Baroid

Baroid Deepwater
Deepwater Services
Services
Baroid
Baroid Brine
Brine Fluid
Fluid Systems
Systems
Baroid
Baroid Displacement
Displacement
Baroid
Baroid Fluid
Fluid Loss
Loss Control
Control
Baroid
Baroid Viscosity
Viscosity && Suspension
Suspension
Baroid
Baroid Crude
Crude Emulsion
Emulsion Control
Control
Baroid
Baroid Corrosion
Corrosion Control
Control
Baroid
Baroid Filtration
Filtration Services
Services
Baroid
Baroid Data
Data Services
Services
Baroid
Baroid Field
Field && Technical
Technical Professionals
Professionals
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 1
Completion and Workover Fluid Basics
Introduction
Completion and Work over represent the final phase of well construction
before production and for maintenance of a well during its productive
life.
These operations can be grouped into three sections:
• Completion - Referred to as primary or initial completion of
the formation in a well bore. (Can also be referred to in
sidetrack operations when completing the same or different
zone aside from the original well bore path)
• Re-Completion - Completing a new (usually higher zone) in
the original well bore path (Can also refer to sidetrack
operations)
• Work Over - Performing repair or restoration to the existing
producing zone
Note: Re-Completion and work over are terms that are often used
interchangeably.
Fluids
Purpose
Completion and work over fluids are used to increase the productivity of
wells by reducing damage to the producing zone. Drilling and
Completion fluids are both used during Completion and Work Over to
prepare, repair, clean out and complete the well bore. The selection and
sequence of use are based on formation damage potential, operational
and economic needs.
Three Primary Operational Groups
• Drilling Fluids
• Dril-N Fluids
• Completion Fluids
Sea/Bay Waters
Sea/bay waters are readily available in coastal areas. Sodium chloride
(NaCl) and potassium chloride (KCl) may be added to adjust weight and
inhibit clay swelling. All fluids should be checked for:
• Solids contamination
• Possible introduction of bacteria
• Dissolved mineral or solids which may precipitate as insoluble
substances
Formation Water
Formation water is commonly used as a work over fluid because it is
cost efficient and it minimizes clay swelling, dispersion, and migration.
Formation water is often considered a clean and ready to use fluid;
however, this is frequently not the case. Formation water often contains
a number of impurities and checks must be made for:
• Solids contamination
• Paraffin’s and asphaltenes
• Treating chemicals
• Compatibility with the zone of interest
Brine fluids
Brine salts used in completion and work over can be classified as having
either monovalent or divalent cations. As a general rule monovalent and
divalent salts are not mixed together. There are a few exceptions, e.g.,
KCl/CaCl2 & NaBr/ZnBr2.
Monovalent solutions Divalent solutions
Organic & Inorganic

Completion and work over base fluids can be categorized as: Ammonium chloride
Sodium chloride
• Water-Based Systems
Sodium bromide
• Brine-Based Systems Calcium chloride
Sodium formate
• Oil-Based Systems Calcium bromide
Potassium chloride
• Synthetic-Based Systems Zinc bromide
Potassium bromide
Potassium formate
Cesium formate
Water Based Systems
Water based systems are used for Drilling Fluids and certain Dril-N Monovalent and divalent solutions: Monovalent solutions contain
compositions. Drilling fluids are used in Completion/Workover when well sodium and potassium & cesium; divalent solutions contain calcium and
bore clean out and/or well bore extension/side track are necessary. In zinc. (Sea Water and Formation waters are mildly divalent)
Mono & Divalent Fluids
some wells where sand control is not an issue and no specialized zone
Monovalent salts and some two salt solutions (NaCl/KCl, NaCl/NaBr,
work is needed, WBM can be used through the completion process and KBr/KCl & NaBr/KBr) can be blended as single salt solutions to a
is sometimes specially treated and used as a packer fluid. maximum of 13 lb/gal. Cesium formate can be blended to higher
Water base systems can consist of: densities up to 19.7 lb/gal.
• Lignosulfonate Weight adjustment of monovalent salts is accomplished by addition of
sack salts or water. In some instances it may be practical to blend a
• High & Low Lime
solution of a monovalent salt to/or near saturation and use the resultant
• PHPA spike fluid as a weight adjustment medium.
• MMH Divalent salts can be blended as single or multiple salt solutions.
• Silicate Maximum density possible is 20.5 lb/gal. Density is adjusted by the
• Foam/Aerated addition of sack divalent salts or divalent salt solution. Water can be
used to adjust CaCl2, but should never be used with any fluid density
• K-Lig
higher than 11.6 lb/gal.
• Cationic Polymer
Note: Zinc fluids above 19.2 lb/gal are extremely acidic and require
Clear-fluid Systems special handling. Zinc fluids above 19.2 are used in special
Clear fluid systems include: circumstances only.
• Sea/bay waters
Addition of water to divalent salt solutions above 11.6 lb/gal is very cost
• Formation water
ineffective and can actually cost more than the use of a fluid solution.
• Brine fluids Insoluble precipitants can form in the fluid with the addition of water
especially in fluids containing zinc.
Note: Formation, sea and bay waters are mildly divalent solutions.
These fluids should never be used to reduce weight in a divalent salt
solution, nor should divalent salts be added to sea/bay waters. Sea/bay
waters contain an abundance of dissolved minerals that frequently react
and precipitate out as solids.

1
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 2
Brine Densities Oil-based systems
Comparative densities of solids-free completion fluids
Comparative densities of solids-free completion fluids Oil-based systems can consist of
20.5 (2.46) • Crude oil
19.7 (2.36) • Diesel oil
19.2 (2.30)
• Mineral oil
Crude Oil
Crude can be used, as a completion fluid but is not suitable for a drilling
Density in lb/gal

15.4 (1.85)
15.1 (1.81) or Dril-N fluid.
Potential risks are:
13.3 (1.60) • Crude oil has low viscosity, a limited carrying capacity, and no
12.7 (1.53) gel strength.
11.8 (1.42)
11.5 (1.38)
• Fluid loss to the formation is not harmful to clay hydration and

CaCl 2/CaBr 2/ZnBr 2

11.1 (1.33) migration; however, since it has no fluid loss control, very fine

CaCl 2 /CaBr 2
solids can enter the formation.

NaBr 2 /NaCl
10.0 (1.20)
Na formate

Cs formate
K formate
NaCl/KCl

KBr/KCl

9.7 (1.16)
Crude oil should be checked for:

CaBr 2

ZnBr 2
CaCl 2
NaCl
NCl

• Presence of asphaltenes and paraffin’s which can damage the

Solids-free fluids
formation
• Possibility of emulsion forming with formation water
• Solids contamination
Synthetic Fluids
Synthetic-based systems can consist of Diesel Oil
• Esters Diesel oil is used as a base for Completion, Dril-N and Drilling fluids
• Olefins when a clean and low-density fluid is needed.
• Specialty base Diesel oil should be checked for:
Ester • Possible solids contamination
Esters can be used as a base for Drilling, Dril-N and Completion Fluids. • Wettability problems if it was obtained from a refinery before
Esters can be prepared from a variety of base stocks of differing fuel additives were added
molecular chain structure and bond. Each ester base can be a blend or • Possible introduction of bacteria
single material.
Areas to check include: Mineral oil
• Possible solids contamination Mineral oil is used as a base for Completion, Dril-N and Drilling Fluids
• Aliphatic and benzene ring contamination where disposal can be easily handled and has less environmental impact
than diesel, and it also minimizes permeability damage to the formation.
Olefin
Olefins can be used as a base for Drilling, Drill-N and Completion Fluids. Mineral Oil should be checked for
Olefins come in a variety of molecular structures and chain lengths; they • Possible solids contamination
are usually LAO; Linear Alpha Olefin, IO; Internal Olefin or PAO; Poly • Possible introduction of bacteria
Alpha Olefin.
Olefins should be checked for:
• Benzene Ring Contamination

Specialty Base
Specialty based systems are suitable for drilling fluid application.
They are composed of organic extracts and or hydrocarbon fractions
such as paraffin.

2
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 3
Formation Damage Location of clays in sandstones
Formation damage is the reduction of permeability in a reservoir rock • Pore filling
caused by the invasion of fluid(s) and/or solid(s) to the section adjacent • Pore lining
to the well bore (In some condition sets, can extend outward some • Grain attachment
• Streaks or laminates
distance from the well bore).
• Structural
Reduction of permeability is any type of restriction in the flow channels
of the reservoir rock that can reduce or prevent the flow of oil and gas Primary types of clays
towards the well bore. • Illite
The common term and measurement is “Skin Factor”. o Sensitive to dispersive environments
o High pH
o Chemical dispersants
Causes
o Migrates readily
Formation damage can be caused by:
o “Hairy” illite
• Foreign particle invasion o Breaks off and migrates
• Formation clay swelling o Sensitive to fluid movement
• Chemically incompatible fluids o
• Oil wetting of the reservoir rock • Kaolinite
• Emulsion blocking o Subject to dispersion and migration
• Smectite
• Fluid invasion (Water Blocking)
o Swelling clay
o Takes on water and expands
o Found primarily as pore lining
Foreign Particle Invasion
o Fresh water sensitive
Plugging of the flow paths in the formation by invading solids can cause
• Mixed Layer
formation damage. This type of damage occurs near the well bore or o Swells like smectite, but not to the same degree
perforation tunnel. Dirty brines can be the cause. • Chlorite
The size of the invading particle is important. Small solids such as clays o Disperses and migrates readily
and iron oxides can be carried deep into the formation and cause severe o Doesn’t swell, but binds water
o May occur as mixed layer with smectite
damage. Plugging of the pore spaces results when, the pore diameter is
less than three times the particle size. If the pore throat size of the o Degrades with HCl, releases Fe- and amorphous
silica
formation is known, the smallest damaging particle size may be
determined using formulas based on the relationship of particle to pore
size.

The most common particles creating formation damage include:

• Barite
• Clay
• Undissolved lost circulation material (LCM)
• Drilled solids
• Rust
• Scale
• Undissolved salts
• Frac sand
• Perforating debris
• Insoluble ion precipitants

Formation Clay Swelling

Formation clays swell and break apart if they meet most drilling fluid
filtrates. Especially if the filtrates are fresh water and/or have a high pH.
Chemical dispersants in a filtrate can break clays apart and allow them
to migrate. As the clay particles migrate, they block the pore spaces.
The result is a number of smaller particles, which can easily plug some Calcium Smectite
of the pore throats. These particles may also swell thus increasing the
severity of the damage.
To control clay migration, keep
the:
• Formation clays from
swelling by using
inhibitive systems
(i.e., brine fluids)
• pH in the 8.3 to 9.0
range
• Flow rates low when
initiating or resuming production

3
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 4
Clay and Mineral Dispersion and Migration
Fluids Compatible with Swelling Clays
Much testing has demonstrated that a 2% to 3% KCL prevents clay
swelling. Most data was generated on tests utilizing short cores. In tests
run on 3 ft. of cores, Halliburton has demonstrated that a 3% KCl will Brine Concentration Density, ppg
undergo ion exchange with the formation mineralogy, consider the
following excerpt from reference NH4CL 5% 8.5
1), and table from reference 2); HCl 4% 8.5
KCl 7% 8.7
1. Gdanski, R.D.: “Formation Mineral Content Key to Successful
Sandstone Acidizing”, Oil and Gas J. (Aug. 30, 1999) 90. CaCl2 5% 8.7
2. Gdanski, R.D. and Shuchart, C.: “Advanced Sandstone Acidizing NaCl 6% 8.7
Designs Using Improved Radial Models”, SPE 38597, (October
1997).

“Ion exchange occurs between formation minerals (usually

Formation Clay Damage Control Summary
clays) and injected brines. Sodium ions are often attached to
these clays, but these ions can become exchanged with ions
of the injected fluids. When ion exchange occurs, the clays
• Illite - Don’t expose to a dispersive environment. No
convert the injected fluids to salt water of the corresponding
lignosulfonates, keep pH below 10. Keep rate of filtration
concentrations. For example, when a 3% ammonium chloride
down to reduce fluid velocity through pores.
(NH4Cl) solution flows across ion-exchanging clay, the solution
• Kaolinite - Much the same as illite. But put more emphasis on
becomes 3.3% sodium chloride brine. Exposure to this low-
reducing fluid velocity through pores, if loosely held.
salinity brine can cause water-sensitive clays to swell and
• Smectite - Do not expose to fresh water to avoid swelling. Use
obstruct matrices. Table 1 lists various minerals and their
potassium-based or oil-based fluid.
capabilities for exchanging ions and transforming brines. The
• Chlorite - Avoid acid if possible. If not, use oxygen scavengers
rating of a mineral is directly proportional to its ion-
and iron chelating agents
exchanging capability. Sand, feldspars, and kaolinite have
ratings of zero.

Ability to inhibit
Table 1—Minerals and Their Ion-Exchange Capabilities Fluid, lb/gal (SG) Cost
clays
Mineral Ion-Exchange Capability
Methanol
Feldspar, kaolinite 0
Methanol, 6.6 (0.79) High Good
Illite, chlorite 20

Mixed-layer clays 20 to 80
Methanol/water,
Smectite, mica 80 to 100 Medium Fair
6.6 - 8.2 (0.79 - 0.98)
Zeolites 100 to 250
Water
Of the ion-exchanging clays listed, smectite and mixed-layer
(illite and smectite) clays are the most sensitive to water and Fresh water, 8.345(1.0) Low Poor
are therefore the most prone to swelling after ion exchange.
Operators who identify or suspect the presence of these clays Sea water (filtered), 8.50 (1.02) Low Poor
in their formations should use brines that transform into
approximately 6% salt water after ion exchange, such as 5% Brines
NH4Cl, 7% KCl, and 5% calcium chloride (CaCl2). Such fluids
are concentrated enough to maintain formation permeability
by preventing clay swelling. By contrast, 2% KCl will NaCl, 10.0 (1.20) Low Good
transform into only 1.5% salt water after ion exchange. Such KBr 11.5
a brine is too weak to prevent clay swelling.” CaCl2 11.6 (1.39) Medium Good
NaBr 12.7
CaBr2 14.2 (1.70) High Good
ZnBr2 19.2 (2.30) High Good

Oils

Diesel, 7.034 (0.84) Medium Excellent

Crude, 7.03 - 7.9

Medium Excellent
(0.84 - 0.94)

Emulsion, 7.03 - 8.33 (0.84 -

Medium Excellent
1.0)

4
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 5
Chemically Incompatible Fluids
A third type of formation damage results from incompatible fluids. The
most common form of damage from incompatible fluids is due to the
precipitation of salts or insoluble ions. Analysis of formation water can
identify potential problems and reactions between the formation water
and brine.
Examples are:
CaCl2 + 2HCO3 → CaCO3 + 2HCl + CO3-2
CaCl2 + HCO3-2 → CaCO3 + 2HCl-
ZnBr2 + CO3-2 → ZnCO3 + 2Br-
CaCl2 + SO4-2 → CaSO4 + 2Cl-
CaCl2 + SO3-2 → CaSO3 + 2Cl → CaSO4 + 2HCl
F- + CaCl2 → CaF + 2Cl-
Fe- + 2OH- → Fe (OH)2
Ca+2 + SO4-2 → CaSO4
ACIDS
Acid Types
All acids, regardless of composition, have one thing in common: They
break down into hydrogen ions and an anion when in solution in water.
Hydrogen ions react with calcareous rock to form water and carbon
dioxide.
Hydrogen ions are generally depicted by the following symbol: H+. They
react with carbonates as shown in Eq. 1.
2H+ + CaCO3 → Ca++ + H2O + CO2 . . . . . . . (Eq. 1)
Hydrogen Ion + Limestone = Calcium Ion + Water + Carbon Dioxide
Acids have a pH less than 7 and taste sour. The more completely an
acid ionizes to hydrogen ions and its anion, the stronger the acid is.
Hydrochloric Acid
Hydrochloric acid (Muriatic acid) is composed of hydrogen and chloride
gasses and is commonly referred to as hydrogen chloride in its gaseous
state. The gas is readily soluble in water up to 43% hydrogen chloride,
by weight, at 60°F. However, a solution of this strength is impractical
because at temperatures higher than 60°F, hydrogen chloride produces
pungent fumes.
Commercial hydrochloric acid has been standardized at 20°Be, which is
31.45% acid, by weight, with a specific gravity of 1.160 and weighing
9.67 lb/gal. Higher strength acid is sometimes available at 22°Be, which
is 35.2% acid with a specific gravity of 1.179 and weighing 9.83 lb/gal.
The chemical formula for hydrochloric acid is HCl. Even though it
contains mostly water, the water is omitted from the formula.
Hydrochloric acid ionizes completely and is considered a strong acid.
HCl and Limestone
The basic reaction between hydrochloric acid and limestone is shown in
Eq. 2.
2HCl + CaCO3 → CaCl2 + H2O + CO2 . . . . . . . (Eq. 2)
Hydrochloric Acid (1,000 gal 15%) + Calcium Carbonate Limestone
(10.9 ft3, 1,843 lb) = Calcium Chloride (40 gal, 2,050 lb) + Water (6,620 not mix calcium, potassium, and sodium ions (Ca++, K+, Na+)
ft3, 331 lb) + Carbon Dioxide Gas (811 lb)
The total volume occupied by 1,000 gal of 15% hydrochloric acid after
reaction follows.
• 912 gal water pumped into formation
• 40 gal water produced by chemical reaction
• 68 gal volume occupied by 2,050 lb calcium chloride
• 1,020 gal total, assuming no volume is occupied by the CO2 or 36HF + Al(Si4O10)(OH)2 → 4H2SiF6 + 2H3AlF6 + H2O . . . . . . (Eq. 9)
diluted by formation brine
In summary, 15% hydrochloric acid spent on limestone becomes a
20.0% solution of calcium chloride with a specific gravity of 1.175,
weighing 9.79 lb/gal.
5
HCl and Dolomite
The reaction for dolomite is similar, but the chemical composition is
slightly different.
4HCl + CaMg(CO3)2 → CaCl2 + MgCl2 + 2H2O + 2CO2 . . . . (Eq. 3)
Hydrochloric Acid (1,000 gal) + Calcium Magnesium Carbonate (9.5 ft3)
= Calcium Chloride (1,040 lb) + Magnesium Chloride (875 lb) + Water
(40 gal) + Carbon Dioxide (6,620 ft3)
The total volume occupied by 1,000 gal of 15% HCl after spending is
1,020 gal. The reaction is a mixture of 10.5% calcium chloride solution
and 9.0% magnesium chloride solution with a specific gravity of 1.185,
weighing 8.70 lb/gal.
Organic Acid
Other acids that are used alone or in conjunction with HCl are acetic
acid and formic acid. These are organic acids and considered much
weaker acids than hydrochloric acid. This means their hydrogen ions are
released more slowly and they react more slowly with most materials
found in wells.
They can be used alone as retarded or slow-reacting acids. Acetic acid is
slower to react than formic acid. Organic acids are also used where low
corrosion is important. Acetic acid is the only acid available that does
not damage chrome plating. They can be used in combination with HCl
to allow deeper penetration and to provide unique etching properties
with some formations.
They react with limestone as shown in Eq. 3.
Acetic Acid
2HCH3CO2 + CaCO3 → Ca(CH3CO2)2 + H2O + CO2 . . . . .(Eq. 4)
Acetic Acid + Limestone = Calcium Acetate + Water + Carbon Dioxide
A 10% solution of acetic acid dissolves as much limestone as a 6%
hydrochloric acid solution.
Formic Acid
2HCO2H + CaCO3 → Ca(HCO2)2 + H2O + CO2 . . . . (Eq. 5)
Formic Acid + Limestone = Calcium Formate + Water + Carbon Dioxide
A 10% solution of formic acid dissolves as much limestone as an 8%
hydrochloric acid solution.
HF Acid
Hydrofluoric acid is mixed with HCl or organic acids to dissolve clay
minerals, feldspars, and sand. Because of the higher surface area of the
clay minerals and feldspars, most of the HF acid will be spent on these
materials rather than quartz or sand.
HF acid reacts with calcareous minerals, such as limestone, but
this reaction results in an insoluble precipitate of calcium
fluoride.
2HF + CaCO3 → CaF2 + H2O + CO2 . . . . . (Eq. 6)
Hydrofluoric Acid + Limestone = Calcium Fluoride + Water + Carbon
Dioxide
Hydrofluoric acid reacts with calcium ions from any source to
form insoluble calcium fluoride. Avoid this reaction.
Ca+- + 2F → CaF2 (insoluble). . . . . (Eq. 7)
HF is the only acid that reacts with sand and other siliceous minerals
such as clay. A simplified reaction is shown in Eq. 8.
6HF + SiO2 → H2SiF6 + 2H2O . . . . . . (Eq. 8)
Hydrofluoric Acid + Silica = Fluosilicic Acid + Water
The reaction product, fluosilicic acid, is readily soluble in water,
but its potassium and sodium salts are practically insoluble. Do
with live or spent hydrofluoric acid.
Avoid formation water that contains calcium chloride, sodium chloride,
and potassium chloride. The only compatible salt solution with HF
acid is ammonium chloride.
A more realistic reaction between a clay, such as bentonite, and HF acid
is shown in Eq. 9.
Hydrofluoric Acid + Bentonite = Fluosilicic Acid + Fluoaluminic Acid +
Water
1,000 gal of 3% hydrofluoric acid dissolves approximately 140 lb of dry
bentonite. A typical hydrofluoric acid solution used in the oil field
contains approximately 3% hydrofluoric acid and 12% hydrochloric
acids.
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 6
Acid Mineral Negative Reactions
Mineral Problem
Feldspars contain sodium and potassium. The major
concern
Feldspars
is fluosilicate precipitation. K-Spars cause the most
precipitation problems.
Carbonate consumes HCl and can cause precipitation of
Carbonate
fluosilicates and aluminum from spent acid.
Illite causes fines migration problems and is ion-
exchanging.
Illite
It contains potassium, which can cause fluosilicate
precipitation from spent acid.
Kaolinite causes fines migration problems. It disperses in
Kaolinite
fresh water and causes plugging.
Smectite is an ion-exchanging mineral that swells in fresh
Smectite
water.
Mixed layer clay is ion-exchanging and swells in fresh
Mixed-Layer water.
Clay It often contains potassium, which can cause fluosilicate
precipitation from spent acid.
Chlorite Chlorite is ion-exchanging and unstable in HCl.
Mica is ion exchanging and unstable in HCl. It contains
Mica Potassium, which can cause fluosilicate precipitation from
spent acid.
Zeolite is ion exchanging and unstable in HCl. It often
Zeolite contains sodium, which can cause fluosilicate precipitation
from spent acid.
Wettability of the Reservoir Rock
A fourth cause of formation damage is a change in wettability of the
reservoir rock which indicates whether a given surface has the capacity
to be preferentially coated with a film of oil or water. If certain
chemicals are injected into a water-wet formation, it is possible to cause
the grains to become oil-wet. If this happens, capillarity forces and
friction tend to hinder the movement of the oil across the grains. The
formation will then produce water more readily than oil.
A,B,C from left to right:
A) Completely water wet system, contact angle = 0°
B) System of neutral wettability, contact angle = 90°
C) Completely oil wet system, contact angle = 135°
Emulsion & Water Blocking
Fluid invasion can cause formation damage and reduce oil/gas recovery
and increase stack-up time. If large amounts of fluid invade the
formation, obtaining maximum production can be difficult because of
the capillarity and friction restricting the production of the invaded zone.
Any invasion of fluid can upset the fine particles located throughout the
formation. The particles will tend to migrate closer to the well bore,
blocking a higher percentage of the reservoir rock flow channels.
6
The section adjacent to the well bore is the most critical and the most
likely to be damaged. The water saturation of the formation close to the
well bore will increase significantly as a result of fluid invasion. This
filtrate or whole fluid invasion is called water blockage; the extent of the
production reduction of the reservoir will depend on the degree of the
water saturation and the radius of the effected area.
Water Block Key Points
• Filtrate or brine invasion
• Reduces K relative to oil
• Can self - correct
• May increase bound water
• Drill in fluids - keep filtrate low use fluid loss additives and/or
bridging solids
Completion fluids containing bromide have been shown to form stable
emulsions with some crude types. Fluid crude analysis should be
performed to determine the extent of emulsion risk and the best brine
formulation and or treatment to control the risk. Baroid offers two very
effective non-emulsifiers No-Blok C and No-Blok Z. This chemicals help
to prevent emulsions from forming and or promote rapid breakout.
Some zones produce a formation water/oil emulsion naturally. Fluid
invasions can exacerbate this condition. No-Blok C & Z have been shown
to control and or reduce the breakout time of these produced fluids.
Emulsion Blockage Key Points
• Emulsion formed inside formation
• Primarily water-in-oil emulsions (viscous)
• Goes hand-in-hand with oil-wetting
• Loss of oil mud filtrate containing high amounts of excess
emulsifier
• Loss of brine completion fluid to formation drilled with oil base
mud
Brine/Formation Water/Crude/Mineral Compatibility
To select the correct brine type, consider the potential interactions of
the completion or work over fluid with formation solids, water, and
gases. The most common incompatibility problems include:
•
Scale production from the reaction of divalent brine with
dissolved carbon dioxide and Hydrogen Sulfide
• Baroid can formulate brines that are divalent free and
inhibited against carbonate formation.
• Precipitation of sodium chloride from the formation water
when it is exposed to certain brines
• Precipitation of iron compounds in the formation resulting
from interaction with soluble iron in the completion fluid
• Baroid can formulate brines with varying relative
concentrations of free water, chloride and bromide content
that maintain density and TCT requirements. Chloride and
water content have shown to have a direct impact on
precipitation of some ions as well as emulsion potential.
• Reaction of formation clays with the clear brine
• Crude Emulsion formation
Baroid provides a non-emulsifier, NO-BLOK C & Z, to inhibit brines
against crude emulsion formation. Further, brine formulations can be
adjusted to provide the least risk of emulsion formation.
Primary Compatibility Tests
The following laboratory tests can be used to evaluate the compatibility
of a clear fluid with a formation:
•
Return permeability
• Formation water analysis
• Formation mineralogy
• Brine/water compatibility
• Brine/Crude emulsion potential
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 7
Other Process Chemical Compatibility
Varieties of chemicals are used during the course of a completion or
work over operation.
Examples are:
• Pipe Dope Removers
• Pickling Agents
• Cements and Associated Spacers
• Chemical Cutters
• Frac and Gravel Pack Suspension Agents
• Lubricity Agents
• Chelating Agents
• Solvents
• Staging Flushes
• Acids
• Emulsion Inhibitors
• Corrosion Inhibitors
Reactions between these chemicals and the completion/work
over fluid, formation matrix and formation fluids can cause
subsequent production declines and costly completion fluid
treatments.
Compatibility issues for many of these chemicals are well known and can
be eliminated. However, any treatments that directly affect the
producing zone should be tested for potential risk. This process is a
cooperative procedure between Baroid and other operation engineers.
Baroid and the process engineer determine potential reaction and
course of action by performing a series of tests and analysis.
Contaminants
Contaminants that can affect completion and work over fluids include:
• Iron
• Acid
• Solids
• Hardness
• Oil, Grease and Distillate
• Polymers
Iron
Iron can be a contaminant in either soluble or insoluble form. Soluble
iron is a product of corrosion and is common in zinc fluids. When
exposed to certain waters, soluble iron can form a precipitate, which can
cause formation damage.
Note: No brine should be delivered to location with iron content greater
than 75 ppm. Consider displacing brine when its iron content reaches
625 ppm.
At the brine plant, iron should be removed from a fluid by adding
hydrogen peroxide to the fluid, flocculating the fluid, and then filtering
the fluid.
On location, treating a fluid for iron is very difficult and is usually
successful only in low-density, monovalent brines such as KCl and NaCl
and divalent CaCl2. The treatment consists of increasing pH with
BARABUF and removing the precipitated iron by filtering the brine.
Fluids cut back with seawater are far more prone to iron precipitation
problems (particularly KCL and CaCl2 brines); fresh water is
recommended as the best practice when cutting density with water.
Brines containing KCL are the most likely to display iron precipitation.
Elevating the pH of the brine to 8.5 is the recommended practice. Iron
in solution will precipitate and can be removed by filtration.
A ph buffering agent is the preferred method of treatment. The next
table displays treatment levels for BARABUF.
7
Recommendation and Treating Guidelines for KCL and light
weight CaCl brines
Initial pH of Barabuf lbs/bbl Final pH of
Completion Fluid Completion Fluid
3 .10 8.5
4 .07 8.5
5 .06 8.5
6 .04 8.5
7 .02 8.5
• Always add Barabuf (Magnesium Oxide) to the completion
fluid in the return pit and filter the completion fluid to the
active pit. This will eliminate any precipitating of iron down
hole while circulating.
Note: Order fluids that are known to be susceptible to iron precipitation,
pre-treated with BARABUF
• Make sure you do not have a problem with compatibility of
the connate water of the formation or pH sensitive clays,
adjusting the pH of the completion fluid to a pH of 8-9 .
• Try to eliminate loose scale, rusty iron, etc…. Paint or coat
exposed mild steel. Using rust free drill pipe, pits and rigs
eliminates many sources of iron. This can also be
accomplished by proper rig preparation for the completion
fluid.
• In persistent precipitation cases, add OXYGON to the fluid @
0.1 to 0.2 ppb. OXYGON will remove soluble oxygen and
chelate iron in solution.
• Watch the pH and iron values closely after the introduction of
acid to the well bore. Usually a lower PH and higher iron will
result because of the acid interface with the completion fluid.
• It may be more economical to dispose of the return pit and
well bore fluid volume instead of circulating and treating the
iron contamination. Pre-treat the new completion fluid with
.04 lbs/bbl of Barabuf prior to re-displacement.
Acids
Acid contamination has several sources:
• Tubular pickles
• Frac & Gravel Pack Treatments
• Stimulation/Remediation Treatments
Acidic fluids can be over-displaced and enter the main body of the brine
system, enter the system at the surface by mistakes in routing returns,
enter the brine from formation kicks or mistakes in storage containers.
Acidic fluids can result in a broad range of effects. Interactions with
other chemicals can create insoluble precipitants in the formation,
amorphous gelatinous masses of several chemicals that reside in the
well bore may stop tool placement or function and significantly increase
iron dissolution and precipitation.
All brine fluids, with the exception of ZnBr2, are normally used in the 7
to 9 pH range. ZnBr2 fluids must be kept below 6.2 pH or the Zinc ion
will begin to precipitate.
Careful handling of acidic chemicals along with regular monitoring of the
system pH will help avoid formation damage and costly brine
treatments.
All brines except ZnBr2 can be pH adjusted with BARABUF pH buffer.
Caustic can be used in monovalent brine if magnesium hardness is an
issue. NaOH or KOH should be prepared as an aqueous solution to add
to brines. Do not add sack chemical directly to brine. Caustic does not
provide an alkalinity buffer as BARABUF does.
Elevating the pH of ZnBr2 brine is very dangerous in field conditions.
Once the pH reaches 6, zinc precipitation is likely to begin and is not
necessarily reversible. The adjustment of pH in zinc brines requires
careful testing and application of the appropriate agent.
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 8
Solids
Solids can enter the fluid from the following sources.
• The water-based fluid obtained from rivers, bays or open sea,
which can contain bacteria, sediments, and plant or animal
matter.
• Impurities in some sacked, dry salt used in making brine.
• Particulate matter from surface pits, tanks and tubulars such
as wall cake, rust, scale, pipe dope and paint chips.
• Iron oxides or other chemicals precipitated from solutions that
are circulated at elevated downhole temperatures.
Rock formations make excellent depth filters. A formation exposed at
the well bore to the pressurized flow of contaminated fluid will filter the
suspended particles from the fluid. Particles will penetrate the pore
spaces and collect on the surface until an impermeable cake is formed
and or penetrate the formation matrix and become lodged and block
permeability away from the formation face.
The following line graph shows that if 300 barrels of a 12-lb/gal-
completion fluid with 1,000 ppm (0.1 percent) of contaminant is
pumped down hole, a total of 150 pounds of solids will be delivered to
the formation.
Weight and volume of solids in dirty completion fluid
1000
Volume of solids in cubic feet SG of 2.4
5.0
Weight of solids in pounds
150 1.5
100
0.5 from the base brine and/or from the reactions of acids in tubulars and
0.1
10
10 100 300 1000 5000
Total solids can be measured at the well site using a turbidity meter or a
shakeout machine. Solids that are not added to the system to enhance A list of some of the substances that cause cross-linking in polymers
the performance of brine are considered contaminants. Contaminants
include formation clays, precipitates, and polymer residues, among
other things. These contaminants can be filtered at the well site using
diatomaceous earth, a DE filter press, and two-micron absolute
cartridges.
Note: A clear completion fluid should not be sent to the well site with an
NTU (unit of measure of turbidity) greater than 30-50 NTU or a
suspended-solids concentration greater than 50 ppm.
Hardness
When monovalent brines have been selected to minimize calcium and
magnesium scale formation, the total hardness content should not
exceed 100 ppm. Brines contaminated in the plant should be treated
with soda ash and/or BARASCAV and filtered. A flocculent may be
required to settle the precipitate prior to filtration. Do not use BARABUF Precipitation of base brine salts due to a reaction with other chemicals
as a ph agent in these cases. Use either NaOH or KOH to elevate or
maintain pH above 7.
Oil, Grease and Distillate
Produced oils, other hydrocarbons and pipe dope compounds affect
brine density and can blind filtration units. Normally hydrocarbons will
separate rapidly from the brine and form a separate layer above heavy
brine and should be pumped off the surface. In some circumstances,
from the actions involved in circulating trapped pressure from the well
bore, brine and hydrocarbons experience high shear and form emulsions
that can be very slow to break. BARABRINE DEFOAM and NO-BLOK C &
Z can be used to promote rapid emulsion break and to inhibit against
new emulsion formation.
Oily contaminants affect Static Sheen and Oil & Grease test parameters.
Contaminated brines cannot be discharged and may cause a significant
increase in disposal expense.
8
Polymers
Brines contaminated with polymers usually cannot be filtered easily
without chemical and/or special mechanical treatment. At the plant site
where hydrogen peroxide can be used to oxidize polymers to permit
filtration.
At the well site, Hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC) or other polymer pills used
in displacement or other well operations should be caught and isolated
from the active brine system. In some cases, HEC pills that have been
sheared and filtered can be processed by the filter system and returned
to the active system. The pill volume is maintained in separate storage
and metered into the returning well fluid stream in small quantities. The
filter unit can then process the diluted polymer and return fluid for re-
use.
The use of breaker chemicals at the well site must be handled with care.
Commonly used breaker chemicals can release hydrogen, chlorine and
bromine gases. All of these gases are hazardous and proper ventilation
along with expert knowledge of the reactions is necessary for safe usage
of breakers.
Several damage mechanisms have been recognized in polymer use
• Cross linking of linear gel structures by metal salts
• Precipitation of base brine salts due to a reaction with other
chemicals
• Yield failure or dehydration of HEC in ZnBr2
• Precipitation of HEC at elevated temperature
Cross linking of linear gel structures by metal salts
Biopolymers are sensitive to iron in several valence states. Iron causes
the polymer to cross-link into (most often) very viscose masses that
completely plug the formation matrix. Subsequent treatments with
breaking chemicals are often ineffective. Iron contamination may come
formation. Iron chelating agents such as erythorbates should be used to
prevent Fe2 and Fe3 ions from interacting with these polymers.
HEC is tolerant of iron contamination but reacts with other polyvalent
cations and other organic compounds.
A source of cross-linking ions can be the formation itself. Many types of
clay contain aluminum in their structure. Ion exchange due the chemical
reactions with acids or other chemicals can release Al ions and they may
become a source of contamination.
(HEC & Biopolymers) is as follows:
• CrCl3
• Cr (NO3)
• FE
• Borate Salts
• AlCl3
• Zn (NO3)
• ZnCl 2
• ZrOCL2
• Etanedial
• Ethylene Carbonate Cyclic Ester
• Propylene Carbonate
• Tetrastearyl Titanate
Precipitation of divalent or monovalent ions is seen in some
circumstances during well procedures. Borate cross-linkers are known to
cause Zinc to precipitate from brines containing ZnBr. A buffer with
acetic acid is necessary to reduce or stop this reaction. What negative
impacts other link agents may have on brines is not clear at this time.
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 9
Formation Damage Inherent to Polymer Use Precipitation of HEC at elevated temperature
Numerous studies have proven that any foreign substance entering the Studies performed by Conoco indicated the precipitation of HEC particles
formation matrix will impart some degree of permeability impairment. In that were water insoluble in NaCl and KCl fluids at temperatures from
fact even native formation fluids, when removed and then reintroduced 150°F and up. These particles were observed to dissolve readily with the
to the formation, have been shown to cause damage. lowering of pH by and acid.
Damage mechanisms include: Testing done by several brine vendor laboratories confirmed the
• Relative permeability impairment reaction and subsequently recommended the HEC polymer not be used
• Polymer deposition on clay surfaces in contact with formations when the base fluid was NaCl or KCl and the
• Blockage of flow channels from particulate bridging or direct temperature was 150°F or higher.
interception
• Wettability changes
• Destabilization of formation fines and the resultant fines
migration
• Reduction of the grain matrix cementation and the
subsequent reduction in rock integrity and or fines migration
• Hydration of clay structures
• Ion exchange mechanisms which contribute to any of the
before mentioned
• Precipitation of insoluble particles in the matrix
• Gross water flood effects from high fluid loss volumes
• Brine/crude emulsions

FLC treatments have polymers as an integral part of most applications.

Polymers are used as the primary loss rate reducer as a function of high
viscosity saturation of the formation matrix, as a carrying agent for
particulate bridging blends and as part of the subsequent filter cake
integrity and specially designed polymers in combination with a cross
linking agent, act as formation face blockers due to ultra high viscosity.
A variety of clean up methods and treatments are available. Methods
and chemicals used must be selected based on formation conditions,
potential interactions with other chemicals, equipment and formation
minerals/fluids and limitations placed by work plans, equipment and cost
budgets.

Polymer fragments attached to clay structures in the formation matrix

9
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 10
Drilling Fluid Systems
Drilling Fluid Systems are comprised of water-based (WBM), oil-based
(OBM), and synthetic -based fluids (SBM). Mud systems are used in very Functions and properties of drilling fluids
specific circumstances during the completion of a well. Drilling fluids are used to:
Mud systems contain high concentrations of solids, thinners, 1. Transport drilled cuttings and cavings to the surface
2. Suspend drilled cuttings and caving in the annulus when circulation
dispersants, and other additives that can be very harmful to a producing
is stopped
formation. 3. Control subsurface pressure
Mud systems are used in work over during the initial phases of work 4. Cool and lubricate the bit and drill string
when contact with zones of interest is minimal or unlikely. 5. Support the walls of the well bore
Mud systems are also used during the initial drilling of the well up 6. Help suspend the weight of the drill string and casing
7. Transmit hydraulic energy
through casing operations, or introduction of solids enhanced fluid
8. Provide a medium for running wireline logs
systems. (Dril-N) 9. Minimize formation damage
Mud systems are considered a contaminant to clear fluid systems. Great 10. Protect the drill string and casing from corrosion
care and attention is placed on the removal of the mud system from the Transport cuttings and cavings
well bore and drilling rig prior to the introduction of solids enhanced Because cuttings and cavings are heavier than the drilling fluid, they
have a tendency to fall towards the bottom of the well bore while they
systems (Dril-N) or clear fluid systems.
are being lifted by the drilling fluid during drilling and circulating
operations. The rate at which these particles fall through the flowing
Drilling Fluid Basics fluid depends primarily on the density and viscosity of the fluid, and the
This section covers the following topics: size, shape, and density of the particles. The rate at which the particles
are being lifted is the difference between the circulating velocity of the
Topic See page drilling fluid and the falling rate of the cuttings and cavings. If the hole
is not cleaned properly, the solid material will accumulate in the annulus
causing increased torque, drag, fill, and hydrostatic pressures. Pipe
Products List 10
failure, stuck pipe, reduced penetration rates, and loss of circulation are
possible consequences or improper hole cleaning.
Functions 10-12
Suspend particles
When the fluid is not being circulated, the force of the rising fluid is
Solids Control 12-15 eliminated. The cuttings and cavings fall to the bottom of the hole
unless the drilling fluid has the ability to form a gel-like structure when it
Baroid Family of Drilling Fluids 16- 21 is not flowing. The fluid must regain its fluidity when circulation is
restarted.
Troubleshooting 22 Control of subsurface pressure
Water, gas, and oil found in the ground are under great pressure. This
pressure must be overbalanced to prevent an uncontrollable flow of
The following products are listed in this manual:
these formation fluids into the well bore. Control is accomplished by
AKTAFLO®-S AQUAGEL® AQUAGEL GOLD
maintaining the well bore full of drilling fluid with a density high enough
SEAL®
to provide sufficient hydrostatic pressure to hold back formation fluids.
BARABLOK™/BARA BARACAT® BARACOR® 95
Cool and lubricate
BLOK 400
Heat is generated as the bit scrapes or rotates on the bottom of the hole
BARACTIVE™ BARA-DEFOAM® 1 BARANEX®
and the drill string rotates against the walls of the hole. The drilling fluid
BARAZAN® CARBONOX® CAT®-300 must absorb this heat and conduct it away. The drilling fluid also acts as
a lubricant for the bit, drill string, and casing during drilling. Special
CAT®-GEL CAT®-HI CAT®-LO
materials are sometimes added to the drilling fluid to improve its
CAT®-THIN CAT®-VIS CC-16® lubricating properties, or certain fluids with high degrees of lubricity are
sometimes used.
CELLEX® CELLEX® HV DEXTRID®
Benefits include longer bit life, decreased torque and drag, reduced
DRILTREAT® DURATONE® HT EZ-CORE™ pump pressure, and reduced frictional wear on the drill string and
casing.
FILTER-CHEK™ GELTONE® II GELTONE® IV
Support the walls of the hole
IMPERMEX® INVERMUL® NT INVERMUL® NTF Lateral support of the walls of the hole is removed as the bit drills a
K-LIG® LIGNOX® OMC® subsurface formation. Unless the support is replaced by the drilling fluid
until casing can be set, the formation will fall into the well bore. The
OMC®2 OMC® 42 PAC™-L mechanism that prevents this from occurring depends on the nature of
PAC™-R Q-BROXIN® RM-63™ the formation. If the formation is very firm (granite is an extreme
example), little support by the drilling fluid is required. If the formation
RV-310 SUSPENTONE™ THERMA-THIN® is fairly firm and consolidated (shale, for example), sufficient support
DP may be obtained solely from the density of the mud. If the formation is
THERMA-CHEK® X-TEND® II X-VIS® weak and unconsolidated (sand, for example), the drilling fluid must
have sufficient density plus it must have the ability to form a thin,
impermeable, and deformable deposition of particles on the walls of the
hole.
Help suspend the weight of the drill string & casing
The weight of a drill string or a string of casing can exceed 200 tons.
This extreme weight can place a high stress on the rig's surface
equipment. These tubulars are partly supported by the buoyant force of
the drilling fluid. The buoyant force is dependent on the pressure
exerted by the fluid and the cross-sectional area on which this pressure
acts.

10
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 11
Transmit hydraulic energy
During circulation, the drilling fluid is ejected through the bit nozzles at a
very high velocity. This hydraulic force keeps the surface beneath the bit Mud weight (density)
free of drilled cuttings. If the cuttings are not removed, the bit regrinds Formation pressures are contained by the hydrostatic pressure of the
the old cuttings and reduces the rate of penetration. The successful drilling fluid. Hydrostatic pressure is a function of depth and mud density
removal of cuttings from the bit surface depends on the physical (or mud weight). Mud weight is determined with a mud balance which
properties of the drilling fluid and its velocity through the nozzles. In consists of a cup with a lid mounted at the end of a graduated arm. See
special situations the hydraulic force of the drilling fluid is also used to figure 1. A knife edge on the arm rests on a supporting base. A sliding
turn the bit. The bit is attached to a downhole hydraulic motor; the weight on the arm is moved towards or away from the knife edge to
assembly then is attached to the bottom of the drill string. This method balance the mud-filled cup. Mud weight is then read directly on the arm
often is used for directional drilling and is gaining acceptance for of the mud balance in lb/gal, g/cc, lb/sq in/1000 ft, and lb/ cu ft.
straight-hole drilling in certain areas.
Provide a medium for wire line logs
Although the drilling fluid disturbs the original characteristics of the
formations, its presence is necessary for many of the common wireline
logs used for formation evaluation. These logs require that the drilling
fluid be an electrically conductive liquid that exhibits electrical properties
different from the fluids in the formation. Proper evaluation of the
formation is difficult if the liquid phase of the drilling fluid penetrates the
formation deeply, or if the fluid has physically or chemically eroded the
hole.
Minimize formation damage
Almost any drilling fluid will alter the original characteristics of the
formations it comes in contact with, but some formations are more
sensitive than others and some fluids are more damaging than others.
Damage to subsurface formations can appear in two different forms:
• Reduction in the ability of a formation to produce
hydrocarbons
• Reduction of well bore stability
Damage to producing formations can result from physical plugging by
inert solids or from a chemical reaction between the drilling fluid and the
formation. The well bore can become unstable through chemical
reactions (as in water-sensitive shale) or through physical erosion.
Particularly sensitive formations may require special treatment of the
Fann mud balance
fluid or even a special fluid.
Protect the drill string & the casing
The drilling fluid can provide a corrosive environment for steel tubulars
Rheological properties
used below the surface. This effect can be minimized by proper
chemical treatment of the fluid or by adding a protective film (chemical • Funnel viscosity
or physical) to the surface of a steel. Some drilling fluids (those that are
predominantly oil) are noncorrosive, and in some cases, the drilling fluid • Plastic viscosity (PV)
actually protects the tubulars from corrosive materials found in the
subsurface.
• Yield point (YP)

Properties • Gel strength

Baroid's field service representative’s record mud properties on the Measurements of the rheological properties of a drilling fluid are used
standard daily mud report. The daily monitoring and interpretation of to:
the changes in the drilling fluid is necessary to recognize many of the
problems in day-to-day drilling operations. Drilling fluid properties
• Calculate frictional pressure losses
determined from routine field testing can be used as a qualitative and • Determine the ability of the mud to lift cuttings and cavings to
quantitative guide for controlling drilling fluid performance. Standard the surface
field tests include:
• Mud weight (density) • Analyze contamination of the mud by solids, chemicals, or
• Rheological properties temperature
• Funnel viscosity • Determine pressure changes in the well bore during a trip
• Plastic viscosity
• Yield point The underlying rheological properties are viscosity and gel strength.
• Gel strength Simple viscosity measurements are taken with a Marsh funnel which
• Mud pH and alkalinity (Pm) measure a timed rate of flow. The funnel viscosity is the number of
• Filtration seconds required for a quart of mud to pass through a 3/16” tube
• API (ambient temperature, low pressure) fastened to the bottom of a 12-inch funnel. The resulting value is a
• API (high temperature, high pressure) qualitative indicator of the mud viscosity.
• Filtrate analysis
• Alkalinity (Pf/Pm) A better measure of mud rheological properties is obtained from a
• Salinity direct-reading, concentric-cylinder rotary viscometer. The standard field
• Hardness unit is a Fann VG meter or a modified Fann meter. See figure 2. The
• Solids analyses viscometer provides two readings that are easily converted to the
• Sand rheological parameter's plastic viscosity and yield point. Plastic viscosity
• Total solids has units of centipoise and is that part of the flow resistance in a mud
• Liquid caused primarily by the friction between suspended particles and the
• Oil viscosity of the liquid phase. Plastic viscosity is affected by the
• Water concentration, size, and shape of the solids particles found in the mud.
• Cation exchange capacity (CEC or MBT) Yield point has units of pounds per 100 square feet and is that part of
the resistance to flow caused by the attractive forces between particles.

11
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 12
Fann 260 Rotary Viscometer
The rotary viscometer is also used to determine a drilling fluid's
thixotropic characteristics, its ability to develop a rigid or semi rigid gel
structure during periods of quiescence. Gel strength measurements are
taken after allowing the mud to stand for 10 seconds and for 10
minutes.
Mud pH and alkalinity
The pH of a drilling fluid indicates its relative acidity or alkalinity. The pH
scale ranges from zero to fourteen, a pH of seven is neutral. Muds are
nearly always alkaline. The typical pH range for drilling fluids is 8.5 to
12.5. Mud pH affects the dispersibility of clays, solubility of various
products and chemicals, corrosion of steel materials, and mud
rheological properties.
The two principal methods for determining pH are the colorimetric and
the electrometric methods. The colorimetric method is based on the
effect of acids or alkalis on the color of certain chemical indicators found
on the strips of pH paper. pH strips are placed on the surface of the
drilling fluid and the resulting color is compared to a standard chart. The
electrometric method is based on the voltage developed between two
special electrodes when they are immersed in the drilling fluid (pH
meter). The latter method is more accurate.
Alkalinity of a fluid is a measure of the concentration of water-soluble
ions that neutralize acids. The Pm test is used to measure total alkalinity
contributing compounds, soluble and insoluble, in a drilling fluid.
Filtration (API ambient temperature/low pressure, API high
temperature/high pressure)
When a drilling fluid is placed opposite or circulated past a permeable
formation, it will lose some of its liquid phase into that formation. Mud
solids will deposit on the walls of the hole and form a filter cake. Fluid
loss is affected by the permeability of the formation, the differential
pressure between the mud and the formation, and the filtration
characteristics of the drilling fluid.
Two standard tests are used for measuring the relative fluid loss of a
drilling fluid. The two tests are distinguished by the pressure applied to
the fluid and the temperature at which the test is conducted. The
standard API test is conducted at ambient temperature and 100 psi
pressure. The API high temperature/high pressure (HTHP) test is usually
run at 300°F (77°C) and 500 psi. Sometimes the HTHP test is run at a
temperature and pressure that simulates subsurface conditions.
Normally, the HTHP test results in higher fluid loss that the low pressure
test because some filtration-control agents lose their effectiveness when
subjected to temperature and pressure.
12
Filtrate analysis
Using the filtrate collected from the API filtration test, several chemical
analyses are performed. These include:
• Alkalinity (Pf/Mf)
• Hardness
• Salinity
These tests are used to determine the presence of contaminants, to
assist in the control of fluid properties, and to determine treatments.
Alkalinity - Alkalinity is a measure of the concentration of water-
soluble ions that neutralize acids. The Pf and Mf tests are used to
determine the concentration of alkalinity contributing ions soluble in the
aqueous phase of a drilling fluid. The Pf (phenolphthalein endpoint of
the filtrate) measures the concentration of ions down to a pH of 8.3. It
is usually assumed that this test is a measure of hydroxyl (OH-) ions.
The Mf ( methyl orange endpoint of the filtrate) measures the
concentration of ions down to a pH of 4.3. These ions primarily include
carbonates (CO-3) and bicarbonates (HCO-3). Even though there are
other ions that could contribute to alkalinity, these are the most
common.
Hardness - The hardness test is used to determine the concentration of
polyvalent metallic ions (i.e. Ca+2, Mg+2, Fe+3) in the mud filtrate.
Sources of these ions usually include contaminants such as cement,
anhydrite formations, calcium flows, etc.
Salinity - The salinity test is used to determine the concentration of salt
in a drilling fluid. Monitoring the salt concentration allows the field
service representative to check for contamination of the drilling fluid by
saltwater flows or salt containing formations.
Solids analysis
Solid analysis is used to determine the amounts of:
• Sand
• Total solids
• Liquid
• Oil
• Water
The solids content affects most drilling fluid properties, including
density, viscosity, gel strength, fluid loss, and temperature stability. The
solids content also has an influence on fluid treatment and the
equipment necessary for efficient drilling operations.
Cation exchange capacity (CEC or MBT)
This test provides a method of monitoring the concentration of clays in
the drilling fluid. Data from this test is usually expressed as pounds per
barrel (lb/bbl) bentonite equivalent or milliequivalent per milliliter of fluid
(meq/ml).
Solids Control Overview
Solids control is the process of controlling the buildup and adverse
effects of undesirable solids in a mud system. The buildup of solids has
undesirable effects on drilling fluid performance and the drilling process.
Rheological and filtration properties can become difficult to control when
the concentration of low-gravity solids becomes excessive. Penetration
rates and bit life decrease and hole problems increase with a high solids
concentration. Solids-control equipment on a drilling operation should be
operated like a processing plant.
The purpose of solids-removal equipment is to discard drilled solids. An
acceptable rate of drilled solids removal is 90 percent. A second goal of
this equipment is to remove from the cuttings as much water, oil, or
synthetics as possible. When this goal is accomplished, dilution can be
cost effective. In heavy-weight mud, acceptable levels of low-gravity
solids range from 3 to 6 percent by volume. In light-weight mud, a 5 to
7 percent concentration of low-gravity solids is acceptable.
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 13
Sources and sizes of solids
The two primary sources of solids are chemical additives and formation
cuttings. Chemical additives are materials added to maintain a drilling
fluid's properties. Formation cuttings are incorporated into a mud
system as a drill bit cuts new hole; these cuttings are contaminants that
degrade the performance of the drilling fluid. If the cuttings are not
removed, they will be ground into smaller and smaller particles that
become even more difficult to remove from the drilling fluid. Most
formation solids can be removed by mechanical means at the surface.
Small particles are more difficult to remove and have a greater effect on
drilling fluid properties than large particles. The particle size of drilled
solids incorporated into drilling fluid can range from 1 to 250 microns
(one micron equals 1/25,400 of an inch or 1/1000 of a millimeter). The
following table lists the approximate sizes of contaminating solids.
Screen devices
A screen device, also called a shale shaker, contains one or more
vibrating screens through which the mud passes as it circulates out of
the hole. Shale shakers are classified by their type of motion. There are
circular/elliptical and linear shale shakers. These shakers are described
below:
• Circular/elliptical motion shaker. This shaker uses
elliptical rollers to generate a circular rocking motion to
provide better solids removal through the screens
• Linear motion shaker. This shaker uses a straight forward-
and-back rocking motion to keep the fluid circulating through
the screens

Material Diameter, Screen Diameter, Screens

microns mesh inches A number of factors are involved in determining the effectiveness of a
screen; among these are mesh size and design.
Clay 1 — 0.0004
Colloidal Square mesh screens
5 — 0.0002
Wire diameter Opening width Percent open area
Mesh
Bentonite 10 1470 0.0004
Fine salt
Barites Inches Inches Microns
Fine cement
dust 20 x 20 0.016 0.0340 863 46.2

Coarse silt 44 325 0.0018 30 x 30 0.013 0.0203 515 37.1

53 270 0.002 40 x 40 0.010 0.0150 381 36.0

50 x 50 0.009 0.0110 279 30.3

74 200 0.003
60 x 60 0.0075 0.0092 234 30.5
API sand 105 140 0.004
80 x 80 0.0055 0.0070 178 31.4
149 100 0.006
100 x 100 0.0045 0.0055 140 30.3

Coarse sand 500 35 0.020

120 x 120 0.0037 0.0046 117 30.7

1000 18 0.040

Solids-control methods
The two primary methods of solids control are:
• Mechanical solids-removal equipment
• Dilution of the mud
Mechanical solids - removal equipment
Equipment that removes solids mechanically can be grouped into two
major classifications:
• Screen devices
• Centrifugal separation devices
In addition, there are two types of centrifugal separation devices. These
are decanting centrifuges and hydrocyclones. Table 11-2 identifies the
types of equipment and the particle sizes (in microns) they can remove.
Solids-control Can remove...
equipment...
Screen devices 74 micron solids with 200-mesh
screen
Centrifugal separation Colloidal solids to 5 microns
devices 20-70 micron solids, depending on
core size
Decanting centrifuges
Hydrocyclones

13
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 14
Mesh size. The screen opening size (mesh size) determines the particle Centrifugal separation devices
size a shaker can remove. Screen mesh is the number of openings per The two types of centrifugal separation devices are:
linear inch as measured from the center of the wire. For example, a 70
by 30 oblong mesh screen (rectangular opening) has 70 openings along • Decanting centrifuges
one-inch line one way and 30 openings along a one-inch line • Hydrocyclones
perpendicular to the first. Actual separation sizes are determined by Decanting Centrifuges
factors such as particle shape, fluid viscosity, feed rates, and particle A decanting centrifuge consists of a conical, horizontal steel bowl that
cohesiveness. Separation size can also be affected by hydraulic effects rotates at high speed using a double screw-type conveyor. The conveyor
that may occur in fluids. Some fluids can form a high surface-tension rotates in the same direction as the outer bowl but at a slightly slower
film on the wires of the screen and reduce the effective opening size of speed. An important aspect of centrifuge operation is the dilution of the
the screen. The following tables list specifications for different screen slurry being fed into the unit. The slurry dilution reduces the feed
sizes and mesh shapes. viscosity and maintains the separation efficiency of the machine. The
Oblong mesh screens higher the viscosity of the base mud, the more dilution is needed (2 to 4
gallons of water per minute is common). The effluent (liquid output
Mesh Wire Opening width/length Percent from the centrifuge) viscosity should be 35 to 37 seconds per quart for
diameter open area efficient separation. If the viscosity falls far below 35 seconds per quart,
too much water is being added. This will cause turbulence within the
bowl and reduce efficiency.
Inches Inches Microns
Note:
Manufacturers' recommendations concerning mud-feed rates and bowl
20 x 0.014 0.036/0.0193 914/490 41.8 speeds should be followed.
30 A single centrifuge unit set for total solids discard should be used for
20 x 0.013 0.0371/0.012 940/305 35.6 low-density systems. Two centrifuges operating in series are
40 recommended for the following systems:
20
60
x 0.009 0.041/0.0076 1041/193 34.0
• Invert emulsion (i.e., synthetic and oil-based) systems

40 x 0.009 0.016/0.0076 406/193 29.4 • High-density, water-based systems

60
40 x 0.0075 0.0181/0.0055 457/140 35.6
• Water-based systems in which base replacement is expensive
(i.e., brines)
80 The first centrifuge unit is used to separate barite and return it to the
mud system. The second unit processes the liquid overflow from the
Screen design first unit, discarding all solids and returning the liquid portion to the mud
Screens are available in two- and three-dimensional designs. Two- system.
dimensional screens can be classified as: Note:
• Panel screens, with two or three layers bound at each side by Centrifuge efficiencies are influenced by mud weight and mud viscosity.
a one-piece, double-folded hook strip During centrifuge operation, the underflow should be analyzed regularly
• Perforated plate screens, with two or three layers bonded to a to determine the amount of low-gravity solids and barite being removed
perforated, metal plate that provides support and is easy to and retained.
repair Hydrocyclones
• Three-dimensional screens are perforated, plate screens with A centrifuge can only handle partial flow of a mud system;
a corrugated surface that runs parallel to the flow of fluid. hydrocyclones are designed to process the full flow. A hydrocyclone is a
This configuration provides more screen area than the two- conical-shaped container in which pressure energy is converted to
dimensional screen configuration. The different types of three- centrifugal force. Mud is fed by a centrifugal pump through the feed
dimensional screens are: inlet tangentially into the feed chamber. The centrifugal forces thus
• Pyramid developed multiply the settling velocity of the heavier-phase material
• Plateau (solids and heavier liquid), forcing them toward the wall of the cone.
Screen designations The lighter particles move inward and upward in a spiraling vortex to
The API (RP13E) recommends that all screens be labeled with the the overflow opening at the top. The discharge at the bottom is the
screen name, separation potential, and flow capacity. Separation underflow; the discharge at the top is the overflow or effluent. The
potential is a projected percentage of the solids the screen can remove. discharge (the underflow) should be in a fine spray with a slight suction
Flow capacity measure the ideal rate of flow the screen can manage in at its center. Adjust the unit if there is a rope discharge with no air
operation. suction.
Optional screen labels include U.S. sieve number, aspect ratio, and The sizes of the cones and the pump pressure determine the cut
transmittance. obtained. Lower pressures result in coarser separation and reduced
capacity. A six-inch or larger diameter cone is recommended.
Name US Separation Flow Aspect Trans
siev potential, capacity ratio mittan
ce
no microns
d50 d16 d84 Con Area
d

Derrick 48 31 23 389 6.10 7.42 1.45 45.3

PMD DX 8 1
50

Brandt 47 32 23 349 8.85 7.28 1.43 64.4

BHX 50 7 1

Sweco 47 32 23 390 6.77 7.7 1.45 52.09

DX 50 4 4

14
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 15
Desanders/Desilters
Hydrocyclones are either desanders or desilters. Desander
hydrocyclones can handle large volumes of mud per single cone, but
they make coarser particle-size cuts. A four-inch diameter cone is
recommended for desilting. For effective operation, maintain the cone
capacity at least equal to the circulating rate, or 20 to 50 percent above
capacity, if possible. In well-designed four-inch cones, the size cut is 15
to 20 microns. Normally, weighted muds are too high in solids content
(by volume percent) to permit efficient (spray discharge)
hydrocycloning.
Desilters are mud cleaners that consist of a battery of desilter cones
(usually eight four-inch clones) above a high fine-mesh, high-energy
screen. The desilting process removes sand-size drilled solids from mud
by hydrocycloning the mud and then dropping the discharge onto the
fine-mesh shaker screen. The mud and solids that fall through the
screen (the cut size is dependent on the screen mesh) are saved and
the solids retained on the screens are discharged. Desilters are rarely
used on weighted muds above 12.5 lbs/gal. Because 97 percent of
barite particles are by API specifications less than 74 microns in
diameter, much of it will be discharged by the hydrocyclones. The barite
will then fall through the screen and be returned to the system. Mud
cleaners normally use 200-mesh screens. The discharge should be
monitored to avoid stripping excess barite from the mud.

Note:
When recovering weight material with a mud cleaner, be aware that any
fine solids that go through the cleaner's screen are also removed. Over
time, this process can lead to a fine-solids buildup.
Dilution
Dilution, or the addition of water to a mud system, serves to:
• Remove solids left by mechanical solids-removal equipment
• Replenish liquids lost when using mechanical solids-control
equipment
Although dilution restores the mud's properties, it can generate
excessive volumes of waste. If large amounts of waste are generated,
the disposal and clean-up costs can be very expensive. Use equipment
that generates the least amount of waste possible.
Efficiency of solids control equipment
Evaluate the efficiency of solids control equipment by the:
• Efficiency of drill-solids removal
• Efficiency of conservation of liquids
Solids-removal efficiency is the percent of the drill solids removed from
the active mud system by methods other than dilution or dumping. The
discharge is assumed to consist of whole mud and drill solids. The
fraction of whole mud in the discharge indicates the degree of liquid
conservation.
The following formula can be used to estimate the volumes produced at
different efficiencies of solids-removal and whole-mud losses.
VTot = (VH [1 - E] ÷ % S) + (VH [E] ÷ % Se) + (Wrig [days] ÷
days) + rain
Where
VTot = Waste volume generated as a result of the drill-solids
removed and the dryness of the solids
VH = Volume of the drilled hole
E = Efficiency, expressed as a fraction of solids removed
% S = Percent drill solids in mud
% Se = Percent solids in equipment discharge
Wrig = Daily rig water requirements
Days = Rig days
Rain = Estimated from pit volume increase in inches
The cost of waste management is calculated by adding the cost per unit
volume of the mud required for dilution to the unit cost per barrel for
waste disposal.

15
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 16
Baroid Family of Drilling Fluids Background Clay-based systems
In December 1993, President Bob Menerey commissioned BDFI Clay-based systems include:
representatives from around the world to determine Baroid's technical
course for the next five years; to name the products and systems Baroid • POLYNOX
would market. The technical marketing group adopted the following • Gyp/Q-BROXIN
mission statement to guide their decisions: To develop a systematic
approach to uniform and consistent technical recommendations around • CARBONOX/Q-BROXIN
the world.
Considerations
• CARBONOX/AKTAFLO-S
After weeding through semantic differences, the group realized that • Low pH/ENVIRO-THIN
although similar systems were recommended for similar conditions
around the world, different names were being used to identify these • K-LIG/KOH
systems. To avoid confusion for transferring personnel and to
successfully categorize well histories for Baroid's worldwide database, it
• BAROID Milling Fluid
became evident that a systematic approach was mandatory. The group POLYNOX system
agreed that: Use a POLYNOX system when the following drilling conditions are
• Similar drilling conditions existed around the world expected:

• Standard Baroid approaches/solutions for similar drilling • Reactive clays

conditions already existed • Acid gas influx
• A standardized Baroid family of mud systems and solutions POLYNOX Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
could be developed system

• A worldwide database would ensure the development of

AQUAGEL 5 - 20 (14 - 57)
consistent and universal Baroid recommendations for mud
programs Caustic soda/KOH 0.5 - 4.0 (1 - 11)
Outcomes Notes
Recognizing that semantics and small differences in product mix •pH 10.5 - 12.0
were separating the various regions of the company, the task force before lime
recommended the following families of systems: additions
• Clay-based Polymer-based •Pf 4
• Oil-based Synthetics •Pm 14 -20
•Excess lime ≥ Pf

CARBONOX 0 - 10 (0 - 29)

Drilling situations LIGNOX 3 - 8 (9 - 23)

High High
Systems Reactive Deep Increase density
Horizontal Salt BHT Deviate DEXTRID/IMPERM 2 - 10 (6 - 29)
shale/ water d (>16.0
drilling beds 300 F d
wells EX/
gumbo drilling ROP ) (149
1.92 sg C)
CELLEX/BARANEX
Notes
BARASILC z z  z  
Use
CARBONOX/
AKTAFLO-S  z z DEXTRID/CELLEX
up to 250°F (121°C
CARBONOX/
Q-BROXIN    z    Use BARANEX at
higher
K-LIG/KOH
z    temperatures
Low pH PAC-L/PAC-R 0.5 - 2.0 (1 - 6)
ENVIROTHIN _ _  
EZ-MUD
z z _ z _ _ Lime 4 - 10 (11 - 29)

THERMA-
DRIL   _ z z z Note:
PAC/DEXTRI
Use BARAZAN as required for suspension.
D z _ z z _ _ _
CAT-I
z z z z
POLYNOX
z   z _ _
Saturated salt
_  z 

ο Good _ Better • Best

16
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 17
Gyp/Q-BROXIN system CARBONOX/AKTAFLO-S system
Use a gyp/Q-BROXIN system when the following drilling conditions are Use a CARBONOX/AKTAFLO-S system when the following drilling
expected: conditions are expected:
• Deepwater wells • High bottomhole temperatures
• Salt beds • High density
• Lost circulation
CARBONOX/AKTAFLO-S Concentration, lb/bbl
• Horizontal wells system (kg/m3)

• Bottom hole temperatures up to 300°F (149°F) AQUAGEL 10 - 25 (29 - 71)

• Caustic soda 1 - 2 (3 - 6)
Gyp/Q-BROXIN Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
system
AQUAGEL 5 - 20 (14 - 57) CC-16/CARBONOX 14 - 18 (40 - 51)

Caustic soda 0.5 - 2.0 (1 - 6) AKTAFLO-S 4 - 8 (11 - 23)

Note: 1 lb/gal/4 lb/gal bentonite
CELLEX/DEXTRID/ 3 - 6 (9 - 17) equivalent
IMPERMEX/FILTER-
CHEK Lime as required
Gypsum 6 - 10 (17 - 29)

Q-BROXIN 4 - 6 (11 - 17)

Low pH/ENVIRO-THIN system
Note: Use a low pH/ENVIRO-THIN system when the sensitive shales are
Optional products include: expected.
Low pH/ENVIRO-THIN Concentration, lb/bbl
• CON-DET to reduce or eliminate bit balling system (kg/m3)
• Salts for inhibition AQUAGEL 10 - 25 (29 - 71)

• Asphalts/BARANEX for HTHP fluid loss control

Caustic soda 0.3 - 1.0 (0.9 - 3)
CARBONOX/Q-BROXIN system
Note:
Use a CARBONOX/Q-BROXIN system when the following drilling
Maintain a 8.5 - 9.5 pH.
conditions are expected: ENVIRO-THIN 2 - 4 (6 - 11)
• Deepwater wells
CELLEX/PAC-L/PAC-R 2 - 4 (6 - 11)
• Salt beds
• Horizontal wells CARBONOX 2 - 6 (6 -17)
• High BHT
• Lost circulation K-LIG/KOH system
Use a K-LIG/KOH system when the following drilling conditions are
CARBONOX/Q- Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3) expected:
BROXIN system
AQUAGEL 10 - 25 (29 - 71)
• Formation damage
• Shale inhibition
Caustic soda 1 - 2 (3 - 6)
K-LIG/KOH system Concentration, lb/bbl
(kg/m3)
CARBONOX 2 - 6 (6 - 17)
AQUAGEL 5 - 20 (14 - 57)
Q-BROXIN 2 - 6 (6 - 17)
Caustic soda 1.0 - 2.0 (3 - 6)
Note: Maintain a 8.5 - 9.0 pH.
PAC-L/PAC-R/CELLEX 0 - 10 (0 - 29)

Note: K-LIG 3 - 10 (9 - 29)

Lime is an optional product as a source of alkalinity.
PAC-L/PAC-R 1 - 2 (3 - 6)

Lime as required

Note:
Optional products are potassium acetate as required as a potassium
source.

17
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 18
BAROID Milling fluid system
Use a BAROID Milling fluid system when the following drilling conditions • Glycol additions are optional for lubricity or additional
are expected: inhibition.
THERMA-DRIL system
• Milling Use a THERMA-DRIL system when high bottomhole temperatures are
• Horizontal wells
expected to be >300°F (>149°C).

• Deviated wells THERMA-DRIL system Concentration, lb/bbl

BAROID Milling fluid system Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
(kg/m3)
AQUAGEL 10 - 12 (29 - 34)
AQUAGEL GOLD SEAL 10 (29)

MMH/RV-310 1 (3) THERMA-DRIL 2 - 6 (6 - 17)

Note: Use on an active basis
Caustic soda/soda ash as required
Note: Maintain a 10.8 - 11.4 pH
PAC-L/PAC-R/THERMA-CHEK 1 - 3 (3 - 9)
Note
• Optional products include starch/FILTER-CHEK/CAT-HI/CAT- BARANEX 4 - 12 (11 - 34)
LO for filtration control.
• Barite can be used to increase density.
Caustic soda 0.5 - 1.0 (1.4 - 3)
Polymer-based Systems
Polymer-based systems include:
Note:
• EZ-MUD
• Add lime/BARACOR-95 as needed to remove
• THERMA-DRIL carbonate/bicarbonates.
• PAC/Starch • Avoid high pH levels (11-12) to minimize hydrolysis of
THERMA-CHEK.
• CAT-I
• X-TEND II/AQAGEL PAC system
Use a PAC system when the following drilling conditions are expected:
• BARASILC
EZ-MUD system • High density > 14.0 lbs/gal (40 kg/m3)
Use an EZ-MUD system when the following drilling conditions are
expected:
• Deviation

• Sensitive shale
• Salt beds

• Gumbo
• Lost circulation

• Deepwater drilling
• High differential pressure

• Low density
• Corrosion

EZ-MUD system Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)

PAC system Concentration, lb/bbl
(kg/m3)
AQUAGEL 0 - 10 (0 - 29)
AQUAGEL+9 5 - 8 (14 - 23)
EZ-MUD 1.0 - 2.0 (3 - 6)
Note: Use on an NaCl/KOH 0.25 - 0.50 (0.7 - 1.4)
active basis Note: Maintain a 9 - 9.5 pH level
PAC-L/PAC-R 0.5 - 1.5 (1.4 - 4)
DEXTRID/FILTER- 0 - 8 (0 - 23)
DEXTRID/FILTER- 3 - 5 (9 - 14) CHEK/IMPERMEX
CHEK
BARAZAN 0.25 - 0.5 (0.7 - 1.4) PAC-L/PAC-R/CELLEX 1 - 3.5 (3 - 10)

Caustic soda/KOH 0.25 - 0.5 (0.7 - 1.4) Salts as required to saturation

Note: Maintain a 8.5
- 9.0 pH
Lime (optional) 1 - 4 (3 - 11)
Note:
• NaCl or KCl can be added as an option (3 percent minimum) Gypsum (optional) 1 - 4 (3 - 11)
for additional inhibition.
• BARANEX, BARO-TROL, BARABLOK, CELLEX, IMPERMEX can
be used for filtration control.

18
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 19
CAT-I system BARASILC
Use a CAT-I system when the following drilling conditions are expected: The following table provides guidelines for formulating BARASILC
systems. This system is formulated in fresh water or monovalent brines.
• Reactive shale
• Gumbo
• Products are listed in order of addition.

• A need for a high rate of penetration (ROP)

• Contingency products are denoted by an asterisk (*); they can
be used with the primary products to obtain properties
3
needed for specific situations.
CAT-I system Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m )
Additive Concentrations, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
NaOH/KOH 0.5 - 1.0 (1.4 - 3)
Soda ash As needed
Note: Maintain a 9
- 9.5 pH level Caustic soda/caustic potash As needed
BARASIL-S 40-80 (114-228)
BARACAT 2 - 3 (6 - 9)
Note: Monitor DEXTRID 2-8 (6-23)
excess with a Hach PAC 0.5-4 (1.4-11)
meter test
CAT-GEL 10 - 12 (29 - 34) FILTER-CHEK 2-8 (6-23)
Note: Initial BARAZAN PLUS 0.2-2.5 (0.6-7)
formulation BAROID As needed
CAT-HI/CAT-LO 2 - 3 (6 - 9) *AQUAGEL 1-10 (3-29)
Note: Add at 1:2 or
*GEM GP/CP 3-5% by volume
1:3 ratios
*BARACOR 95 0.5-4 (1.4-11)
CAT 300 3 - 6 (9 - 17)
*BARA-DEFOAM HP As needed
Note: Add for
filtration control at *BARASCAV D 0.2-1 (0.6-3)
temperatures Caution:
approaching 300°F BARASIL-S is an alkali solution which can cause burns to the skin and
(149°C) eyes. Wear appropriate protective gear and avoid breathing mists of the
CAT-VIS 1 - 2 (3 - 6) solution when working with BARASIL-S. The active mud should be
handled as any high pH water based mud system.
Salts as required up to saturation

Note:
• Optional products include gilsonites/asphalts/glycols.
• System performance and filtration are more controllable in
saline environments.

X-TEND II/AQUAGEL system

Use an extended bentonite system when the need for increased
penetration rate is expected.

X-TEND Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)

II/AQUAGEL
system
AQUAGEL 5 - 12 (14 -34)

X-TEND II 0.1 - 0.4 (0.3 - 1.1)

Caustic soda 0.25 - 0.50 (0.7 - 1.4)

Soda ash as required to remove Ca2

CMC as required for filtration

19
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 20
Invert systems ENVIROMUL system
Invert oil systems include: Use an ENVIROMUL system when the following drilling conditions are
expected:
• BAROID 100
• Deep water
• INVERMUL
• Gumbo
• INVERMUL RF
• Salt beds
• ENVIROMUL
• High density
• ENVIROMUL RF
• High BHT
• ENVIROMUL 100
BAROID 100 system ENVIROMUL system (base Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
Use a BAROID 100 system when the following drilling conditions exist: oil)
• Coring 300°F 400°F (204°C)
• Reactive shale (149°C)
INVERMUL NT 4 - 8 (11 - 23) 8 - 15 (23 - 43)
BAROID 100 Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
system (diesel)
EZ-MUL NT 1 - 4 (3 - 11) 2 - 12 (6 - 34)
EZ-CORE 6 - 8 (17 - 23)

DURATONE HT 8 - 10 (23 - 29) Lime 2 - 8 (6 - 23) 4 - 10 (11 - 29)

GELTONE II 6 - 14 (17 - 40) GELTONE II 2 - 8 (6 - 23) 2 - 8 (6 - 23)

Lime 4 - 8 (11 - 23)

DURATONE HT 4 - 8 (11 - 23) 9 - 20 (26 - 57)

BARACTIVE 3 - 7 (9 - 20)
Note: Add as bbl CaCl2 as required as required

BARACARB 5 10 - 15 (23 - 43) Note:

• Bentone 38 or GELTONE IV can replace GELTONE II at high
Note: temperatures.
• For filtration, add BARABLOK as an alternative to DURATONE • RM-63, X-VIS, CMO 568, BARACARB and diesel-base.
HT.
• If inordinate amounts of water are incorporated into system,
EZ-MUL NT may be required to maintain emulsion stability.

INVERMUL system
Use an INVERMUL system when the following drilling conditions are
expected:
• Deepwater drilling
• High BHT
• Gumbo
INVERMUL Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
system
(diesel)
300°F (149°C) 400°F (204°C)

INVERMUL 4 - 8 (11 - 23) 8 - 15 (23 - 43)

NT
EZ-MUL NT 1 - 4 (3 - 11) 2 - 12 (6 - 34)

Lime 2 - 8 (6 - 23) 4 - 10 (11 - 29)

CaCl2 as required as required

GELTONE II 2 - 8 (6 - 23) 2 - 8 (6 - 23)

DURATONE 4 - 8 (11 - 23) 9 - 20 (26 - 57)

HT
Note:
• For suspension of barite, add SUSPENTONE and X-VIS.
• For thinning, add OMC and DRILTREAT.

20
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 21
Synthetic systems
Synthetic systems include:
Additive Concentrations, lb/bbl (kg/m3) to
• PETROFREE 325°F (163°C)
• PETROFREE 100 Ester/LE BASE As needed

• PETROFREE LE
LE MUL 0-8 (0-23)
LE SUPERMUL 5-12 (14-34)
• PETROFREE LE 100
Lime 2-3 (6-9)
• PETROFREE HT CaCl2 As needed
• XP-007 DURATONE HT 5-12 (14-34)
• XP-007 100 Water As needed
PETROFREE systems GELTONE II/V 4-6 (11-17)
Use a PETROFREE system when the following drilling conditions are
expected: BAROID, As needed
BARODENSE, or
• Environmental concerns BARACARB
• Horizontal wells
• Sensitive shale
PETROFREE LE 100
• Low density For use as a non-damaging drilling fluid, PETROFREE LE 100 all-
• Deep water synthetic systems are used when maintaining the native state of the
geologic formation is a primary concern. These systems are not used
• Salt beds where water contamination is a known problem. The table below
• Formation damage
provides guidelines for formulating PETROFREE LE 100 systems.

Additive Concentrations, lb/bbl (kg/m3) to

PETROFREE Concentration, lb/bbl (kg/m3)
325°F (163°C)
system
(Ester/water ratio Ester/LE BASE As needed
is 60/40 to 95/5)
EZ-MUL NTE 6 - 15 (17 - 43) EZ-CORE 2 (6)

DURATONE HT 4 - 15 (11 - 43) *LE SUPERMUL 0-6 (0-17)

GELTONE II 0 - 8 (0 - 23) BARABLOK or 5-15 (14-43)

BARABLOK 400 or
Lime 0 - 1 (0 - 3) DURATONE HT

OMC 42 1 - 2 (3 - 6) GELTONE II/V 6-14 (17-40)

RM-63 0 - 15 (0 - 43) BARACTIVE 2-6 (6-17)

Note: BAROID, As needed

Add OMC 42 and OMC 2 as thinners. BARODENSE, or
BARACARB
PETROFREE LE
Use PETROFREE LE for the following applications
Lime 1-3 (3-9)
• deepwater
• high-angle
• high density
• high temperature
• extended-reach
PETROFREE LE systems use emulsifiers and fluid-loss agents that
provide maximum emulsion stability and minimal filtrate loss. The
following table provides guidelines for formulating PETROFREE LE
systems:

21
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 22
Trouble Shooting Overview
Overview Oil-based mud: maintenance and operational
This chapter contains troubleshooting tables for the following fluids: problems
• Foam/aerated drilling fluids Problem Indications Treatments
• Oil-based muds Water in HPHT
filtrate
• Synthetics Emulsion breaking Low electrical
Add EZ MUL NT, INVERMUL
NT, DURATONE HT, and lime.
• Water-based muds
stability
Water-wet solids
The tables include a list of contaminants or operational problems,
as well as indications of and treatments for the contaminants or Excess organophilic Add OMC.
operational problems. High yield point and additives Use optimum solids control.
gel strengths Solids build-up Dilute with oil.
Water-wet solids Add emulsifiers.
Oil-based mud: contaminants
Increase mud density with
Contamina weighting agent.
Indications Treatments Low electrical
Adjust water phase salinity.
nt stability
Hole instability Add DURATONE HT to reduce
Shale slivers on
filtrate.
Increase mud density if shaker
Add INVERMUL NT and lime
possible. to tighten the emulsion.
Acid gas Depletion of alkalinity Add lime.
Increase in torque
Add NO-SULF H2S
and drag
scavenger. Inadequate gel
Inadequate hole strengths
Add GELTONE II,
cleaning/suspension Residue in cup
SUSPENTONE, or RM-63.
Few cuttings on
Add water to dissolve shaker
Salt crystals on the shaker
the salt, then add Fill on
and in the mud
INVERMUL NT, EZ MUL trips/connections
Salt Drop in electrical stability Low electrical
NT, and lime.
Increase in chloride stability
Add new mud Insoluble salt Add water to solubilize salt.
content in water phase Water in HPHT
containing no salt.
filtrate

Use a GELTONE II squeeze or

a high-solids squeeze when
Reduce shaker screen there is major mud loss.
size. Whole mud losses Add MICATEX lost-circulation
Increase in solids (retort Decrease in pit
Optimize mud material, WALL-NUT seepage-
analysis) Lost circulation volume
cleaner/centrifuge use. loss control, BAROFIBRE
Increase in plastic Drop in circulating
Solids Dilute mud with oil and seepage-loss control, or
viscosity pressures calcium carbonate when there
maintain density with
Decrease in electrical is minor mud loss.
weight material.
stability Note: Do not add cellophane
Use optimum solids
or BARO-SEAL lost-circulation
control. material.
Increase salinity with CaCl2.
Drilled solids appear
Check hydraulics program.
Slow drilling rates gummy
Circulate bottoms up prior to
Drop in mud weight Bit balling
tripping.
Change in O/W ratio
Add oil, EZ MUL NT, Mud appears
Water in HPHT filtrate Add oil.
INVERMUL NT, dull/grainy
Water Increase in funnel Add EZ MUL NT, DRILTREAT,
DRILTREAT, and weight Large BAROID flocs
viscosity and INVERMUL NT.
material. Aggregation of
Decrease in electrical Water wetting solids
Dilute mud with fresh mud.
stability Adjust the shaker screen to
Settling in cup
remove aggregated solids.
Over-saturation
Add water to solubilize excess
with calcium
salt.
chloride
Weight material
settles in the
Add GELTONE II,
Weight material viscometer cup
SUSPENTONE, X-VIS, and
settling Mud weight varies
RM-63.
when circulating
after trips

22
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 23
PETROFREE: contaminants
Contaminant Indications
H2 S
Detection of H2S
Salt
Salt crystals on the shaker
and in the mud
Drop in electrical stability
High chloride content in
water phase
Solids
Increase in solids (retort
analysis)
Increase in plastic viscosity
Decrease in electrical
stability
Water
Drop in mud weight
Change in E/W ratio
Water in HPHT filtrate
Increase in funnel and
plastic viscosity
Decrease in electrical
stability
Treatments
Emulsion breaking
Add NO-SULF H2S scavenger.
High yield point and
Add water to dissolve the
salt, then add EZ MUL NTE.
Add new mud containing no
salt.
Reduce shaker-screen size.
Optimize mud
cleaner/centrifuge use.
Dilute with ester.
cleaning/suspension
Add weight material.
Use optimum solids control.
Add ester, EZ MUL NTE, and
weight material.
Slow drilling rates
23
PETROFREE: maintenance and operational
problems
Problem Indications Treatments
Water in HPHT filtrate
Add EZ MUL NTE and
Low electrical stability
DURATONE HT.
Water-wet solids
Excess organophilic
additives
Add OMC 42 or OMC 2.
Solids build-up
Use optimum solids
Water-wet solids
control.
gel strengths Low E/W ratio for mud
Dilute with ester.
weight for
Add emulsifiers.
temperatures in excess
of 350°F
Add DURATONE HT to
Low electrical stability
reduce filtrate.
Hole instability Shale slivers on shaker
Add EZ MUL NTE to
High HTHP fluid loss
tighten the emulsion.
Add GELTONE II,
Increased torque and SUSPENTONE, or RM-63.
drag Test yield point and gel
Inadequate hole Inadequate gel strengths at elevated
strengths temperature.
Residue in cup Increase low-shear rate
Few cuttings on shaker viscosity with X-VIS and
Fill on trips/connections GELTONE III.
Consider raising E/W ratio.
Low electrical stability
Water in HPHT filtrate
Add water to solubilize
Insoluble salt Increase in funnel
salt.
viscosity and water-wet
solids
Use a GELTONE V squeeze
or a high-solids squeeze
when there is major mud
loss.
Add MICATEX lost-
Whole mud losses
circulation material or
Decrease in pit volume
Lost circulation BARACARB when there is
Drop in circulating
minor mud loss.
pressures
Note: Do not add
cellophane, graphite, or
cellulosic products as they
will reduce the emulsion
strength.
Increase salinity with
Drilled solids appear CaCl2.
gummy Check hydraulics program.
Bit balling Circulate bottoms up prior
to tripping.
Add ester.
Add EZ MUL NTE and
DRILTREAT.
Mud appears
Dilute mud with fresh
dull/grainy
mud.
Water wetting Large BAROID flocs
Adjust the shaker screen
Aggregation of solids
to remove aggregated
Settling in cup
solids.
Add water to solubilize
salt.
Weight material settles
in the viscometer cup
Weight material Add GELTONE II,
Mud weight varies
settling SUSPENTONE, or RM-63.
when circulating after
trips
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 24
Water-based Fluids: maintenance and
Water-based Fluids: contaminants operational problems

Problem Indications Treatments

Contaminant Indications Treatments

Premature bit failure

Remove chemically with Excessive wear of Dilute and/or chemically
High viscosity and swabs, valve seats, and treat mud to dilute sand
soda ash or sodium Abrasive
gel strengths liners content.
bicarbonate. sands
Cement Increase in pH, fluid Excessive wear on Use a desander to minimize
Convert to a system that
loss, and filtrate elbow joints of mud sand content.
will tolerate cement for
calcium handling equipment
high concentrations.

Decrease in mud weight

Use chemicals and fluid Air bubbles encapsulated in
Air Thin fluid with chemical
loss control agents so mud mud
High viscosity and entrapment treatment or water.
tolerates gypsum or Increase in plastic pressure
flash gels Hammering of pumps
anhydrite.
Gypsum or Increase in fluid
Convert to a system that
anhydrite loss, filtrate Decreasing hydroxyl Add biocide.
will tolerate gypsum or
calcium, and alkalinity Add lime.
anhydrite when drilling
sulphate Bacterial Increasing carbonate Treat with fluid loss additive
high gypsum or anhydrite degradation alkalinity if required.
concentrations. Increase in filtration and Treat with rheological
rheological properties control agents if required.
Dilute mud when only
High viscosity and Reduced drilling progress Maintain low viscosity and
stringers are encountered.
gel strengths Balled bit and string gel strengths to keep hole
Use chemicals and fluid-
Salt Increase in chloride Bit balling Swabbing on trips clean.
loss control agents so that
and salt content Packed bits that show little Maximize horse power for
mud tolerates salt. wear efficient use of hydraulics.
Mud appears
Convert mud to a saturated
dull/grainy Raise pH to between 11 and
salt system.
External and/or internal 11.5.
Increase in pit pitting on drillpipe Note: Lime may be used in
Corrosion
volume Drillpipe failure some applications.
Washouts Add a compatible Baroid
Mud flows after corrosion inhibitor.
Shut in well.
shutting down
Increase the mud weight Partial or full circulation Cover drillstring at the stuck
pump
Saltwater flow following work sheet for String against porous zone zone with a Baroid spotting
Change in chloride No key seats fluid or diesel, keeping some
killing the well. Differential
content High fluid loss in muds with in the pipe to move at 10-
Adjust flow properties. sticking
Increase in total a high solids content minute intervals.
hardness Cannot rotate or Use stretch charts to help
Decrease in pH reciprocate drillpipe locate stuck region.

Increase in solids Spray water or diesel on the

Decrease in mud weight
(retort analysis) pits.
Foam on surface of mud
Add a Baroid defoamer to
Increase in plastic Use optimum solids control. Foaming pits
Solids Decrease in pump pressure
the mud.
viscosity Dilute mud with base Add AQUAGEL to salt or low-
Increase in fluid fluids. Hammering of pumps
solid muds.
loss (API and Minimal increase in pit
HTHP) volume
Appearance of gas-cut mud
Gas influx Well does not flow after Increase mud weight.
shutting down pump
Decrease in mud weight at
flow line

Increase in pit volume Shut-in well.

Gas kick Well flows after shutting Follow proper kill
down pump procedures.

Can rotate bit but cannot

reciprocate drillpipe Backoff and wipe out key
Key seating
Partial or full returns seat.
Well is dog-legged

Increase in
Use optimum solids control.
surface mud High viscosity
Add water to dilute the mud.
weight

Locked cones or loose

Locked Use optimum solids control.
bearings when teeth are on
cones Add water to dilute the mud.
cones

24
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 25
Water-based Fluids: maintenance and
operational problems

Problem Indications Treatments

Add lost-circulation material

Decrease in pit volume or set a soft plug.
Loss of returns Lower the mud weight and
Lost
Whole mud losses the equivalent circulating
circulation
Decrease in circulating density, when possible.
pressures Use a cement squeeze.
Reduce pump speed.

Backoff and wash over.

Cannot rotate or For plastic salt: Use water to
Mechanical
reciprocate drillpipe dissolve salt at stuck-pipe
sticking
Reduced or no circulation point. Increase mud weight
after adding water.

Ream salt sections after

trips
Plastic salt Increase mud weight.
Tight connections
Stuck pipe

Reduce fluid loss.

Increase mud weight, if
possible.
Convert mud to an inhibitive
fluid.
Increase mud viscosity if
Excessive shale slivers at
Sloughing possible.
shaker
shale Note: If drilling through
Tight connections
bentonitic shale, increasing
the mud viscosity is not
necessary.
Add BAROTROL.
Reduce pressure surges.
Reduce drillpipe whipping.

25
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 26
Drill-N Systems
Overview
DRIL-N Fluids are designed to be essentially non-damaging to the producing
formation, provide superior hole cleaning, allow easy clean-up and be cost effective.

These fluids address the wide range of problems encountered in horizontal drilling,
completion, and work over operations. These systems are designed to provide the
lowest filtration rate possible in order to minimize or prevent formation damage.

Bridging off the production zone is a key to preventing formation damage. Bridging
materials that are utilized in DRIL-N fluids include sized calcium carbonate and salt.

When bridging production zones, the correct sizing of particles becomes important. The pore diameter of the formation must be known to
effectively bridge. An industry rule of thumb for estimating an unknown pore diameter (microns) is to take the square root of the permeability in
millidarcies.
Filtration tests on DRIL-N fluids are conducted using a ceramic disc, which simulates as close as possible the pore size of the formation. These
tests can be utilized in the field to determine proper application of the DRIL-N fluids system.

Baroid has seven unique systems; each designed to do a specific job of addressing a specific set of conditions and objectives. The following table
gives a brief description of each system. A more detailed description is found in each system section.

DRIL-N Fluid systems

System Description

BARADRIL-N Sized calcium carbonate system

COREDRIL-N All oil drilling and coring system

MAXDRIL-N Mixed metal silicate system

SHEARDRIL-N Clay free, modified polymer system

SOLUDRIL-N Sized salt system

QUIKDRIL-N Water Based Solids Free System
High Density Modified Cellulose Low
BRINEDRIL-N
Solids System

Horizontal /Minimize Reactive Depleted

Systems Reactive Depleted High Angle Minimize Cleanup
Shale Zones Drilling Formation
Damage
BARADRIL-N™ Better Best Better Best Better
COREDRIL-N™ Best Best Better Best Better
MAXDRIL-N™ — Best Best Good Good
QUIKDRIL-N™ Better — Good Best Best
SHEARDRIL-N™ Better — Good Best Best
SOLUDRIL-N™ Best Best Better Best Best
BRINEDRIL-N™ Good — — Good Good

26
The Baroid CFS Completion Fluids Manual 27
Competitor System Comparison

Particle
Weighting / Bridging Density
COMPANY Trade Name Type System Size
Material Range (ppg)
(microns)

Saturated NaCl brine

10.4 –
SOLUDRIL-N™ with a cross linked starch & Sized Salt 5 – 150
14.5
biopolymer.

Sized Calcium Carbon-

BARADRIL-N™ Calcium Carbonatea 5 - 150 8.4 - 14.5
ate System

BRINEDRIL-N™ Clay and Solids Free Brine Density 11 – 16.5

Baroid
Polymer
QUIKDRIL-N™ System Base Fluid 8.4 – 12.7
Clay and Solids Free
Modified Polymer Sys-
SHEARDRIL-N™ Base Fluid 8.4 – 15.0
tem
MAXDRIL-NTM Mixed Metal Silicate (mms) Calcium Carbonate 5 – 150 8.8 – 13.0

COREDRIL-NTM All Oil / Synthetic System Calcium Carbonate 5 - 150 7.5 – 12.0

Saturated NaCl brine

Thixsal Ultra™ With Xanthan Polymer
Sized NaCl, 5-30 >10
System and Starch. Stable up to
290

KCl, NaCl, CaCl2 brine

Ultra-Carb™ System With polymer and starch. Calcium Carbonatea 2-30 8.5-12.0
Staple up to 290 o
TBC Brinadd
Biopolymer system
which is formulated
Ultra-PF™ using Potassium Formate Calcium Carbonatea 2-30 12.5-17
Brine. Stable up to
350°F

Xanthan Polymer. Stable up Calcium Carbonatea

Hy Dens™ 2-30 12.5-17
to 275°F Solids loading of <20 ppb

MI Flo-Pro™ Xanthan Polymer, Starch Calcium Carbonatea

PERFFLOW® Xanthan Polymer, Starch Calcium Carbonatea <100 8.5 – 14.0

Baker Inteq

AQUA-DRIL®

Breaker catalyst is in the

filter cake. Activator for
PAYZONE® Fluids Calcium Carbonate 8.4-20.5
the breaker catalyst is in
Tetra Technologies
the gravel pack carrier fluid

PayZone DF-CC™ Calcium Carbonatea

PayZone DF-SS™ Sized Salt

a
Calcium Carbonate weighting / bridging materials are normally used in horizontal gravel packs due to the ability of the sand carrier fluid (clear
brine) to dissolve the sized salt particles unless the carrier fluid is saturated with salt. The additional hydrostatic pressure due to the saturated
carrier fluid could potentially frac the formation and thus could cause fluid loss problems.

Typical solids’ loading for a water-based system is 40 lb/bbl. Typical solids loading for an oil based mud is 180-190 lb/bbl.

27
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 28 -

SOLUDRIL-N™ Maintenance guidelines

SOLUDRIL- N fluids are sized salt systems designed for drilling, Any fluid dilution should be made with the saturated brine used for the
completion or work over operations in horizontal and vertical wells. base fluid.· BARAPLUG additions should be sized according to the mean
SOLUDRIL-N fluids utilize BARAPLUG (sized salt) and a crosslinked pore diameter of the formation.
polymer to provide superior rheological and filtration control.
Advantages
• Filter cake is easily removable with unsaturated sodium BARADRIL-N™
chloride brine.
• Excellent return permeability has been demonstrated in tests The BARADRIL-N system provides acid soluble drilling, completion, and
that prove SOLUDRIL-N fluid is far superior to conventional workover fluid compositions. The BARADRIL-N system is designed for
water-based systems. non-damaging drilling when fluid loss and formation stability are of
• Solids and fluids are prevented from entering production zone primary concern. Return permeability’s are excellent with the BARADRIL-
because the bridging agent has correct particle size N system and the filtercake is easily removed by treating with
distribution to assure a thin, low permeability filter cake. hydrochloric acid.
• Improved suspension under downhole conditions because Advantages
advanced polymer chemistry provides low viscosities at high • Disperses easily with minimal shear
shear. • Provides hole stability and effective seepage loss control while
• Provides thermally stable fluid up to 290° F with use of drilling permeable formations
specialty products that allow control of rheological properties • Can be weighted-up for pressure control
at elevated temperatures • Acid soluble and non-damaging to producing reservoirs
Density Range • Solids and fluids are prevented from entering production zone
10.4 – 14.5 lb/gal because the bridging agent has correct particle size
Temperature Range distribution to assure a thin, low permeability filter cake.
Up to 290o F Density Range
8.5 – 14.5 lb/gal
Typical Temperature Range
Additive Function concentrations, Up to 300o F
lb/bbl (kg/m3)
Typical
Brine Base fluid Saturate based on Additive Function concentrations,
(saturated) the brine used lb/bbl (kg/m3)

N-VIS Viscosifier 0.25-1 (0.7-3) N-VIS Viscosifier 0.25-1 (0.7-3)

N-VIS P Viscosifier/Filtratio 1-3 (3-9) N-VIS P Viscosifier/Filtratio 1-3 (3-9)

n control n control

N-DRIL HT Filtration control 5-10 (14-29) N-DRIL HT Filtration control 2-10 (6-29)

BARAPLUG Weighting/Bridgin As needed BARACARB Weighting/ As needed

6- g agent 5/25/50/15 Bridging agent
300/20/40/50 0

BARABUF Alkalinity 1-3 (3-9) BARABUF Alkalinity 0.1-3.0 (0.3-9)

Formulation Formulation
· Products are listed in order of addition.
Products are listed in order of addition. BARADRIL-N fluids may be formulated in freshwater, seawater,
SOLUDRIL-N fluids may be formulated in saturated potassium chloride, potassium chloride, sodium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium bromide,
sodium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium bromide, or calcium bromide or calcium bromide brines.
brines. Add all polymers slowly to prevent the formation of “fish eyes”.
Add all polymers slowly to prevent the formation of “fish eyes”. Add BARACARB as needed for density and bridging requirements.
Add BARAPLUG as needed for density and bridging requirements. Add BARABUF for pH control
Add BARABUF to maintain alkalinity in the 8-10 pH range.
BARADRIL-N fluid density,
Base fluid
lb/gal (sg)
SOLUDRIL-N fluid density,
Base fluid
lb/gal (sg) Freshwater 8.8-10.0 (1.05-1.20)

Potassium chloride 10.0-12.0 (1.20-1.44) Seawater 9.0-10.0 (1.08-1.20)

Sodium chloride 10.4-12.5 (1.25-1.50) Potassium chloride 9.0-12.0 (1.08-1.50)

Calcium chloride 12.0-13.5 (1.44-1.62) Sodium chloride 9.0-12.5 (1.08-1.50)

Sodium bromide 13.0-14.5 (1.56-1.74) Sodium bromide 12.0-14.5 (1.44-1.74)

Calcium bromide 15.4-17.0 (1.85-2.04) Calcium bromide 12.0-16.0 (1.44-1.92)

Caution: When selecting a saturated salt fluid, be aware of its
crystallization point.

28 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 29 -

COREDRIL-N™ Maintenance guidelines

COREDRIL-N is an oil-drilling and coring fluid for maximum formation
Minimize invasion of water from formation through proper control of
protection without altering native Wettability. COREDRIL- N fluids are
hydrostatic pressure.
100% oil/synthetic drilling fluids (diesel, mineral, ester or crude)
developed to control formation damage caused by conventional drilling Do not contaminate fluid with water from surface equipment.
operations.
The COREDRIL-N system contains an optimum concentration of
QUIKDRIL-N™
BARACARB designed to bridge rock pores, thus providing low filtration
QUIKDRIL-N fluids are designed as water-based, solids-free polymer
rates—minimizing fluid invasion into potential pay zones. COREDRIL-N
drilling fluids.
fluids use passive emulsifiers that reduce the risk of creating emulsion
QUIKDRIL-N fluids are especially beneficial in slimhole drilling or coiled
blockage and preserve the wettability characteristics of the reservoir
rocks. tubing operations when minimizing circulation pressure is critical.
Advantages Advantages
• Is non-damaging to pay zones • First system specifically designed for coiled tubing and slimhole
• Allows for improved formation evaluation by unmasking drilling
reservoirs • Provides stable filtration control
• Can be formulated with good properties over a wide range of • Provides superior return permeability results
fluid densities • Lower pumping pressures
• Temperature stable and resistant to solids and water • Reduces hole washout
contamination • Easy borehole cleanup
• Can be used with a variety of base oils and synthetics • Minimizes circulating pressure losses
• Solids and fluids are prevented from entering production zone • Allows ease of weight up
because the bridging agent has correct particle size • Provides ease in mixing
distribution to assure a thin, low permeability filter cake • Increases drilling rates
• Does not contain strong emulsifiers • Drill solids can be effectively removed if needed
• Requires much lower concentrations of emulsifiers than Density Range
conventional oil mud 8.4 – 12.7 lb/gal
• Exhibits excellent return permeability Temperature Range
Density Range Up to 300o F
7.5 – 12.0 lb/gal
Temperature Range Typical
Up to 300o F Additive Function concentrations,
lb/bbl (kg/m3)
Typical N-Vis Viscosifier 1-2 (3-6)
Additive Function concentrations,
lb/bbl (kg/m3) N-Dril HT Plus Viscosifier / Filtration 3-5 (9-14)
Control
Oil/Synthetic Base fluid As needed BARABUF Alkalinity 2-3 (6-9)

EZ-CORE Passive emulsifier 2 (6)

Formulation Guidelines
Lime Alkalinity/Emulsificatio 1-2 (3-6)
n aid • Products are listed in order of addition
• When mixing N-Vis and N-Dril HT Plus add slowly and agitate
BARABLOK or High temp filtration 5-25 (14-71) to insure proper hydration of polymers
BARABLOK 400 control • Use brines to obtain the required density
or • Caution: Do not use Calcium chloride brines heavier
DURATONE HT than 11.0 lb/gal. Do not use in calcium bromide or zinc
bromide brines
N-VIS O Viscosifier/Suspension 6-15 (17-43)

BARACTIVE Polar additive 2-3% (2-3%)

BARACARB Weighting/ Bridging As needed

5/25/50/150 agent
Formulation

Products are listed in order of addition

Note: When using DURATONE HT for filtration control, BARACTIVE must
be used as an activator.
COREDRIL-N fluids may be formulated with diesel, mineral oils, esters,
and synthetics.

Provide sufficient mixing time and high shearing action for proper yield
Lime addition provides alkalinity to aid in emulsification

29 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 30 -

SHEARDRIL-N™ Advantages
• Provides high yield point with relatively low funnel viscosity
SHEARDRIL-N fluids are designed as a solids-free modified polymer • Has high, low-end rheological properties
drilling fluid for drilling consolidated horizontal wellbores. SHEARDRIL-N • Provides superior shale stability to a mixed-metal hydroxide
fluids provide maximum penetration rates while minimizing formation • Solids and fluids are prevented from entering production zone
damage. because the bridging agent has correct particle size
Advantages distribution to assure a thin, low permeability filter cake
• Provides stable filtration control • Optimizes hole-cleaning capabilities
• Gives superior return permeability results • Maintains filtration control in the presence of contaminants
• Easy to clean up • Has excellent suspension characteristics
• Has been used in limestone and tight consolidated sand • Requires no special or sophisticated rig equipment for mixing
formations and maintaining the system
• Provides excellent hole cleaning and allows settling of solids at • Has few components and is simple to use
surface
• Minimizes circulating pressure losses
• Tolerates calcium or magnesium
• Drill solids can be effectively removed with flocculants if
needed Typical
Density Range Additive Function concentrations,
8.4 – 15.0 lb/gal lb/bbl (kg/m3)
Temperature Range
Up to 300o F Soda ash Hardness 0.05-0.25 (0.15-0.7)
reducer
Typical
Additive Function concentrations, AQUAGEL Viscosifier 8-15 (23-43)
lb/bbl (kg/m3) GOLD SEAL

N-VIS Viscosifier 0.25-1 (0.7-3) Caustic soda Alkalinity As needed for pH 9.5-
11.5
N-DRIL HI Viscosifier/ 1-3 (3-9)
Filtration control N-DRIL Fluid Control 2-6 (6-17)

N-DRIL LO Viscosifier/Filtratio 1-3 (3-9) N-VIS HI Viscosifier 0.075 lb per lb

n control AQUAGEL (0.075 kg per
kg AQUAGEL )
Caustic soda Alkalinity 0.05-1 (0.15-3)
BARACARB Weighting/Bridgi As needed
BARABUF Alkalinity 1-3 (3-9) 5/25/50/150 ng agent
Formulation guidelines Formulation guidelines
• Treat fresh water with soda ash to reduce hardness below 60
Products are listed in order of addition. mg/L to improve the yield of AQUAGEL GOLD SEAL
• When mixing N-DRIL HI and N-DRIL LO, add slowly and • Prehydrate AQUAGEL GOLD SEAL for at least one hour before
agitate to insure proper hydration of polymers. adding caustic soda
• Use brines to obtain the required density. Refer to the brine Caution: Do not add any chemicals (i.e., fluid loss control
density tables in the chapter titled Completion fluids for additives or thinners) that are not on the formulation list.
density guidelines.
Note: For a seawater system, premix chemicals in freshwater and add
• Caution: Do not use brines containing zinc.
the premix to salt water in the pits.
Maintenance guidelines
Maintenance guidelines
In saltwater fluids use BARABUF to maintain alkalinity.
In other systems maintain alkalinity with caustic soda. • Add prehydrated AQUAGEL GOLD SEAL and/or N-VIS HI,
when necessary, to increase viscosity.
• Dilute with water when necessary to decrease viscosity.
• Avoid using more than 0.1 lb of N-VIS HI per lb (.1 kg/kg) of
AQUAGEL GOLD SEAL.
• Maintain pH between 9.5 and 11.5 with caustic soda.
MAXDRIL-N™ •
The MAXDRIL-N system is a mixed-metal silicate system (MMS) Caution: Any anionic product may cause adverse deflocculating
designed for drilling, milling, and completion operations. MAXDRIL-N or dispersion.
fluids provide borehole stability and superior hole cleaning for milling Note: "Rule of thumb" To effectively bridge off the production zone, 20-
casing and drilling highly deviated/horizontal sections. This fluid is 30% by weight of the bridging material (BARACARB) should be one-
especially effective when drilling in unconsolidated, unstable, stressed or third of the pore size in microns.
faulted formations. MAXDRIL-N fluids form a low permeability filtercake Contamination
that restricts solids and fluid invasions into the formation, thus reducing
damage to the formation. Clean tanks prior to addition of fluid or products. When milling casing
the old drilling fluid left behind casing may cause deflocculating or
thinning.
Keep calcium levels below 60 mg/L with soda ash.

30 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 31 -
Drill-In Fluid Recommendations
Recommended mud properties, which will help ensure minimal damage and proper clean up of filter cake, are listed in the following table.
Drill-In Fluid Mud Property Recommendation
Calcium Carbonated Based System / Salt Based System / Oil
Preferred Drill-in Fluid
Based Mud System

Recommended Drill-In Fluid Properties

Methylene Blue Test (MBT1) for Cation Exchange
<10
Capacity
<12 using a Particle Plugging Apparatus (PPA) with grade 2
Particle Plugging Test (PPT2)
ceramic disks3 at temperature
Particle Plugging Test (PPT) Cake < 1/32 in.

<20 ppb
4 35 – 65 o - fluid velocity in excess of 3 ft/s, with a
Insoluble Solids or Drill Solids —Total
YP/PV ratio greater than 1.
Concentration
Above 65o -- turbulent flow and pipe rotation are
recommended to keep the hole clean.

PV = 12 to 16 cp
OBM Drilling Mud
YP = 14 – 18 lb/100 ft2
Water Based Drilling Mud
After Drilling OH section condition mud to PBM – lower YP to around 12 – 15 lb/100 ft2
Pipe Rotation 10 – 20 rpm
Pipe Reciprocation 10-20 ft strokes, with 1 – 2 strokes/min
1
Methylene Blue Test (MBT) measures the clay content expressed in ppb. Prefer to keep this value to less than 5 ppb.
2
Particle Plugging Test (PPT) using the PPA (Particle Plugging Apparatus) allows for filtration testing at temperature and high pressures.
3
Ceramic Disks—Filtration tests on DRIL-N fluids are conducted using a ceramic disc that simulates as close as possible the pore size of the
formation. These tests can be utilized in the field to determine proper application of the DRIL-N fluids system. Use these instead of filter paper
for filtration testing. These disks are available in several sizes in order to better test fluids on a three dimensional material that is representative
of the formation permeability. This test is usually done at bottom hole temperature and 500 psi for a period of 30 min. Spurt values of 0.5-4 ml
and total volume of 8-20 are acceptable numbers. These change dependent on system design, formation permeability, pressure used, etc.
The rheology of DRIL-N systems is designed to be low, but sufficient to provide the required hole cleaning.
4
Insoluble solids are measured using a retort. From here we utilize special testing to determine how much of these solids are bridging particles
and how much are formation drilled solids. Prefer to keep the drill solids to less than 4-5%.
After drilling open hole section with DRIL-N system change out to clean system with fine bridging particles, clean system with no bridging
particles or to brine.

Particulate Sizing

Bridging off the production zone is a key to preventing formation damage. Bridging materials that are utilized in DRIL-N fluids include sized
calcium carbonate an sized salt. The pore diameter of the formation must be known to effectively bridge. An industry rule of thumb for estimating
an unknown pore diameter (microns) is to take the square root of the permeability in millidarcies. To effectively bridge off the production zone,
20-30% by weight of the bridging material should be one-third of the pore size in microns.
Depending upon the formation pore throat diameter and requirements to produce the filter cake particles back through the gravel pack screen,
the median particle diameter can be altered by varying the grind size and changing out the shaker screen on the drilling circulation system on the
rig.
Estimating / Measuring Pore Throat Size
Pore throat diameter can be determined by a number of mechanisms such as:
• Mercury injection and capillary pressure relationships
• Directly measured by a scanning electron microscope
• Estimated via the Kozeny relationship between permeability and pore throat size or the Blick and Civan relationship between
permeability, porosity and pore throat size
Kozeny Relationship

µ= k
Where:
µ = pore throat diameter (microns)
k = permeability (millidarcies)
Example:
If the formation has a permeability of 300 md then the pore space can be approximated by taking the square root of 300 mD (17.32 ) Therefore
the pore throat is approximately 17.32 microns.
Blick and Civan Relationship

µ = (32 • k / φ )
Where:
µ= pore throat diameter (microns)
k = permeability millidarcies)
∅= Porosity (percent)
Once the pore throat diameter has been estimated then the median diameter (D50) of the bridging material is normally designed to be 1/3 the
pore throat diameter.

31 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 32 -

32 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 33 -
Barabrine Completion Fluids Crystallization Temperature
Brine based fluids are used anytime formation damage from solids or Definition: The temperature at which salt crystals will form and
waters are potential and in most sand control circumstances. The ability precipitate out of a solution. There are four (4) measurement points:
of brine to provide clay inhibition, solids free environment and matrix • FCTA: First Crystal To Appear
compatibility is key…
• TCT: True Crystallization Temperature
Barabrine Fluids are classed as: • LCTD: Last Crystal To Dissolve
• Monovalent • PCT: Pressurized Crystallization Point
o Organic Precipitation of salts can cause a number of problems. Each brine
o Inorganic solution is selected and blended to meet the required temperature range
• Divalent
that is anticipated at the well site. API utilizes true crystal temperature
Fluid Properties (TCT) as a standard.
Properties, which can affect the efficiency of completion and workover
fluids, include: PCT became a concern with the advent of deepwater drilling &
• Density completion. Brines exhibit an elevated crystallization point when
• Viscosity subjected to high pressures and low ambient temperatures found in
• Suspension deepwater risers & well heads. The condition is exacerbated by pressure
• pH applied during BOP and well testing.
• Crystallization Temperature
• Hydrate Point
• Clarity Measurement Hydrate Point

Density Definition Hydrate: The formation of an icy water lattice encapsulating a

Definition: Density is the weight of a substance per unit of volume.
Generally expressed as specific gravity (g/cc) or pounds per gallon
(lbs/gal)
Formation pressures are contained by hydrostatic pressure. Hydrostatic
pressure is a function of the fluid column height and density. The
density must be controlled to provide sufficient hydrostatic head to
prevent or control the influx of formation fluids but not so great as to
cause excessive fluid loss.
Brine densities are reported as per API RP-13J spec at a reference
temperature of 70o F (21.1o C). If possible, brine density should be
calculated from specific gravity as measured with a hydrometer.
Brines used in completion or work over applications have densities
ranging from 8.345 to 19.7 pounds per gallon.
The density of brine is a function of temperature. When measured at
atmospheric pressure, brine densities decrease as temperatures
increase.
Viscosity
Definition: Viscosity is the fluid’s resistance to flow. The viscosity of a
fluid is directly related to the volume and type of dissolved salt (s) in
solution.
The viscosity of brine provides lifting capacity to bring sand or cuttings
to the surface.
Suspension
Definition: The ability of a fluid to suspend particles.
The ability of a completion fluid to suspend particles is directly related to
the difference in density between the fluid and particle.
gas (usually hydrocarbon); referred to as a clathrate. The ratio of
compression is 160:1 relative to surface area.
Deep-water operations experience low ambient temperatures at the
wellhead and in the riser. Brines must be formulated to meet these
temperature requirements and balance composition requirements to
suppress hydrate formation. Baroid provides computer modeling and
laboratory testing to select the best composition for TCT and Hydrate
Suppression.
Note: Temperature, pressure and composition affect both TCT and
Hydrate points.
Clarity Measurement
The degree of contamination (solids) brine contains is measured by
three methods
• TSS Total Suspended Solids
• PPMcnt Part Per Million measured by a centrifuge & graduated
container
• NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit measured by an optical
sensor
The TSS test requires sensitive laboratory equipment and high
temperature ovens to process and is not usually feasible in field local
The centrifuge PPM is used to determine the gross solids content when
concentrations are +/- 500-1000 ppm and higher
The NTU meter is used as the standard method; the meter provides a
relative value of solids contamination for low, < 500 ppm,
concentrations.

pH
Definition: The pH of a fluid is a thermodynamic value equal to the
negative logarithm of the hydrogen ion, H+, activity in aqueous
solutions. pH = -log [H+]

33 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 34 -
Completion Fluid Selection & Application
When determining if a fluid will perform effectively in the planned
completion or work over operation, consider the following factors:
• Density (Temperature & Pressure Compensated) Table 1
• Crystallization point surface
Temperature correction factors
• Crystallization point mud line
• Hydrate point
• Brine/formation water compatibility Brine type
• Brine/Crude emulsion potential
• Brine/Formation mineral compatibility NaCl or KCl 0.0024
• Other Process Chemical Compatibility
Density
Brine fluid density is a function of temperature and pressure. As brine’s CaCl2 0.0027
temperature increases its density decreases. As the pressure on brine
increases its density increases. NaBr or NaBr/NaCl 0.0033
To determine the actual density of a brine column in a well bore a three-
part calculation is necessary. CaBr2 or CaBr2/CaCl2 0.0033
• Temperature Expansion Factor
• Pressure Compression Factor ZnBr2/CaBr2/CaCl2 ( 17.5 lb/gal) 0.0036
• Compensated Column Density @ TVD
Deep-Water wells require that these calculations be done twice.
• Riser Compensated Column Density (Inverse function of ZnBr2/CaBr2/CaCl2 (> 17.5 lb/gal) 0.0048
temperature gradient)
• Sub-sea Compensated Column Density (Mud line to TVD)
4 Calculate average hydrostatic pressure.

(SD - DL) x 0.052 x TVD

Deep Water wells calculations must compensate for the warm to cool = AH
temperature gradient in the riser then combine that value with the
2
Where
conventional calculation of cool to warm temperature gradient in the
SD = Surface density at 70°F
well bore.
DL = Density loss
1 Calculate the average well temperature.
TVD = True vertical depth of well
(BHT + ST) AH = Average hydrostatic pressure
= AT .052 = Constant in hydrostatic pressure, lb/inch2, derived
2
from the following formula:
Where
BHT = Bottom hole temperature
ST = Surface temperature (typically 70 F) 12 inch 7.48 gal 1 ft 3 gal
AT = Average well temperature x 3
x 3
= .05194 2
ft ft 1728 inch inch * ft
2 Calculate the average temperature increase over the API
5 Calculate density gain due to pressure.
standard measurement temperature.
AH x Cfp = DG
AT - ST = ATI
Where
Where
AH = Average hydrostatic pressure
AT = Average well temperature
Cfp = Correction factor for pressure from Table 2
ATI = Average temperature increase
DG = Density gain
ST = Surface temperature (typically 70 F)

3 Calculate density loss due to temperature.

ATI x Cft = DL
Where
ATI = Average temperature increase
Cft = Correction factor for temperature from Table 1
DL = Density loss

34 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 35 -

6 Calculate average wellbore density.

Table 2
SD - DL + DG = AD
Pressure correction factors
13.00 - 0.264 + 0.073 = AD
12.81 = AD (Average wellbore density)
Brine type

NaCl or KCl 0.000019

Where
CaCl2 0.000017 BHT = Bottom hole temperature
ST = Surface temperature
NaBr NaBr/NaCl 0.000021 AT = Average well temperature
ATI = Average temperature increase
CaBr2 or CaBr2/CaCl2 0.000023
Cft = Correction factor (See Table 1)
SD = Surface density at 70 F
ZnBr2/CaBr2/CaCl2 (< 17.5 lb/gal) 0.000024
DL = Density loss
ZnBr2/CaBr2/CaCl2 (> 17.5 lb/gal) 0.000031 AH = Average hydrostatic pressure
Cfp = Correction factor (See Table 2)
DG = Density gain
AD = Average well bore density

Notes:
6 Calculate average well bore density. • The API Standard Temperature of 70o F is used as the agreed
SD - DL + DG = AD upon reporting temperature for brine fluids. Actual density at
Where temperature is converted to the standard for report and trade
AD = Average well bore density purposes.
SD = Surface density at 70 F • In a dynamic circulating situation the fluid surface, bottom
DL = Density loss hole and average column temperature are in flux.
DG = Density gain
• Initially there is a cooling effect on the average column
temperature and a subsequent increase in average column
EXAMPLE
1 Calculate average well temperature.
density.
• Periods of prolonged circulation, in conventional wells, see an
BHT + ST
= AT increase in average column temperature observable as an
2 increase in flow line temperature. The average column density
is subsequently reduced.
230 + 70 • Density calculations for a particular point in time are always
= AT
2 performed using actual density at surface temperature; the
bottom hole static temp is always used a base. We do not
150 = AT (Average well temperature) dynamic BHT values in the vast majority of cases; we can
2 Calculate the average temperature increase over the API
assume that the dynamic BHT is some degree lower than the
standard measurement temperature.
static BHT. Therefore the calculation for column density has a
AT - 70 = ATI built in safety factor of some few psi.
150 - 70 = ATI • The complex set of variables such as, thermal coefficient of
80 = ATI (Average temperature increase) the brine, temperature gradient of the well bore and surface
3 Calculate density loss due to temperature.
temperatures will control the rate at which a brine column will
ATI x Cft = DL reach thermal stability.
80 x 0.0033 = DL • Deepwater wells have a constant mud line temperature as low
0.264 = DL (Density loss) as 32oF.
4 Calculate average hydrostatic pressure. • Density calculation is done as a two column exercise for these
conditions. The riser portion is calculated inversely (warmer to
(SD - DL) x TVD cooler) and the well bore calculation is done conventionally
*0.05194 = AH
(cooler to warmer). The composite average density is used to
0.264 = DL (Density loss) calculate the pressure exerted on the formation.

5 Calculate density gain due to pressure.

AH x Cfp = DG
3,311 x 0.000022 = DG
0.073 = DG (Density gain)

35 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 36 -
Brine Density Adjustment Calcium Chloride / Calcium Bromide Blend Guidelines

The guidelines for increasing brine density are also applicable to
decreasing brine density. Decreasing brine density should be
accomplished with a brine of a lesser density from the same class. The
use of water should be avoided since it is not an economical approach.
The exception is Class I fluids, which can be cut back with water. (Class
I fluids NaBr and KBr may be cut back with both water and lighter
density Class I brines.)
When water is added to brine, it is less saturated and it lowers the
crystallization point by diluting the brine.
Lower density brines of the same class with a lower TCT than the
original fluid will normally yield a new density that maintains TCT or
slightly lower TCT. A salt balance equation can be used to determine the
crystallization point of the two brine mix. Contact a Baroid CFS Technical
Service Representative to evaluate a proposed blend. Any brine mixture
should be pilot tested for TCT to verify equation predictions.
Sack salts can be used to maintain density without detrimental effect on
crystallization points if the original salt balance is maintained.
General Guidelines
• Brine should be handled with the proper care and protective
equipment.
• Safety and environmental hazards are low.
• Calcium bromide is available as a 95% solid concentrate or a
53% solution having a density of 14.2 lb/gal and in summer
months at a density of 15.1 lb/gal.
• An increase in the calcium bromide concentration will increase
the brine density and increase the cost.
• Adding water is not cost effective in brine weights above 11.6
lb/gal.
• At temperatures less than 350o F, corrosion is easily
controlled; however, above this temperature additional
corrosion inhibitors are required
• Corrosion rates are higher as densities and temperatures
increase. At the time of manufacture, an inhibitor is blended
to protect tanks and metals.
• Formation waters containing high contents of bicarbonate,
sulfate or fluoride may cause precipitation of carbonate,
calcium sulfate or calcium fluoride.

• It is more cost effective to purchase a premixed BARABRINE® Zinc Bromide Blends

than to formulate one from sack salts, except for brines
composed of potassium chloride.
• Adding sack salts to a BARABRINE® will increase the
crystallization point, except for light, unsaturated brines.
• Weighting up of CaCl2, CaBr2 and ZnBr2 is economically
achieved by the addition of spike fluids; i.e., a higher density
fluid of compatible composition.
• Note: Fluid solutions that are near the maximum weight
crystallization point ( cP) range for a particular blend, within ±
0.04 of the spike weight for that blend, are an exception
• Decreasing the density of a BARABRINE® with water is less
cost effective than using a lighter density brine, except for
Class I brines.
• Decreasing the density of a BARABRINE® Class II or Class III
with water is almost always not cost effective and may cause
precipitation of salts and insoluble ions ; lower fluid weight by
using a lower density BARABRINE® of compatible
composition.
Note: Some NaBr solutions are exceptions.
Note: Never reduce the density of a BARABRINE® zinc bromide
with water
• Do not mix fluids containing divalent ions with fluids
containing monovalent ions, except in some cases of CaCl/KCl
blends.
• Do not mix fluids containing zinc with non-zinc fluids unless a
blend requires zinc content.
• The temperature of the solution directly affects the density of
a brine solution. The standard base temperature for brine is
70o F.
• Addition of dry CaCl2 or CaBr2 to a solution of water will create
heat of solution increasing the temperature of the solution.
• A temperature correction calculation will be necessary to
• Zinc is toxic and will accumulate in the body of any living
organism. Brine should be handled with proper care and
protective equipment.
• Use zinc bromide to prepare the brines. The liquid is available
as a 19.2 lb/gal solution with 56.7 percent ZnBr2 and 19.7
percent CaBr2 by weight.
• Several blends are available containing different amounts of
CaCl2 and CaBr2 to reduce the cost.
• An increase of the pH of ZnBr2 fluids may cause ion
precipitation.
• Do not add water to ZnBr2 brines.
• During the course of exposure to the atmosphere, solutions,
which contain ZnBr2, being highly hydroscopic, will absorb
water and density reduction will result. It will be necessary to
make periodic additions of spike fluid (19.2 ZnBr2) to maintain
weight.
• Zinc bromide is used to build brines in the 14.7-19.2 lb/gal
range and to reduce the crystallization temperature of brines.
• ZnBr2 is a total accelerator for cement; it is not compatible
with most drilling fluids.
• Corrosion is high at high densities and temperatures. At the
time of manufacture, an inhibitor is blended to protect tanks
and metals.
Cumulative percent by weight
100 Class I Class II Class III
80
Water
60
Percent

Zinc
determine true density after blending especially when Bromide
blending brines using sack divalent salts.
• On site it is preferable to use a lower density brine fluid to 40
Calcium
reduce weight Bromide
1 20
• Cost =
CT Calcium Chloride
• A decrease in crystallization temperature (CT) increases the 0
cost of the fluid. 9 11 13 15 17 19 20
• Use brine formulation tables to determine the required
ingredients for a solution and the proper amount of each This chart illustrates how much CaCl2/CaBr2/ZnBr2 is in a 17 lb/gal brine
ingredient. solution and the cumulative percent by weight.
• When adding sack salt on site, use the same ratio of materials • Class I (calcium chloride brine for this example only)
as in the original blend in order to maintain crystallization • Class II is calcium chloride/calcium bromide brine
point. • Class III is calcium chloride/calcium bromide/zinc bromide
brine

36 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 37 -
Brine Blend Equations Brine Density Adjustment
Density increases in brine are achieved through the addition of heavier
Material balance equation brine or the addition of sacked salts. Weight up procedures depend on

V 1W1 +V 2W 2 + ...=V f W f
the classification of the base brine. Base brine classifications are shown
in the table below.
Although weighting up procedures may vary according to circumstances,
V1 + V2 + ... = VF there are some general guidelines, which may be followed. Adjacent
classes can be mixed to alter the density, but a brine from a higher class
V1 = Volume fluid 1, bbl should not be used to increase density unless necessary.
W1 = Density fluid 1, lb/gal Generally, Class III brines are not used to increase the density of Class I
V2 = Volume fluid 2, bbl brines because Class III brines are more expensive and may be
W2 = Density fluid 2, lb/gal incompatible. Instead of using brine from a higher class, density
increases should be achieved using higher density brine or sacked
Vf = Volume fluid final, bbl materials of the same class.
Wf = Density fluid final, lb/gal For example, to increase the density of a Class I fluid, the following
guidelines may be used:
• It is preferable to use a brine to weigh up brine. In this case,
Class II brine should be used.
Use the following equation to raise or lower the weight of known volume • A second choice is to weigh up using sacked salts.
and weight. • Never use a Class III material unless Zinc is required for TCT
or density

V1 W1 +W2 V 2 =(V1 +V 2 )W f The above guidelines are suggestions rather than hard rules to follow in
weighting up. Naturally, there are exceptions to these guidelines.
Brines are less expensive per unit of density than sacked salts. It is
V1 = Volume fluid, bbl seldom economical to weigh up brine from sacked materials. Formulated
W1 = Weight fluid, lb/gal liquid brines should be blended with lesser density brine to obtain the
W2 = Adjusted density, lb/gal desired density.
V2 = Volume of W2, bbl Example:
Wf = Weight, lb/gal Weigh up 11.0-lb/gal calcium chloride brine to 11.3 lb/gal; an
V1 + V2 = Final volume appropriate amount of 11.6-lb/gal calcium chloride should be blended
with the 11.0-lb/gal fluids. The total resulting volume of the resulting
11.6 lb/gal must be considered.
KCl Percent by Weight Purity Correction Class III brine should never be mixed with a Class I brine to achieve a
higher density in the Class I brine because it is not economical and may
If the KCl used is less than 100 percent pure, adjust the starting be incompatible. The same applies to mixing a Class I brine to Class III
brine to reduce the Class III density.
volume. The weight of a barrel of water is 8.345 x 42. For example, assume that 100 barrels of a 14.8-lb/gal calcium chloride
(Water is 8.345 lb/gal and there are 42 gal per bbl blend are needed. In storage are 300 barrels of 14.7-lb/gal calcium
bromide blends. Initially, you might be inclined to mix dry calcium
bromide with the 14.7-lb/gal brine to achieve the extra .1 lb/gal.
 lb KCl  (100 - % purity of KCl )However, the appropriate choice would be to mix 15.1-lb/gal calcium
Volume of water -   x chloride brine with an appropriate volume of 14.7-lb/gal calcium chloride
 % purity of KCl  8.345 x 42 brine to achieve the 14.8 density. Under no circumstances should Class
= Corrected starting volume III brine be used to weight up a Class I brine.

Chemical Maximum density

lb KCl
= corrected lb KCl Composition
% purity of KCl
Class I Brines containing:
NaCl only 9.8-10.0 lb/gal
KCl only 9.7 lb/gal
NaCl /KCl 10.0 lb/gal
NaBr 12.4 lb/gal
KBr 13.4 lb/gal
Formate
8.7-19.7 lb/gal
Class I Brines are ionic
solutions containing
cations Na, K and the
anion Cl- or Br-

Note: Formate brines are grouped with Class I brines

Note: KCl is used as a treatment in some CaCl2 formulations.

37 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 38 -

Chemical Maximum density

Marsh Funnel Viscosity
Composition
10. 0 lb/gal NaCl 28 sec.
Class II Brines containing: Summer brines 15.1
CaCl2 only lb/gal 11.6 lb/gal CaCl2 28 sec.
CaBr2 only Winter brines 14.6
CaCl/CaBr lb/gal 14.2 lb/gal CaBr2 43 sec.
Class II Brines are
ionic solutions
containing cations
16.0 lb/gal CaCl2 /CaBr2 /ZnBr2 45 sec.
Ca+2,and the anion Br-
or Cl2 18.0 lb/gal CaCl2 /CaBr2 /ZnBr2 39 sec.

Class III Brines containing: Maximum 20.5

ZnBr2/CaBr2 or lb/gal possible
ZnBr2/CaBr2/CaCl2 Practical Maximum Stokes Law
Class III Brines are 19.2 lb/gal
ionic solutions The settling velocity of a particle is directly related to the difference in
containing cations density between the particle and the medium through which it falls and
Zn+2, and Ca+2 and the inversely related to the medium viscosity
anion Br- and Cl2-

Temperature Effects on Viscosity of Various Brines

Viscosity and Suspension
Brine based fluids exhibit an inherent viscosity but have a “0” or near Brine Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
zero yield point. FANN 50 Readings at 280 psi
The viscosity of single salt brine is directly related to the type and
Ambient 1.95 8.95 8.7 11.9 13.7 24.6 20.3 27.2
quantity of salt in solution.
The combinations of various salts used to achieve a given density and 102°F 0.75 5.3 5.8 7.05 8.0 14.0 12.3 16.7
crystal point also affects the native viscosity of a brine fluid. 150°F .04 3.7 4.9 5.05 5.8 9.7 8.9 11.8
As a general rule; single salt solutions become more viscose as the salt
concentration nears saturation point. Multiple salt solutions tend to be 200°F 0.2 2.45 3.8 3.45 3.85 6.15 5.8 7.3
more viscose as one or more salts in solution near their relative 250°F 0.05 1.35 3.15 2.5 2.8 4.2 4.2 5.2
saturation points.
Typically higher TCT fluids exhibit higher viscosity. 300°F 0.05 0.9 2.8 1.85 2.05 3.15 6.05 3.8

350°F 0.05 0.95 2.5 1.6 1.7 2.6 2.4 2.8

400°F 0.05 0.8 2.3 1.3 1.3 2.1 2.0 2.3

Viscosity, Cp, of blends of CaCl2 /CaBr2 /ZnBr2

lb/gal

Summer Winter

38 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 39 -
Control of pH and Temperature Buffering Crystallization Points
Fluid pH plays an important role in metal ion precipitation, acidic gas Surface
control, and corrosion control and polymer temperature range Crystallization point
extension. Brine crystallization point is the temperature at which salt crystals will
Completion brine fluids are usually neutral to slightly basic with the begin to fall out of solution given sufficient time and proper nucleating
exception of fluids containing ZnBr2, which are always acidic. conditions.
Note: Nucleation is the process by which insoluble matter provides a
Standard Brine Fluid pH physical platform upon which crystals can form.
Monovalent brines, particularly NaCl & KCl, have a tendency to absorb
and precipitate iron as the fluid transitions the well bore and from
surface metal lines. Maintenance of an 8-9 ph in these brines brings the
majority of soluble iron out of solution as an oxide where it can be
filtered from the fluid. The elevated pH also inhibits the absorption of
additional iron.
CaCl fluids will also display an iron precipitation problem when seawater
is used as a density cut medium or when the fluid has become acidic.
Sodium and Potassium bromide fluids are often used where high levels
of CO2 and H2S will be encountered. High pH in these fluids protects
against acidic reactions from gases and prevents precipitation of
carbonates and sulfates from these gas reactions.
Elevated pH (to a maximum of 9.5-10) also enables polymers and
starches such as Liqui-Vis, Bromi-Vis, Barazan D Plus, N-Vis and N-Drill
HT to remain stable at higher than normal temperatures. This effect is
primarily a function of reduction of acid hydrolysis.
The precipitation of salts can cause a number of problems. For
A buffered pH is preferable to simple pH elevation. Buffered pH resists
example, when the dissolved salt in the fluid crystallizes and settles in a
the change to more acidic conditions. In other words a reserve of
tank, the fluid density usually drops. Crystallization in brines can also
alkalinity is present in a buffered solution whereas a solution that has
cause lines to plug and pumps to seize. To ensure crystallization does
elevated pH responds directly to acidic materials. Barabuf is the
not occur in brine:
preferred buffered pH material in all brines.
• Determine the required crystallization point of the fluid
If a pH buffer is not available, we try to match the primary metal anion
• Check the actual crystallization point of the fluid
with the hydroxide of that metal.
• Adjust the crystallization point of the fluid, as necessary

The following paragraphs discuss how to determine, check, and adjust

Additive pH agent Type fluid Typical treatment the crystallization point of a fluid.

Caustic NaOH NaCl/NaBr2 0.1-1 lb/bbl Determining the required crystallization point
In choosing the lowest-cost formulation for a given density, consider
the temperatures at which the brine will be transported, stored, and
Caustic potash KOH KCl/KBr2 0.1-1 lb/bbl
used. The crystallization point of a fluid should be a minimum of 10°F
(6°C) less than the lowest projected temperature of exposure. For
Lime CaOH CaCl2/CaBr2 0.1-0.5 lb/bbl deep-water projects, consider the seawater temperature at the ocean
floor.
BARABUF® MgO3 Any fluid 0.1-1.0 lb/bbl
Checking the actual crystallization point
Three temperature values are used to describe a fluid's crystallization
point. These include the:
Brine pH • First crystal to appear (FCTA)
• True crystallization temperature (TCT)
• Last crystal to dissolve (LCTD)
NaCl 7 to 9

NaBr 7 to 12

KCl 7 to 9

KBr 7 to 12

11.6 lb/gal CaCl2 6.5 to 7.5

14.2 lb/gal CaBr2 6.5 to 7.5

15.0 lb/gal CaCl2/CaBr2 6.0 to 7.0

16.0 lb/gal CaCl2/CaBr2/ZnBr2 4.5 to 5.0

17.0 lb/gal CaCl2/CaBr2/ZnBr2 3.5 to 4.0

The TCT is the API-prescribed method for describing crystallization
18.0 lb/gal CaCl2/CaBr2/ZnBr2 2.5 to 3.0 point; all temperature values can be determined at the well site using
the brine-crystallization test kit..
19.0 lb/gal CaCl2/CaBr2/ZnBr2 1.5 to 2.0

39 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 40 -
Eutectic point: Crystallization Points
The eutectic point is the lowest freezing point of a solution. This curve is Mud Line
not necessarily a symmetrical function. Water temperatures in deep water applications can be in the mid 30’s,
dependent on depth. The crystallization point for a particular brine is
General Observations affected by the relationship of brine composition, temperature and fluid
The addition of fresh water to single-salt brine whose density is above column pressure. This is a complex relationship and specific testing is
the eutectic point lowers the density and crystallization point. necessary to establish the TCT point for a fluid under set conditions. In
The addition of fresh water to a two-salt system tends to lower both general, the effects of deep-water temperature and pressure increase
density and crystallization point. To accurately determine the the TCT point of a particular brine formulation. Contact Baroid CFS
crystallization point for a blend of brines, run a pilot test on the brine representatives to formulate and test brines for the proposed
using the brine-crystallization test kit. application.
Eutectic Point Effects
• Any brine formulation whose crystal point and density are on
the right side of the Eutectic Curve will display a lowering of
density and crystal point with the addition of water; down too
the eutectic point.
• Any brine formulation whose crystal point and density are on
the left side of the Eutectic Curve will display a lowering of
density and an increase in crystal point with the addition of
water; down too the eutectic point.
• The affects of water addition relative to crystal point are not
uniform. Each salt or multi-salt blend exhibits a unique
eutectic curve.
• The effects of adding a single salt or multi-salt blend to brine
are not uniform relative to crystal point. The crystal point may
increase, remain the same or decrease.

Dramatic Results of an improperly formulated brine crystal point on

CaCl Eutectic Curve
deep water well.

60
Adjusting the crystallization point
40 Although fluid delivered to a well site is formulated to have the correct
Temperature F

20 density and crystallization point for the well and weather conditions, it
may be necessary, at some point, to adjust the fluid's crystallization
0 point.
9.1
9.3
9.5
9.7
9.9
10.1
10.3
10.5
10.7
10.9
11.1
11.3
11.5

-20 This is done by adding dry salts (e.g., CaBr or CaCl), stock brines, (e.g.,
14.2 lb/gal (1.70 sg) CaBr or 19.2 lb/gal (2.30 sg) Ca/ZnBr), or water.
-40
Adjusting a fluid's density using dry salts or stock brines will also affect
-60 the fluid's crystallization point.
For single-salt solutions, with density on the left side of the eutectic
-80
point, the addition of the same type of dry salt lowers the crystallization
Density PPG point of the solution down to the eutectic point, which is the lowest
freezing point of a solution obtainable by increasing the concentration of
a solute. For example, the addition of dry calcium chloride to water and
CaCl2 Eutectic Curve: the effects of water or CaCl2 salt addition
calcium brines lowers the crystallization point of the brine solution until
are uniform across the density range.
it reaches a density of 10.8 lb/gal (1.29 sg). Further, the addition of dry
calcium chloride to a 10.8 lb/gal (1.29 sg) brine solution raises the
CaCl/CaBr Eutectic Curves Blend 1 crystallization point, even though the density continues to increase.
Blend 2 For two-salt brines with a crystallization point of 30°F (-1°C), the
addition of a dry salt in general raises the crystallization point.
80 The addition of fresh water to a two-salt system tends to lower the
60 density and crystallization point.
Temperature F

To accurately determine the crystallization point for a blend of brines,

40 run a pilot test on the brine using the brine-crystallization test kit.
20
Special brines are used to accommodate seasonal and climatic changes
0 in temperature. Summer blends are fluids appropriate for use in warmer
weather. Summer blends have crystallization points from 50 – 68o F
-20 (4 – 20o C) Winter blends are used in colder weather or colder climates.
-40 Winter blends have crystallization points from 0 – 40o F (-18 to 20o C)
Other formulations can be used to prepare fluids with crystallization
Density PPG
points between the summer and winter blends. The cost of brine with a
lower crystallization point (winter blend) is generally more expensive
Example of two CaCl/CaBr blends than brine with the same density as a summer blend.
Both blends have a eutectic point lower than the use range of 11.7 – The crystallization point of a fluid must be equal to or less than the
15.1 lb/gal. requirements of the operator. The seasonal temperature at the well site
Blend 1 exhibit’s a slow decline in crystal point initially then a more rapid and the price of the fluid usually determines the operator’s requirement.
decrease as water is added. The two problems normally encountered with crystallization point are
Blend 2 exhibits a very narrow range of crystal point change as water is that it is either to high or to low. If crystallization point is lower than
added. required, it is uneconomical for the operator to use.
The charts on the following pages are guidelines for raising or lowering
the crystallization points of solid free fluids.

40 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 41 -
Solution has too low of a crystallization point Solution has too high of a crystallization point

Solution Advantages Disadvantages Solution Advantages Disadvantages

Inexpensive Volume increase may Rapidly decreases the

Lower the
Raise the Quick and easy create storage problems density, and, thereby
crystallization Easy
crystallization May the increase Cannot be used with reduces the value of the
point by adding Readily available
point by adding volume without monovalent salt system fluid
fresh water
CaCl2 liquid losing the value of Changes the density of May cause precipitation
the buyback the system

Easy
Relatively
Raise the Small volume Requires relatively high Does not reduce the
Lower the inexpensive
crystallization increase shear for mixing crystallization point in all
crystallization Does not reduce
point by adding Easy storage of May be more expensive cases
point by adding the density or the
sacked CaCl2 sacked materials than CaCl2 liquid Cannot be used in
CaCl2 liquid value of the brine
monovalent systems
as quickly as
fresh water
Blend with a
buyback fluid May not be available
Quick and easy
with a known May create storage Very expensive
Inexpensive
crystallization problems Slightly more corrosive
point Lower the
Quick, easy to than other materials
crystallization
May require additional handle Limits the use of other
point by adding
May be less storage facilities, blending additives
Displace with CaBr2 liquid
expensive than and transportation must Increases the density of
fluid with a increasing the be coordinated, may be the system
higher crystallization more expensive than
crystallization point of the adjusting the existing
point existing fluid fluid Very expensive
More corrosive than
Quick and easy other materials
Lower the
Reduces the Limits the use of other
crystallization
crystallization additives
point by adding
point without Increases the density of
ZnBr2 liquid
reducing density the system

Lowering the Can reduce the

crystallization crystallization
Availability of materials
point using point without
Requires pilot testing
combinations of reducing density
May increase density
the other May be less
methods expensive

Quick and easy

Blend with a Lack of availability
Should be less
buyback fluid May require additional
expensive than
having a lower storage
using CaBr2 or
crystallization May change the density
ZnBr2
point of the fluid

May require additional

May be less
storage facilities,
expensive than
blending and
Displace with reducing the
transportation must be
another system crystallization
coordinated, may be
point of the
more expensive than
existing fluid
weighting up

41 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 42 -
Hydrate Point
The formation of gas hydrates is a distinct concern for deep-water
operations. The combination of temperature, pressure, brine
composition, free water content, and gas composition provide a very
complex set of variables to model. Baroid has developed computer
modeling that plots hydrate formation points for brines and provides
compositions and treatments to suppress or eliminate hydrate formation
during completion and workover.
Baroid has also developed optical cell test apparatus to physically check
prediction against physical conditions for both hydrate formation and
elevated crystal points in deep water.
Hydrate Phase Equilibrium for 11.6 NaBr Diluted with 8.7 ppg KCl
12000
11.6
10000
8000
Pressure [psi]
Brine Clarity Measurement
HISTORY
Over the years, a number of methods and test parameters have been
presented to make some quantification of clarity in completion fluids. As
the level of acceptable solids loading has decreased, the ability to
accurately measure that solids loading in the field has increased in
difficulty.
Early on in the clean completion fluid story, a solid loading of 1000 to
5000 ppm was viewed as adequate. Filtration methods included nominal
cartridge filters, sock filters and bag filters.
Typically the QAQC method was a hand cranked centrifuge and a
graduated 12.5 ml glass vial. This method would provide ppm readings
down to 2000 ppm and reasonable guesses at 1000 – 500 ppm could be
made. The centrifugal force available to a hand-cranked unit is relatively
low so that true solid/liquid separation is not really achieved.
This equipment is still in use today. It provides a quick approximate
10.5 10.0 9.5 9.0 assessment of solids loading going to the filter system and a check
method for monitoring DE bleed thru. High-speed electric lab bench
centrifuges are employed occasionally and are more accurate in terms of
separation quality and lower limit PPM measurement. Using specialized
vials, these units can measure down to +/- 500 PPM with reasonable

HYDRATE REGION accuracy.

6000 In the early 80’s, the industry moved to diatomaceous earth filter
systems. These systems produced very high degrees of clarity for a
4000 variety of fluids, contaminant types and solids loading conditions.
The first problem encountered was the ability to measure the solids
content of these very clean fluids. Under normal conditions, no visible
2000
trace of solids should be seen when centrifugally testing for solids
loading. At most, a light dusting of solids at the bottom of the vial
0 should be seen. Quantifying the PPM of this light dusting via tube
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 calibration is impossible.
Temperature [F] ML Temp The introduction of absolute β rated cartridge filters down stream of the
DE system further increased the difficulty of field measurement of solids
11.6 NaBr 10.5 NaBr 10.0 NaBr 9.5 NaBr 9.0 NaBr loading.
TSS protocols and laser particle counters were tried but were found to
be inaccurate to impossible to run at the well site.
The water treatment industry had long used a method of turbidity
measurement to quantify drinking water standards. Although solids
TABLE 3.1.1 loading and turbidity are not synonymous, this was viewed as a viable
COMMON THERMODYNAMIC HYDRATE INHIBITORS method for quick real time measurement of fluid quality under field
Salts Alcohol/diols conditions.
NaCl Methanol Early in the learning curve, several companies tried to develop a
KCl Ethanol standard for NTU VS PPM and Mg/L levels that comprised an acceptably
clean fluid and Conoco, Phillips, OSCA, Baroid & Tetra were among
CaCl2 Glycerol
those who presented quantifications or methods of standardizing NTU
Na-Formate Ethylene glycol relative to PPM.
K-Formate Propylene glycol Initially one PPM was stated as equal to one NTU. This was soon proved
NaBr Polyalkylene glycol wrong by laboratory analysis of fluid with one NTU turbidity; these fluids
were found to have wildly different solids loads.
CaBr2 A statistical method was employed to arrive at a standard. Varieties of
ZnBr2 mud systems were prepared in the lab and a number of samples
generated with a linear set of graduated loading scales of mud solids in
brine. These samples were measured via NTU then tested for TSS. The
variance between NTU and percent solids covered a broad range but
was sufficiently consistent to generate a statistical equivalent of 1 NTU
equals 5 PPM.
This standard was tried but under field conditions, the fluid
contaminants varied significantly from the averages found in the lab.
A method of standardizing the NTU – PPM based on sampling of the
mud system at the well site was developed. A standardization curve for
that particular well circumstance is then generated. This methodology
was more accurate than the lab method. Solids loadings of 1-25 ppm to
NTU were observed.
Using this method and performing lab analysis on samples taken, a
variance to standard was identified. However, the standard developed
initially at the beginning of the completion was found to be inaccurate at
later stages.
The conclusion was that the size, type, shape and particular mix of
solids encountered during a completion changed sufficiently during the
course of the completion to preclude the use of an initial standardization
curve.

42 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 43 -
Since accurate field measurement of solids loading is problematic, it
became apparent that the primary assurance of fluid quality at the well Example NTU Reading Plot
site is:
• The size cut and efficiency of the cartridge filters Clarity Plot
downstream of the DE system
• Procedures used to clean and maintain the well bore fluids 20
• Control of particle precipitation due to minerals in solution
and chemical reactions 15
• Average NTU range values for a fluid type Filter

NTU
• Comparison of NTU values between the well, clean pit and 10 Clean Pit
filter discharge
Well Return
5
FIELD APPLICATION
What is most surprising is the level of misunderstanding that exists in 0
the completion industry relative to fluid clarity and best practices. The
1 2 3 4 5 6
most common mistake is taking a particular standard or measurement
out of context and trying to compare data from different wells. Sample Number
The relationships between fluids, contaminants, in-situ reactions and
procedures are complex. Taking some parameter from one well and
The graph above depicts the relation ship between the three
comparing, that parameter to the same in another well will yield apples
measurement points at the well site. In the first three readings the
and oranges results if taken out of relationship context.
relationships are in flux and do not indicate optimum clarity. The last
three readings indicate stable levels with appropriate NTU delta between
Key Points to Brine Clarity Measurement
the sample points and the readings are stable through time.
• Nephelometric measurement of solids content is an
approximation or relative value.
• NTU values do not describe or indicate particle sizes in
the fluid.
• NTU values and PPM/MgL values do not directly correlate
for a specific fluid situation.
• Values may be established statistically in a range
parameter
• Changing the parameters of any component part of a
sample (particle type, size, shape, brine type, blend,
ratio of constituent parts to each other, etc.) will change
the NTU reading derived without necessarily changing
the volumetric solids content
• No two NTU meters will give the same reading of the
same sample
• Particles tend to degrade to smaller sizes during the
course of a completion and the overall impact to NTU
readings are affected by gross particle count as well as
ppm. A fluid can have a substantial increase the number
of particles in suspension and not increase the ppm
value.
• Empirical data provides a range of NTU readings that can
be considered clean for each range of fluid type, blend
and density
• Well returns should be compared to the NTU readings
directly after the filter system and clean pit. Well returns
should be within a few percentage points of the average
of the filter and clean pit readings.
• Well returns are mitigated by chemical reactions which
take place during the circuit of the well bore. If the fluid
has been chemically stabilized to the degree possible,
then the relationship between the filter/pit average and
well returns is unlikely to change, even when return NTU
readings are significantly higher than the base average.
• Typically, the range of NTU delta between filter system
discharge and the clean pit value should be 4-10 NTU.
Values higher than this delta indicate a contaminant
problem in the clean pit.
• The NTU delta range between the clean pit NTU and well
return NTU should be 5-10 NTU. A delta value greater
than this indicates that well return clarity is less than an
optimum level.
• Periodic samples of the three system measurement
points should be taken and submitted to a laboratory
analysis of PSD and TSS to establish actual solids loading
for the fluid.

43 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 44 -
BEST PRACTICES FOR COMPLETION FLUID HANDLING Fluid sampling
Transportation & Storage Standard protocol for shipment of any brine solution is to collect and
A completion or work over fluid should be protected from contamination label two sets of samples for each batch and/or shipping container.
while the fluid is prepared, transported, and used at the rig; any • One set of samples is for Baroid reference.
contamination can have costly results. Some brines are quite corrosive • One set of samples is for customer reference.
to the skin and eyes. All rig personnel who might come in contact with The purpose of samples is to verify the condition of a fluid at the point
these fluids should be trained in both handling fluid and personal safety.of shipment. Should some problem occur that affects the
condition/value of brine during shipment, samples help to limit the area
Transportation of investigation of cause.
To help maintain the quality of brines during transport: Sample containers are generally 0.5-1.5 liters in size.
• Ensure the boat or truck is clean and dry before loading the Labeling consists of:
brine. • Customer name
• Tie the fluid-transfer hose securely and continually monitor • Sample date/time
the hose for leaks or breaks. • Well identification
• Ensure all brine is transferred to the boat or truck, including • Sample point
the brine in trip tanks, sand traps, cement-unit tanks, filter- • Sample fluid type, density and temperature oF
unit tanks, slugging pits, etc. Shipping to the well site:
• Strap the boat or truck tanks and check the density of the • Sample of fluid from each tank or truck loaded.
brine being shipped to help explain any losses in density Return fluid for credit:
and/or gains or losses in volume once the material is received. • Sample of each fluid type and weight as it is being back
• Ensure all hatches and valves on the boat or trucks are loaded to transportation.
securely closed before leaving the rig. • Fluid displaced from the well bore to return transport should
• Instruct the person in charge of transport not to transfer any be sampled at least three times:
fluid on board during transport. o Beginning
Note: Major losses of credit often occur because some rig pits and boat o Middle
tanks do not allow for the transfer of all fluid. When this is the case, o End
consider renting a small, portable pump or modifying the rig pits

Before receiving fluid

• Cover all open pits that will be used to contain the completion
fluid. A solid, raised cover with sufficient overhang is
preferable to tanks.
• Wash and dry all pits or tanks to be used in handling the fluid
• Flush all lines and pumps with sea or fresh water.
• Clean and dry the fluid-return ditch, shale shaker, possum
belly, and beneath the shale shaker.
• Seal return-ditch gates, shale-shaker gates, and dump valves
with silicon caulking compound or some other compatible
material.
• Disconnect or plug all water and diesel lines leading to pits.
• Tie down the fluid-delivery hose to prevent accidents or loss
of expensive fluid.
• Conduct a meeting to establish the methods for emergency
communication with boat or truck personnel to allow for rapid
shutdown should problems develop.

While receiving fluid

• Monitor the delivery hose for breaks or leaks.
• Monitor pits and dump valves for leaks.
• Maintain communications with the boat or truck for estimated
volumes pumped.
• Allow plenty of time to shut down delivery as soon as pits are
full.

After receiving fluid

• Mark the fluid level in pits and monitor for losses.
• Inspect pits and dump valves for leaks.
• Use completion fluid to flush sea or fresh water from all lines,
pumps, solids-control equipment and degassers.

During Completion or Work Over

• Monitor fluid level in pits and dump valves for losses.
• Monitor pits for accidental water additions.
• Restrict the use of pipe dope to a light coating on pin ends
only.
Note: Clean, clear completion fluids do not contain solids that
might plug a productive formation. Pits and lines must also be
cleaned of solids. Drilling fluids will often seal small to moderate
leaks in surface tanks and equipment. The normal cleaning used
for completion, will remove these mud seals resulting in the loss of
expensive fluid. Immediately investigate any unexplained losses of
volume.

44 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 45 -
BRINE QUALITY ASSURANCE CHECK LISTS
Because of the high initial cost of clear, high density brines and the
potential loss of production due to formation damage, Baroid Completion
Fluid Services recommends that the following steps be taken to insure a
successful Completion/Workover operation.
Before receiving the fluid:
Cover all pits to be used in handling the completion fluid. (A
solid, raised cover with sufficient overhang is preferable to
tarps.)
Wash and dry all pits and/or tanks to be used in handling the
fluid.
Flush all lines and pumps with sea or fresh water.
Flush all solids control equipment and degassers with sea or
fresh water.
Clean and dry mud return ditch, shale shaker, possum belly,
and under shale shaker.
Seal return ditch gates, shale shaker gates, and dump
valves.
Disconnect or plug all water and diesel lines leading to pits.
Disconnect or plug any sink or platform drains leading to pits.
Securely tie fluid delivery hose to prevent accidents or loss of
expensive fluid.
Conduct meeting and set up method of communication with
boat or truck to allow for rapid shutdown, should problems
develop.
Recheck above items.
While receiving fluid:
Continually monitor delivery hose for breaks or leaks.
Periodically monitor pits and dump valves for leakage.
Maintain good communications with boat or truck for
estimated volumes pumped.
Allow plenty of time to shut down delivery when pits are full.
After receiving fluid:
Mark fluid levels in pits and monitor for losses.
Visually inspect pits and dump valves for leakage.
Double check all water, diesel, and drain lines for leakage
into pits.
Flush sea or fresh water from all lines, pumps, solids control
equipment, and degassers with completion fluid.
45 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
During Completion/Work Over operations:
Periodically monitor fluid levels in pits and dump valves for
losses.
Monitor pits for accidental water additions from wash down
hoses, drains, or other sources.
Do not use pits to dispose of old oil, dirty water, or other
substances.
If it rains, monitor pit covers for leaks and correct if
necessary.
Monitor pump packings, suction lines, and valves for leaks.
Restrict the use of pipe dope to a light coating on pin ends
only.
Remember - Clean, clear completion fluids are formulated to contain no
solids to plug a productive formation. Unfortunately, the same holds true
for pits and lines. A pin hole that was plugged, in the past, with mud solids
may become unplugged resulting in the loss of expensive fluid. Investigate
any unexplained losses of surface volume immediately.
RETURNING BRINES FOR CREDIT
It has been Baroid Completion Fluid Services practice to buyback all high
density brines. Credit is calculated as a percentage of the selling price for
the density and volume after filtration with a diatomaceous earth and/or
absolute cartridge filtration system less any expenses incurred for filtration,
transportation, disposal, or conditioning of the brine or the residual sludge
after filtration. Brines that are 11.6 ppg or less (typically KCL, NACL, and/or
CACL2) generally have such a low resale value that any credit recovered
could easily be exceeded by expenses incurred for filtration, transportation,
and etc., resulting in added charges to the customer. For this reason,
Baroid Completion Fluid Services, does not normally buyback these lighter
density brines.
The following steps will help to maximize the credit received for returned
brines.
Insure that the boat or truck is clean and dry before loading
with the fluid being returned.
Securely tie fluid transfer hose and continually monitor for
leaks or breaks.
Maintain good communications with the boat or truck as to
volumes pumped and remaining tank capacity.
Insure that any fluid pumped to the boat or truck is being
received in the correct tank.
Insure that all of the brine is transferred to the boat or truck,
including any volumes in trip tanks, sand traps, cement unit
tanks, filter unit tanks, slugging pits, and etc.
Strap boat or truck tanks and check the density of the fluid
being returned to help explain any losses in density and/or
gains or losses in volume once the boat or truck returns to
Baroid.
Insure that all hatches and valves on the boat or truck are
securely closed before leaving the rig.
Instruct boat or truck not to transfer any fluid on board after
leaving rig.
Insure that any sack, can, or drum products are well stacked
on pallets and securely tied or shrink wrapped before
returning for credit.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 46 -
BRINE SAFETY
Special awareness should be emphasized during the completion
operation when handling completion fluids. All personnel should be
informed of health hazards associated with completion fluids (eye and
skin contact, inhalation, and product ingestion).
Response to eye contact is particularly critical.
1) Conduct a safety meeting with all personnel prior to receiving the
fluid. Safety videotape is available through the Wellsite engineer.
2) Eye wash stations with a 15-minute capacity should be installedo
all areas where contact with the fluid is a possibility. Especially,
but not limited to, the following areas:
• Rig floor (2 or more locations)
• Mud pit (as needed for easy access) o Any other brine that we know contains greater than 10% by weight zinc
• Mixing hopper area
• Cement skid unit
• Production deck (Locations under fluid handling areas)
3) Provide and require the use of safety equipment for all personnel in
contact with the brine including;
• Face shield and/or chemical splash goggles (ANSI Z87.I-1989)
• Chemical/Nitrile grade slicker
• Non-modified safety toed neoprene rubber boots
• Chemical/Nitrile grade rubber gloves (21CFR.I70-199)
• Elastic arm sleeves
• Solvent resistant chemical barrier skin cream
4) A 15-minute supply of water should also be available to shower
and wash down any personnel contaminated by completion fluids.
For more detailed safety and first aid measures, see the appropriate
BAROID Material Safety Data Sheet.
Baroid Completion Fluid Services
PPE Safety Packs
Pack Contains;
Pouch - containing all items
Slicker Suit - chemical grade PVC-on nylon slicker suit
with double stitched and sealed seams,
Velcro gathers at all openings.
Goggles - chemical splash goggles (ANSI Z87.1-
1989)
Rubber Gloves - chemical/nitrile grade rubber gloves
21CFR.170-99)
Skin Cream - moisturizing cream containing aloe
Steel Toe Rubber Boots Not contained within pack but available
separately – neoprene steel toe rubber boots with non-skid soles
available upon request
46 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
ZINC BROMIDE
Brines containing, greater than 10% by weight zinc bromide are now
classified as hazardous materials and also as a marine pollutant by the
Department of Transportation. Those brines that would fall into the
greater than 10% category are as follows:
• 20.5 ppg calcium-free zinc bromide
• 19.2 ppg calcium/zinc bromide
in 60o crystallization point (cp) fluids with a density greater than 15.5 ppg.
• 50o cp fluids with a density greater than 15.2 ppg
• 40o cp fluids with a density greater than 15.1 ppg
• 30o cp fluids with a density greater than 15.0 ppg
bromide would also be classified as hazardous.
Being classified as a hazardous material requires that we deal with these
fluids in a very specific manner as defined by law. Baroid is meeting
these requirements and training in HM-126 is required for all our
completion fluid engineers.
ZINC BROMIDE (>10%) SPECIAL HANDLING
I. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - Version for brines
containing greater than 10% zinc bromide must accompany
shipment and also be maintained at rigsite (see attached).
MSDS is also required for returning fluid to Baroid
shorebase.
II. Bill of Lading – Baroid CFS computer system will print
correct hazardous classification on Bill of Lading.
ENVIRNMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES, LIQUID,
N.O.S. (CONTAINS ZINC BROMIDE), 9, UN3082, PGIII, RQ
NMFC #138640
"A Bill of Lading for returning the fluid from the rigsite should
also be prepared. Our rigsite representative should fill out the
date and estimated quantities when fluid is being returned."
III. Training - Baroid employees shipping hazardous material
and Baroid Wellsite Representatives must receive HM-126
training.
IV. Transport - Vessel or truck must be certified to transport
hazardous materials. MPT tanks must be DOT (Coast
Guard) certified.
V. Placarding
Portable Tanks - If contain 1,000 gallons or more, they must
have two placards on each side and also on each end. The
two placards are the (a) marine pollutant, (b) Class 9
hazardous with 3082 in diamond. If spike tanks contain less
than 1,000 gallons, then placarding on the two sides is
acceptable.
Bulk brines in below deck tanks do not require placarding the
vessel.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 47 -
Zinc Bromide Reportable Quantities (RQ)

Bbls RQ Bbls RQ Lbs ZnBr Lbs ZnBr

Density
40 degree 60 degree 40 degree 60 degree
14.5 124.3 n/a 8.0 n/a
14.6 62.5 n/a 16.0 n/a
14.7 41.7 n/a 24.0 n/a
14.8 31.4 127.0 31.9 7.9 Note: Fluid densities < 15.1 ppg
14.9 25.1 61.0 39.9 16.4 may or may not contain zinc
15.0 21.2 40.1 47.3 24.9
15.1 18.2 31.7 54.9 31.5
15.2 15.8 26.9 63.1 37.2
15.3 14.1 23.3 71.1 42.9 Regulations require reporting
15.4 12.6 19.5 79.3 51.4 discharges of zinc bromide
15.5 11.4 16.7 87.6 59.9 greater than 1,000 lbs.
15.6 10.5 14.6 95.5 68.4
15.7 9.7 13.0 103.5 76.9
15.8 9.0 11.7 111.7 85.5
15.9 8.4 10.6 119.4 94.0 Volumes in columns #2 & 3
16.0 7.9 9.8 126.8 102.5 equal 1,000 lbs. by scratch blend
16.1 7.5 9.2 134.2 108.2 mix charts.
16.2 7.1 8.8 141.5 113.9
16.3 6.7 8.2 150.2 122.4
16.4 6.3 7.6 157.6 130.9
16.5 6.1 7.2 165.1 139.4 Lbs. in columns #4 & 5 equal
16.6 5.8 6.7 172.5 149.2 lbs/bbl zinc bromide
16.7 5.6 6.3 179.9 157.7
16.8 5.4 6.0 186.8 166.2
16.9 5.1 5.7 194.3 175.9
17.0 5.0 5.4 201.5 184.4
17.1 4.8 5.2 209.3 192.9
17.2 4.6 5.0 216.3 201.4
17.3 4.5 4.6 222.7 215.4
17.4 4.4 4.5 228.6 223.9
17.5 4.2 4.3 239.8 232.4
17.6 3.6 3.8 274.0 264.3
17.7 3.5 3.6 285.6 275.4
17.8 3.4 3.5 294.6 286.4
17.9 3.3 3.4 303.1 296.4
18.0 3.2 3.3 312.4 305.4
18.1 3.1 3.2 320.9 313.9
18.2 3.0 3.1 329.4 322.9
18.3 3.0 3.0 334.7 330.1
18.4 2.9 3.0 342.2 338.6
18.5 2.9 2.9 350.7 345.8
18.6 2.8 2.8 359.2 352.2
18.7 2.7 2.8 368.1 363.2
18.8 2.7 2.7 376.6 371.7
18.9 2.6 2.6 385.1 380.3
19.0 2.5 2.6 393.6 388.8
19.1 2.5 2.5 401.8 395.7
19.2 2.3 2.3 425.8 425.8

47 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 48 -

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

48 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 49 -
Brine Economics
Introduction
To operate economically with clear brines you need to have an
understanding of the costs involved.
Inefficient use of heavy brines can lead to considerably higher costs. The
graph below illustrates the most commonly used brines and their density
ranges. They are grouped as single and multi-salt brines because the two
differ in characteristics and they will be discussed separately.
Formate brines are not discussed because they have not been in wide use
yet.
Often you have a choice between single salt brines; potassium chloride,
sodium chloride, and calcium chloride. These brines are solutions of a
single salt and their effective density ranges overlap.
The multi-salt brines are sodium bromide, calcium bromide, and zinc
bromide. While sodium bromide densities overlap with the calcium chloride
and calcium bromide brines, sodium bromide is quite a bit more expensive.
It is generally used only when incompatibilities exist between the formation
and calcium-base brine.
Calcium bromide is generally used in the range of 11.7 ppg to 15.1 ppg and
is actually a blend of calcium bromide/calcium chloride. It is not used
below 11.7 ppg because the cost is much greater than calcium chloride.
Similarly, zinc bromide brines are actually a blend of zinc bromide/calcium
bromide/calcium chloride and are used in the range of 14.7 ppg to 19.2
ppg. Zinc bromide is not generally used below 14.7 ppg because the cost
is much greater than calcium bromide and brines with zinc below 14.7
require reconditioning to or above 14.7 with 19.2 ZnBr to be useable in
other operations.
Liquid Blend vs. Sack
Potassium Chloride
Liquid blends are slightly more expensive than ordering sack material and
building volume on location. However, logistics and rig time may override
any cost savings by using sack. A 3% KCl only requires 10.7 lbs/bbl of
sack potassium chloride. The actual density of 3% KCl is slightly lower
than 8.5 ppg. No advantages are gained by the extra .1 ppg and you
should avoid specifying 8.6 ppg for formations requiring 3% KCl.
Note: Halliburton has also demonstrated that with 3% KCL, some KCl may
be spent as fluid flows through the rock matrix leaving <3% - therefore
6% KCL is preferred.
Sodium Chloride - Costs are virtually equal whether you order blended
brine or use sack to build volume on location.
Calcium Chloride - Blended calcium chloride is much cheaper than an
equivalent amount of sack material. It is roughly three times as expensive
to build calcium chloride from sack material than to order a liquid calcium
chloride. The chart below shows the relative cost difference between 11.6
ppg CaCl2 and 11.6 ppg mixed from sack calcium chloride using
representative costs.
1 Barrel of 11.6 ppg CaCl2 - Liquid vs. Mixed From Sack

While 15.1 ppg calcium bromide is referred to as the cutoff point for Product Amount Cost/Unit Total Cost
switching to zinc bromide, 15.1-ppg calcium bromide has a crystal point of
almost 65oF and cannot be used in winter. For winter blends and
intermediate blends, the cutoff point is lower. For instance, 40oF blends in Sack CaCl2 2.4 sacks $13.31 $31.94
the density range from 14.5 ppg to 15.0 ppg actually require zinc bromide,
so the cutoff point for 40oF blends is 14.4 ppg. 11.6 ppg CaCl2 1 bbl. $9.55 $9.55

DISCUSSION OF SINGLE SALT BRINES

These brines are all used in a common range up to their respective

saturated density. For densities below 9.7 ppg, all three brines could be
used. Their costs relative to each other follow:

Potassium Chloride (KCl) - Most expensive

Sodium Chloride (NaCl) - Cheaper than KCl
Calcium Chloride (CaCl2) - Cheaper than both NaCl & KCl

One limitation to both sodium chloride and calcium chloride exists. In

densities below 9.1 ppg, the formation is susceptible to damage due to
swelling clays.

Note: Formations worked over with seawater may incur the same
problem.

For densities below 9.1 ppg either KCl or a combination such as CaCl2 with
3% KCl should be used. Above 9.1 ppg, CaCl2 is the cheaper fluid.

Evidence exists of some incompatibilities between potassium chloride and

some acidizing regimes resulting in potassium fluorosilicate precipitants.
You may want to consult your stimulation vendor to see if this is a
problem. Ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) is an alternative though
approximately twice the cost of 3% KCl.

49 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 50 -
Diluting
Potassium Chloride, Sodium Chloride, and Calcium Chloride Large Density Increase
You can order heavier single salt brine and dilute back to any density on
location with equivalent costs.
Cost To Weight Up 1,000 Bbl of 10.0 ppg CaCl2 to 11.0 ppg
Note: It is preferable to use fresh water over seawater when diluting any
Class I brine (CaCl2 in Class II) because of bacteria and other mineral Cost Per
contaminants present in seawater. Total Finished
Product Amount Cost/Unit Yield
Cost Bbl
Weighting Up
Sack 896 1,064
$13.31 $11,926 $11.21
Potassium Chloride CaCl2 sacks bbl
Sack potassium chloride 11.6 ppg 1,667 2,667
$9.55 $15,920 $5.97
CaCl2 bbl bbl
Sodium Chloride
Sack sodium chloride
In large density increases, 11.6 ppg CaCl2 is the cheaper alternative. Here
sack material is not that attractive an alternative when the cost in rig time
Calcium Chloride
of cutting almost 900 sacks.
The best weight material alternative varies but 11.6 ppg CaCl2 as a spike
Weight up the entire 1,000 bbl of 10.0 ppg CaCl2 with 11.6 ppg CaCl2
fluid is the cheapest alternative, it is limited to densities less than 11.0 ppg
would build too much volume.
and can be logistically difficult.

Sack CaCl2 is more expensive but is often more practical for small density
The best solutions are to weight up part of the 10.0 ppg and build the
increases of 1 to 2 tenths lb/gal. Above 11.0 ppg the only practical method
balance needed from 11.6 ppg CaCl or to simply re-displace with fluid of
of weight up to 11.6 ppg is sack salt.
the appropriate density.
The following chart shows the relative costs of these options:
Small Density Increase

Cost To Weight Up 10.0 ppg CaCl2 to 11.0 ppg - 1,000 bbls

Final Volume
Cost To Weight Up 1,000 Bbls of 10.0 ppg CaCl2 to 10.3 ppg
10.0 New Unit Total Cost/
Option
ppg Fluid Cost Cost Bbl
Cost Per
Total Finished Weight up 375 625 bbl -
Product Amount Cost/Unit Yield $9.55 $5,969 $5.97
Cost Bbl 10.0 ppg bbl 11.6 ppg
1,000 -
Re-displace 0 $7.79 $7,790 $7.79
Sack 250.5 1,017 11.0 ppg
$13.31 $3,334 $3.28
CaCl2 sacks bbl
Upper CaCl2 Density Range

11.6 ppg 1,231 This chart shows that in the upper density range sack CaCl2 is obviously
231 bbl $9.55 $2,206 $1.79
CaCl2 bbl the better option.
Cost To Weight Up 1,000 Bbl of 11.2 ppg CaCl2
The example table above shows that 11.6 ppg CaCl2 is the cheaper
Weight
alternative but the sack CaCl2 is not prohibitively expensive. If the intent
Density Material 11.2 Final Unit Total
is to have some weight material on hand for emergencies then sack
Increase Sacks - Used Volume Cost Cost
material is probably the best alternative unless a reserve tank is available
CaCl2
for 11.6 ppg CaCl2 storage. MPT tanks for storage would probably offset
Bbl -
any gain in using 11.6 ppg CaCl2. Logistics would be the prevailing
11.6
decision.
ppg
99 sacks 1,000 1,008 $13.31 $1,318
To 11.3 bbl
ppg 252 bbl 756 1,008 $9.55 $3,283
bbl
194 1,000 1,015 $13.31 $2,582
To 11.4 sacks bbl
ppg 507 bbl 507 1,015 $9.55 $6,606
bbl
296 1,000 1,024 $13.31 $3,940
To 11.5 sacks bbl
ppg 768 bbl 256 1,024 $9.55 $10,007
bbl

50 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 51 -
DISCUSSION OF CaBr2 AND ZnBr2 BRINES
The rig orders 961 bbl of 13.4 ppg 40oF TCT CaBr2 and dilutes to 13.2 ppg
To understand the basic formulations we are using it is necessary to on location.
understand the economics of the heavy brines.
Material Volume Cost/Bbl Total Cost
In mixing at the plant, we use three basic fluids from our suppliers; 19.2
ppg zinc bromide, 14.2 ppg calcium bromide, and 11.6 ppg calcium 13.4 ppg CaBr 2 961 $96.12 $92,371
chloride. The 19.2 ppg zinc bromide and 14.2 ppg calcium bromide brines Fresh Water 40 n/c n/c
are so expensive that it becomes much more economical to use 11.6 ppg Cost of 1,000 bbl of 13.2 ppg by diluting 13.4 ppg CaBr2 $92,371
calcium chloride and sack calcium chloride in blending a brine rather than Cost of 1,000 bbl of 13.2 ppg 40oF TCT CaBr2 blended $87,800
just the pure fluids. In other words, the more calcium chloride used the
cheaper the brine because of the savings in calcium bromide and zinc The cost of water is $114.28 per barrel.
bromide.
Ordering heavier density brine than necessary is sound procedure
For example we will look at blending a 13.7 ppg calcium bromide two logistically if appropriate density modification is available. Higher density
different ways, using some representative costs to figure a per bbl cost. should be ordered when:
• Insurance against density loss in transit is desired
14.2 ppg CaBr2 Pure and water to mix 1 bbl of 13.7 ppg • Formation pressure prediction is uncertain and starting with the
highest anticipate density fluid gives the greatest flexibility to
control pressures
Product Amount Unit Unit Cost Total Cost
14.2 ppg CaBr2 .9148 bbl $158.27 $144.79 The examples given so far have demonstrated that the use of water to
Fresh Water .0852 bbl $0.00 $0.00 cut back high-density brine is not cost effective.
Total cost for 1 bbl 13.7 ppg $144.79 For example, a lower zone is completed with 14.0 ppg CaBr2 and an upper
zone will require 13.2 ppg. Economic dilution of the 14.0 ppg with 11.6
14.2 ppg CaBr2 Pure and 11.6 ppg CaCl2 to mix 1 bbl of 13.7 ppg ppg CaCl2 can be achieved if logistics allow.

Total
Product Amount Unit Unit Cost Total Cost Material Volume Cost/Bbl
Cost
14.2 ppg CaBr2 .8077 bbl $158.27 $127.83
11.6 ppg CaCl2 .1923 bbl $9.55 $1.84 14.0 ppg CaBr2 .6667 $125.25 $83.50
Total cost for 1 bbl 13.7 ppg $129.67 11.6 ppg CaCl2 .3333 $9.55 $3.18

13.2 ppg cost by diluting 14.0 ppg CaBr2 with 11.6

Note: In these examples the water used to dilute the first example fluid $86.69
ppg CaCl2
actually has a cost of $15.12 per barrel.
13.2 ppg 40oF TCT CaBr2 blended cost $87.80
When 14.2 ppg CaBr2 is diluted by 11.6 ppg CaCl2, it takes less 14.2 ppg to
mix 13.7 ppg and results in a cheaper blend. Purchasing 11.6 ppg CaCl2 to dilute as opposed to using free water is
In calcium bromide and zinc bromide brines, the brine is always in the counterintuitive. A cost analysis reveals that water actually costs more
range approaching saturation. This is because of the economics shown in than 11.6 CaCl when used to dilute a heavy brine.
the example of the 13.7-ppg blends. We can mix the bromide brines
much cheaper by using as much calcium chloride as possible and the net • Example: 1,000 bbl of 14.0 ppg CaBr2 is diluted back to 13.2
effect is a fluid that is approaching saturation. The amount of sack ppg. It would take 164 bbl of fresh water for a final volume of
calcium chloride added is our primary means of controlling the 1,164 bbl. Diluting with 11.6 ppg CaCl2 would use 776 bbl of
crystallization point. However, a fluid received in the field is already 14.0 ppg and 388 bbl of 11.6 ppg CaCl2 to make the same
saturated with calcium chloride and further additions of sacks salts may; volume of 13.2 ppg, or 1,164 bbl. This would involve
purchasing 388 bbl of 11.6 ppg CaCl2 and leave an excess of
• Oversaturated if a summer blend. 224 bbl of 14.0 ppg CaBr2 to send in for credit.
• Raise the crystal point too high for prevailing weather if a winter
blend. The following chart shows the comparative cost/credit of these options.
Note: When using a l sack salt (calcium chloride or calcium bromide) in
multi-salt brines, monitor the crystal point carefully. Cost Comparison - Diluting with Water vs. 11.6 ppg CaCl2
Starting Volume - 1,000 bbls of 14.0 ppg CaBr2
Ending Volume - 1,164 bbls of 13.2 ppg CaBr2
DILUTING CaBr2 AND ZnBr2 BRINES
Density, Volume, Unit
Source Total Cost
Cost considerations also apply when ordering a heavier density to be ppg bbls Cost
diluted on location.
Fluid on rig 14.0 1,000 n/c n/c
Consider the following example (using representative costs):
Water to
8.33 164 n/c n/c
If a rig is using 13.2 ppg 40oF TCT CaBr2 and is considering ordering 859 dilute
bbl 14.0 ppg 40oF TCT CaBr2 and diluting to 1,000 bbls 13.2 ppg on Cost to dilute with water n/c
location. Fluid on rig 14.0 776 n/c n/c
Total Purchased 11.6 388 $9.55 $3,705
Material Volume Cost/Bbl
Cost Excess 14.0
14.0 ppg CaBr2 859 $125.25 $107,590 ppg sent in 14.0 224 ($100.02) ($22,445)
for credit
Fresh Water 141 n/c n/c
Net credit to dilute with 11.6 ppg CaCl2 ($18,739)
Cost of 1,000 bbl of 13.2 ppg by diluting 14.0 ppg
$107,590
CaBr2 The cost of water in this example is $114.26 per barrel.
Cost of 1,000 bbl of 13.2 ppg 40oF TCT. CaBr2
$87,800
blended
The cost of water is $140.35 per barrel.

51 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 52 -
Diluting the Entire Volume
DILUTING CaBr2 AND ZnBr2 BRINES BELOW DENSITY RANGE
Cost Comparison - Diluting with Water vs. 11.6 ppg CaCl2 Calcium Bromide
Starting Volume - 1,000 bbls of 14.0 ppg CaBr2 It is usually cheaper to re-displace than to dilute a fluid below it's density
Volume range.
Dilution Dilution Final Cost of
of 14.0
Method Volume Volume Dilution
ppg • Example: diluting a 12.7 ppg CaBr2 back to 11.4 ppg (11.7 ppg is
Dilute with the bottom of the CaBr2 density range).
1,000 164 1,164 n/c
water @ n/c
Dilute with Cost Comparison - Diluting with 12.7 ppg CaBr2 to 11.4 CaBr2
11.6 ppg vs. Re-displacing
1,000 500 1,500 $4,775 Starting Volume - 1,000 bbl of 12.7 ppg CaBr2
CaCl2 @
$9.55/bbl Ending Volume - 1,423 bbl of 11.4 ppg CaBr2
11.6 ppg CaCl2 builds 336 bbl more volume at a total
$4,775 Source Density, Volume, Unit Total Cost
cost of
ppg bbl Cost
Cost to purchase 336 bbl more volume @ $87.80/bbl $29,501
Total Savings By Using 11.6 ppg CaCl2 To Dilute $24,726 Fluid on 12.7 1,000 n/c n/c
rig
The cost of water in this example is $150.77 per barrel and generates 336
Water to 8.33 423 n/c n/c
barrels less volume.
dilute
• Example: 1,000 bbl of 16.5 ppg ZnBr2 to 15.8 ppg. The Cost to dilute with water n/c
following table will examine using water, 11.6 ppg CaCl2, and
15.1 ppg CaBr2. Cost of 1,423 bbl of 11.4 ppg CaCl2 $8.96 $12,750
• Note: 11.6 ppg CaCl2 looks like the better option, but caution is Credit for 1,000 bbl of 12.7 ppg CaBr2 ($41.72) ($41,720)
needed, this may not always be the case. ZnBr2 fluids are
diluted with lighter density brine as well as 11.6 lb/gal CaCl2. Net credit from re-displacing ($28,970)
The best selection should be based on available fluids and
Note: Cost of dilution below normal density range is $28.97 per barrel.
careful economic study.
WEIGHTING UP CaBr2 AND ZnBr2 BRINES
Cost Comparison - Diluting with Water vs. 11.6 ppg CaCl2 vs. There are three options for weighting up CaBr2 and ZnBr2 brines:
15.0 ppg CaBr2 • Sack calcium chloride
Starting Volume - 1,000 bbl of 16.5 ppg ZnBr2 • Sack calcium bromide
Ending Volume - 1,094 bbl of 15.8 ppg ZnBr2 • Spike fluid
The best option varies depending on the fluid type and density. Sack
Density, Volume, Unit calcium chloride is the cheapest alternative but very limited. Spike fluid is
Source Total Cost
ppg bbl Cost the best alternative for most situations, and sack calcium bromide is the
most expensive alternative.
Fluid on rig 16.5 1,000 n/c n/c
Water to These options are discussed below as well as the three fluid groups they
8.33 94 n/c n/c
dilute apply to, 11.7 - 14.0 ppg CaBr2, 14.0 - 15.0 ppg CaBr2, and all ZnBr2
Cost to dilute with water n/c brines.
Fluid on rig 16.5 938 n/c n/c
Calcium Chloride
Purchased 11.6 156 $9.55 $1,490
In the discussion of basic fluid formulations, it was shown that the heavy
Excess 16.5 brines, are virtually saturated with calcium chloride. Addition of much
ppg sent in for 16.5 62 ($207.28) ($12,851) more sack calcium chloride can cause:
credit • Over saturating a summer blend
Net credit to dilute with 11.6 ppg CaCl2 ($11,361) • Raise the crystal point of a winter blend too high for prevailing
Fluid on rig 16.5 547 n/c n/c weather conditions.
Referring to the crystallization chart for calcium chloride, as the salt
Purchased 15.1 547 $165.38 $90,463 solution approaches saturation the crystallization point rises. If you start
Excess 16.5 with a 40oF blend and further saturate it with calcium chloride you will be
ppg sent in for 16.5 453 ($207.28) ($93,898) raising the crystal point and risking problems with fluid crystallization on
credit the surface. While this option is the cheapest, care must be taken and
Net credit to dilute with 15.1 ppg CaBr2 ($3,435) the crystal point must be monitored. At best, very limited use
calcium chloride salt is possible.
Note: The cost of water in this example is $120.86 per barrel. The cost of
CaBr2 to dilute (over and above base brine cost) is $14.49 per barrel.
Spike fluid
• 15.1 ppg CaBr2 in calcium bromide summer blends
• An intermediate blend (14.4 ppg - 14.6 ppg) for calcium
bromide winter blends
• 19.2 ppg ZnBr2 for zinc bromides

Generally, these are the best alternative for most CaBr2 and ZnBr2 brines.

Calcium Bromide
Most expensive alternative and should be avoided unless necessary.
Use when:
• The density range of the Brine is to near maximum density to
allow economic use of spike
52 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 53 -
Guideline Review
CALCIUM CHLORIDE
• Avoid mixing volume from sack material.
• Avoid large density increases using sack material. Use liquid or it
may actually be cheaper to re-displace.
• Using sack material for small weight increases is okay.
• Use sack material in the upper density range for weight material.

CALCIUM BROMIDE
• Avoid mixing volume from sack material.
• Avoid ordering excessive extra density. Limit this to a couple of
points.
• Avoid diluting below the calcium bromide density range (11.7
ppg). It may be cheaper to re-displace.
• Avoid large dilutions with water unless logistically necessary. It
would be cheaper to use 11.6 ppg CaCl2.
• Avoid heavy usage of calcium chloride sack material alone. To do
so will risk over-saturation or raising crystal point too high for
prevailing weather.
• Avoid using sack calcium bromide. This is the most expensive
alternative for weight material.
• Using spike fluid for weight material is the best alternative.
• Use sack material for weight material only in the upper density
range (14.0 ppg - 15.0 ppg) unless logistically necessary.

ZINC BROMIDE
• Avoid heavy usage of sack salts for weight material. To do so will
risk over-saturation or raising crystal point too high for
prevailing weather.
• Avoid ordering excessive extra density. Limit this to a couple of
points.
• Avoid large dilutions with water. Some other weighted fluid will
be better as determined on a case-by-case basis.
• Avoid diluting very far below the lower density range (15.1). To
dilute in the upper calcium bromide may be okay but the
resulting fluid may be less valuable containing zinc bromide.
Again this should be evaluated on a case by case basis.
• Use 19.2-ppg-spike fluid for weight material.

53 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 54 -
DISPLACEMENT A large body of research and publication has been devoted to hole
cleaning in drilling and displacement scenarios.
Pivital to Baroid’s technology have been the following:

• A paper by S. Okrajhi and J.J. Azar of the University of Tulsa

(SPE Drilling Engineering, August 1986) described cuttings
transport with varying rheology hole inclination, flow rates,
and pipe eccentricity.
• IADC/SPE Hole Cleaning Modeling: What’s “n” have To Do
with It?
• UT Cuttings Transport and Flow Loop Study 1997
• SPE Field Applications of ERD Hole Cleaning Modeling
• Kerr-McGee Competitive Displacement Chemical Study in WBM
1996
• Baroid CFS Competitive Displacement Chemicals for WBM-
OBM-SBM; Product Efficiency Index 1996
• Chevron Studies of SBM Wall Cake and Film Removal 1997/98
• BP & Stim-Lab PFLE Displacement Chemicals and Sequence
1998
• Baroid CFS SBM Displacement Testing for Chemical Type,
Sequence & Quantity 1998
• Mobil GOM / Mobile Bay Empirical Study of Hole Cleaning
Sweeps for WBM & OBM Fluids 1997/98
• DFG+ and CFG software for Rheological, Hydraulic & Spacer
Modeling of Drilling and Completion Fluids
• CFS Displacement Performance Database
• Global Equipment Empirical Analysis of the Effects of
Mechanical Device Cleaners 1997/2000

The Purpose of Displacement

Displacement in completion and work over is the process of removing an
existing well bore fluid and replacing it with a fluid suitable for the next
phase of well operations.

A number of factors control the design and execution of a displacement

procedure.
• Safety
• Fluid Rheology
• Particle and Debris Transport
• Fluid Flow Dynamics
• Pump Rate & Pressure
• Well Bore & Pipe Geometry
• Well Bore Inclination & Azimuth
• Temperature
• Formation Pressure Stim-Lab PFLE Displacement Study
• Burst & Collapse Factors; Casing, Pipe & Well Head
• Deep Water vs. Conventional Well Parameters
• Dissimilar Fluid Interaction and Reaction
• Surface System Logistics and Preparation
• Displacement Spacer Design & Preparation
• Fluid Economics
• Environmental Compliance
• Waste Control & Disposal

This complex matrix of driver factors can present a daunting technical

selection process.
Baroid has enjoyed a very high success rate in completion and work
over displacements. The basis for this success is the careful study of
fluids, chemicals, well bore mechanics and particle transport.

54 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 55 -
HOW FLUIDS AND PARTICLES MOVE IN THE WELL BORE
Influence of variables on hole cleaning
The 1986 study produced this model of hole cleaning. Particles & Debris
The focus in completion and work over are:
• Relatively large diameter solids such as elastomers, cement
and metal cuttings
• Barite beds or sag
• Drill solids that have bedded or adhered to the casing

Hole Angle
Particle & debris removal generally becomes more difficult as the
angle increases.
Angles between 50-60° present most problems because the cuttings
have a tendency to slide down the annulus and cause pack off.
In wells deviated beyond 60° particles & debris form stable beds.
These beds are supported by sliding friction against the well bore.
The angle range for cuttings bed slide depends largely on fluid
rheology and problems cleaning the hole may be experienced from
30-60°.

Rheology
Fluid viscosity affects particle slip velocity, which greatly influences
transport efficiency in vertical and near vertical wells. However,
changes in conventional fluid rheology have little benefit once cuttings
beds form (>300.) Low viscosity fluids are most effective at angles
above 300 since they induce turbulence and encourage cuttings
removal by saltation.
Figure 5-14 Hole cleaning mechanisms
Plastic viscosity should be minimized to reduce pressure losses and
Figure 5-14 illustrates the transport mechanism for a range of well
obtain a “flatter” viscosity profile.
inclinations. Particles & debris are effectively suspended by the fluid
High plastic viscosity creates higher annular velocity in the outer
shear and beds do not form (Zones 1 and 3) for holes inclined less
portion of the hole for the same pump rate in large diameter well
than 30°, at 30o to 60o the particles & debris form beds on the low
bores
side of the hole which can slide back down the well. These particles &
(> 12.25”).
debris can be transported out of the well by a combination of two
High viscosity is most effective for particle & debris transport at low
different mechanisms. Particle & debris beds, which form on the low
velocity and or large well ID.
side of the hole can:
• Slide as a block (Zone 4)
• Be transported at the bed/fluid interface as ripples or dunes (Zone 2)

This latter transport mechanism, referred to as saltation, is best induced

by low viscosity fluids pumped in turbulence (high flow rate.) The ideal
zones for good hole cleaning are 1 and 2. Zone 5 essentially guarantees
tight hole problems.

A paper by S. Okrajhi and J.J. Azar of the University of Tulsa

(SPE Drilling Engineering, August 1986) described cuttings transport
with varying rheology hole inclination, flow rates, and pipe
eccentricity. Three clear hole angle ranges were identified:
• 0-45° Effects of laminar flow dominated and
increased rheology (especially yield point) aided cuttings
transport.
• 45-55° Effects of laminar and turbulent flow have
similar characteristics. Cuttings bed slide occurred in this
Combined Effects of Yield Point/Plastic Viscosity Ratio and Annular
range.
Fluid Velocity
• 55-90° Effects of an increased yield point/plastic
viscosity lacked real effect. Turbulent flow cleaned the hole
best.
At low angles under laminar flow, a raised yield point improves
particle & debris transport (decreases annular particle concentration.)
Increased fluid rheology only had an effect at low fluid velocities. It
However, the effect of increasing yield point/plastic viscosity ratio
had no effect in turbulent flow at any hole angle.
decreases as the flow rate increases.
Earlier studies indicated that the effect of pipe eccentricity on cuttings
transport is small for angles up to 550. However, in laminar flow
Pump rate
above 300, the effect of pipe eccentricity becomes significant.
The single most crucial factor for successful hole cleaning is fluid flow
rate, especially for deviated holes. As a rough guide, the annular
velocity needed for cleaning wells deviated 50°-60° is approximately
twice that required for the vertical case. All reasonable steps to reduce
frictional pressure losses must be taken. Doing so will extend the
range of available flow rate. In critical cases, careful consideration
should be given to bottom hole assembly (BHA) design, nozzle
selection, and additional losses due to fluid motors and/or
measurement while drilling (MWD) tools.
Use riser booster pumps while displacing marine risers.

55 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 56 -
Hole angles above 30°
Turbulent/transitional flow is most effective in cleaning and
evacuating/minimizing cuttings bed formation.
From these studies, Baroid developed rheology, hydraulic, transport and
spacer software models (DFG+ & CFG) that predict and visualize flow
regime, flow dynamic, pressure and particle / debris transport.
The model clearly visualizes the regions of flow in a well bore and
attenuation of leading/trailing edges in fluid flow.

Common Fluid Models

Fluid & Spacer Density
Lower fluid rheology (at the corresponding annular shear rates) will Fluid weight influences hole cleaning by affecting the buoyancy of the
be required to obtain the Reynolds numbers above 2,100. In this case, drilled cuttings. This applies for both vertical and deviated holes. For
the cuttings/cuttings beds will be moved as ripples or dunes. small changes in density, the flow rate required to maintain adequate
Turbulent flow cannot be achieved in most of the 445 mm (17½ inch) hole cleaning is directly proportional to the cuttings / fluid density
holes and some of the 311 mm (12¼ inch) holes. This is due to a differential.
variety of reasons including limitation of surface/down hole Sweeps & spacers that are higher in density than the existing fluid are
equipment, washouts, etc. A compromise for hole cleaning may be more efficient at particle removal and less likely to channel. Higher
made using laminar flow. Effective steps include: density is a net force multiplier for particle and fluid movement.
• Use the highest possible pump output/annular velocities. Slip velocity
• Optimize the low shear rheology using low shear rate The actual lifting capacity of a fluid is related directly to the rate at
rheology modifiers in oil fluids and XC Polymer type materialwhich a particle (cutting) tends to fall, or slip, through the liquid. In
with WBM to suppress the formation of cuttings beds. respect to good hole cleaning ability, the average upward annular
• High initial gel strength gives rapid suspension of cuttings velocity of the mud must be greater than the tendency of the cutting
when the pumps are off during surveys or trips. This should to fall due to gravity. This tendency of a cutting to fall is termed slip
be combined with flatter gel strength development with velocity. Slip velocity is influenced by fluid weight, cutting’s density,
time. cutting’s diameter, annular velocity, hole size, type of flow and
• Use mechanical means (e.g., wiper trips, pipe rotation, friction.
reciprocation, etc.) and pills pumped in turbulence to assistOne section of the annulus is particularly important in respect to slip
hole cleaning. velocity. This is the largest annular section, between the drill pipe and
surface or an intermediate casing or, for offshore, the riser. This
Pipe Eccentricity annular section, because of its large size, possesses the lowest
Three studies extended the understanding of flow dynamics and particle annular velocity. Should a situation arise where slip velocity is great
& debris transport in the well bore. (say a pump is down or pump speed is reduced), annulus overloading,
• IADC/SPE Hole Cleaning Modeling: What’s “n” have To Do solids buildup, fluid channeling, fill on bottom may result. Remedies
With It? for such situations include adjustment of fluid properties, increased
• U of T Cuttings Transport and Flow Loop Study 1997 pump output riser flushing, etc.
• SPE Field Applications of ERD Hole Cleaning Modeling The velocity of a solid particle, drill cutting relative to drilling fluid.
These studies demonstrated the importance of:
• Low-end rheology in flow dynamic and cutting transport µ   (368100) (MW ) (DP ) (Wp - MW ) 
3

• Hershel-Bulkley rheological model was supported as best in
Vs = 0.45   + 1 - 1
 MW x DP   µ 2

class for prediction of dynamic
Where
• The effects of eccentric pipe on flow dynamic
MW = Mud density, lb/gal
• The effects of particle bedding and removal relative to the Wp = Particle density, lb/gal
flow dynamic, i.e. critical velocity Dp = Particle diameter, in.
• Critical velocity does not necessarily start at the onset of µ = Plastic viscosity for bentonitic type fluids
turbulent flow Vs = Velocity of a solid particle feet/min
• Dune & ripple transport is eliminated at the critical velocity (YP )( D p )
• Shear thinning fluids tend to move into and reside in the low
side of an eccentric hole V mud
• Pipe eccentricity thresholds can be as low as 10o hole angles µ = Plastic viscosity + 300 for polymer fluids
Vmud = Velocity mud, feet/min

In the choice of either minimum or optimum annular velocities,

consideration must be made not only to these generalized annular
velocities which have proven suitable, but also to type and rheological
properties of the drilling fluid, geology and possibly hole problems,
etc.

56 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 57 -
Cuttings type Horizontal 216 mm (8½ inch) section
Particle & debris shape and size is also important in vertical transport. Flow Rate for Cleaning 216 mm (8½ inch) Horizontal Hole
The larger, more rounded particles are the hardest to remove. Shape
and size have little influence in highly deviated wells because the
cuttings move in blocks rather than discrete particles.

Drill pipe rotation

Rotating the drill string will assist in mechanically disturbing cuttings
beds in deviated well paths or eccentric pipe to borehole relationships
exist.
• The rotating pipe forces particles & debris upward to the
high side of the hole, and into the fast moving fluid stream.
• Drill pipe rotation also encourages fluid flow in the narrow
gap between the pipe and the settled bed or low side of the
borehole.
• When a down hole motor in oriented mode is used in a
deviated well, the cuttings beds are probably not being
disturbed. Consider rotating the string and circulating the
well clean, prior to tripping.
• Field studies show that pipe rotation while drilling or
displacing enhances hole-cleaning efficiency.

Short trips
Short trips are used to remove cuttings beds or residual adhered This figure shows hole cleaning model predictions for the minimum
solids by mechanical agitation. flow rate required to clean the hole.
Disturbed beds and adhered solids are more readily moved out of the Hole cleaning becomes easier as the fluid weight increases.
hole by a saltation process.
Flow regimes
Cuttings bed suppression Hole cleaning in horizontal holes will be enhanced by turbulent flow,
Cuttings bed formation in deviated holes can be suppressed by using which promotes efficient cuttings removal. Flow in the annulus is
generally laminar for hole diameters 311 mm (12¼ inch) and above in
fluids with exceptionally good suspension characteristics. However, high
drilling and > 8.5” in completion / work over cased hole.
flow rates are still necessary since the beds can never be completely
eliminated and this can result in high ECD. For water-based fluid, the Pb Gpm
best conventional additive for this purpose is Barazan D Plus or Biozan
(Xanthan or Wellan gum) polymer.
1714
A simple force balance approach can be used to determine the
minimum fluid rheology necessary to maintain drilled cuttings in
For 216 mm (8½ inch) sections and below, flow can become turbulent
suspension:
depending upon fluid rheology and flow rate.
The fluid yield point has a strong influence over the critical flow rate.
(2 x Æ3) - Æ6 = 110 x (Cuttings SG-Fluid SG) x Dp
The data in Figure 5-19 are for a 1.6 SG (13.3 lb/gal) fluid. Lower fluid
weights will require higher flow rates to reach turbulence. The figure
Where
also shows that turbulence will be difficult to achieve at yield points
Æ6 = Fann 6 rpm reading
above 10 lb/100 ft2, for the normal range of circulating range.
Æ3 = Fann 3 rpm reading
However, the fluid rheology (and gels) must remain sufficient to
Dp = Cuttings diameter (inches)
provide adequate suspension of barites. This is particularly important
for lengthy periods when the fluid remains stationary in the hole (e.g.,
For example: A 1.4 SG (11.7 lb/gal) fluid, with Fann 6/3 readings of
logging or running casing.)
21/20 lb/100 ft2, will support a 6mm (¼) cuttings with an SG of 2.1.
Although turbulence is an advantage for cleaning lateral sections, it
Monitoring Hole Cleaning
is not an essential (or even achievable) condition. The most
important factor is to control rate of penetration within the range
Cuttings transport efficiency must be maximized by optimizing the
given by the hole cleaning curves.
fluid system carrying capacity, annular fluid velocities, drill cuttings
size, maximum allowable rate of penetration (ROP,) etc. A reliable
hole cleaning monitoring system should also be followed to flag
cuttings transport inefficiencies before they become a problem. These
include:
• Closely monitor the SPM/pounds per square inch, drag-up/drag-
down/rotating string weight. Higher than normal values may
be the first indicators of potential wellbore stability or hole
cleaning problems.
• Do not assume that all the drilled cuttings are being evacuated
from the hole. If necessary, check this using sweeps
(appropriate to the hole deviation/geometry) and make
check/wiper trips to disturb and clean out possible cuttings
beds at regular intervals.

57 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 58 -
Shear rate for non-Newtonian fluids with various yield point/plastic
viscosity ratios
The figure above illustrates the viscosity shear rate relationships for
several non-Newtonian fluids. The tendency of shear thinning has a
significant influence on hydraulic performance for bit hydraulics and
borehole cleaning with respect to fluid velocity profiles in the annulus.
Polymers used in completion and work over are shear thinning.
Hydroxyethylcellulose does not build gel strength or yield point. XC
builds gel strength in relation to stresses, but maintains a higher level
of suspension in all conditions.
Any evidence of poor hole cleaning should be addressed by increasing
flow rate rather than changing rheology of flow regime.
The range of viscosities as a function of shear rate in a typical
fluid circulating system
58 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
Spacer Composition and Sequence
The listed studies focused on spacer composition, contact time and
sequence:
• Kerr-McGee Competitive Displacement Chemical Study in WBM
1996
• Baroid CFS Competitive Displacement Chemicals for WBM-
OBM-SBM; Product Efficiency Index 1996
• Chevron Studies of SBM Wall Cake and Film Removal 1997/98
• BP & Stim-Lab PFLE Displacement Chemicals and Sequence
1998
• Baroid CFS SBM Displacement Testing for Chemical Type,
Sequence & Quantity 1998
• Mobil GOM / Mobile Bay Empirical Study of Hole Cleaning
Sweeps for WBM & OBM Fluids 1997/98
• Global Equipment Empirical Analysis of the Effects of
Mechanical Device Cleaners 1997/2000
• CFS Displacement Performance Database
• Stim Lab Consortium SBM Displacement Trials 2001
Spacer Types
Spacers fall into five main categories:
Flush
• Consists of water, base oil/synthetic or low-density brine;
Water volumes can be from a few barrels to several well
volumes. Base oil/synthetic flushes are sized in the 10 to 100
bbl range. Low-density brines are sized in the 10 to one well
volume range.
Barrier
• Consists of weighted or un-weighted viscous water, brine or
oil/synthetic; Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, Liqui-Vis NT/EP*, Bromi-
Vis*and the Geltone family are used in the appropriate fluid
base. Barriers are employed at the lead and tail of a
displacement spacer sequence. *Provide viscosity only, does
not provide suspension.
Primary Cleaner (Chemical)
• Consists of the chemical specific to fluid to be removed from
the well bore; water based fluids utilize Caustic & ConDet
Blend, oil/synthetic based fluids utilize Barascrub. Some WBM
types require an additional oxidizing chemical treatment with
Caustic & ConDet to ensure film removal.
Secondary Cleaner (Chemical)
• Consists of a blended surfactant with water wetting properties
that causes various particle types to release from metal
surfaces; Baraklean FL is the blend of choice and is used as a
secondary in all displacement types.
Flocculent (brine specific)
• Consists of a blend of agents formulated to flock solids in
high salinity fluids; Can be used as a discrete spacer but is
most effective as a fluid treatment in the first fluid volume
after the spacer sequence. Flo-Clean MD is used in all brines
except zinc and Flo-Clean Z is formulated for brines
containing zinc
The sequence for pumping is generally the same as listed above. In
special circumstances, sequence modification or spacer type additions
are sometimes employed.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 59 -
Key Points from Studies
The studies identified several critical facts about spacer flow behavior,
composition, sequence, volume and concentration.
• Flow attenuation is normal in laminar and transitional flow.
Multiple flow starts and stops will extend the attenuation to
the point of failure for displacement spacers.
• Eccentric pipe flow dynamics contribute significantly to flow
attenuation on the high side of the well bore. Spacer and
displacement fluid bypass or channeling is significantly more
pronounced in this scenario.
• Shear thinning fluids (polymers in brine or water) tend to
move into and reside on the near side of an eccentric pipe
well bore. This tendency exacerbates flow attenuation of
displacement spacers. Dissimilar fluid reactions such as
dehydration of WBM and emulsion sludge formation in
OBM/SBM fluids can be severe if the displacement design
does not account for this flow dynamic.
• Tapered casing strings and tapered pipe produce regions of
sudden change in the flow dynamic. Large annular spaces
at a given flow rate will produce sudden drops in annular
velocity and Reynolds Number energy. Vortices can develop
at these points that cause undesirable mixing of dissimilar
fluids.
• Relatively thinner displacement spacers and completion
fluids can attenuate or channel in these velocity transition
zones and may propagate hundreds to thousands of feet
beyond the transition point. This is most likely when; the
fluid to be displaced has not been conditioned to a desirable
level or has experienced a static interval greater than 8 – 10
hours. Particularly prominent are well conditions above
225oF where WBM can experience temperature gellation
effects.
• Drilling fluids that have not been conditioned for rheology,
chemical contaminants, solids and solids bedding and
temperature will experience a high percentage of
displacement failure.
• Drilling fluids should be conditioned to a rheologically thin
condition. Low-end suspension characteristics should be
based on the 6-RPM reading instead of yield point (YP). The
6-RPM reading should be greater than five. (Generally 6-10)
• Uniform flow around the pipe is necessary to achieve
effective displacement of fluids and solids. Rotation of the
drill string at 30 RPM or higher causes the pipe to lift from
the eccentric position and maintain a more centralized
position in the well bore.
• Drill string rotation and reciprocation imparts mechanical
energy to the fluid dynamic and increases the energy
(Reynolds Number) of the flow dynamic.
• Rotation and reciprocation disturbs particle and debris beds,
dunes and ripples. The disturbed solids or more readily
transported out of the well bore by the saltation process.
• Density differentials above 0.5 – 1.0 lb/gal between displaced
and inserted fluids require a weighted barrier. The barrier
spacer should be at least 1.0 lb/gal higher in density than the
fluid being moved out of the well bore. This density delta
directly contributes to the spacers ability to uniformly move
fluids, particles and debris.
Flow attenuation in eccentric pipe well
59 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
• Indirect displacements may contribute to poor zonal isolation.
The cement sheath outside the casing experiences significant
positive and negative flex as high and low density fluid
columns transition the well. This density induced flex is
thought to impact the formation of micro-annular fractures in
the cement.
• Water immiscible chemicals must remain in constant
turbulent flow to effectively remove fluid films from the
casing and pipe. Immiscible chemicals will channel and
continue to rise in the well bore if flow is stopped. Once
flow stops and the chemical channels, no further cleaning
benefit is experienced in the well bore above the spacer
flow stop point.
• Cleaning chemicals must be formulated for the specific fluid
to b cleaned from the well bore. No “One Chemical Fits All”
exists.
• Cleaning chemicals have a specific volume per unit area
surface (V/UA) factor based on a residual wall film of less
than 0.1875”. The total surface area of the casing and pipe
must be calculated to determine the necessary volume of
cleaning agent necessary. If wall films greater than 0.1875”
are anticipated, the V/UA must be increased by the multiple
of the film factor.
• Cleaning chemicals have a preferred contact time to achieve
maximum benefit. More contact time does not necessarily
increase cleaning efficiency. The default minimum chemical
volume for a particular well is equal to the volume in the
largest annular cross-section that meets the required
contact time.
• Cleaning chemical efficiency is affected by flow dynamic
energy (shear rate or Reynolds Number) The quantity of
cleaner necessary is inversely proportional to the increase or
decrease in dynamic energy.
• Cleaning chemicals must be in high-energy turbulent flow to
achieve the most effective cleaning action. Current study
indicates a minimum Reynolds Number of 8000 – 10,000 or
a shear rate > 45.
• OBM and SBM displacements require that the first water
based spacer to enter the well bore be treated with and
emulsion inhibitor or de-emulsifier. Chemicals included
EGMBE, Mu-Sol A and Barascrub at 5 to 15% v/v. Water
contact with invert emulsion fluid systems before the
residual oil or synthetic film has been removed will cause
emulsion sludge’s to occur. This sludge can have water wet
solids bound within and can be very difficult or expensive to
remove from the well bore.
• Displacement spacers and completion fluids with a Ca++ or
Zn++ content that attenuate over or channel through WBM,
will cause severe dehydration of the clay solids in the WBM.
The water exchange reaction can penetrate through wall
films and cause clay solids to form a strong bond with metal
surfaces.
• Large diameter casing and marine riser annular spaces (>
11.75”) will have laminar flow under most circumstances.
Riser boosting will aid the displacement cleaning process.
Large annular cross section responds well to increased
viscosity in the displacement spacers. Solids and displaced
fluids are more readily transported in large diameter cross
section with increased spacer viscosity.
• Casing cleaning tools such as scrapers and brushes, will
compress the blades or brushes on the low or eccentric side
of the pipe. The high side of the casing will not be
contacted. This is found in any well with angles of 10o or
higher or where the well path undulates along its course.
• Casing scraper and brush tools require centralization to
insure uniform contact with the casing wall. Centralized
tools also experience less wear as opposed to non-
centralized tools.
• Casing scraper and brush tool bodies and inserts should
have rounded shoulders at all points of contact
perpendicular to the casing wall. Rounded profiles reduce
the incidence of casing wear or gouging.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 60 -
Key Points from Studies Displacement Methods

• The optimum spacing for casing cleaning tools is 4000 linear The three procedures used are:
feet or less. This interval represents the optimum cost • Indirect
effective balance between tool cost and short trip time • Modified Indirect
consumption. The maximum spacing for deep-water wells is • Direct
equal to the riser height. All methods utilize additives that are formulated to provide well bore
• Each casing section in a tapered hole must have at least cleaning and separation of fluid types.
one centralized scraper & brush tool per interval. Each
interval should be completely covered by linear motion of Pump rate and direction
the casing tools in the short trip cycle. Pump rate and direction are dictated by several factors:
• Direct displacements require a short trip in the brine • Differential density between existing fluid and fluid to be pumped
followed by at least one well volume of circulation and • Maximum allowable pressure on casing
filtration to assure well bore cleanliness. • Maximum negative differential pressure on drill pipe or casing
• Indirect displacements may perform the short trip after the • Maximum pump rate possible at a given pressure
flush to ensure particle and debris removal. Completion fluid • Maximum feed rate of fluids to pump equipment
should be circulated and filtered at least one well volume to Pump direction is referred to as either conventional (down tubing/up
assure well bore cleanliness. casing) or reverse (down casing/up tubing.)
• Significant cost reduction of the displacement process is
accomplished by embedding surface preparation activities
Conventional
outside the critical hour path. Savings of 6-18 hours of rig
Conventional pump direction is used when:
time have been observed. The use of additional rig
• Density differential between fluids is less than 1.0 lb/gal.
personnel or dedicated cleaning crews is virtually always
(Higher deltas can be accommodated by specialized spacer
cost effective.
designs)
• In an efficient operation, rig and well preparation for
• Differential pressures exceed casing limits or down hole
displacement begins well before the actual displacement
conditions such as liner tops or squeeze perforations.
event.
• Pipe reciprocation and rotation is possible (Reciprocation and
• The surface system should be reduced to the minimum
rotation is not possible in normal reverse circulation mode.)
configuration possible with a view to safety and well
• Higher flow rates desired than reverse circulation permits.
operations. In cased hole operations, this is normally just
after the final casing string or liner is set and cemented. The
Reverse
preferred configuration is a single pit system with solids
Reverse circulation is used when:
control processing pits by-passed. All system parts not in
• Density differential between fluids is greater than 1.0 lb/gal
direct need for well operations should be cleaned to at least
and well angles are </= 10o
a basic level, free from sediment beds and liquid fluid
• Low pump rates are required
content.
• Long contact times for cleaning chemicals (slow pump
• Displacement spacers must exit the well bore before
rates)
cessation of flow.
• High turbulent flow up drill pipe for removal of contaminants
• Pre-mixing displacement spacers in MPT vessels significantly
is desirable
reduce rig time consumption for preparation and pumping.
• Brine to brine displacements, any angle
• Spacers that are spotted in the pipe must not enter the
annular area at the well’s circulation point unless the density
Indirect displacement
of the spacers is equal to or higher than the fluid in the
The indirect displacement utilizes water as the major component to
annular column.
flush and clean the well bore. Coastal areas utilize sea and bay waters
• Spacer column height in the largest casing cross section is
and land sites utilize lease and fresh water. The type of water used is
usually 500 to 1000 linear feet. Actual spacer size is dictated
a function of availability and disposal constraints. In some cases, it
by the V/UA, contact time and density differential factors.
may be desirable to use relatively inexpensive brine as a well flush.
• The aggregate column height of displacement spacer
NaCl or CaCl2 based brines would be used in that case.
systems displays the highest degree of success when the
Indirect displacement is used when:
aggregate total (all spacers) linear feet are 2500’ or more.
• Casing and tubulars can withstand maximum pump and
• Marine riser spacer column height is always significantly less
differential pressures anticipated.
than casing profiles. The aggregate column height total in
• Formations are effectively isolated from the well bore
the riser is typically 400 – 600 linear feet.
• A source of water is readily available.
• Surface systems that have contained calcium or zinc based
brines must be cleaned with a high pH water with a calcium
Modified Indirect
specific reagent to prevent contamination of drilling fluids in
The modified indirect displacement uses a limited amount of either
subsequent use.
water or low-density brine as a flush between the existing fluid and
• Displacement of brine fluid back to WBM requires a barrier
the new working fluid.
between the brine and WBM. The barrier should be treated
Modified Indirect Displacement is used when:
for high calcium or zinc content residual wall films. The lead
• A reduction in flush volumes is desired
volume of WBM should be buffered against calcium
• Less time consumption vs. indirect is desired
contamination.
• Reduced waste volume is desired
• A key performance indicator (KPI) for displacement
• A spacer column height greater than a direct displacement
performance is attaining the desired clarity level in 1.5 well
can economically provide
volumes after the completion fluid has reached the surface.
• Optimum well clarity is based on the relationships between
the NTU readings of well return, clean pit and filter
discharge sample points.

60 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 61 -
Direct displacement
The direct displacement utilizes chemical agents and weighted fluids to used steps
clean the well bore and separate the existing fluid from the completion/ Indirect procedure
work over fluid.
Direct displacement is used when:
• Lower rig time requirements are desired
• Casing and tubulars cannot withstand pressures that the
indirect method would impose
• Formations are exposed to the well bore
• A source of water is not readily available
• Disposal and discharge restraints are present
Key points for displacement
The key points for displacement are:
• Correct conditioning of the drilling fluid is critical, use 6 RPM
readings to adjust rheological properties
• Displacement additives and mixtures must be compatible with
adjacent fluids in the pumping regime
• Pump rates that provide high turbulent flow are preferable
• When high pump rates are not possible, increased contact
time for cleaning agents and increased plastic viscosity and
yield point of viscous materials may be necessary
• An effective displacement is paramount to the overall fluid cost
to the customer
Ineffective displacement = higher cost.
Quality Assurance in Displacement Design and Execution
Cased Hole; Nine Steps to Success
• Mechanical Conditioning of the Well Bore (casing
scrapers/brushes)
• Proper Sizing of Tubulars for Optimum AV’s (minimum of 100
ft/min AV)
• Circulate and Condition Mud
• Embed Surface System Preparation Time
• Circulate Spacer System Without Stopping Pumps
• Rotate / Reciprocate the Work String
• Route, Collect and Dispose of Mud System and Displacement
Spacers
• Circulate & Filter until Clarity Measurements Reach
Specification
• Short Trip to Mechanically Condition the Well Bore and Verify
Removal of Wall Film and Eccentric Beds
Open Hole; Eleven Steps to Success
• Mechanical conditioning of the Well Bore (casing
scrapers/brushes) the lowest tool position should be as close
to the casing shoe as practical.
• Proper Sizing of Tubulars for Optimum AV’s (minimum of 100 that an emulsion inhibitor or OBM / SBM specific cleaner
ft/min AV in cased portions)
• Circulate and Condition the drilling fluid in the open and cased Caustic sweeps should never be used until the OBM / SBM
hole
• Flush the open hole with the appropriate solids free “Clean
Pill”* The volume of the pill should be at least 1.5 times the
open hole gross capacity and annular velocity should be at
least 200 fpm. The” Clean Pill” should extend at least 250’ into
the cased portion of the well.
• Pull up above the casing shoe to displace to the completion
fluid. The circulation point should be as close to the casing
shoe as is practical.
• Embed Surface System Preparation Time
• Circulate Spacer System Without Stopping Pumps
• Rotate / Reciprocate the Work String (reciprocation in open
hole conditions s dependent on surge and swap effects on the
open hole segment)
• Route, Collect and Dispose of Mud System and Displacement
Spacers
• Circulate & Filter until Clarity Measurements Reach
Specification
• Short Trip to Mechanically Condition the Well Bore and Verify
Removal of Wall Film and Eccentric Beds
61 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
General outline of procedures incorporating most commonly
• Begin preparation of the surface system and fluid
equipment.
• Run bit and scraper.
• Condition existing well bore fluid to the minimum plastic
viscosity (lower plastic viscosity increases turbulence) and
yield point (yield point indicates the relative ability of the
fluid to suspend solids but use the 6 RPM reading as the
basis for rheology modification.)
• Prepare and pump initial fluid/seawater spacer, usually a
high viscosity polymer, BARAZAN® PLUS or a LIQUI-
VIS®NT/EP, in a sea or fresh water base.
• Prepare and pump a caustic sweep of 3-5 lb/bbl. The
caustic sweep should be large enough to provide at least
five minutes contact time to each section of the annulus.
The high pH of the sweep helps break up and disperse
residual wall cake. Caustic sweeps should be prepared in
fresh water only.
• Follow with clean seawater at a pump rate high enough to
provide turbulent flow in the annulus, or highest possible
pump rate (calculate hydraulics and flow characteristics of
different fluids utilizing DFG+ software). Continue pumping
until clean seawater returns are achieved.
• Rotate and reciprocate pipe while circulating. This ensures
contact of all surfaces with sweeps and seawater and helps
break up residual wall cake.
• Prepare a well bore cleaning solution. The sweep should be
large enough to assure that at least five minutes contact
time throughout the annulus. Use BARAKLEAN FL in either
fresh water or brine.
• Prepare a hi-vis spacer with Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, LIQUI-
VIS® NT/EP or BROMI-VIS® (Depending on base fluid).
The spacer should be large enough to cover 700-1,000 feet
of the largest annular section. The spacer may use a base
fluid of either water or brine (water or CaCl is usually most
economical.)
• Pump clean filtered completion fluid. In most cases, the first
50-150 barrels of fluid should be treated with Flo-Clean MD
/ Z to aid rapid cleanup of initial well returns. Flo-Clean is
100% compatible with clear fluids.
• Route returns of the original well bore fluid, cleaning
agents, water and viscosity fluids to storage or disposal as
conditions dictate.
• Route the initial returns of completion/workover fluids to
storage or disposal until the fluid reaches a degree of
cleanliness and correct density to justify usage.
Note: Indirect displacement of OBM / SBM systems require
enter the well bore prior to water or water based spacers.
wall films have been removed.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 62 -
Direct procedure Deep Water Wells
• Begin preparation of the surface system and fluid
equipment. Deep-water wells present a two-segment profile for displacement
• Run bit and scraper. treatment; well bore and marine riser.
• Condition existing well bore fluid to the minimum plastic The flow dynamics in the well bore and riser are considerably different
viscosity (lower plastic viscosity increases turbulence) and due to:
yield point (yield point indicates the relative ability of the • Annular cross sectional area
fluid to suspend solids but use the 6 RPM reading as the • Temperature
basis for rheology modification.) • Maximum possible pump & booster rates
• OBM/SBM displacements require a base oil spacer of 20-50
bbls in front of the barrier. In some cases, the base oil may The segmentation of the well allows the different displacement types to
be treated with Barascrub to aid the removal of invert be used in conjunction with each other.
emulsion wall films. The variations are:
• Prepare and pump a barrier pill utilizing fresh water and • Indirect over Indirect
BARAZAN® D plus or N-Vis (spacer may be weighted or o Each segment is displaced separately with water
non-weighted as conditions dictate). Funnel viscosity should • Indirect over Direct
be ± 150-quart seconds. The spacer volume range is 25 to o The riser is displaced indirectly and the well bore is
100 bbl. displaced directly
• Prepare and pump a cleaning agent solution. This pill is • Direct over Indirect
usually 15 - 50 barrels in volume and has a base fluid of o The riser is directly displaced and the well bore is
fresh water or is pumped as a neat chemical. Agents include displaced indirectly
“Caustic & ConDet” at 5 minutes contact or BARASCRUB at • Direct over Direct
2-3 minutes contact. o Both the well bore and riser are directly displaced
• Prepare and pump the secondary cleaning agent solution of • Single stage
BARAKLEAN FL in a water or brine base fluid. This mix is o Direct displacement of the riser and well bore in one
usually 25-50 barrels in volume. continuous operation
• In some cases, a flocculent spacer comprised of Flo-Clean • Two Stage
MD/Z in seawater or brine is used after the secondary o Any combination of displacement variations except
cleaner. The spacer volume is normally 25-50 bbl. single stage direct. A direct over direct displacement
• Prepare and pump high viscosity brine spacer composed of can be handled in a two-stage manner by displacing
Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, LIQUI-VIS® NT/EP or BROMI-VIS® each segment separately.
and the completion/work over fluid to be used. The spacer
should have a viscosity of 200-300 quart seconds and be
large enough to cover 1,000 feet of the largest annular Selection of the methods used
space. is dependent on:
• Pump clean filtered completion/work over fluid. In many • Rig storage and
cases, the first 100-150 barrels of fluid may be treated with transfer limitations
Flo-Clean MD / Z. This agent is 100% compatible with • Exposed formation
brines and will aid rapid cleanup of the initial returns and face
complement the filter system by flocculating solids into large • Operator preference
complexes. • Riser pump and
• Critical point: Once completion/work over fluid enters the boost rates
well, pumping should not stop until all original fluid,
spacers, cleaning agents and viscous brine have returned to Single stage direct/direct
surface and are routed to disposal or storage. Reciprocate displacements are the
and rotate the work string if possible throughout the most cost effective in
procedure. terms of time and
• Route the initial returns of completion/work over to chemical usage, but hold
storage/disposal until they reach a usable level of the greatest risk of poor
cleanliness and density displacement
performance.
Note: Direct displacement of OBM / SBM systems require an
emulsion inhibitor or OBM / SBM specific cleaner enter the Two stage indirect/indirect
well bore prior to water or water based spacers. Caustic displacements are the
sweeps should never be used until the OBM / SBM wall films most costly in time
have been removed. consumption and chemical
consumption is not
necessarily significantly
less, but holds the least
risk of poor displacement
performance.

62 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 63 -
Surface Preparation
WBM
• During well bore clean out to PBTD; minimize the surface
tanks, lines and equipment that are in contact with the WBM
system. By-pass the traps and process pits. Use the shakers
as the primary solids control equipment. The pit system
should be configured as a single pit with a minimum working
volume.
• POOH with the clean out BHA and PU the displacement
configured BHA. During these trips, begin the final cleaning of
the fluid system, tanks, pumps and lines. If well control safety
issues preclude removal of the WBM system at this time, go to
surface cleanup steps after reaching bottom with the work
string. Circulate and condition the drilling fluid after all well
bore clean out activities are complete.
• In some cases the clean out and displacement BHA are run
together. Having the bulk of the surface system drained and
cleaned is important to reducing critical path rig time usage.
• Transfer the excess surface drilling fluid system volume to
boat storage or disposal.
• Start at the highest point of the fluid handling system
(Typically the flow line area) and wash down. This involves
starting at the shaker and ending at the mud pits.
• Wash fluid handling system equipment and adjacent areas
utilizing a combination of cleaning agents and low volume /
high-pressure water wash to remove caked and dried mud
solids.
• All troughs flow lines, trip tanks, pits and pump lines should
be opened and thoroughly cleaned.
• All areas around and associated with the fluid system pits and
pumps should be thoroughly cleaned. These include structural
steel beams, ladders, equalization lines & valves, grating and
walkways above pits and flow lines and pay special attention
to areas that are not readily visible.
• Flush all suction and discharge lines (high and low pressure)
with water followed by a solution of water with 2 ppb caustic,
2 ppb soda ash and 5 cans Condet per 50 bbls of water. The
cleaning solution and water flush should be pulse flowed
through all PDP and centrifugal pumps and their associated
discharge lines. Pulse flow provides a hydraulic shock within
the structures that helps to dislodge and remove sediment
accumulations. Follow the cleaning wash with clean water. If
the final water rinse does not clean up rapidly, repeat the
pulsed cleaning solution flush.
• Cycle all valves in the low-pressure fluid system against
centrifugal pump pressure. Check for leaks and repair /
replace valves as necessary.
• Drain all lines (blow down lines, pumps and fluid equipment
with compressed air if possible). Drain all pits, traps and
tanks, flush and squeegee dry. If possible, open horizontal
suction lines and visually inspect for residual sediments, clean
as necessary.
• Close and seal all dump valves. A silicon-based caulk is
preferable. Allow the caulk to dry for 15 to 30 minutes before
introducing fluids.
• Bring completion fluids on board and prepare displacement
spacer system.
63 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
OBM / SBM
• During well bore clean out to PBTD; minimize the surface
tanks, lines and equipment that are in contact with the
OBM/SBM system. By-pass the traps and process pits. Use the
shakers as the primary solids control equipment. The pit
system should be configured as a single pit with a minimum
working volume.
• POOH with the clean out BHA and PU the displacement
configured BHA. During these trips, begin the final cleaning of
the fluid system, tanks, pumps and lines. If well control safety
issues preclude removal of the OBM/SBM system at this time,
go to surface cleanup steps after reaching bottom with the
work string. Circulate and condition the drilling fluid after all
well bore clean out activities are complete.
• In some cases the clean out and displacement BHA are run
together. Having the bulk of the surface system drained and
cleaned is important to reducing critical path rig time usage.
• The pit system should be configured as a single pit with a minimum
working volume.
• Use a mud vacuum and/or a diaphragm pump to collect all liquid
OBM fluid. Route the residual OBM liquids to the same storage as
the excess OBM system.
• All mud-contaminated surfaces should be sprayed with BARASCRUB
prior to steam cleaning or pressure washing. We recommend using
a specialized tank cleaning service to expedite the cleaning
process.
• Wash fluid handling system equipment and adjacent areas utilizing
a combination of BARASCRUB applied with sprayers and/or deck
brushes followed by high-pressure low volume pressure washer
spray. A cleaning solution of 5% v/v BARAKLEAN can be used in
the pressure washer feed water to enhance clean up. Follow these
primary-cleaning steps with the use of high-pressure steam
cleaning to loosen and remove crusted or tenacious OBM solids.
• The objective is the removal of OBM liquids, solids & sludge’s with
the minimum of waste volume produced.
• Use mud vacuums and/or diaphragm pumps to collect and route
liquid, sludge and solid wastes to appropriate waste disposal
containers. Stay up with the volume generated. Do not wait until
pools of waste develop.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 64 -

64 ddi Don.Isaac@Halliburton.com
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 65 -

Fluid to be displaced Displacement Fluid

OBM WBM Synthetic Brine

OBM High viscosity Base oil High viscosity Base Oil

oil-based mud PETROFREE/PETROFREE LE/ BARAZAN PLUS or BARAZAN D PLUS
High viscosity water- XP-07 (Weighted or un-weighted)
based mud Mud’s BARASCRUB
Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, LIQUI-VIS
NP/EP*
or BROMI-VIS**
FLO-CLEAN MD
FLO-CLEAN Z

WBM Water Water Water Water or

BARAZAN PLUS or BARAZAN D PLUS
High viscosity High viscosity (Weighted or un-weighted)
oil-based mud PETROFREE/PETROFREE LE/ CAUSTIC & CONDET (High pH)
XP-07 BARAKLEAN FL
Mud’s Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, LIQUI-VIS NT*,
LIQUI-VIS EP, or BROMI-VIS**
FLO-CLEAN MD
FLO-CLEAN Z

SBM Base Oil

PETROFREE High viscosity oil- BARAZAN PLUS or High viscosity BARAZAN PLUS or BARAZAN D PLUS
PETROFREE LE based mud BARAZAN D PLUS PETROFREE/PETROFREE LE/ (Weighted or un-weighted)
XP-07 XP-07 BARASCRUB
Mud’s BARAKLEAN NS
BARAKLEAN FL
Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, LIQUI-VIS NT*,
LIQUI-VIS EP, or BROMI-VIS**
FLO-CLEAN MD
FLO-CLEAN Z

Hi-Viscosity
Brine High viscosity BARAZAN PLUS or High viscosity Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, LIQUI-VIS NT*,
oil-based mud BARAZAN D PLUS PETROFREE/PETROFREE LE/ LIQUI-VIS EP,
(Weighted or un- XP-07 or BROMI-VIS**
weighted) Mud’s BARAKLEAN FL
Buffer with Soda Ash FLO-CLEAN MD
@ 2-4 ppb FLO-CLEAN Z

* Use LIQUI-VIS for non- bromine brines.

** Use BROMI-VIS for bromine brines.

Spacer Recommended formulation

BARAKLEAN (Surface Equipment

1 drum/32 bbl (5.09 m3) of water
Cleaner)

BARAKLEAN FL 1 drum/32 bbl (5.09 m3) of water based fluid. Required contact time is 5 minutes.

BARAKLEAN NS 6-15 percent concentration in water based fluid

BARAZAN PLUS or BARAZAN D

1.0-1.5 lb/bbl (3-4 kg/m3) (weighted to desired density)
PLUS
Caustic & ConDet 4-5 ppb Caustic & 0.5 –1.0 gpb ConDet in fresh water. Required contact time is 5 minutes

BARASCRUB Use neat. Required contact time is 3-5 minutes

BROMI-VIS Minimum of 150 sec/qt (150 sec/L)

High viscosity: OBM/Synthetic Displacement fluid viscosified with conventional gellants

LIQUI-VIS NT/LIQUI-VIS EP Minimum of 150 sec/qt (150 sec/L)

1 drum/150 bbl of seawater or brine (requires a minimum Cl- content of ± 5000 mg/L )(not to be
FLO-CLEAN MD
used with zinc bromide brines)

FLO-CLEAN Z 1 drum/150 bbl of zinc bromide brine

- 65 -
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 66 -

Intentionally Left Blank

- 66 -
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 67 -
BRINE ADDITIVES & FLUID LOSS CONTROL (FLC) Modified Cellulose
A number of chemicals and compounds are used to impart or control (N-Vis HB) is a specialized suspension agent for brine fluids up to 16.5
properties in completion work over fluids. This section focuses on those lb/gal. It is not a true polymer but a matrix of cellulosic glucose strands
items used in brine-based fluids. The chemicals and compounds are as that act to suspend particles and impart low-end rheological properties.
follows: This material is used exclusively in brine based Dril-N fluids.
• Viscosity
• Suspension
• Polymer Breakers
• Filtrate Control
• FLC Cake Formation
• Fluid Loss Control Pills
• Control of pH
• Temperature Buffers
• Brine in Oil Emulsifiers
• Foam Suppression
• Emulsion Suppression
• Hydrate Suppression
• Invert Emulsion Cake Cleaners
• Corrosion Inhibitors
• CO2 & H2S Inhibitors
Biopolymers
• Oxygen Scavengers
Biopolymers are produced as a fermentation by-product from various
• Biocide
• Filtration Aids species of bacteria and fungi. Biopolymers are primarily used as
suspending polymers rather than viscosifiers, although they do impart
some viscosity to brines. They create intermolecular support networks
called gel structure, which retards or stops the settling of solids in brine.
Starch
Polymers & Starch
Starch is used in brines to impart filtration control in FLC formulations
Viscosity – Suspension – Filtrate Control
and in some cases to aid hole-cleaning sweeps. Starch products used in
Water-soluble polymers are found in three categories: brine or brine based Dril-N fluids is a modified high purity material and is
• Synthetic, which are obtained by the polymerization of either corn or potato based. Common drilling fluid starch product are
monomers synthesized from petroleum or natural gas not recommended for completion / work over applications.
precursors; an example is Polyacrylamide (Synthetic polymers
have limited use in completion / work over and are not Natural Gums
discussed here.) Gums are a class of natural polymers derived from plants. The most
• Semi-synthetic, which are manufactured by chemical common gum is guar gum and its various derivatives
derivatization of natural organic materials such as (Hydroxypropylguar), which are used in monovalent brines as frac and
Hydroxyethylcellulose, generally based on a polysaccharide, or gravel pack fluids. Guars are not generally used in other completion
by fermentation production of microbial material such as operations due to their potential to cause formation damage without
Xanthan and Scleroglucan specialized handling and formulation.
• Natural, including plant and animal-based materials such as,
Hydroxypropylguar
Chemical Structure of a Biopolymer
Polysaccharides
Polysaccharides are naturally-occurring (organic) water-soluble polymers
composed of carbohydrate compounds chained together molecularly by
acetyl linkages. Most brine polymers are non-ionic (neutrally-charged) or
slightly anionic (negatively electrical charged.) Many polysaccharides are
modified to impart particular properties to the polymer. Generally,
polysaccharides can be grouped into four classifications:
• Hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC)
• Modified Celluloses (N-Vis HB)
• Biopolymers (Xanthan, Wellan, Gellan, Scleroglucan &
Succinoglycans)
• Starch (potato, corn)
• Natural Gums (Hydroxypropylguar)

HEC
HEC is a neutrally charged, modified cellulosic polysaccharide, soluble in
most brine due primarily to its neutral charge. Other cellulosic polymers,
such as carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC), will not viscosify brine due to
the negative electrical charge. HEC is the most frequently used brine
polymer because it will viscosify virtually all brines, is highly acid-soluble,
and has low damaging potential to the formation. Modified HEC
compounds are used as a base for cross-linked hi-viscose formulations.

67
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 68 -
USE AND COMPATIBILITY TABLE
Material Product Name Fluid Temperature Acid Primary Usage Range
Compatibility Compatibility Solubility Applications
Friction Reduction 0.25 – 6 lb/bbl
Baravis
Formate, Mono & divalent Viscose Sweep Max vis requirements
HEC Liqui-Vis NT/EP 60-300oF (1) Excellent
brine (5) Plastic Viscosity decrease as brine
Bromi-Vis
FLC density increases
K-Max Formate, Mono & divalent K-Max & Max Seal
Desired Rheology
HEC (Modified) Z-Max brine 60 – 300oF Excellent FLC
dependent
Max Seal Zinc brines require Z-Max Z-Max 60 – 225oF
Moderate
Formate, Mono & divalent Will Degrade in
Modified Cellulosic N-Vis HB 60 – 275oF Suspension 0.25 – 1 lb/bbl
brine ZnBr densities >
16.5 lb/gal
Good
Acid Resistant Suspension
Formate, Mono & divalent
XCD Barazan D Plus 60 – 280oF (2) Oxidizers & Friction Reduction 0.5 – 2 lb/bbl
brine
Enzymes degrade Viscose Sweep
more rapidly
Good
Suspension
Acid Resistant
N-Vis Formate, Mono & divalent Friction Reduction
XC 60 – 280oF (2) Oxidizers & 0.5 – 3 lb/bbl
N-Vis L brine (6) FLC
Enzymes degrade
Frac/GP Fluid
more rapidly
Salinity of <50,000 mg/L Good
Suspension
Cl2 Acid Resistant
Viscose Sweep
Wellan Biozan Calcium tolerant to 5000- 60 – 300oF Oxidizers & 0.5 – 3 lb/bbl
Friction Reduction
10,000 ppm under certain Enzymes degrade
Frac/GP Fluid
pH conditions more rapidly
High
Formate & Monovalent Oxidizers & Suspension
Gellan Kelcogel 60 – 140oF 0.5 – 1 lb/bl
brine Enzymes degrade Frac/GP Fluid
more rapidly
Good Suspension
Acid Resistant Friction Reduction
Formate & Monovalent o
Scleroglucan Biovis 60 – 160 F (3) Oxidizers & Viscose Sweep 0.5 – 2 lb/bbl
brine
Enzymes degrade FLC
more rapidly Frac/GP Fluid
Poor
Very Acid Suspension
Formate & Monovalent
Succinoglycan FloPac 60 – 140oF (3) Resistant Viscose Sweep 0.5 – 2 lb/bbl
brine
Requires Alkalinity Frac/GP Fluid
to Degrade
Good
Some Acid
Formate, Mono & divalent Resistance Filtrate Reduction
Starch N-Drill HT Plus 60 – 300oF (4) 0.5 – 6 lb/bbl
brine Oxidizers & Carry Capacity Aid
Enzymes degrade
more rapidly
Poor
Friction Reduction
Formate, Mono & divalent Requires Oxidizers
HPG (Guar) Frac & GP Suspension
brine or Enzymes to
Frac/GP Fluid
Degrade

1. Above 225oF requires pH buffer & O2 Scavenger

2. Above 225oF requires pH buffer & O2 Scavenger
3. Transition Temp affected by salts
4. Above 250oF requires pH buffer & O2 Scavenger
5. Requires special blend formulation in Zinc concentrations < 22% by weight
6. Requires special blending formulation above 10.5 b/gal density

68
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 69 -
Fluid Rheology Graphics Acid Solubility
Viscosity and Suspension of HEC VS XC After the polymer has performed as required in the well bore, it is often
desirable to break or degrade the viscosity of the brine fluid with a
mineral acid. The process of breaking a completion fluid with a mineral
acid, called acid hydrolysis or acidizing, produces both soluble and
insoluble residues. The insoluble residue can cause formation damage.
All of the polysaccharide polymers are acid-soluble to some degree with
the exception of Succinoglycan.
Note: Generally, HEC polymers are very acid-soluble and produce very
low insoluble residue. However, some liquid HEC products on the market
contain organophilic clay, which is added to suspend the HEC in
solution. The clay is not acid-soluble and can result in damage to the
formation. Baroid LIQUI-VIS® NT /EP and BROMI-VIS® liquid HEC
polymers do not contain any organophilic clay.
Acid hydrolysis of BARAVIS®, BROMI-VIS®, and LIQUI-VIS® NT/EP
polymers results in the lowest insoluble residue content of any
viscosifying polymer (less than 0.09% by weight.) Baroid's BARAZAN®
and N-VIS biopolymers demonstrate excellent acid solubility and low
insoluble residue.
FANN 50 Readings at 250 psi Viscosity
Measurements of 11.6 lb/gal Calcium pH Tolerance
HEC polymers are stable over a pH range of 2 - 12. Below pH 3, they
Chloride & 3 lb/bbl HEC
can show some loss in viscosity over time due to hydrolysis. BARAVIS®,
BROMI-VIS®, and LIQUI-VIS® NT/EP are not affected by the pH
Temperature, F 150 200 250
ranges associated with brine formulations.
600 rpm 283 205 116 The biopolymer BARAZAN D Plus®, N-Vis and N-Vis L are stable over a
pH range of 2 - 12, and has almost no viscosity loss at the extremes of
300 rpm 216 148 74 this range.
Yield failure or dehydration of HEC in ZnBr2
200 rpm 186 122 39 HEC is normally the polymer of choice with ZnBr fluids. It is well
established that a range of 0.1 to 6 percent ZnBr will prevent the
polymer from proper yield. Any ZnBr2 fluid containing a trace of zinc
100 rpm 143 88 23 bromide to 22% by weight ZnBr2 must be specially blended to increase
the zinc concentration above the 22% threshold. HEC forms hard
60 rpm 117 67 16 polymer particles and stringy viscose chains below the threshold
condition. These by products can be very hard if not impossible to treat.
30 rpm 88 45 9 A second effect that is often over looked; polymer blends at the
necessary Zn percentage mixing with fluids that have less than the
6 rpm 39 15 3 necessary ZnBr concentration. This brings the overall concentration of
ZnBr down into the critical range.
Light ZnBr fluids and ZnBr fluids with summer TCT blends to +/- 16.0
3 rpm 26 8 2 ppg are often used during completion and work over operations.
Volumes of HEC polymer mixing with low Zinc brines have been
Plastic viscosity, 67 56 43 observed to form rubbery glutinous masses that were sufficient to
cP impair mechanical operations in the well bore and were very resistant to
chemical removal. To avoid this reaction HEC polymer pills must be
blended with a maximum ZnBr concentration and a high ZnBr
Yield point, lb/100 149 91 32
concentration spacer of 5 to 10 barrels must be pumped ahead and
ft2 behind the pill to insure sufficient ZnBr in the vicinity the pill to inhibit
the low Zinc reactions.
Apparent 142 102 58 Dilution effects can be addressed as follows:
viscosity, cP • Prepare HEC polymers in 19.2 lb/gal ZnBr2 that has be cut to
the desired density with CaCl2
• Prepare lead and chase spacers that have sufficient ZnBr2
content to correct in dilution in the well bore area where the
polymer will be used

Precipitation of HEC at elevated temperature

HEC precipitation at higher temperatures has been observed in the past
several years. Brines composed of NaCl, KCl, NaBr and CaCl were tested
at various polymer loads and temperatures from 135oF to 240oF. In NaCl
and KCL brines, HEC was seen to precipitate beginning at +/- 150oF.
The precipitant was found to be a water insoluble mass of HEC. The
precipitated masses were found to be soluble in HCl concentrations as
low as 1%.
The obvious danger would be precipitation in the formation matrix
outside the ability of HCl to reach the mass. The blocked region would
then be said to be permanently impaired.
CaCl and NaBr fluids were tested with a range of polymers loads but no
precipitation was observed. At this time continued study with formats,
CaBr and ZnBr has not been initiated.

69
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 70 -
“Best Practice” for Polymer Sweep & FLC Pill Mixing is as
follows:
• Use a filtered base brine that meets 2 micron absolute quality
standards
• Mixing tanks and lines should be cleaned of all potential
contaminants such as drilling fluid residue, rust and scale and
other foreign materials.
• Mixing hopper systems should be high shear and tanks should
contain an agitation method other than fluid flow from the
hopper. (Air bubble agitation is not an adequate method)
• If a reliably clean and high shear mixing system cannot be
accomplished, a dedicated third party mix system should be
used.
• Polymer FLC pills should be hydraulically sheared then filtered
to 10 micron absolute.
• Polymer sweeps that will not contact the productive formation
do not require shear & filter.
• External breakers for HEC based FLC are acids and or
oxidizers; for biopolymers, oxidizers work in a much shorter
time frame as compared to acids.
• Internal breakers are selected based on a complex set of
design variables. Internal breaker application is discussed in a
subsequent part of this section.
70
Preparation of Barazan D Plus, N-Vis, N-Vis L in Different Brine
Bases
In high concentrations of divalent salts, such as calcium chloride,
calcium bromide and zinc bromide, special mixing procedures will have
to be followed to obtain complete viscosity in a reasonable period of
time.
As the salt concentration increases above the critical level, the hydration
time will become longer. The high-density brines from 11.6 -19.2
lb/gallon (1.4 -2.3 S.G.) are normally blends of calcium chloride, calcium
bromide and zinc bromide. The performance of Xanthan gum is
dependent upon the total divalent ion concentration. Improved
performance can be obtained by formulating the brines for a minimum
ionic concentration. Increasing the solution temperature and/or
increasing the mixing shear can reduce the hydration time in some
divalent salts.
SODIUM BROMIDE & POTASSIUM BROMIDE
• In solutions containing less than 1000 mg/L total hardness
(calcium & magnesium) and at normal temperatures (50°-
90°F, 10°-30°C), Xanthan gum can be mixed directly into the
solution at all salt concentrations.
• In solutions containing over 1000-mg/L total hardness,
hydration time will increase as the salt concentration and
hardness increases. High shear mixing for longer periods 30-
90 minutes or increasing the temperature to 120°-150°F (50°-
65°C) will normally allow complete hydration in saturated
monovalent salt solutions up to very high hardness levels.
CALCIUM CHLORIDE
• Xanthan gum will viscosity calcium chloride solutions with high
shear mixing at normal temperatures (50°-90°F, 10°-30°C) up
to 15% salt concentration (10.5 lb/gallon, 1.26 S.G.).
• Solutions over 15% calcium chloride can be viscosified using
one of the following procedures:
o Increase the solution temperature to 120°F (50°C)
while mixing xanthan gum at high shear and
maintain temperature until complete hydration is
obtained.
o Mix Xanthan gum in a 15% or lower solution using
high shear, allow time for complete hydration then
increase the salt concentration to the desired level
by adding dry salt.
CALCIUM BROMIDE
• Xanthan gum will viscosity calcium bromide solutions with
high shear mixing at normal temperatures (50°-90°F, 10°-
30°C) up to 13% salt concentration (10.5 lb/gallon, 1.26
S.G.).
• Solutions over 13% calcium bromide can be viscosified using
one of the following procedures:
o Increase the solution temperature to 120°F (50°C)
while mixing xanthan gum at high shear and
maintain temperature until complete hydration is
obtained.
o Mix Xanthan gum in a 13% or lower solution using
high shear, allow time for complete hydration then
increase the salt concentration to the desired level
by adding dry salt.
o Dilute a saturated calcium bromide solution
approximately 30% with fresh water, mix 4-5 lb/bbl
(1.1% to 1.4% by wt.) Xanthan gum using high
shear, allow time for complete hydration then add
saturated calcium bromide solution to obtain the
desired polymer concentration and density.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 71 -
ZINC BROMIDE
• Xanthan gum will viscosity zinc bromide solutions with high
shear mixing at normal temperatures up to 10% salt
concentration (13.5 lb/gallon, 1.6 S.G.).
• Solutions up to 15% zinc bromide (16 lb/gallon, 1.92 S.G.)
can be viscosified by raising the solution temperature to 120°F
(50°C), while mixing Xanthan gum at high shear and
maintaining temperature until complete hydration is obtained.
• To obtain solutions over 15%, dilute the highest density zinc
bromide solution with approximately 30% fresh water. Mix 4-5
lb/bbl (1.1% to 1.4% by wt) Xanthan gum using high shear
and allow time for complete hydration. Add dry calcium
bromide salt and saturated zinc bromide solution to obtain the
desired polymer concentration and density.
Note: As brine density increases above 12.0 lb/gal the suspension
properties of Xanthan polymers begin to loose their effectiveness.
Pilot test mixtures to verify suspension performance for the particular
application.

71
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 72 -
Fluid Loss Control (FLC) Applications and Characteristics:
• Single Use
Definition: A material or blend of materials used to control fluid loss to • Perforating
the formation. • Tubing plug
Solids free polymer solutions prepared with LIQUI-VIS® NT/EP and • Squeeze Gravel Packs
• Simple
BROMI-VIS® at high viscosities are used to control light to moderate
• Nothing to retrieve
fluid loss. K-Max and Z-Max (Cross linked modified HEC) are used to
control moderate to severe loss. Limitations and Precautions:
Specially sized particle suspensions of salt, calcium carbonate or oil • No access below before expending
soluble resins are used for moderate to heavy fluid loss rates. In some • Glass fragments will remain
• Torque through the assembly and impact may break the
blends HEC and XC polymers are used for viscosity and suspension
flapper
along with colloidal starches to aid bridging and control seepage loss.
Baroid products used in these blends are BARACARB® (CaCO3), Cost:
BARAPLUG® (NaCl),BARARESIN®, N-Vis, N-Drill HT Plus and Barabuf. Inexpensive

Filtrate Control – FLC Cake Formation – FLC Pills – Breakers –
Formation Damage Potential
Fluid loss to the formation can be expensive in lost production and lost materials and with varying designs. All
brine value. Lost production potential is often difficult to remedy and
invariably expensive. Costly brine loss is a major component of AFE
over-run.
Fluid loss to the formation is controlled in variety of methods.
In hierarchical order they are:
• Density Reduction
• Mechanical Loss Prevention Systems and Devices
• Linear and Cross-Linked Polymers
• Cake Forming Particulates
Density Reduction
Density reduction is the least expensive method and the least likely to
cause formation damage. Reducing the delta pressure across the
formation face is an effective method of reducing the bph loss rate.
Density reduction has the following limitations:
• A over-balance pressure of at least 100 psi must be
maintained to control formation pressures
• The lower limit of over-balance may be much higher than 100 hold pressure from below. Without
psi. Well bore geometries such as angle and tubular/tool
dimensions, formation characteristics such as laminated
layers, and fluid swap phenomena as well as the gas
entrainment potential of the brine; control the lower limit of allowing slick line tools to pass through trapping tools below the flapper.
over-balance reduction.
• Loss rates of > 1-2 bph after density reduction may require
additional FLC measures.
Mechanical Fluid Loss Control
Mechanical fluid loss systems include a variety of devices that either
temporarily or permanently block fluid flow into the formation. They can to log the pack, break the first flapper, pull the logging tools and close
be expendable or may use a communication device such as a sliding
sleeve to gain future access. The different devices have operating
characteristics that are more suitable in some well completions. With all
of these devices, the elastomeric and metallic components need to be
compatible with the produced fluids and any chemicals that may be
injected. These devices are sound selections and are encouraged
whenever conditions permit. Although they add expense to tool
construction, they pay for themselves in damage prevention and
expensive brine loss. The limitations to mechanical devices are:
• Not available at all stages of a completion / work over
• Length between zones may prevent inclusion in the down-hole
tool design
• May be difficult to activate or remove due to debris fill
Glass Disk
Glass disk assemblies are used to provide flow diversion, seal off the
end of the tubing string and provide isolation and protection to tools
below the disk assembly. The disk is broken by pressure or impact when
removal is desired. If access below the disk is required, a flapper type
device is preferred. The glass disks can also be used in combination with
a latching device that can be expended after being latched in place.
Glass flappers may creep and fail at a lower pressure if exposed to
pressure for extended periods.
Frangible Flappers
This category includes a whole range of products that are available on
the market made from a variety of
are intended to close and shut off flow
from the well bore. Most all of these
designs are “reverse flappers” meaning
they hold pressure from above (as
opposed to pressure from below). They
are most often run as part of a gravel
packing or horizontal well completion
assembly and can be shifted into service
as the wash pipe is removed from the
well. When the well is ready to produce,
the flapper is broken. Using pressure to
break a flapper is not generally
recommended since the pressure may
cause it to crack and leak rather than
shatter. Caution should be exercised
when using one of these devices in a
configuration where it is designed to
sufficient pressure to hold the flapper
closed, it will be difficult to expend the flapper. The flapper may open
and close with each impact, eventually breaking off at the hinge or
The flapper assembly design should be able to fully retract and be
protected inside it’s housing during installation and service operations.
These devices can be run in tandem to allow two flappers to be run, one
above the other. This provides a secondary flapper to close after the
first is expended. An example of one such application might be to gravel
pack followed by a logging trip. Close the first flapper, run logging tools
the second flapper with a shifting tool attached to the logging string.
This leaves the well with fluid-loss control while tubing is run in the well.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Single-use device
• Simple operation
• Ceramics are not affected by most well fluids
• Multiple closure options
• Removable prop sleeve
• Internal prop sleeve and shifting tool
• Drag on w ash pipe (not recommended)
• Removal Options – Impact loads
• Tubing stinger
• Wire line tools
• Coil Tubing
• Perforating device

72
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 73 -
Limitations and Precautions:
• Fragment disposal/flow back problems
• Insure that the flapper material is dense enough not to float
in heavy brines (select grades of ceramics are recommended)
• Some materials may require a separate metal or plastic hinge
• May shatter when perforating above if not protected
• Avoid slam closure
• Avoid impact and rough handling
• NOT A SAFETY DEVICE
• OD/ID ratios and collapse pressure should be checked on Frac Cost:
Packs
• Holds pressure in one direction.
Cost:
Moderately Expensive
Plugging Devices
Several of the fluid-loss devices work by dropping or latching a plug into expended to open the well to flow. The internally expendable devices
a receptacle that is in the flow path. The plug is generally carried on the can be any one of a number of plugging devices such as a glass disk,
end of the wash pipe in a gravel packing assembly. When the gravel
packing assembly is removed from the well, the plug is released from
the wash pipe, plugging off the well from fluid losses. These devices
range from balls being dropped to plugs that have glass disks that can
later be broken to put the well on production.
Ball Dropper Fluid Loss Device
This relatively new device uses collet catcher sub technology to provide remaining carrier may cause a restriction to flow or other access.
post gravel-pack fluid-loss control. A ball is initially attached to and later Latching the device may also be a concern in sand-laden fluids.
dropped from a running tool onto the collet catcher assembly, located in
the blank pipe above the screen thus sealing off the packed interval.
The running tool is located on the end of the wash pipe string. As it is
pulled through the collet catcher assembly, a shoulder on the running
tool engages a sleeve in the collet catcher assembly that pulls the collet
fingers into a closed position. Additional tension shears the pin holding
the ball in place and allows it to fall and seal off on the closed collet
fingers. Once the production tubing is in place, the ball is expended into
the rat hole by pressuring up on the tubing. The expending pressure can
be adjusted by adding or removing pins from the collet catcher
assembly.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Ball seals on a rubber coated collet
• Simple Operation / field proven concepts
• Sized to screen base pipe
73
Limitations and Precautions:
• Check burst and collapse pressure limits in Frac Packs
• Aluminum balls will dissolve (may cause problems if exposed
to acid prior to sealing off)
• Limited deviation
• Exercise care when running wire line tools through the
expended collet
• Holds pressure in one direction
Moderately Expensive
Tubing Latched Plug
This device is also carried on the end of the wash pipe of a gravel-
packing assembly. The plug is latched into a specially designed nipple
and is later expended or pulled when the well is put on production.
Either the device is expended completely or a plug within the device is
expendable plug or expendable ball seat. This device and can be
configured to provide pressure holding capabilities in both directions.
As with the ball dropper, the use of this in highly deviated wells is not
recommended. With these devices, the caution is even stronger; since
the device may not fall to bottom as easily as a ball and can become
lodged in the completion assembly. This procedure must thoroughly be
reviewed before attempted. If it is an internally expendable device, the
Applications and Characteristics:
• Run on the wash pipe
• Simple Technology
Limitations and Precautions:
• Debris Intolerant when latching
• Vertical to slight deviation for expending
Cost:
Moderately Expensive
Hydraulic Reverse Operated Flapper
A reverse flapper is designed for completion systems that require that
no debris or expended components will remain in the well bore. This
device prevents fluid loss to the formation after the screens are in place,
the packer is set, and the wash pipe is removed. A sleeve holds the
flapper open during running and service operations. The sleeve is
removed with the wash pipe to allow the valve to close. The valve is
reopened by applying pressure down the tubing and releasing the
pressure to allow a flapper prong to open the valve from below. This
reduces rig time associated with opening typical upside down flapper
valves using through-tubing methods as described above. No fragments
exist as with the breakable flapper valves. This valve uses subsurface
safety valve technology.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Multiple closure options
• Removable prop sleeve
• Internal prop sleeve and shifting tool
• Removal Options – Apply pressure to actuate and release
pressure
• Horizontal non-gravel pack wells
Limitations and Precautions:
• Debris sensitive
• Holds in one direction
Cost:
Relatively Expensive
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 74 -
Packer Plugs.
Retrievable sealing plugs are designed to latch into and seal off the well
at the packer. Designs exist for the various packer types. Most plugs are
designed to provide a seal against pressure from above or below the
packer. These plugs are designed to be retrieved by the work string with
rotation, with a straight pull of the tubing, or in some cases, either
method. An optional design is to provide a plug against pressure from
above the packer only. It can be retrieved with a straight pull of the
tubing. Retrievable plugs can be set in place by the work string, the
bottom of a perforating assembly, or on electric wire line.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Perforating Operations
• Temporary Abandonment
• Bi-directional pressure capabilities
Limitations and Precautions:
• Requires an additional trip to run and remove
• Equalization capabilities are recommended
• Debris may need to be removed before retrieval
Cost:
Moderately expensive
Tubing Plugs
Tubing plugs include a number of familiar locking devices that come
with equally as many types of plugs attached to the bottom of the plug.
These are covered in numerous sales catalogs and will not be discussed
in detail here. A primary precaution that needs to be considered when
using tubing plugs with sand control applications is the plugs’ sand
tolerance. Retrieval methods may be difficult or necessitate coiled tubing
intervention to wash these devices before they are pulled.
Applications and Characteristics:
• General plugging applications
• Work over and secondary plugging option
Limitations and Precautions:
• Debris tolerance should be considered
Cost:
Moderate
74
Fluid Loss Limiting Completion Systems –
A number of completion systems have been designed to provide a
systematic approach to fluid loss control by addressing the problem
from the onset of the perforation process (where fluid losses start) until
the well is completed and production tubing is in place. These systems
may address some or all of these steps depending upon their design and
the extent of control that is desired.
Single Trip Perforate and Gravel Pack Systems. These gravel-pack
systems are designed to perforate and gravel-pack in one trip. The
system includes running a tubing-conveyed perforating assembly below
a packer, which allows the well to be perforated under balanced and
flow tested. After testing, the well is killed. A lower packer is then
released and set again below the perforated interval or a set of seals
seal off in a specially designed big bore sump packer that is run prior to
perforating. The bottom packer now becomes the sump packer. With
the screen properly aligned across the perforations, the gravel-pack
packer is now set. Standard procedures are followed to complete the
gravel-pack operation. After the well is reversed clean, the wash pipe is
pulled, allowing a flapper or similar device to close. This isolates the
formation from any pressure or fluid loss while pulling the work string,
running the production tubing or while tripping pipe in and out of the
hole. Once the production string has been run and the tree tested, the
ceramic flapper is broken with the use of wireline or coiled tubing.
These systems are limited to single zones or the lower zone in a
multi zone completion hookup. Careful planning is required due to the
multi-disciplinary equipment and operations that must work together to
be successful. The number and complexity of these completions require
close communication and extensive Quality Control due to the number
of different places that something can go wrong. Longer gravel pack
assembly run times are offset and actually can provide rig time savings
by eliminating some operations in the completion process. These types
of completion assemblies are especially beneficial in wells with
expensive completion fluids. Coordination with the drilling operations is
also required to insure that sufficient rat hole is provided to accept the
length of the gun assembly below the sump packer.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 75 -
Wash pipe Isolation Systems
The wash pipe isolation system provides a means to isolate the screen
adjacent to the producing interval immediately following completion
operations. This system utilizes the wash pipe below the gravel-pack
service tool as the isolation string; to latch, release and seal off the
screened interval prior to pulling out of the hole with the work string.
This system has been particularly effective in stacked zone completions.
Where fluid loss and down hole flow between zones presents a problem
for fluid-loss flappers or chemical fluid loss methods, the wash pipe
isolation system is a proven and reliable solution. Pressure differentials
(as much as 2,000 psi) between producing gravel-packed intervals have
been effectively isolated packed and selectively produced with this type
of system.
The assembly is run and set like a conventional gravel pack assembly.
The circulate, squeeze and reverse out positions function identically to
those on a conventional open- or cased-hole gravel pack.
Telescoping Joint Expansion
Once the pack is completed, the service tool is raised to engage the
shear ring sleeve on the telescoping joint. The shear ring sleeve is
sheared, allowing the sleeve to move downward un-propping the
telescoping joint lugs, allowing the telescoping joint to expand and lock
open. (Note: On a vertical well, the weight of the wash pipe assembly
below the telescoping joint will stroke it to the fully open position).
Continuing to pick up will re-engage the shear ring to verify that the
telescoping joint is fully stroked open.
At this point, the service tool assembly can be lowered back into the
packer to latch the wash pipe isolation string into the ratch-nipple
located below the gravel-pack safety shear joint. As an option, the shear
ring on the travel joint can be sheared by pulling upward, and the
service tool can be pulled from the packer bore to verify fluid loss.
75
Inner String Latch-Up
To latch up the inner string the service tool is slacked downward. The
ratch release sub will engage the "No-Go" shoulder in the Shear Joint,
un-propping the C-ring, activating the shear release pins. Continued
slack off will allow the ratch locator and seals to latch in and seal off in
the ratch nipple. Seals on the lower end of the wash pipe also enter and
seal in the seal bore located in the sump packer seal assembly. Picking
up the service tool assembly will shear the shear release pins,
disconnecting the service tool assembly from the wash pipe assembly.
Raising the service tool will close the closing sleeve assembly leaving the
formation totally isolated prior to removing the last gravel-pack service
tool seal. With the gravel-pack service tool above the packer, the
isolation string can be tested by pressuring down the work string with
the annulus closed.
Inner String Zone Isolation
The service tool is removed from the well bore, leaving the gravel
packed interval totally isolated from annulus fluids. Depending upon
screen and isolation string size, a sliding sleeve can be run as part of the
isolation string or the isolation string may be perforated to open the
zone for production using one of a number of methods such as tubing
punch technology.
Single-Trip Dual and Multi Zone Systems
These systems are designed to allow multiple zones to be gravel packed
in a single tubing trip. These systems reduce total fluid loss through the
elimination of multiple perforating trips and shorter overall completion
times. Fluid losses are controlled during completion operations with
these systems by using a viscous or gelled fluid-loss-control material as
opposed to a particulate system due to the superior properties of a gel
system when it is necessary to pass tools through the fluid-loss
materials. The benefit of this type of completion system is that it
provides control of overall fluid losses, but they are complex and require
the same integrated approach as the single-trip perforate systems. The
multi-zone systems are also limited to zones with relatively equal
pressure gradients.
Shoot and Drop Single Completions
These relatively simple systems have combined the perforating and
completion operations into a single step. Instead of making two trip into
the well to perforate and set the packer, the perforating guns are run
below the packer or hung off in the well bore with a gun hanging
device. Once the production tubing is in place and the well is ready for
production, the guns are actuated through a number of optional firing
systems, and the well is flowed. With these systems, fluid losses are
minimized. Because of the simple nature of these completions, they are
well suited for a number of well completion applications. Planning of the
drilling operations needs to take into account the need for sufficient rat
hole of the fired guns below the perforations. These are also only
applicable to the lowest zone of a multiple zone completion assembly.
Gun Hanger Systems
Gun hanger systems can be used to allow the well to be perforated
while the well is closed to fluid entry. They can also be used with wire
line-deployed systems on live wells, eliminating fluid losses. The gun
hangers are a device with packer-type slips that bite into the casing and
provide a location for a single or multiple sections of guns to be run and
landed on top of the hanger. Once the guns fire, the hanging device
also releases, dropping the complete assembly to the bottom of the
well. These systems also require careful coordination with the
completion design personnel to insure that the firing of the guns will not
affect down hole equipment. They have the advantage over wire line
gun systems in that larger guns can be used, and longer intervals can
be shot at one time.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 76 -
Snubbing and Plugging Systems
This is a relatively novel approach where the well is completed and
perforated. The tubing is plugged at a location close to the top of the
production packer, and the completion assembly is then snubbed into
the well without a pressure differential pressure. Once the plug is
encountered, it is engaged by a pulling tool located on the bottom of the
completion assembly and released. The whole assembly can then be
lowered even further, using the snubbing jack in a positive load
condition. This type of completion is applicable to various through-
tubing well control applications and is especially well suited for wells
with extreme well control problems.
Disappearing Plugs
These families of relatively new devices are made from materials that
dissolve in water or acid solutions. The “disappearing” portion of the
plug is sometimes covered with a non-reactive material that protects the
plug until an internal sleeve is actuated that pierces the cover and
exposes the dissolvable materials. As with the other expendable devices,
this material must be handled with care to prevent premature exposure
of fluids to the base material. They fall within the same limitations of
through-tubing access that glass disks experience with the advantage
that the material does not leave fragments in the well bore and may be
designed to expend at relatively low pressures.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Single use device
• Multiple pressure cycles to expend
• Can be complex
Limitations and Precautions:
• Review debris tolerance
• Device may fail if the seal is broken
Cost:
Expensive
Expendable Plugs
These simple tubing plugs, plug the end of the tubing to control flow in
one or both directions. They are relatively inexpensive and provide
many of the features of the glass disk assemblies. Some can be
designed with a ball plugging option to allow bypass until a ball is
dropped to stop flow through the device.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Simplest of designs
• Apply pressure to expend
• Must be run in place or latched in place
Limitations and Precautions:
• Must use sufficient acid to dissolve
• Must contact all plugs with the acid
Cost:
Moderately Expensive
Screen Coatings
This method of fluid loss involves the use of an acid soluble cement that
is coated over the entire length of a screen or screen sections. The
coating stops flow through the screen until the acid meets the coating to
dissolve the coating. Oil soluble coating has also been used to provide
similar restriction to flow.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Flow restriction through screens
• Screen protection in dirty or rough well bores
Limitations and Precautions:
• Review reaction byproducts (may plug some screens)
• Must contact all of the material with the acid
Cost:
Inexpensive
Select Flow Screen
Screen that either has an un-perforated base pipe or has a sliding sleeve
device incorporated into the length of the screen. These can be used to
provide long term isolation of a specific zone or several zones. It can be
later opened to flow through perforating or shifting the sleeve into the
open position. Primary applications are in multiple zone gravel packing
completions where one or more zones will be preferentially produced
while others are isolated for future production. Care should be taken to
use a controlled perforation device to insure that the screen is not
perforated when the base pipe is perforated.
Applications and Characteristics:
• Multiple Zone Selective production Gravel Packs
Limitations and Precautions:
• Pre-plan perforating procedures to gain zone access
Cost:
Inexpensive

Limitations and Precautions:

• Vertical wells to expend the plug to bottom

Cost
Inexpensive

Acid Soluble Plugs

Acid soluble plugs can be used in a number of configurations to provide
well control until acid is introduced to the well bore. The acid dissolves
the plugs to open the well to flow. The plugs are generally made of a
reactive metal such as Zinc or Aluminum to enhance the reaction time
and create a preferential reaction site. One application of this
technology is to provide a screen where the perforations in the base
pipe are plugged with acid soluble plugs. The screen acts as blank pipe
until the acid is flowed into the well and the plugs are dissolved. This
allows a screen to be run in a gravel pack application without wash pipe
since the flow will not pass through the screen during packing
operations.

Applications and Characteristics:

• Screen base pipe plugs
• Horizontal open hole completions
• Gravel packs without washpipe

76
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 77 -
Linear or Cross-Linked Polymers
Linear Polymer
Organic polymers used in fluid loss reduction have show themselves to
be effective and provide acceptable levels of clean up for sand control
application and subsequent production.
However, polymers that are improperly prepared and or cannot be
contacted by breaker chemicals exhibit significant permeability reduction
for extended periods.
The most commonly used polymers are: Hydroxyethylcellulose (HEC),
Xanthan Gum (XC), Hydroxypropylguar (HPG), Scleroglucan (SCG),
Succinoglycans (SUG), Whelan Gum and Derivative HEC Cross Links (Z
& K Max).
Polymer FLC works by penetrating the near well bore matrix with a
viscous fluid medium. As the viscous fluid saturates the matrix, the
shear rate seen by the fluid reduces due to the structure of pore size
and interconnectivity. Viscose fluid resists shear in an increasing rate as
the velocity of the fluid lowers in the matrix. This shear resistance then
gives the effect of blocking or slowing flow through the formation. The
efficacy of the viscous pill is a function of, pill viscosity at temperature;
low shear rate viscosity, linear structure of the polymer, pore size and
permeability of the formation and delta pressure from the well bore to
the formation. As a general rule of thumb, the lower the permeability
and average pore size of the formation the greater delta pressure the
viscous fluid can withstand.
Several papers have stated that biopolymers are superior to HEC for FLC
application. These statements are based on the high viscosity at low
shear that biopolymers display as compared to HEC and slightly higher
return permeability performance of unbroken polymers. At reciprocal
second rates, less than 10 sec-1, biopolymers display an increasing
viscosity and the HEC viscosity cure remains flat. A number of radial
flow expressions show the resistance to flow in small matrix structures is
much higher with the low shear viscosity of biopolymers.
Empirically, observations suggest the opposite. Even high viscosity
biopolymers have been seen to be ineffective as polymer FLC pills. This
may be due to the velocity and rate that an FLC enters the formation
being at a higher shear rate than the best range for biopolymers,
fingering effects or some other mechanism. Mixtures of HEC and
biopolymers have been promoted as a best of both worlds solution.
Return permeability testing has show that the mixture of polymers is
significantly more formation damaging than either single polymer.
A large number of studies and papers have been written as to the use of
polymers as an FLC or as a component of an FLC. Various formulas,
placement methods and clean up protocols have been presented. In all
circumstances, some degree of permeability impairment will remain if
the polymer has penetrated the formation matrix. The degree of
damage is directly related to polymer type, preparation and placement
procedure, presence of an internal breaker, accessibility of an external
breaker, temperature, and base brine composition. This complex
mixture of variables can make for a difficult design matrix that will meet
loss control rate reductions, effective loss control time and clean up
requirements.
77
Formation Damage Due To Preparation & Placement
All organic polymers contain contaminants. These contaminants are
various foreign materials as a fractional percentage of the gross product
weight and micro gels.
Micro gels are defined as aggregations of polymer material that has a
thin semi-hydrated shell surrounding the aggregation. Micro gels range
in size from <10 microns to 100 microns. As the size range indicates,
most of these structures are invisible to the naked eye or at least very
difficult to discern. The lower limit of human eyesight is 34 to 40
microns. An example of a small structure is a single grain of common
table salt. These ionic crystals range in size from +/- 80 to 100 microns.
The most visible type of contaminant is “Fisheyes”. These structures are
like the micro gel but are on a larger scale, 100 microns to several
inches in diameter.
Fisheyes are exclusive to the onsite mixing process or, in some cases,
due to partial hydration from water through damaged containers.
Micro gels are formed in the manufacturing process but can also be
formed during the mixing procedure. These structures are formed as the
result of inadequate dispersion of the polymer in the medium before the
onset of hydration. Methods include, low shear rates in the mixing
device and mixing tank, high polymer addition rates exceeding the
volume of fluid passing through the mixing device and fluid conditions,
such as free water content and pH, that are at odds with polymer
dispersal and hydration.
One answer to these problems was the introduction of pre-hydrated
concentrated polymer slurries. These liquid polymer slurries are less
likely to form fisheyes and micro gels. Liquid slurries do not eliminate
micro gels and fisheyes from the preparation process but do reduce the
volume of structures. Poor mixing conditions and adverse base brine
conditions still promote the formation of micro gels and fisheyes.
Return Permeability Data
50 lb HEC + 50 lb XCD / 1000 gal 9.2 lb/gal NaCl No Breaker Added
Test Temp 175ºF
Berea Sandstone Core
300
250
Ki = 230 mD Inject 1 pore volume of
50 lb HEC + 50 lb XCD
per 1000 gal 9.2 lb/gal
NaCl brine. Hold for
200
30 minutes.
Permeability, mD
Resume flow of Soltrol.
Kf = 136 mD
150
100
50
59% Return
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Cumulative Flow, Pore Volumes
A number of studies examined formation damage by these contaminants
at various temperatures and time lengths. At the high end of conditions,
400oF, permeability impairment of 20% was measured with an HEC
polymer after one month. This was surprising, in that, HEC begins to
degrade at +/- 225oF and is thought to breakdown completely at >300oF
after as little as one hour. Microgels and fisheyes resist thermal
breakdown at elevated temperatures and long time frames.
Return permeability tests also studied the effects of internal and
external breakers and the integrity of polymers at lower temperatures
for extended time frames. An HEC polymer (without breakers) was
tested at 150oF for eight months and was found to have retained most
of its viscosity and microgels after this period.
Return permeability tests showed 55% damage to the formation matrix.
Polymer treated with internal breakers displayed 35% damage.
A process of hydraulic shear and 10 micron absolute filtration was
developed for HEC polymers (other polymers were also included in the
procedure). The process of “shear and filter” gave significant
improvement to return permeability. Formation damage was reduced to
the +/- 4 to 10% range.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 78 -
Hydraulic shearing consists of pumping the polymer-fluid solution
through a small orifice (s) with a sufficient delta pressure across the
orifice, to cause microgels to disintegrate and then hydrate into the base
fluid. The process of shearing also tends to induce a linear structure to
the polymer chains. Filtration to 10 micron absolute removes the
majority of residual microgel structures and other particulate
contaminants. Sheared polymers exhibit higher leak-off rates than do
non-sheared polymers. In other words, these treated polymers flow
through a permeable matrix more readily.
78
Addition of an internal breaker further reduced formation damage to
<5% consistently.
External breakers, while effective to a point, have inconsistent results.
The basis of this effect is one of contact with the polymer. In the
formation matrix, fluids will follow the path of least resistance. Once a
flow path, that can process the available flow rate of the breaker, is
established, the breaker chemical does not affect other portions of the
matrix. Polymer induced damage in the untouched regions then
remains.
An example of this effect was seen in filter cake removal studies. A
wormhole effect was seen in cake structures. Small regions of the cake
were dissolved and allowed flow of cleaning chemicals out to the
formation. Large portions of the cake and any damage in the near well
bore region behind the untouched cake were not removed. In strictly
viscous fluid examples, a fingering of the thinner breaker chemicals is
observed through the polymer-saturated region. As with the wormhole
effect, cleanup chemicals that finger through the polymer region do not
break down untouched polymer.
FLC placement procedures also contribute to the reduction of FLC
effectiveness and subsequent cleanup efforts. Also impacted by
placement methods, is rig time associated with residual FLC left in the
well bore that later return to surface. Frequently very large volumes of
polymer FLC are spotted in and above the loss zone. Excess pill volume
is often strung out in the well annulus during pipe trips out of the well.
Lighter density FLC pills blend with heavier brine above the FLC and
increase the volume FLC while lowering the effective viscosity of the
FLC. The results of this placement are reduced loss control efficiency,
large volumes of polymer fluid returns to surface during subsequent
circulation, lighter fluids cause a “U-Tube” effect during trips which may
not show up until a number of stands have been set back. A slug is
pumped and the volume of hi-viscosity fluid contained in the drill pipe is
ejected in the annulus at some higher point in the well. During
subsequent circulations, unexpected or larger than expected volumes of
polymer fluid return to surface and impact filtration efficiency. Often a
loss of rig time is observed.
Polymer FLC pills are “squeezed” into position in the erroneous belief
that forcing a saturation of the matrix will stop the loss rate quicker. Any
contaminants in the FLC are forced into the formation matrix by higher
delta pressures. These contaminants, either gels or particulates are
most likely to be untreatable by a cleaning chemical. Many of these
contaminants would normally have been stopped at the formation face
and would have been easier to treat. Forcing the polymer into matrix
also insures greater penetration depth in the matrix. The farther from
the face permeability impairment is the higher the rate of unsuccessful
removal and or the greater the cost of removal.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 79 -
“Best Practice” for Linear Polymer FLC Pills is as follows:
• Use a filtered base brine that meets 2 micron absolute quality
standards
• Mixing tanks and lines should be cleaned of all potential
contaminants such as drilling fluid residue, rust and scale and
other foreign materials.
• Mixing hopper systems should be high shear and tanks should
contain an agitation method other than fluid flow from the
hopper. (Air bubble agitation is not an adequate method)
• If a reliably clean and high shear mixing system cannot be
accomplished, a dedicated third party mix system should be
used.
• Polymer FLC pills should be hydraulically sheared then filtered
to 10 micron absolute.
• External breakers for HEC based FLC are acids and or
oxidizers; for biopolymers, oxidizers work in a much shorter
time frame as compared to acids.
• Internal breakers are selected based on a complex set of
design variables. Internal breaker application is discussed in a
subsequent section of this paper.
• FLC pills should be spotted as a balanced fluid column
immediately above the exposed formation. The FLC will
migrate to loss areas sequentially as a function of path of
least resistance principle. Spotting the pill in or below and
through the exposed loss zone subjects the zone to higher
fluid column delta pressures due to the ECD effect. Increased
loss rate due to higher circulating densities causes polymer
FLC pills to enter the formation at rates that will increase the
time and loss volume to reach stability. Also deeper
penetration of the matrix will occur.
• FLC pills should be slightly denser (0.3 to 0.5 ppg) than the
surrounding fluid. This promotes pipe evacuation and
minimizes “string out” from pipe tripping. It also eliminates
the ejection of polymer FLC higher in the well bore from
subsequent slugging events. Even though the denser pill will
blend with lighter fluid below the spot point, the thinning of
the pill is minimized by the fact that the maximum volume
available for thinning before entry to the formation is equal to
the volume of the formation exposed interval. Once that
volume has blended, further formation loss will be full
viscosity FLC. Once loss rates have stabilized, further thinning
of the FLC will be minimal due to the volume of fluid below
the exposed zone; this volume is most often quite small. (On
the order of 1 to 3 barrels)
• FLC volumes should be +/- two times the formation-exposed
interval. This is usually a volume equal to 20 barrels or less.
Very large polymer FLC volumes (>20 bbl) often have large
unused FLC remaining in the well bore that must be dealt with
subsequently. The expense of preparing the large volume is
also wasted. Losses that are not controlled by the initial
application of FLC are a good indicator of the need to reduce
the fluid column delta pressure across the formation face.
Controlling fluid loss via fluid column density is the least
damaging method of loss control. Matrix invasion, by large
volumes of FLC materials, is at higher risk of permanent
permeability damage. Well safety should be the deciding
factor between reducing fluid column density and application
of more or large volume FLC pills.
79
FLC Clean-Up & Breakers
Acids
HEC and biopolymers are acid (HCl) soluble. However, the rate at which
a particular polymer will hydrolyze varies dramatically. HEC polymer
chains begin to breakdown in acid hydrolysis quite rapidly whereas
biopolymers are resistant to acid hydrolysis and require considerably
longer times to break. In both cases, the hydrolysis rate is affected by
temperature, quantity of polymer in solution, base brine composition
and buffer effects of chemicals or brines. Fluids containing zinc do not
respond to most polymer breakers other than strong HCl acid.
The percentage of acid solubility of polymers also varies from 99.8
percent to as low as 92 percent. This percentage differential is referred
to as residue.
Typically, HEC polymers have a lower residue percentage, on the order
of 0.2 to 1.5 percent. Biopolymers have residue percentage of 2 to 8
percent. Xanthan Gum (XC) typically has residue of 2 to 5 percent.
Residue can be an acid insoluble material and or polymer chain
fragments. As the chemical reaction breaks down the polymer, the
polymer chain is broken into chain fragments and then continues to
solvate the polymer material. Chain fragments are left behind due to
insufficient reaction chemical; polymer bonding to matrix surfaces and
inhibiting reaction or an insoluble fraction is left that the chemical
cannot reduce further. Polymer chain fragments act as blocking or
bridging agents in matrix pore structure. Surface bonded polymer acts
to reduce the available pore diameter and thereby reduce flow potential.
Reduction of pore diameter leads to smaller particles being able to
bridge the pore throat and block flow. This same size range now bridges
pore throats that would normally pass 2-5 micron particles.
(Succinoglycans are very acid tolerant)
Oxidation by Free Radicals and Oxidizers
The classes of these agents are peroxydisufate, perchlorate, peroxide
and hypochlorite.
Of these agents, peroxides are able to work in all brine types with some
degree of efficacy.
Using peroxides in formation matrix can be very destructive if an
uncontrolled reaction with a hydrocarbon fuel source is induced. Without
careful engineering, very high temperatures can occur that will affect
the metals in the well bore as well as the formation structure. Generally,
peroxides are used as a surface agent to reclaim contaminated brines.
The perchlorates, sulfates and hypochlorites work in specific brine types.
They each have their best usage parameters. All types have been seen
to be ineffective or non-effective in brines containing zinc.
The primary formation damaging mechanism is the precipitation of
sulfate or carbonate by-products. The volume of precipitant is related to
the base brine type, pH, and temperature and secondary chemicals in
matrix. A secondary by product from these reactions is the release of
chlorine and bromine (in brines containing Br) gases. Both gasses are
very toxic and must be planned for in surface operations or in out-
gassing when soluble gas returns in the fluid stream from the well bore.
In most cases the volumes of gas are relatively small and proper
ventilation is the required safety measure.
Similar to acid reduction, polymer chain fragments are left in matrix and
provide a source of permeability impairment.
Enzyme Reduction
The two classes of enzyme most often used are Cellulase and
Hemicellulase. Enzymes are very attractive breaking agents due to their
non-toxic nature, low concentration strengths, fast action and ability to
produce the lowest volume of residue and polymer fragments.
Enzymes are inhibited by divalent ions such as Ca and Zn. For all
practical purposes enzymes can only be used in monovalent brines.
Enzymes are also temperature and pH sensitive. The effective working
range for this material is 40 to 140oF and 3 to 6 pH.
Research has developed more tolerant strains of enzymes that work in
slightly higher temperatures and into the low base pH range. Enzymes
are most frequently seen as a breaking agent for frac fluids. Damage
mechanisms are the same as with other breakers mainly fragment
residue impairment.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 80 -
Internal & External Breakers
The family of materials used to break polymers includes acids, free
radicals, oxidizers, enzymes and linking agents. Of this group linking Fluid & Breaker Compatibility
agents are used exclusively in surface brine reconditioning and hydrogen Peroxid
Peroxy
Perchlorat
Hypo
Enzyme
peroxide is most often used only as a surface treatment for brine Fluid HCL disufat chlorite
e e s
reclamation. Neither of these agents is recommended as matrix insitu e s
treatments. NH4Cl Xf Xe Xc Xc Xc Xd
Internal and external breakers are usually the same material that is NaCl
applied in a different manner. Internal breakers are added as liquid Xf Xe Xc Xc Xc Xd
KCL
solutions to the FLC mix. The breaker begins to work at once. The
degree of break and the time frame in which the FLC is deemed to be NaBr
Xf Xe Xc Xc Xc Xd
broken is based on a complex set off variables that include the quantity KBr
of breaker per unit volume of FLC, quantity of polymer per unit volume Formate Xf Xe Xc Xc Xc Xd
FLC, base brine type and mix, temperature, and the presence of other
inhibiting chemicals and conditions. CaCl Xf Xe Xb Xb Xb Na
At some point in future, the FLC will reach a reduced viscosity level CaBr Xf Xe Xb Xb Xb Na
considered broken. This is not necessarily the reduction of all polymers ZnBr Xa Xe Na Na Na Na
in the FLC.
Another form of internal breaker is a delayed reaction breaker. These
a. Requires heat, 150oF
materials are usually granular forms of common breakers that either
b. Precipitants form
have a protective coating or depend on the time needed for the breaker
c. Precipitants may form
to enter solution as the delay agent. Coated breakers have water-
d. Temperature & pH limited
soluble coatings that inhibit the breaker entering water solution or have
e. Not suitable for rig site use
a coating that requires a specific chemical to strip the coating and
f. May expend in the formation before effective reaction occurs
expose the breaker to fluids that allow solution. There are also water
insoluble breakers that require an activating chemical (such as acid) to
The bulk of breaker technology study has been focused on short-term (2
start the breaking reaction. All of these materials are essentially
– 12 hours) activity. Brine reclamation, frac and gravel pack polymer
formation face or filter cake agents. The particulate structures prevent
degradation are the drivers for this focus.
entry of the breaker into the formation matrix.
Extended or controlled break times for FLC has been largely ignored
External breakers are concentrated solutions of the break chemical that
with the exception of “drill in” filter cake cleaning. Hypochlorites and
are pumped to the formation face or into the matrix. These solutions
acids have been added to linear polymers in varying concentrations to
may be blended with the base brine or other liquid medium. The intent
provide some degree on degradation at intervals =/> 24 hours. The
of external breakers is usually rapid treatment of polymer flow
results are not clear and treatments are based on empirical data and
restriction, on the order of minutes to an hour or two.
observation only.
External breaker efficiency is subject to the degree in which the breaker
A controlled break time and potential negative reactions study should be
can contact the polymer structures. Fingering of the breaker chemical
modeled in the lab before use to provide a sound basis for breaker
through the FLC body produces regions of polymer reduction and leaves
treatment.
large sections of formation matrix untouched. This may produce a
Other Damage Mechanisms
production rate consistent with predictions for the zone but does not
Three other damage mechanisms have been seen in polymer use.
leave the formation in optimum condition.
Cross Link & Precipitation
Cross linking of linear gel structures by metal salts and precipitation of
base brine salts due to a reaction with other chemicals.
Biopolymers are sensitive to iron in several valence states. Iron causes
The combination of internal and external breakers has been shown to be
the polymer to cross-link into (most often) very viscose masses that
the most effective at removing the volume of FLC resident in the
completely plug the formation matrix. Subsequent treatments with
formation matrix.
breaking chemicals are often ineffective. Iron contamination comes from
In virtually all situations, it is unlikely that all polymer FLC material has
the base brine and or from the reactions of acids in tubulars and
been reduced and removed. Production efficiency (or impairment) is
formation. Iron chelating agents such as erythorbates should be used to
measured as a skin factor. A value of “0” skin is said to mean no
prevent Fe2 and Fe3 ions from interacting with these polymers.
damage. A positive skin factor is said to be an indication of permeability
HEC is tolerant of iron contamination but reacts with other polyvalent
impairment, the higher the number the greater the impairment.
Negative skin factors are also observed. This is usually seen after acid cations and other organic compounds.
stimulations and or frac procedures. A source of cross-linking ions can be the formation itself. Many types of
Low skin factors of <1 to 0 are viewed as acceptable values and any clay contain aluminum in their structure. Ion exchange due the chemical
impairment induced by FLC materials is thought to be sufficiently reactions with acids or other chemicals can release AL ions and they
removed to pose no reduction to produced rates.
may become a source of contamination.
Formation matrix dynamics in a virgin state often have the capacity to
flow in excess of what is considered “0” skin. This excess factor is most A list of some of the substances that cause cross-linking in polymers
likely impaired by FLC materials as well as other mechanisms. The (HEC & Biopolymers) is as follows:
treatment of FLC and other impairment agents to a low or negative skin • CrCl3
is an acceptable standard but should never be considered to indicate • Cr (NO3) 3
zero matrix damage. • Borate Salts
A number of studies have shown that when formation fluids are • AlCl3
channeled through relatively small flow paths and at angles • Zn (NO3) 3
perpendicular to the matrix, fines production and migration are • ZnCl2
increased. Formation cementation and structure integrity are also likely • ZrOCL2
affected negatively. Fingering of formation water through hydrocarbon • Etanedial
flow is also more likely. Many producing wells with very low skins have • Ethylene Carbonate Cyclic Ester
failed at uneconomic points and may have flow channeling as a primary • Propylene Carbonate
driver. • Tetrastearyl Titanate

80
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 81 -
Metal Ion Precipitation Cross Linked Polymers Designed for FLC Applications
Precipitation of divalent or monovalent ions is seen in some
circumstances during well procedures. Borate cross-linkers are known to Cross-linked gels are generally HEC derivative11 or CMHEC-based
cause Zinc to precipitate from brines containing ZnBr. A buffer with systems. For the purposes of this section we will only discuss the HEC
acetic acid is necessary to reduce or stop this reaction. What negative derivative based systems. They function by forming a filter cake at the
impacts other link agents may have on brines is not clear at this time. formation face or enter the permeability of the formation and stop loses
HEC is normally the polymer of choice with ZnBr fluids. It is well by plugging the pore throats with the cross-linked gelled structure.
established that a range of 0.1 to 6 percent ZnBr will prevent polymer Whether the cross-linked fluids enter the formation or not is generally
from proper yield. HEC forms hard polymer particles and stringy viscose dependent on their polymer type and concentration, the pore throat
chains under these conditions. These by products can be very hard if size, the overbalance pressure and the bottom hole temperature. The
not impossible to treat. systems are removed in a manner similar to linear systems. The same
A second effect that is often over looked; polymer blends at the considerations must be used when deciding on a break time. With cross-
necessary Zn percentage mixing with fluids that have less than the linked systems however, break times of up to 48 hours may be possible.
necessary ZnBr concentration. Break times longer than these risk that slight chemistry variations may
Light ZnBr fluid and ZnBr fluid with summer TCT blends to +/- 16.0 ppg, not allow a total break
are often used during completion and work over operations. Volumes of
HEC polymer mixing with low Zinc brines have been observed to react in
a manner such as trying to make an initial blend in a light ZnBr and
have also been observed to form rubbery glutinous masses that were
sufficient to impair mechanical operations in the well bore and were very
resistant to chemical removal. To avoid this reaction HEC polymer pills
must be blended with a maximum ZnBr concentration and a high ZnBr
concentration spacer of 5 to 10 barrels must be pumped ahead and
behind the pill to insure sufficient ZnBr in the vicinity the pill to inhibit
the low Zinc reactions.

HEC Precipitation
HEC precipitation at higher temperatures has been demonstrated in the
Cross Linked Polymer System (on-site mixing)
past several years. Brines composed of NaCl, KCl, NaBr and CaCl were
This type of system uses a specially formulated HEC polymer that has
tested at various polymer loads and temperatures from 135oF to 240oF.
been treated with cross-link sites. The base polymer is added to
In NaCl and KCL brines, HEC was seen to precipitate beginning at +/-
completion brine on-site. Once the pill is ready to pump, a cross linker is
150oF. The precipitant was found to be a water insoluble mass of HEC.
added. The pill is given time to cross link before it reaches the zone
The precipitated masses were found to be soluble in HCl concentrations
as low as 1%.
Applications and Characteristics:
The obvious danger would be precipitation in the formation matrix
• Stops losses completely
outside the ability of HCl to reach the mass. The blocked region would
• Easily removed with external or internal breakers
then be said to be permanently impaired.
• Can withstand high overbalance pressures
CaCl and NaBr fluids were tested with a range of polymers loads but no
• Can run tools through the fluid loss material
precipitation was observed. At this time continued study with formats,
Limitations and Precautions:
CaBr and ZnBr has not been initiated.
• Internal breakers used for 48 hour breaks or less
• Must be mixed on location
Cost: Moderate (depends on volume)

Pre-prepared cross linked gel particles

This system uses the same crosslinkable HEC as the previous system,
but it is manufactured and delivered “ready to pump.”
Applications and Characteristics:
• Stops losses completely
• No on-site chemical mixing required
• Can withstand high overbalance pressures
• Can run tools through the fluid loss material
Limitations and Precautions:
• No internal breakers can be added.
• Bulky to ship
Cost:
Moderate to High (depends on volume)

81
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 82 -
Zinc Bromide Cross Linked Gel System Particulate FLC Preparation & Formulation
This system uses the same cross linked HEC as the previous systems, Particulate FLC formulas are essentially blends of sized particles,
but is mixed in zinc bromide. Special mixing procedures and additives polymer and starch in base brine that will bridge and seal the aperture
allow hydration and cross linking in zinc bromide of a wide range of or pore throat where fluid loss is occurring. The particle size blend is a
densities.
function of the “Basketballs & Marbles” principle, i.e. a particle 33% of
Applications and Characteristics: aperture will bridge. The mixture has particles that range a variety of
• Stops losses completely sizes that will then bridge on the initial particle matrix. The polymer and
• Only pumpable zinc bromide system available modified starch act is filtrate reducers for the tight bridging particle mix.
Limitations and Precautions: FLC formulations that have been properly designed, form a very thin (<
• Must be mixed on-site
0.09375”) cake that exhibits very low HTHP spurt and total ml volumes
• Externally broken only
Cost: High (depends on volume) e.g. 2 ml or less spurt and <
10 ml total filtrate.
FLC formulations should be
tested and verified with
aloxite disk HTHP or
Best Practices K-Max & Z-Max FLC Systems
Gravel/Screen PPD testing.
Brines
K-MAX Plus gel pills can be prepared in the following brines: Note: HTHP testing for
• Potassium chloride (KCl) particulate FLC formulations is
• Sodium chloride (NaCl)
done against aloxite disks
• Sodium bromide (NaBr)
• Calcium chloride (CaCl2) sized to replicate the
• Ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) formation face mean pore diameter.
• Seawater
• CaCl2/calcium bromide (CaBr2) brines FLC mixtures are used when:
• Little or no penetration of the formation matrix by fluids or
Gel pills can be used in brine densities of 8.3 to 14-lb/gal. To ensure the FLC materials is desired
condition of the brine, Halliburton should supply the customer with base • Little or no penetration of the sand control screen or gravel
brines for K-MAX Plus service. These brines should be prepared, tested, pack are desired
and shipped to locations like other fluids. Brine tanks should be cleaned • Moderate loss rates exist
of contaminants that might interfere with the reactions of WG-33 gelling • Heavy loss rates exist
agent.
Particulate FLC pills are specially designed formulations of Dril-N fluids.
The particulates types are:
• Salt (Baraplug)
• Calcium Carbonate (Baracarb)
• Oil-Soluble Resin (Bararesin)
Note: Oil-Soluble Resins are used infrequently. OSR
particulates tend to become plastic at temperatures well below
their melt point and are known to extrude into and plug pore
throats. OSR mixtures are used in some international fields
with low SBHT conditions.

Particle size grades for FLC formulas are either two or three grades
dependent on circumstances.
Typically, sized particle ratios are;
• 40-60% of the primary bridge size
• The balance of the solids in the smaller grade (s)
• Most Baraplug formulations are two size blends
• Most Baracarb formulations are three size blends.

Polymer loading is dependent on the base fluid type:

• For monovalent & Formate fluids 0.75 to 1 lb/bbl N-Vis or N-
Vis L is used
• For divalent fluids 1-2 lb/bbl Liqui-Vis EP or Bromi-Vis is used
•
Note: Any FLC using HEC, as a suspension agent must remain in
agitation until pumped.

Starch Filtrate Control Loading is

• 3 to 4 lb/bbl for either monovalent, Formate or divalent fluids

pH buffer loading is
• 1 to 4 lb/bbl for mono and divalent fluids
• 0.5 to 1 lb/bbl for divalent fluids containing ZnBr2

82
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 83 -
The total solids load of an FLC pill is between 25 and 40 lb/bbl. Salt Based FLC Guidelines for Use
Pilot testing under the specific conditions to be met is strongly Pre-Pack FLC
recommended. FLC formulations that will use salt as the particulate must insure that the
carrying fluid and the fluid adjacent to the FLC pill in the well bore is
saturated relative to NaCl.
The base fluid can be any brine type, but must be treated with NaCl to
the saturation point of sodium in that brine.
Example Baraplug FLC Pre-Pack The solubility of NaCl creases with temperature. Since the salt volume
necessary for saturation at down hole conditions will not dissolve at
MATERIAL UNIT QUANTITY ambient surface conditions, we must add the necessary salt volume to
the pill so that saturation is reached down hole. The finer grade of
KCl 8.6 ppg Bbl 0.87 Baraplug 20 will become soluble as temperature increases more readily
than courser grained salt particles. We therefore increase the Baraplug
Barabrine 0.2 gal/5 20 loading in a pill formula for this reason.
Can
Defoam bbl Fluids that reside above and below the salt FLC will also affect the salt
Evaporated load of the pill. The soluble salt level for these fluids will draw from the
Bag 120 ppb
Salt salt pill and can degrade or destroy the ability of the salt pill to perform
N-Vis Bag 2 ppb as an FLC.
A spacer of NaCl saturated fluid (5-10 bbl) should be pumped before
N-Drill HT Bag 4 ppb and after the salt FLC. These spacers will buffer against salt dissolution
in the pill.
Temperature and salt solubility again must be considered.
Baraplug 20 Bag 15 lb/bbl
Two methods can be used to ensure sufficient salt is in the spacers:
Baraplug 40 Bag 20 lb/bbl • Treat the salt saturated spacer with a small amount of
polymer (XC or HEC) sufficient to suspend the excess salt
load; usually 0.5 to 1 lb/bbl. Add the calculated amount of
Barabuf Bag 4 lb/bbl
excess salt to the spacer
• Prepare the spacer as a salt saturated mix. Add Baraplug 20
to the FLC volume sufficient to saturate the spacer at BHT.
Example Baracarb FLC Pre-Pack
Guidelines for Baraplug Pre-Pack FLC
MATERIAL UNIT QUANTITY The two most common mistakes made with particulate FLC pills is
spotting too much pill volume and attempting to squeeze the pill into
12.7 PPG CaBr Bbl 0.96 place.
The thin film cake parameter means that large volumes are not needed
Barabrine Defoam Can 0.2 gal/bbl to achieve a seal. Excessive volumes led to perforation tunnel packing
and fill in the well bore. Packed perforations are very difficult to clean
Bromi-Vis Can 1 can / 8 bbls and contribute to poor sand control operations and reduced production.
A small volume FLC is more efficient and less likely to form masses in
Baracarb 5 Bag 5 lb/bbl the perfs or well bore. It is much better to add an additional FLC to a
loss zone that did not respond sufficiently to the first treatment than it is
Baracarb 25 Bag 10 lb/bbl to deal with the clean up of excessive volume pills.
Particulate LC pills have little or no resistance to delta pressure until a
relatively stable cake has formed. Once formed, the cake has
Baracarb 50 Bag 16 lb/bbl
remarkable resistance to pressure delta. High velocity or excessive shear
as the cake is initially forming, causes particles to shear apart and
Barabuf Bag 1 lb/bbl
disrupts the normal deposition process and allows volumes of small
particles, polymer fluid and starch to penetrate the formation or screen
Formation Permeability Particle Damage Index face. The disruption can be sufficient to cause FLC failure and or cause
formation and pack damage. The dynamics of cake formation are
Permeability Mean Particle Size Most Damaging different from drilling conditions versus FLC in completion. FLC cakes
Milidarcies Pore Size To Bridge Particle Size Range perform best when the loss velocity is < 20 bph. At higher rates, we
4000 63 21 9 6 observe the tendency of particulate FLC pills to form bridges inside pipe
3000 55 18 8 5
or screen and to form large plugs of materials in perforations.
2000 45 15 6 4
Particulate FLC pills should be allowed to migrate into place without
1000 32 11 5 3
additional squeeze pressure. If loss velocities are high, consider the use
750 27 9 4 2.7
500 22 7 3 2
of a polymer FLC in front of the particulate FLC to aid uniform cake
250 16 5 2 1.6 deposition.
100 10 3 1.4 1
50 7 2 1 0.7

83
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 84 -
Best Practices for Baraplug FLC Pre-Pack Pills: starch enrobed salt will resist dissolution. A breaker solution of
• Saturate the FLC relative to NaCl solubility in a particular fluid either oxidizer or acid in under saturated fluid is often
at the actual BHT parameter necessary to achieve acceptable clean up of a salt-based FLC.
• Use a filtered base brine that meets 2 micron absolute quality • Glycol treatments are used with particulate FLC pills to
standards enhance cake lift off and cleanup.
• Mixing tanks and lines should be cleaned of all potential • Salt-based FLC pills should control the loss rate to < 1 bph
contaminants such as drilling fluid residue, rust and scale and (preferably near 0 bph). Loss rates greater than this indicate a
other foreign materials. problem with formulation mix and volume or relative NaCl
• Mixing hopper systems should be high shear and tanks should saturation around the pill.
contain an agitation method other than fluid flow from the • Salt based FLC pills that have loss rates > 0.5 bph are prone
hopper. (Air bubble agitation is not an adequate method) to dissolution and loss control failure.
• If a reliably clean and high shear mixing system cannot be
accomplished, a dedicated third party mix system should be Guidelines Post-Pack FLC
used. The two most common mistakes made with particulate FLC pills post-
• External breakers for HEC based FLC are acids and or pack is spotting too much pill volume and failing to size properly for
oxidizers; for biopolymers, oxidizers work in a much shorter screen aperture bridging.
time frame as compared to acids. The thin film cake parameter means that large volumes are not needed
• Internal breakers are selected based on a complex set of to achieve a seal.
design variables. Internal breaker application is discussed in a Excessive volumes lead to packing and fill in the production screen
subsequent section of this paper. Contact your Baroid CFS assembly and lower zone hardware. Pack and fill tend to become a
Technical Professional for internal breaker application. rubbery mass that requires excessive slick line bailing or coil tubing
• Excessive polymer and starch loading will significantly impair intervention to clear. The fill is difficult to clean and contributes to
clean up by reverse flow or breakers and may cause clean up delayed production and considerable well maintenance expense.
to fail. Improperly sized salt-based FLC pills penetrate the gravel pack and
• FLC pills should be spotted as a balanced fluid column potentially the formation face. Polymer enrobed particulates are not
immediately above the exposed formation. The FLC will easily cleared from the pack and formation matrix.
migrate to loss areas sequentially as a function of path of A small volume FLC is more efficient and less likely to form masses in
least resistance principle. Spotting the pill in, below or through the production profile. It is much better to add an additional FLC to a
the exposed loss zone, subjects the zone to higher fluid loss zone that did not respond sufficiently to the first treatment than it is
column delta pressures due to the ECD effect. Increased loss to deal with the clean up of excessive volume pills.
rate due to higher circulating densities causes FLC pills to Pill volume formulae and NaCl solubility charts for pre-pack and post-
enter the formation at rates that will increase the time and pack FLC are located in the “Engineering Calculations & Data”
loss volume to reach stability; also deeper penetration of the section of the book. Post-pack Baraplug FLC pills have a single
matrix will occur. formulation for screen sizes of 6 to 12.
• Salt FLC pills require a lead (10 bbl) & tail spacer (5-10 bbl) of
NaCl saturated fluid to protect against early salt dissolution.
Wire Wrapped GP Screen Index
• Prepare and pump the spacer/pill/spacer sequence in to the
Size To Size To
pipe and circulate to the bit or circulation point. Bullhead the
GP Screen Bridge Bridge
first five (5) bbl of saturated spacer below the circulation point Gauge Micron Inches Microns Inches
then spot the balance of the spacer and pill as a balanced
0.018 488 0.019 162 0.006
column between the pipe and annulus. Leave the tail spacer 0.016 422 0.016 140 0.0055
in the pipe. 0.014 356 0.014 118 0.0046
• FLC pills should be slightly denser (0.3 to 0.5 ppg) than the 0.012 305 0.012 102 0.004
surrounding fluid. This promotes pipe evacuation and 0.008 203 0.008 68 0.003
minimizes “string out” from pipe tripping. It also eliminates 0.006 152 0.006 51 0.002
the ejection of polymer FLC higher in the well bore from 0.004 102 0.004 34 0.001
subsequent slugging events. Even though the denser pill will
blend with lighter fluid below the spot point, the thinning of
the pill is minimized by the fact that the maximum volume
available for thinning before entry to the formation is equal to BRIDGING REQUIREMENTS ON SAND FACE OR
the volume of the formation exposed interval. Once that RESIN COATED SAND SCREENS
volume has blended, further formation loss will be full
viscosity FLC. Once loss rates have stabilized, further thinning SAND PARTICLE
of the FLC will be minimal due to the volume of fluid below SIZE PERMEABILITY PORE SIZE SIZE
the exposed zone; this volume is most often quite small. (On (U.S. (DARCY) (MICRONS) TO BRIDGE
the order of 1 to 3 barrels) MESH) (MICRONS)
• Excessively large FLC volumes often leave a large unused FLC 12/20 120 346 115
volume remaining in the well bore that must be dealt with 20/40 70 265 88
subsequently. The expense of preparing the large volume is
40/60 40 200 67
also wasted. Losses that are not controlled by the initial
application of FLC are a good indicator of the need to reduce
the fluid column delta pressure across the formation face.
Controlling fluid loss via fluid column density is the least
damaging method of loss control. Matrix invasion, by large
volumes of FLC materials, is at higher risk of permanent
permeability damage. Well safety should be the deciding
factor between reducing fluid column density and application
of more or large volume FLC pills.
• Over sized or excessive application of salt FLC pills will lead to
perforation plugging and fill material in the well bore. Both
circumstances contribute significantly to increased skin
factors, cleaning expense and rig time expense.
• Salt-based FLC pills will not necessarily degrade with water
flow from the formation or across the pill face. Polymer &

84
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 85 -
Best Practices for Baraplug FLC Post-Pack Pills: • Salt-based FLC pills should control the loss rate to < 1 bph
• Saturate the FLC relative to NaCl solubility in a particular fluid (preferably near 0 bph). Loss rates greater than this indicate a
at the actual BHT parameter problem with formulation mix and volume or relative NaCl
• Use a filtered base brine that meets 2 micron absolute quality saturation around the pill.
standards • Salt based FLC pills that have loss rates > 0.5 bph are prone
• Mixing tanks and lines should be cleaned of all potential to dissolution and loss control failure.
contaminants such as drilling fluid residue, rust and scale and
other foreign materials.
• Mixing hopper systems should be high shear and tanks should
contain an agitation method other than fluid flow from the
hopper. (Air bubble agitation is not an adequate method)
• If a reliably clean and high shear mixing system cannot be
accomplished, a dedicated third party mix system should be
used.
• External breakers for HEC based FLC are acids and or
oxidizers; for biopolymers, oxidizers work in a much shorter
time frame as compared to acids.
• Internal breakers are selected based on a complex set of
design variables. Internal breaker application is discussed in a
subsequent section of this paper. Contact your Baroid CFS
Technical Professional for internal breaker application.
• Excessive polymer and starch loading will significantly impair
clean up by reverse flow or breakers and may cause clean up
to fail.
• Calculate the require FLC volume using the formulae
• FLC pills should be spotted as a balanced fluid column
immediately above the gravel pack cross over tool. The FLC
will migrate to loss areas sequentially as a function of path of
least resistance principle. Bull heading the FLC into the blank
and screening densities causes FLC pills to enter the screen at
rates & pressures that tend to shear particles and polymer
before an effective cake matrix can develop. Increased time
and volume is needed to reach stability (if it doesn’t fail
altogether); also, deeper penetration of the matrix will occur.
• High loss rates (> 15-20 bph) can also contribute to pill shear
and or bridging plugs rather than uniform cake formation.
High loss rates may require the use of a high-vis polymer FLC
in front of the salt-based FLC to slow the pill application rate
in the production profile. The lead saturated spacer can be
used or increased in size to perform this task.
• Salt FLC pills require a lead (10 bbl) & tail spacer (5-10 bbl) of
NaCl saturated fluid to protect against early salt dissolution.
• Prepare and pump the spacer/pill/spacer sequence in to the
pipe and circulate to the circulation point. Bullhead the first
five (5) bbl of saturated spacer below the circulation point
then spot the balance of the spacer and pill as a balanced
column between the pipe and annulus. Leave the tail spacer
in the pipe.
• FLC pills should be slightly denser (0.3 to 0.5 ppg) than the
surrounding fluid. This promotes pipe evacuation and
minimizes “string out” from pipe tripping. It also eliminates
the ejection of polymer FLC higher in the well bore from
subsequent slugging events. Even though the denser pill will
blend with lighter fluid below the spot point, the thinning of
the pill is minimized by the fact that the maximum volume
available for thinning before entry to the formation is equal to
the volume of the formation exposed interval. Once that
volume has blended, further formation loss will be full
viscosity FLC. Once loss rates have stabilized, further thinning
of the FLC will be minimal due to the volume of fluid below
the exposed zone; this volume is most often quite small. (On
the order of 1 to 3 barrels)
• Over sized or excessive application of salt FLC pills will lead to
production profile plugging and fill. Both circumstances
contribute significantly to increased skin factors, cleaning
expense and rig time expense.
• Salt-based FLC pills will not necessarily degrade with water
flow from the formation or across the pill face. Polymer &
starch enrobed salt will resist dissolution. A breaker solution of
either oxidizer or acid in under saturated fluid is often
necessary to achieve acceptable clean up of a salt-based FLC.
• Glycol treatments are used with particulate FLC pills to
enhance cake lift off and cleanup. Contact your CFS Technical
Professional for formulation.

85
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 86 -
Carbonate Based FLC Guidelines for Use
Baracarb Pre-Pack FLC
FLC formulations that will use Baracarb as the particulate are widely
used in the industry. They respond excellently to Acetic and Hydrochloric
acid clean up.
The base fluid can be any brine type, oil or synthetic fluid. Oil and
synthetic fluid require specialized carry and filtrate agents.
Guidelines for Baraplug Pre-Pack FLC
The two most common mistakes made with particulate FLC pills is
spotting too much pill volume and attempting to squeeze the pill into
place.
The thin film cake parameter means that large volumes are not needed
to achieve a seal. Excessive volumes led to perforation tunnel packing
and fill in the well bore. Packed perforations are very difficult to clean
and contribute to poor sand control operations and reduced production.
A small volume FLC is more efficient and less likely to form masses in
the perfs or well bore. It is much better to add an additional FLC to a
loss zone that did not respond sufficiently to the first treatment than it is
to deal with the clean up of excessive volume pills.
Particulate LC pills have little or no resistance to delta pressure until a
relatively stable cake has formed. Once formed, the cake has
remarkable resistance to pressure delta. High velocity or excessive shear
as the cake is initially forming, causes particles to shear apart and
disrupts the normal deposition process and allows volumes of small
particles, polymer fluid and starch to penetrate the formation or screen
face. The disruption can be sufficient to cause FLC failure and or cause
formation and pack damage. The dynamics of cake formation in an FLC
application differ from drilling conditions. FLC cakes perform best when
the loss velocity is < 20 bph. At higher rates, we observe the tendency
of particulate FLC pills to form bridges inside pipe or screen and to form
large plugs of materials in perforations. Particulate FLC pills should be
allowed to migrate into place without additional squeeze pressure. If
loss velocities are high, consider the use of a polymer FLC in front of the
particulate FLC to aid uniform cake deposition.
Best Practices for Baracarb FLC Pre-Pack Pills:
• Use a filtered base brine that meets 2 micron absolute quality
standards
• Mixing tanks and lines should be cleaned of all potential
contaminants such as drilling fluid residue, rust and scale and
other foreign materials.
• Mixing hopper systems should be high shear and tanks should
contain an agitation method other than fluid flow from the
hopper. (Air bubble agitation is not an adequate method)
• If a reliably clean and high shear mixing system cannot be
accomplished, a dedicated third party mix system should be
used.
• External breakers for HEC based FLC are acids and or
oxidizers; for biopolymers, oxidizers work in a much shorter
time frame as compared to acids.
• Internal breakers are selected based on a complex set of
design variables. Internal breaker application is discussed in a
subsequent section of this paper. Contact your Baroid CFS
Technical Professional for internal breaker application.
• Excessive polymer and starch loading will significantly impair
clean up by reverse flow or breakers and may cause clean up
to fail.
• FLC pills should be spotted as a balanced fluid column
immediately above the exposed formation. The FLC will
migrate to loss areas sequentially as a function of path of
least resistance principle. Spotting the pill in, below or through
the exposed loss zone, subjects the zone to higher fluid
column delta pressures due to the ECD effect. Increased loss
rate due to higher circulating densities causes FLC pills to
enter the formation at rates that will increase the time and
loss volume to reach stability; also deeper penetration of the
matrix will occur.
86
• FLC pills should be slightly denser (0.3 to 0.5 ppg) than the
surrounding fluid. This promotes pipe evacuation and
minimizes “string out” from pipe tripping. It also eliminates
the ejection of FLC higher in the well bore from subsequent
slugging events. Even though the denser pill will blend with
lighter fluid below the spot point, the thinning of the pill is
minimized by the fact that the maximum volume available for
thinning before entry to the formation is equal to the volume
of the formation exposed interval. Once that volume has
blended, further formation loss will be full viscosity FLC. Once
loss rates have stabilized, further thinning of the FLC will be
minimal due to the volume of fluid below the exposed zone;
this volume is most often quite small. (On the order of 1 to 3
barrels)
• Excessively large FLC volumes often leave a large unused FLC
volume remaining in the well bore that must be dealt with
subsequently. The expense of preparing the large volume is
also wasted. Losses that are not controlled by the initial
application of FLC are a good indicator of the need to reduce
the fluid column delta pressure across the formation face.
Controlling fluid loss via fluid column density is the least
damaging method of loss control. Matrix invasion, by large
volumes of FLC materials, is at higher risk of permanent
permeability damage. Well safety should be the deciding
factor between reducing fluid column density and application
of more or large volume FLC pills.
• Over sized or excessive application of carbonate loading in
FLC pills will lead to perforation plugging and fill material in
the well bore. Both circumstances contribute significantly to
increased skin factors, cleaning expense and rig time expense.
• Carbonate-based FLC pills will often lift off when flow from the
reservoir initiates; however, a cleanup solution is usually
applied to insure removal of particles, polymer and starch. A
breaker solution of either oxidizer or acid will attack the
polymers and either Acetic or Hydrochloric acid will dissolve
the carbonate component.
• Glycol treatments are used with particulate FLC pills to
enhance cake lift off and cleanup.
• Carbonate-based FLC pills should control the loss rate to < 1
bph (preferably near 0 bph). Loss rates greater than this
indicate a problem with formulation mix or application
technique.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 87 -
Post-Pack FLC • Excessively large FLC volumes often leave a large unused FLC
Guidelines for Baracarb Post-Pack FLC volume remaining in the well bore that must be dealt with
The two most common mistakes made with particulate FLC pills post- subsequently. The expense of preparing the large volume is
pack is spotting too much pill volume and failing to size properly for also wasted. Losses that are not controlled by the initial
screen aperture bridging. application of FLC are a good indicator of the need to reduce
The thin film cake parameter means that large volumes are not needed the fluid column delta pressure across the formation face.
to achieve a seal. Controlling fluid loss via fluid column density is the least
Excessive volumes lead to packing and fill in the production screen damaging method of loss control. Matrix invasion, by large
assembly and lower zone hardware. Pack and fill tend to become a volumes of FLC materials, is at higher risk of permanent
rubbery mass that requires excessive slick line bailing or coil tubing permeability damage. Well safety should be the deciding
intervention to clear. The fill is difficult to clean and contributes to factor between reducing fluid column density and application
delayed production and considerable well maintenance expense. of more or large volume FLC pills.
Improperly sized salt-based FLC pills penetrate the gravel pack and • Over sized or excessive application of carbonate loading in
potentially the formation face. Polymer enrobed particulates are not FLC pills will lead to perforation plugging and fill material in
easily cleared from the pack and formation matrix. the well bore. Both circumstances contribute significantly to
A small volume FLC is more efficient and less likely to form masses in increased skin factors, cleaning expense and rig time expense.
the production profile. It is much better to add an additional FLC to a • Carbonate-based FLC pills will often lift off when flow from the
loss zone that did not respond sufficiently to the first treatment than it is reservoir initiates; however, a cleanup solution is usually
to deal with the clean up of excessive volume pills. applied to insure removal of particles, polymer and starch. A
Pill volume formulae and NaCl solubility charts for pre-pack and post- breaker solution of either oxidizer or acid will attack the
pack FLC are located in the “Engineering Calculations & Data” polymers and either Acetic or Hydrochloric acid will dissolve
section of the book. Post-pack Baracarb FLC pills have a single the carbonate component.
formulation for screen sizes of 6 to 12. • Glycol treatments are used with particulate FLC pills to
enhance cake lift off and cleanup.
Best Practices for Baracarb FLC Post-Pack Pills: • Carbonate-based FLC pills should control the loss rate to < 1
• Use a filtered base brine that meets 2 micron absolute quality bph (preferably near 0 bph). Loss rates greater than this
standards indicate a problem with formulation mix or application
• Mixing tanks and lines should be cleaned of all potential technique.
contaminants such as drilling fluid residue, rust and scale and
other foreign materials. Example Baraplug FLC Post-Pack
• Mixing hopper systems should be high shear and tanks should
contain an agitation method other than fluid flow from the MATERIAL UNIT QUANTITY
hopper. (Air bubble agitation is not an adequate method) KCl 8.6 ppg Bbl 0.87
• If a reliably clean and high shear mixing system cannot be Barabrine
accomplished, a dedicated third party mix system should be Can 0.2 gal/5 bbl
Defoam
used.
Evaporated Salt Bag 120 ppb
• External breakers for HEC based FLC are acids and or
oxidizers; for biopolymers, oxidizers work in a much shorter N-Vis Bag 2 ppb
time frame as compared to acids. N-Drill HT Bag 4 ppb
• Internal breakers are selected based on a complex set of Baraplug 50 Bag 14 lb/bbl
design variables. Internal breaker application is discussed in a
subsequent section of this paper. Contact your Baroid CFS Baraplug 6/300 Bag 21 lb/bbl
Technical Professional for internal breaker application. Barabuf Bag 4 lb/bbl
• Excessive polymer and starch loading will significantly impair
clean up by reverse flow or breakers and may cause clean up
Example Baracarb FLC Post-Pack
to fail.
• Calculate the require FLC volume using the formulae in the MATERIAL UNIT QUANTITY
“Engineering Calculations & Data” section of the book. 12.7 PPG CaBr Bbl 0.96
• FLC pills should be spotted as a balanced fluid column Barabrine Defoam Can 0.2 gal/bbl
immediately above the exposed formation. The FLC will Bromi-Vis Can 1 can / 8 bbls
migrate to loss areas sequentially as a function of path of Baracarb 50 Bag 10 lb/bbl
least resistance principle. Spotting the pill in, below or through Baracarb 150 Bag 21 lb/bbl
the exposed loss zone, subjects the zone to higher fluid Barabuf Bag 1 lb/bbl
column delta pressures due to the ECD effect. Increased loss
rate due to higher circulating densities causes FLC pills to
enter the formation at rates that will increase the time and
loss volume to reach stability; also deeper penetration of the
matrix will occur

• FLC pills should be slightly denser (0.3 to 0.5 ppg) than the
surrounding fluid. This promotes pipe evacuation and
minimizes “string out” from pipe tripping. It also eliminates
the ejection of FLC higher in the well bore from subsequent
slugging events. Even though the denser pill will blend with
lighter fluid below the spot point, the thinning of the pill is
minimized by the fact that the maximum volume available for
thinning before entry to the formation is equal to the volume
of the formation exposed interval. Once that volume has
blended, further formation loss will be full viscosity FLC. Once
loss rates have stabilized, further thinning of the FLC will be
minimal due to the volume of fluid below the exposed zone;
this volume is most often quite small. (On the order of 1 to 3
barrels)

87
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 88 -
Filtration Based on the square root of the permeability equals mean pore
diameter in microns principle, the table below illustrates damaging
The single most important aspect of brine fluid maintenance is filtration. particle sizes and the necessary filter level.
The purpose of a clear brine fluid is to provide a solids free environment
that protects the producing formation from particle invasion damage. Mean
Pore
Diameter
in 33% 10% Filter
Permeability md Microns Level Level Micron
3000 54.8 18.1 5.5 5
2000 44.7 14.8 4.5 2
1500 38.7 12.8 3.9 2
1000 31.6 10.4 3.2 2
900 30.0 9.9 3.0 2
800 28.3 9.3 2.8 2
700 26.5 8.7 2.6 2
600 24.5 8.1 2.4 2
500 22.4 7.4 2.2 2
250 15.8 5.2 1.6 0.5
100 10.0 3.3 1.0 0.5

During the past 25 years, many studies have been done to assess the
effects of particle invasion damage and the size cut and quality level of
filtration necessary to prevent formation damage.
The basis of size cut determination is a percentage of the formation
pore throat diameter, often referred to as the “Basketballs and Marbles
Principle”.
Any particle that is 33% of the pore diameter will instantly bridge and
block the pore; any particle that is 10-30% of the pore throat diameter
will penetrate deeper into the formation and plug or bridge matrix
permeability.
Filtration levels are base on removing particles to the 10% throat
diameter level to prevent particulate damage.
Note: The lower limit of human eyesight is 34-44 microns.
The table illustrates that the particle sizes that damage formations are
significantly smaller than unaided human eyesight can resolve. Even 3
Darcy formations, often thought not to need filtration, are subject to
particle damage from material to small to see.
In the majority of conditions, 2-micron filtration is necessary to prevent
particulate damage.
Illustrated below, is the particle size range that is damaging to formation
matrices. Particles in this range can have a very large particle count and
not occupy large part per million levels.

Basketballs & Marbles Grid

Particle size Affect

> 1/3 the diameter of Bridge instantly on the throat and do on penetrate
the pore throat the formation
Solution: Filter fluids to remove particles +/> 1/3 the pore
diameter.
Hydraulic fracture the well and blow the particles from the
perforated tunnels, by perforated washing tools or by acid.

1/3 and 1/10 pore Invade the formation and bridge on the pore throat deeper
throat diameter in the formation.
With the pore throats plugged and no permeability, acid
cannot be injected into the formation to clean the pore
throats.
Solution: Filter fluids to a level less than 10% of the pore
diameter

< 1/10 the diameter Considered normally not damaging to the formation

< 2 microns Considered non-damaging in most cases

88
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 89 -
Filter Level Quality Particle Removal Efficiency Testing
How effective a filter system is at removing particles became a concern
in the early 1980’s. Procedure: OSU F-2 (Modified single –pass water)
Nominal cartridge filters were the equipment of choice for many years. Test Particles: AC Test Dust
They were relatively inexpensive and did not require much space. The Fluid: Water maintained at 1 cp kinematic viscosity.
standard used to measure the efficiency of the filter was solids removal Flow Rate: 1 gpm per 10-inch cartridge or as specified by user.
by weight percent. The most common method of testing the size cut of Sample Sequence:
a filter was the “Bubble Point” method. A minimum of five sample sets is taken upstream and downstream of
Laboratory testing with particle counters and particle size distribution the
graphs revealed that as much as 70% of the total particle count in a cartridge. The first sample set is taken at the start of the test, after the
fluid was passing through the filter and that particles much larger than system has stabilized. The remaining sample sets are taken at 10%,
the size rating of the filter were passing the media. The graph on the 20%, 40%, and 80% increase in the net pressure drop.
previous page illustrated how fine particles take up small weight Terminal pressure drop is 35 psi.
percentage ppm.
Nominal filters were found to have relatively poor construction integrity. The two methods used to verify fluid quality are Particle Size Distribution
The media was subject to deformation and shifting at the upper range (PSD) and Total Suspended Solids (TSS). These tests require a laser
of delta pressure. particle counter and a very sensitive lab scale. Both pieces of equipment
A more reliable media structure and a more accurate efficiency standard are not accurate under field conditions and the time required to perform
were sought. the testing precludes a rapid test result. Samples of filtered fluid are
The method of rating a filters efficiency that was adopted was the Beta usually collected and submitted for testing on a 48-hour time scale.
Ratio (βR). The beta ration method compares the particle size Baroid CFS provides the following Beta 5000 rated Cartridge filters.
distribution and particle counts before and after a filter medium and Filter Cartridges:
expresses the efficiency as a β coefficient. 0.5 um part number -PFP005-40AN-TM-03
All polypropylene construction, 40" length with 222 o-ring/cap ends
Formula & Table connections.
2um part number -PFP05-40AN-TM-03 & 5um part number -
inlet concentration - outlet concentrat ion PFC2-40AN-TM
Removal efficiency ( β R
)=
inlet concentrat ion
x 100
All polypropylene construction, 40" length with 222 o-ring/cap ends
connections.
10um part number –PFC10-40AN-TM
Beta (β) Removal All polypropylene construction, 40" length with 222 o-ring/cap ends
efficiency (%) connections.
High pleated surface area for long service life. Low clean pressure drop
and high flow capacity.
1 0
Absolute removal of solid contamination to prevent formation damages
and optimizes zone permeability during downhole operations.
2 50
Cartridge Filter Economics
4 75 A Beta 5000 (99.98%) was Absolute Beta rated filter cartridges are several times more expensive
established as the than nominally rated cartridges. Beta 5000 cartridges are cost effective
5 80 preferred level of filter when used as a downstream guard or polishing filter after a DE filter
efficiency. Cartridge filters unit.
10 90 of this type are referred to
as “Absolute” filters. They Cartridge filtration alone is cost effective for low volume or low
are usually composed of a contaminant level fluids. Filtering make-up water for chemicals and or
20 95 filtering relatively clean seawater are examples. The demands of
shallow or multi-layered
filter media. The media has circulation and maintenance of a completion fluid system are better
50 98 strong bonding addressed by a staged filter system comprised of a DE unit followed by
mechanisms that prevent ABS cartridge filters.
75 98.67 the media from shifting or A common use for cartridge filters is polymer solution filtration. A beta
deforming, thus assuring 5000 10-micron filters is used to remove contaminants from polymer
high integrity throughout pills. Combined with hydraulic shear devices and due to the low volumes
100 99
the delta range of the and relatively low percentage of contaminants, these cartridges provide
cartridge. a cost effective means of formation protection with polymer pills.
1000 99.9
Most ABS filters are
configured as pleated Pleated ABS Cartridge
5000 99.98
cylinders to provide
maximum surface area and
10,000 99.99 therefore maximum flow
rate per unit.
The Beta ratio of a filter at
the desired level of size cut
100 is the basis for quality
δ

assurance in the field.

Since actual particle size
and count measurement is
very difficult to impossible in the field, the Beta rated cartridge is the
determining factor.

The beta method used to test and verify a cartridge filters removal
efficiency is the modified OSU F-2 standard.

89
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 90 -
Cartridge Filter Housing

Filter Press Plate Manifold & the Filter Cycle

The plate manifold is made up of a number of plates with recessed
chambers on each side of the plate. At the head and tail of the manifold
are special plates with only one recessed side. The plate recessions are
covered with and appropriate filter septum material that promotes the
formation of a DE cake but permits maximum flow through the septum.
Completion Fluid Filter Types The plates with their clothes are closed and hydraulic pressure is applied
to seal the individual plates.
Diatomaceous Earth (DE) Filters
DE is the fossilized skeletal remains of marine diatoms. There are two
main types, salt and fresh water. These structures provide a highly
porous non-compressible cake ideal for the removal of solid
contaminants.
DE is produced in a variety of size and treatment grades and is used in a
broad range of industrial applications.

Dirty Fluid
Inlet

Filtered fluid discharge

Although a DE filter consistently produces a very high fluid quality (less

than 50 ppm), it is not absolute beta rated because the filter cake is
susceptible to shifting. Some DE particles and solids across a small
range (relative to the DE type) can pass through the DE filter. The
nominal micron ratings for DE provided by Baroid CFS are: A pre-coat of clean DE is established by pumping a slurry of clean brine
and DE into the central port of the manifold. The slurry spreads radially
• 10 micron Celatom 565 through all the plate chambers. As the slurry passes through the filter
• 5 micron Celatom 545 septum, the DE is deposited on the septum as a uniform and clean
• 2 micron Celatom HyFlo Super Cell coating. The fluid that passes through he septum travels via runnels to
the inside corners of each plate recess. Exit ports in the plate allow the
The most commonly used is HyFlo Super Cell an in some applications fluid to enter the manifold discharge ports and then exit the press.
545. The 565 grade is used in high concentration contaminant situations Once a clear and air free circulation is seen in the slurry skid pre-coat
when staging down to a required level is the practical method. tank, the press is ready to begin filtering dirty fluid.
The slurry skid has an additional tank that is used to prepare a body
There are two main types of DE filter in use in brine filtration. feed slurry of DE and Fluid. This slurry is a concentrated suspension of
DE. The slurry skid manifold is configured to allow dirty fluid to be
• Recessed Plate Press brought from the rig return pit and body feed slurry is either injected or
• Vertical Leaf Pressure Filter pulled in to the dirty fluid stream.
The mixture of DE and dirty fluid enters the press through the center
Recessed Plate Press port and makes a radial distribution through the plate stack. As the DE
The graphic at the front of this section displays an oilfield configured and dirty fluid pass through the pre-coat a continuous layer of DE and
skid mounted DE press. Below is a diagram of the main portions of the trapped solids is deposited building a porous cake. The clean fluid exits
press. the press and is routed to the downstream guard filter with ABS
cartridge filters and then to the rig clean pit.

90
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 91 -
Filtration continues until the press reaches it’s maximum cake capacity The equipment foot print is smaller than a press system and cycle
or maximum delta pressure level. Ideally max cake and max pressure cleaning is usually faster than a press unit.
happen simultaneously. The disadvantages of the VLF are that it cannot deal with rapid changes
The slurry skid is configured for re-circulation and pumping stops. The in solids concentration or higher malleable particle loads. The VLF units
fluid in the press is evacuated by air pressure and the press is opened. also have a lower range of practical solids loading, on the order of less
The spent cake is removed from the plate recesses and the press is than a half percent by volume. Situations that have blinding particle
closed and sealed again ready for the next filter cycle. loads and inconsistent solids loads are not practical use points for a VLF
The length of a press cycle is governed by the concentration of filter.
contaminants and their type. Ridged particles are easily incorporated VLF Interior Diagram
into the DE cake and do not create excessive delta pressure across the
cake. Malleable solids such as clays and polymers deform readily and
block a much higher portion of the DE cake permeability and cause
more rapid delta pressure build across the cake. Sudden influxes of
malleable particles can cause the press to “Blind”. In other words, the
press will reach its max delta pressure before reaching max capacity.
DE presses can usually deal with solids concentrations of up to one or
one and a half percent and maintain a practical cycle length. Solids
concentrations above this threshold can be impractical to process with a
filter press. Some other method of solids concentration reduction must
be used first.

Filter Press side view

Vertical Leaf Pressure Filter

VLF DE units approach pressure containment in a different manner.
Instead of plates, clothes and pressure sealing, the VLF encloses the
filter areas in a pressure vessel.
A pressure leaf is composed of a ridged hollow frame enclosed in a filter
septum of cloth or metal mesh. Fluid filtrate exits to the interior of the
leaf then out a discharge port at the bottom of the leaf to the system
manifold.
The DE filter cycle is performed the same as with a press unit. The
difference begins at the cleaning point. Manual systems evacuate the
pressure housing with air. The vessel lid is opened and the vertical
leaves are washed with water. The water and spent cake exit via a large
diameter clean out port.
VLF units have some unique advantages as a result of design. The flow
rate possible with a VLF is higher per unit area than a press unit. VLF
units are usually set with 100 to 400 square feet of leaf surface and
achieve flow rates with light fluids in the 8 to 15 bpm range.

91
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 92 -
Baroid CFS MMS approved Filter System Pump Package

FILTRATION SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATIONS

Filter Press Units BF 800 BF 1100 BF

1200
Filtration Area (FT2) 800 1100 1200
Length (in) 188 216 230
Width (in) 91 94 94
Height (in) 79 102 120
Weight (lb) 18,500 20,500 27,800
Number of Plates 31 42 49
Working PSI 100 100 100
Stackable Yes Yes Yes
Back-up Hydraulic Yes Yes Yes
System

Pod Units BF 64 BF 126

Number of Cartridges 64 126
Length (in) 64 81
Width (in) 78 87
Height (in) 76 96
Baroid CFS Cartridge & Filter Press Units Weight (lb) 3,500 5,500
40” ABS Rated Filter Cartridges Working Pressure 80 150
Housings are 64 or 126 element sizes (psi)

Accessory Admix 800 & Admix

Equipment 1100 1200
Volume (bbl) 14 14
Length (in) 138 148
Width (in) 72 84
Height (in) 84 84
Weight (lb) 5,200 5,300
Working Pressure 100 100
(psi)

4 x 4 Gorman Rupp Centrifugal Pump

Length (in) 60
Width (in) 40
Height (in) 50
Weight (lb) 2,500
Working Pressure 100
(psi) 600 gpm @ 65 psi (higher with positive fluid
Flow Rate (gpm) feed)

Air Compressor
Length (in) 96
Width (in) 62
Height (in) 63
Weight (lb) 4,000
Output (cfm) 185
Working Pressure 100
(psi)

92
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 93 -
System Flow Rate
Flow rates expressed in this table represent a median range for a variety
of conditions. The rate of fluid feed and the size of the feed line
significantly affect the equipments maximum process rate.
The CFS filter system is capable of pulling it’s own suction when no
powered feed source is available. However, many rig setups do not
allow the pumping system to be within vertical lift and horizontal pull
limitations. Under these conditions the filter system must be fed by a rig
centrifugal pump system. Feed lines should be 4” or 6” to achieve
maximum flow rates from the filter system. Using a 6”feed line, a CFS
1200 system was able to process 25 BPM in a CaCl fluid.

PRESS SIZE SW – CaCl2 CaBr2 ZnBr2

1200 SF 10 – 15 BPM 8 – 12 BPM 6 – 12 BPM

1100 SF 10 – 14 BPM 8 – 10 BPM 6 – 10 BPM
800 SF 8 – 12 BPM 8 – 10 BPM 6 – 8 BPM

FILTER SIZE SW – CaCl2 CaBr2 ZnBr2

BF 64 Max Rate 15.2 BPM 10.3 BPM 5.3 BPM

BF 126 Max Rate 30.4 BPM 20.5 BPM 10.7 BPM

Baroid CFS Filter System Selection Guide

SYSTEM
BEST USAGE
TYPE

Cartridge Low Volume or low contaminant levels

Units Use when space limitations are severe

Filter Press Applicable in most filter situations

May experience size limitations in some
circumstances

Applicable with lighter fluids or fluids with low or

consistent solids loads.
VLF Filter
Use when size limitations make press units less
attractive

93
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 94 -

94
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 95 -
Corrosion
Corrosion Inhibitors – CO2 & H2S Scavengers – Oxygen
Scavengers – Biocides
Corrosion is the destruction of metal through electrochemical action
between metal and its environment. About 75 to 85 percent of drillpipe
loss can be attributed to corrosion. Other areas affected by corrosion
include pump parts, bits, and casings. Factors affecting corrosion
include:
• Temperature: Corrosion rates can double with every 55
increase in temperature.
• Velocity: The higher the mud velocity, the higher the rate of
corrosion due to film erosion (oxide, oil, amine, etc.)
• Solids: Abrasive solids remove protective films and cause
increased corrosive attack.
• Metallurgical factors: Mill scale and heat treatment of pipe can
cause localized corrosion.
• Corrosive agents: Corrosive agents such as oxygen carbon
dioxide and hydrogen sulfide can increase stress cracking
corrosion and lead to pipe failure.
The corrosion that occurs because of these various factors falls into four
categories:
• Uniform corrosion results in an even corrosion pattern over
surfaces.
• Localized corrosion results in a mesa-like corrosion pattern
over surfaces.
• Pitting is a highly localized corrosion that results in the deep
penetration of surfaces.
• Mechanical damage dislocates or completely removes
surfaces.
Category Explanation
Uniform corrosion Even corrosion pattern over surfaces
Localized corrosion Mesa-like corrosion pattern over surfaces
Highly localized corrosion that results in the dissolved and precipitant content.
Pitting
deep penetration of surfaces
• Actions of mixing and solids control equipment
o Mixing and solids-control equipment can cause aeration
of the drilling fluid during drilling operations. For
example, aeration occurs as mud falls through the shaker
screen or when hopper or mud guns are discharged
above the surface of the mud in the pits. To reduce the
amount of oxygen injected into drilling fluid by mixing
and solids-control equipment, follow these guidelines.
o Use a premix tank to mix mud when possible.
o Maintain the minimum mud volume.
o Operate mud-mixing pumps, especially the hopper, only
when mixing mud.
o Keep the packing tight on centrifugal pumps.
o Keep the mud in the suction pit deep enough to keep the
mud pump from pulling in air.
o Keep discharge below the mud surface when moving
mud from the reserve pit.
o Ensure guns discharge below the mud surface.
o Ensure the degasser and desander discharges are below
the mud surface.
• The atmosphere
o The atmosphere is another source of oxygen. The main
by-product of atmospheric corrosion is iron oxide rust. To
prevent atmospheric corrosion, wash the pipes free of all
salts and mud products and then spray or dip the pipe in
an atmospheric corrosion inhibitor.
The oxygen content of brines with densities greater than 10.0 lb/gal is
low. The solubility of gasses in a fluid is directly related to the total
dissolved solid content of the fluid. The concentration of metal salts in
brines of 10 lb/gal or higher significantly inhibits the amount of gases
that can dissolve into the brine.
However, circulation and the affects of surface aeration tend to
replenish the dissolved gas content of a fluid as it is spent in chemical
reactions. During completion operations, a cumulative affect is seen in
the system. Indications are lowering pH values and increased iron

Corrosion categories. Brine Oxygen concentration, ppm

The categories of corrosion range from uniform corrosion to mechanical
damage.
11.6 lb/gal CaCl2 0.1 to 0.2
Corrosive agents found in completion and workover fluids include:
Oxygen (O2) 14.2 lb/gal CaBr2 0.05 to 0.1
Oxygen causes a major portion of corrosion damage to drilling
equipment. Oxygen removes protective films; this action causes 19.2 lb/gal Ca/ZnBr2 0.4 to 0.6
accelerated corrosion and increased pitting under deposits.
The four primary sources of oxygen are:

• Water additions
o Water added to drilling mud during normal drilling Performance of OXYGON O2 Scavenger in Brine Fluids
operations can contain dissolved oxygen. Very small Dissolved oxygen (mg/l)
concentrations of oxygen Brine Density Blank With scavenger
o (<1 ppm) can cause severe corrosion by setting up SG 0.1 lb/bbl
differential aeration cells that can show preferential (lb/gal) (0.29kg/m3)
attack with pitting under barriers or deposits. The Seawater 1.03 (8.6) 0.9 0.2
primary corrosion by-product of low oxygen
concentrations is magnetite. Sodium 1.20 0.6 0.05
chloride (10.0)
Calcium 1.20 0.6 0.2
chloride (10.0)
Calcium 1.39 0.2 0.05
chloride (11.6)
Calcium 1.44 0.2 0.1
bromide (12.0)
Calcium 1.56 0.1 0.05
bromide (13.0)
Calcium 1.70 0.05 0.05
bromide (14.2)

95
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 96 -
Hydrogen sulfide (H2S)
Hydrogen sulfide can enter the mud system from:
o Formation fluids containing hydrogen sulfide
o Bacterial action on sulfur compounds in drilling mud
o Thermal degradation of sulfur-containing drilling-fluid
additives
o Chemical reactions with tool-joint thread lubricants containing
sulfur
The corrosion process, bacterial action, and thermal degradation of
organic additives can generate hydrogen sulfide in drilling fluids.
Hydrogen sulfide is very soluble in water. Dissolved hydrogen sulfide
behaves as a weak acid and causes pitting. Another problem with
hydrogen sulfide is that some of the hydrogen ions at the cathodic areas fluids to control bacteria. This chemical is scheduled for retirement in
may enter the steel instead of evolving from the surface as a gas. This
process can result in hydrogen blistering in low-strength steels. Both the
hydrogen and sulfide components of hydrogen sulfide can bring about
drill string and tubing failures.
Hydrogen sulfide corrosion is mitigated by increasing the pH to above
9.5 and by using sulfide scavengers and film-forming inhibitors.
Note: Hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxide are often encountered in the of drilling fluids and increasing the solubility of corrosion by-products.
same geologic formation; therefore, design treatments to deal with
both contaminants simultaneously.
Carbon dioxide (CO2)
Carbon dioxide is found in natural gas in trace element and major-
element quantities. When combined with water, carbon dioxide forms
carbonic acid and decreases the water’s pH, which increases the water’s
corrosivity. While carbon dioxide is not as corrosive as oxygen, it can
cause pitting. A large drop in pH, combined with a negative test for
hydrogen sulfide, is an indication that CO2 has contaminated the fluid.
Maintaining the correct pH is the primary treatment for carbon dioxide
contamination. Either lime or caustic soda can be used to maintain pH.
Lime is problematic in completion fluids and is used as a last resort at
the well site. The following table provides the reactions for each of these
treatments.
Treatment with caustic soda produces water and sodium carbonate, a
soluble precipitant, treatment with lime, produces an insoluble calcium-
carbonate precipitate and water. These treatments are for
formation produced gases not atmospheric conditions.
Treatment Reaction
Caustic soda 2 NaOH+CO2 2H2O+Na2CO3
Lime Ca(OH)2+CO2+H2O 2H2O+CaCO2
The water by-product from these reactions can affect brine density with
sufficient gas ppm or over time. Density maintenance will be necessary
in these conditions.
Atmospheric CO2 affects brines in a manner similar to atmospheric
oxygen; most fluids tend to become more acidic with time when
exposed to the atmosphere. Prolonged fluid aeration from equipment
and hopper circulation provides a constant source of gases uniformly
dispersed in the fluid. The preferred treatment for most brine types is
Barabuf pH buffer. All brines with the exception of ZnBr2 can be
maintained at a pH of 7.5 to 9.0.
Brine Recommended pH Treatment
Formate 7.5 to 12.0 Barabuf or Caustic Soda
NaCl - KCl 7.5 to 9.0 Barabuf, Caustic soda or lime
NaBr & KBr 7.5 to12 Caustic Soda or Potash
CaCl - CaBr 7.0-10.5 Barabuf, Caustic soda or lime
ZnBr 3.0-5.0 Barabuf or Lime
96
Bacteria
Microorganisms can cause fermentation of organic mud additives,
changing viscosity and lowering pH. A sour odor and gas are other
indicators that bacteria are present. Degradation of mud additives can
result in increased maintenance costs.
The by-products of bacteria are carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide.
The presence of bacteria is determined by the phenol-red test. Micro
biocides are used to control bacteria.
Bacteria are strongly inhibited in brine systems at or above 10.0 lb/gal.
With few exceptions brine fluids at this threshold do not require a
biostatic.
Glutaraldehyde solutions are currently used in drilling and completion
the near future and other biostatics (example: Isothiazolone-based
agent) will be used.
Dissolved salts (Zn++, Ca++, etc…)
Dissolved salts increase corrosion by decreasing the electrical resistance
These by-products can cause a film to form on the surface of the metal.
Metal salts exhibit the highest rates of corrosion at relatively low
concentrations on the order of 2-10% by weight. Typically, brines with
densities at or above 10.0-lb/gal displays relatively low corrosion rates
but still require inhibitor treatment to achieve the best long-term
corrosion control.
Packer-fluid
Recommended treatment
system
Increase pH to between 9.5 to 11.5
Add 2 to 4 lb/bbl BARACOR 44
or NO-SULF to control hydrogen sulfide
Add a biocide to control bacteria such as
Drilling mud
ALDACIDE-G. Add an oxygen scavenger such
as Barascav D or L or Oxygon to control
soluble O2
Add BARACOR 100 at 21 to 42 gal/100 bbl
Clear fresh Add a biocide to control bacteria such as
water ALDACIDE G Add an oxygen scavenger such
Clear salt as Barascav D or L or Oxygon to control
water soluble O2
Add BARAFILM at 15 gal/100 bbl
Add a biocide to control bacteria such as
Oil or diesel
ALDACIDE G
Invermul oil Add 2 to 10 lb/bbl INVERMUL and 2 to 10
mud lb/bbl GELTONE II
Add BARACOR 100, 0.5 to 2 percent by
Heavy brine volume or BARACOR 450, 0.2 to 0.4
(CaCl2 CaBr2 percent by weight
ZnBr2 or Add an oxygen scavenger such as Oxygon
blends of the to control soluble O2
three)
Monovalent brines contain salts that have monovalent cations; such as
salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, potassium bromide,
and sodium bromide. Potassium bromide and sodium bromide are
especially effective in calcium-sensitive formations and in formation
where carbon dioxide gas might react with calcium brines to create a
calcium-carbonate precipitate. Monovalent brines generally show low
corrosivity, even at temperatures exceeding 400o F (204o C.)
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 97 -
Divalent brines contain salts that have divalent cations; such as calcium
chloride, calcium bromide, and zinc bromide. Divalent brine might Biocide
consist of single salt or a blend of salts, depending on the required brine In working with BJ Services, it has been brought to Baroid’s DRIL-N
density and crystallization point. department that caution needs to be had when selecting a bactericide
The corrosivity of these brines depends on their density and chemical for use in DRIL-N systems that are to be cleaned up with BJ Service’s
composition. Laboratory data show that the addition of calcium chloride MUDZYME S. According to BJ, the use of Magnacide and XCIDE 207 are
lowers the rate of corrosion, while the addition of zinc bromide rapidly the preferred bactericides to be applied when their enzymes are used in
increases the rate of corrosion. filter cake clean up.
The use of products containing Glutaraldehyde solutions (ALDACIDE G)
can produce damaging results. The combination of the enzyme and
Mineral scale (CaSO4, FeCO3, ZnSO4)
Glutaraldehyde solutions will create a cross link with the polymers and
Mineral scale deposits set up conditions for local corrosion-cell activity.
starch into plastic like strands of materials according to studies by BJ
Completion and workover programs are typically more concerned with Services. From the DRIL-N product line the products to be most
scale in packer fluid applications and inside production tubing. concerned with are N-VIS, N-VIS P PLUS and N-DRIL HT PLUS. Other
polymers and starches could have the same results and caution should
Packer Fluids be given to any operation that may involve the use of these enzymes
The final fluid conditioning in a completion or work over is the and bactericides containing Glutaraldehyde solutions.
installation of a packer fluid.
Packer fluids are used to provide a variety of benefits for the producing Baracor 450
well: A recent issue came up concerning Baracor 450. Baracor 450 is
• Weight and pressure on production packers and seals designed only for fluids containing zinc.
• Supporting medium and pressure for the production tubing The fluid should contain a minimum of 1% by weight zinc.
• Pressure against the casing to resist outside formation forces The primary reasons are:
• Thermal conductivity or insulation for the fluids flowing in the • In the absence of zinc and in higher temperature
production tubing environments (350 to 400+ BHT) the Baracor 450 can break
• Protective environment that inhibits against corrosion and down with H2S as a by-product. This situation could pose
potential acidic gas seepage from production hardware potential safety risks and should be avoided.
• Solids free fluids provide easier re-entry and hardware • Baracor 450 normally functions by reacting with zinc and iron
recovery as compared to solids laden fluids to form a iron/zinc sulfide complex that coats the pipe
somewhat similar to a galvanizing process. While Baracor 450
General Packer Fluid Treatment Guidelines does show a reduction in overall corrosion rates, the test
results are somewhat misleading. Even though overall
corrosion is reduced, Baracor 450 (in the absence of zinc) may
still allow pitting corrosion that in turn can help induce
Counter Indications chloride stress cracking.
Oxygen Scavengers The important thing to remember is that the Baracor 450 functions by
Some products used as oxygen scavengers contain sulfides that react combining with zinc and zinc must be present. All other brines should
with the dissolved oxygen in fluids to form sulfates, eliminating the be treated with Baracor 100 as long as the BHT allows.
If you have an application where light density brine is being treated with
corrosive effects of the dissolved oxygen. Calcium brines should not be
a BHT in excess of 350 degrees, the correct procedure would be to treat
treated with oxygen scavengers containing sulfides because chemicals the brine with at least 1% by weight zinc before adding the Baracor
could precipitate calcium scale and cause problems. Even though 450.
dissolved oxygen levels are low high higher density brines, the (Baracor 100 can actually be used up to 400 degrees BHT in some fluid
application of an oxygen scavenger such as OXYGON has proven types). (There are 123.6 lbs of zinc in one barrel of 19.2 ppg ZnBr).
beneficial. OXYGON is the preferred treatment for brines containing
Multiply total volume (bbls) times density (ppg) times 42 time .01 to get
calcium or zinc. total pounds of zinc required. Divide that by 123.6 to get total bbls of
19.2 required.
Performance of OXYGON & BARACOR 100 Example:
Corrosion rates (mpy) For 500 bbl 10.0 ppg CaCl ------> 500 x 10 x 42 x .01 / 123.6 = 17
Brine Density Blank BARACOR OXYGON BARACOR bbls of 19.2 ppg ZnBr
sg. 100 0.1 lb/bbl 100
(lb/gal) 0.5% (0.29kg/m3) +
(v/v) OXYGON

Seawater 1.03 2.1 2.3 1.6 1.2

(8.6)
Sodium 1.08 3.0 2.1 2.9 1.6
chloride (9.0)
Sodium 1.20 2.0 1.5 3.6 1.5
chloride (10.0)
Calcium 1.08 3.7 3.3 3.6 2.5
chloride (9.0)
Calcium 1.20 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.2
chloride (10.0)
Calcium 1.39 6.8 7.3 6.0 6.0
chloride (11.6)
Calcium 1.44 3.6 2.6 6.9 1.7
bromide (12.0)
Calcium 1.56 5.5 4.4 5.5 4.6
bromide (13.0)
Calcium 1.70 5.7 6.6 6.2 5.4
bromide (14.2)

97
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 98 -
Product Guidelines Corrosion Trouble Shooting Table
Product Function Used In Description Treatment Oxygen from water additions
Water Based Source: Water additions By-product: Oxides of iron Black to
Drilling & red dust
0.2-0.5 lb/bbl
ALDACIDE Dril-N Fluids Glutaraldehyde Indication: Concentration cell pitting Tests:
Micro biocide (0.6-1.4
G Completion solution under barrier or deposits and pits filled Some by-product insoluble in 15% HCl
kg/m3)
Fluids <10.0 with black magnetic corrosion Some by-product attracted to magnet
lb/gal by-products
Pre-treat with
Water & Oil 2-5 lb/bbl;
Hydrogen Treatment:
BARACOR Based Powdered zinc additional
sulfide
44 Drilling & compound treatments Treat with an oxygen scavenger having a range equivalent of 2.5 to 10 lb/hr of
scavenger sodium sulfite.
Dril-N Fluids as required
(6-14 kg/m3) Maintain 20-to 300-mg/L sulfite residual.
High
Temperature Oxygen from mixing and solids-control equipment
Polymeric Source: Mixing and solids-control By-product: Oxides of iron Black to
Alkalinity
BARACOR Systems Liquid amine 0.25-1.4 lb/bbl equipment red dust
control
95 such as compound (0.7-4 kg/m3) Indication: Concentration cell pitting Tests:
agent
Therma-Dril under barrier or deposits and pits filled Some by-product insoluble in 15% HCl
& EZ-Mud with black magnetic corrosion by-products Some by-product attracted to magnet
PHPA
Clear fresh Treatment:
water or Coat pipe with film-forming inhibitors to reduce atmospheric attack and cover
salt water: 21- concentration cell deposits.
Reduce air entrapment in pits.
42
Defoam drilling fluid.
BARACOR Corrosion Completion Film-forming gal/100 bbl
100 inhibitor Brines amine fluid. Heavy Carbon dioxide
brine: 0.5- Source: By-product: Iron carbonate
2.0% by Formation
volume Thermally degraded mud products
(5-10 L/m3). Indications: Test: Slow effervescence in 15% HCl
Completion Cyanogen- Localized corrosion to pitting
BARACOR Corrosion Brines based 0.2-0.4% by Dark brown-to-black film
450 inhibitor Containing inorganic weight
Zinc compound
Blend of Treatment:
Water Based phosphonates Maintain basic pH with caustic soda, lime, or BARACOR 95 to neutralize the acid-
BARACOR Corrosion 0.5-1.5 lb/bbl forming gas.
Drilling & and
700 inhibitor (1.4-4 kg/m3)
Dril-N Fluids alkyl Bacteria
phosphates Source: Bacteria By-product: Carbon dioxide;
1.5-2 hydrogen
Drill Pipe sulfide
gal/1,000 ft of
Protective
Corrosion Film-forming pipe every 1-4 Indications: Tests:
BARAFILM Film for air,
inhibitor amine hours Fermentation of organic mud additives Phenol-red serum test (aerobic
mist & foam
(1.9-2.5 L/100 Change in viscosity bacteria)
drilling Lower pH Marine anaerobic serum test (anaerobic
m)
Oxygen Water Based Sour odor bacteria)
0.5-1 lb/gal of Gas formation
scavenger Fluids that Powdered
BARASCAV fresh
Thermal do not sodium
D water (1.4-2.9
extender contain Ca sulfite
kg/m3)
for polymers or Zn Treatment:
Oxygen Water Based Add biocides.
Initially 0.1-
scavenger Fluids that Liquid Dissolved salts
BARASCAV 0.5 lb/bbl
Thermal do not ammonium Source: Dissolved salts By-product: Oxides of iron
L (0.3-1.4
extender contain Ca bisulfite
kg/m3)
for polymers or Zn Indications: Test:
Oxygen Localized corrosion Black to red rust
Scavenger, Pitting
Iron Chelate Water & Powdered Treatment: Add film-forming inhibitors.
0.1 to 0.2
OXYGON & Inhibitor, Brine Based Sodium Mineral scale deposits
lb/bbl
Thermal Fluids Erythorbate Source: Formation and mud materials By-product: Iron products beneath
Extender for mineral deposit
Polymers Indication: Test:
Pre-treat with Corrosion cell pits beneath deposit White mineral scale: calcium, barium
Hydrogen Aqueous
Blend of zinc 0.1-5 and/or magnesium compounds
NO-SULF sulfide Drilling &
compounds lb/bbl (0.3-14 Treatment:
scavenger Dril-N Fluids
kg/m3) Slowly and continuously, add scale inhibitor at 5-15 mg/L.
Fresh Water Reduce treatments of scale inhibitor when phosphate residual exceeds 15 mg/L.
Thinner/scale Organophosph 0.1-1 lb/bbl
STABILITE Fluid Use 1 gal/1,000 bbl (0.25 L/m3) mud/day for maintenance treatment under
inhibitor onate (0.3-3 kg/m3) normal drilling conditions.
Systems

98
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 99 -
Packer Fluid Compatibility with Production Tool Seal Materials
Production packers and seal assemblies use a variety of materials that act as seal agents. The materials are selected based on performance at
pressure and temperature in various fluids or gasses.

99
 The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 100 -
SODIUM CHLORIDE w/ INHIBITOR COMPLETION FLUID: IMMERSION TEST
REI 8/21/00
PURPOSE: Evaluate the effect on various elastomers exposed to Sodium Chloride Completion Fluid
PROCEDURE: 1. Establish physical properties of each sample type before immersion.
2. Immerse specimens in fluid for 1 week @ 325°F (163°C) [275°F (135°C) for Nitrile].
3. Remove specimens & measure properties at indicated time since testing began.
FLUID: 10 #/gal. Sodium Chloride treated with 1% by vol. of Baracor 100 (inhibitor). Furnished by Baroid
Completion Fluid Services. pH ≅ 8-9

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (7/19) (7/20) (7/21) (7/26) Change (Date) (7/19) (7/20) (7/21) (7/26)

COMPOUND: FF-8023 (Fluorel – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #1; Position #1]

Hardness 87 86 87 87 0 Thickness-1 .080 .080 .079 .079

(A)
Tensile 2014 1033 925 783 -61.1% -2 .077 .077 .076 .077
Elongation 201 125 107 86 -57.2% % Swell --- 0 -1.27 -0.63%
50% Mod. 637 583 625 641 ---
100% Mod. 1094 872 894 --- --- Notes: --- Flex.
Flexi Cracks

ble

COMPOUND: 7148 (Fluorel - Seals Eastern) O-Ring…[Marked #1; Position #1]

Hardness (A) 98 99 98 100 +2.0% Thickness-1 .119 .119 .119 .119
Wt. in Air –1 6.1313 6.1185 6.0671 --- -2 .119 .119 .119 .119
-2 6.1136 6.1025 6.0504 --- % Swell --- 0 0 0%
% Change --- -0.19 -1.04% --- Notes --- Stiff Brittle Broken

COMPOUND: FA-9028 (AFLAS – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #2; Position #4]

Hardness (A) 94 93 93 93 -1.1%

Tensile 2990 2947 3122 2952 -1.3% Thickness-1 .101 .101 .101 .101

Elongation 159 191 199 192 +20.8% -2 .107 .108 .108 .108
50% Mod. 1149 1032 1120 1035 --- % Swell --- 0.47 0.47 0.45%
100% Mod 2051 1808 1940 1803 --- Notes: --- Flex. Flexible Flexible

COMPOUND: 7182 (AFLAS – Seals Eastern) O-Ring…[Marked #2; Position #4]

Hardness (A) 98 98 99 98 0% Thickness-1 .112 .112 .112 .112
Wt. In Air –1 4.8052 4.8061 4.8031 --- -2 .116 .116 .116 .116
-2 4.8445 4.8471 4.8447 --- % Swell --- 0 0 %
% Change --- 0.04 0.02% --- Notes --- Flex. Flexible Flexible

COMPOUND: HNBR-7530 (HNBR – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #3; Position#7]

Hardness 84 83 84 84 0% Thickness -1 .070 .070 .070 .070

Tensile 3675 3438 3299 3209 -12.7% -2 .080 .080 .080 .080

Elongation 303 365 317 358 +18.1% % Change --- 0 0 0%

50 % Mod. 623 534 563 500 --- Wt. in Air –1 --- 3.6403 3.6455 3.6434
100% Mod. 1365 1155 1202 1030 --- -2 --- 4.1416 4.1487 4.1438
200% Mod 2938 2610 2603 2366 --- % Change --- --- 0.16 0.07%

COMPOUND: HNBR-9030 (HNBR – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #4; Position#10]

Hardness 94 95 96 96 0% Thickness–1 .093 .094 .095 .095

Tensile 2982 2978 2979 2879 -3.5% -2 .083 .083 .083 .083

Elongation 125 145 132 130 +4.0% % Change --- 0.53% 1.08% 1.08%
50% Mod. 1624 1514 1659 --- --- Wt. in Air -1 --- 5.3053 5.2894 5.2668
100% Mod. 2505 2211 2408 --- --- -2 --- 4.9124 4.8971 4.8739
% Change --- --- -0.32 -0.75%

100
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 101 -

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (7/19) (7/20) (7/21) (7/26) Change (Date) (7/19) (7/20) (7/21) (7/26)

COMPOUND: 25% Glass Filled TEFLON - Strips…[Marked #5; Position #13]

Hardness (D) 58 59 59 60 +3.4%
Wt. in Air–5-1 6.6247 6.6927 6.6947 6.6723 --- Thickness-1 .130 .131 .130 .130
5-2 6.5793 6.6643 6.6708 6.6465 --- -2 .130 .131 .130 .130
% Change --- 1.20 1.22 0.87% --- % Swell --- 0.77 0 0%
COMPOUND: PEEK - Strips…[Marked #6; Position #16]
Hardness (D) 85 85 86 85 0%
Wt in Air 6-1 3.8512 3.8703 3.8685 3.8659 --- Thickness-1 .128 .128 .128 .127
6-2 3.7534 3.7711 3.7725 3.7687 --- -2 .129 .129 .129 .128
% Change --- 0.48 0.48 0.39% --- % Swell --- 0 0 -0.78%
COMPOUND: Ryton - Strips…[Marked #7; Position #19]
Hardness (D) 69 69 69 69 0%
Wt in Air 7-1 5.9254 5.9562 5.9525 5.9461 --- Thickness-1 .127 .127 .127 .128
7-2 5.7961 5.8237 5.8225 5.8185 --- -2 .127 .127 .127 .127
% Change --- 0.47 0.46 0.37% --- % Swell --- 0 0 0.39%

pH = 4-5, 8/7/00 MUST RE-RUN WITH FRESH SAMPLE OF FLUID {Fresh, pH ≅ 8-9}
Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week
(Date) (8/7) (8/8) (8/9) (8/14) Change (Date) (8/7) (8/8) (8/9) (8/14)
COMPOUND: 7265 (Viton-ETP – Seals Eastern) O-Ring…[Marked #8 ; Position #1 ]
Hardness (A) 94 94 94 94 0% Thickness-1 0.112 .112 .112 .112
Wt. In Air –1 5.3896 5.4476 5.4452 5.4400 --- -2 0.109 .109 .109 .109
-2 5.3001 5.3567 5.3548 5.3487 --- % Swell --- 0 0 0%
% Change --- 1.07 1.03 0.93% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: 9062 (Viton – Parco) O-Ring…[Marked #9 ; Position #4 ]
Hardness (A) 99 99 99 99 0% Thickness-1 0.106 .109 .109 .108
Wt. In Air –1 5.2484 5.3228 5.3284 --- --- -2 0.106 .107 .107 .107
-2 5.2436 5.3176 5.3223 5.2802 --- % Swell --- 1.88 1.88 1.42%
% Change --- 0.87 1.42 0.70% --- Notes --- Cracks Broke Very Brittle
COMPOUND: V8588 (Perfluoroelastomer – Parker) O-Ring…[Marked #10; Position #7 ]
Hardness (A) 98 98 99 98 0% Thickness-1 .115 .116 .115 .115
Wt In Air –1* 6.5849 6.5874 6.5868 6.5863 --- -2 .115 .116 .116 .115
-2** 6.5449 6.5492 6.5469 6.5460 --- % Swell --- 0.87 0.43 0%
% Change --- 0.05 0.03 0.02% --- Notes --- Stiff Stiff Stiff
* Sample-1: Batch #1128 ……..Sample-2: Batch #40000039

COMPOUND: Chemraz (Greene-Tweed) O-Ring…[Marked #11; Position #10]

Hardness (A) 95 95 95 95 0% Thickness-1 .106 .106 .106 .106
Wt. In Air –1 2.9371 2.9392 2.9376 2.9387 --- -2 .106 .107 .107 .107
-2 3.2577 3.2605 2.2584 3.2598 --- % Swell --- 0.47 0.47 0.47%
% Change --- 0.07 --- 0.06% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: Kalrez (DuPont) O-Ring…[Marked #11; Position #13]
Hardness (A) 90 90 90 90 0% Thickness-1 .110 .110 .110 .110
Wt. In Air –1 4.1164 4.1242 4.1217 4.1211 --- -2 .109 .109 .109 .109
-2 4.0709 4.0758 4.0744 4.0725 --- % Swell --- 0 0 0%
% Change --- 0.15 0.11 0.08% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (8/7) (8/8) (8/9) (8/14) Change (Date) (8/7) (8/8) (8/9) (8/14)

COMPOUND: 705-85 (EPDM – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #12; Position #16]

Hardness (A) 84 85 85 86 2.38% Thickness-1 --- .096 .096 0.96
Tensile 2859 2848 2909 2933 2.59% -2 --- .093 .093 .094
Elongation 238 211 225 205 -13.9% % Swell --- --- 0 0.54%
50% Mod. 517 587 579 650 --- Wt. in Air -1 --- 5.0263 5.0339 5.0624
100% Mod. 1022 1165 1075 1259 --- -2 --- 4.9194 4.9266 4.9505
200% Mod. 2392 --- 2595 2769 --- % Change --- --- 0.15 0.68%

101
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 102 -

The Samples Below are Tested at 275°F (135°C) due to the Temperature Limit of the Compounds (Nitrile)

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (8/14) (8/15) (8/16) (8/21) Change (Date) (8/14) (8/15) (8/16) (8/21)
COMPOUND: 320-60 (Nitrile – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #1; Position # 1]
Hardness (A) 70 70 70 71 +1.43% Thickness-1 .077 .077 .077 .078
Tensile 2866 2863 2852 2718 -5.16% -2 .066 .066 .067 .068
Elongation 595 578 547 566 -4.87% % Swell --- 0 0.76 +2.16%
50% Mod. 230 238 260 244 --- Wt. in Air -1 4.1582 4.1702 4.1615 4.1480
100% Mod. 383 411 446 413 --- -2 3.6782 3.6879 3.6815 3.7082
200% Mod. 885 941 992 922 --- % Change --- 0.28 0.08 +0.29%
300% Mod. 1499 1550 1622 1520 +1.40%
COMPOUND: 201-75 (Nitrile – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #2; Position #4 ]
Hardness (A) 84 82 83 84 0% Thickness-1 .059 .059 .060 .062
Tensile 3727 3276 3297 3293 -11.64% -2 .058 .058 .058 .059
Elongation 383 361 251 245 -36.03% % Swell --- 0 1.69 +3.40%
50% Mod. 524 500 521 582 --- Wt. in Air -1 3.5771 3.5700 3.5652 3.5878
100% Mod. 912 969 1026 1119 --- -2 3.4761 3.4729 3.4620 3.4823
200% Mod. 2140 2438 2566 2667 +24.6% % Change --- -0.15 -0.37 +0.24%
COMPOUND: N-9029 (Nitrile – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #3; Position #7 ]
Hardness (A) 93 94 94 95 2.15% Thickness-1 .089 .088 .089 0.92
Tensile 2301 2140 2162 2129 -7.48% -2 .100 .099 .099 .102
Elongation 251 200 184 150 -40.24% % Swell --- 1.06 -0.50 +2.69%
50% Mod. 662 735 886 1170 --- Wt. in Air -1 4.7309 4.7047 4.6717 4.6771
100% Mod. 986 1127 1332 1675 +69.9% -2 5.7018 5.6600 5.5308 5.6336
200% Mod. 1943 --- --- --- --- % Change --- -0.64 -2.13 -1.17%

CONCLUSIONS:
1. All rubber compounds, except the standard fluoroelastomers, performed well in this fluid.
2. Standard fluoroelastomers should not be used in this fluid. This is due to the high pH of the fluid.
Note: Compound FF-8023 (Halliburton Proprietary, Fluorel) lost over half of its strength and
elongation, along with showing surface cracks at 168 hours. Compounds #7148 (Seals Eastern,
Fluorel) and #9062 (Parco, standard Viton) both became brittle and showed surface cracking within
48 hours and by 168 hours broke when flexed.
3. Most of the other materials tested (AFLAS, HNBR, Glass filled TEFLON, PEEK, Ryton, Viton-ETP,
V8577 Perfluoroelastomer, Chemraz, Kalrez & EPDM) showed no significant swell, loss of
properties or change in hardness due to the fluid.
4. The harder Nitrile compounds (Halliburton Proprietary 201-75 & N-9029) were beginning to loose
elongation and increase Modulus by 168 hours; due to being at the upper temperature limit for long-
term use (275°F; 135°C). Nitrile should be limited to short-term (1 week max.) useage only.

102
 The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 103 -

CALCIUM CHLORIDE/CALCIUM BROMIDE w/ INHIBITOR COMPLETION FLUID: IMMERSION TEST

REI 8/21/00

PURPOSE: Evaluate the effect on elastomers exposed to Calcium Chloride/Calcium Bromide Completion Fluid. .
PROCEDURE: 1. Establish physical properties of each sample type before immersion.
2. Immerse specimens in test fluid for 1 week @ 325°F (163°C) [275°F (135°C) for Nitriles.
3. Remove specimens & measure properties at indicated time since testing began.
FLUID: 13.5 #/gal. Calcium Chloride/Calcium Bromide formulated to a 20 degree TCT and treated with 1% by
vol. of Baracor 100 (inhibitor). Furnished by Baroid Completion Fluid Services. pH ≅ 5-6

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (7/31) (8/1) (8/2) (8/7) Change (Date) (7/31) (8/1) (8/2) (8/7)

COMPOUND: FF-8023 (Fluorel – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #1; Position #A]

Hardness 86 84 84 84 -2.3% Thickness-1 .075 .075 .075 .075

(A)
Tensile 1850 1980 2077 1893 +2.3% -2 .080 .080 .080 .080
Elongation 200 227 219 211 +5.5% % Swell --- 0 0 0%
50% Mod. 571 509 573 556 ---
100% Mod. 969 886 1003 948 --- Notes --- Flex
Flex Flexible

COMPOUND: 7148 (Fluorel - Seals Eastern) O-Ring…[Marked #1; Position #A]

Hardness (A) 98 97 98 98 0% Thickness-1 .117 .117 .117 .117
Wt. in Air –1 6.0184 6.0183 6.0158 5.9989 --- -2 .117 .117 .117 .118
-2 6.0936 6.0930 6.0887 6.0724 --- % Swell --- 0 0 0.43%
% Change --- 0 -0.06 -0.32% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: FA-9028 (AFLAS – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #2; Position #D]
Hardness (A) 93 92 92 92 -1.1% Thickness-1 .081 .081 .081 .081

Tensile 3035 2954 2805 2834 -6.6% -2 .090 .090 .090 .090

Elongation 192 207 196 199 +2.1% % Swell --- 0 0 0%

50% Mod. 1040 981 984 1022 ---
100% Mod 1773 1617 1603 1652 --- Notes -- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: 7182 (AFLAS – Seals Eastern) O-Ring…[Marked #2; Position #D]
Hardness (A) 98 97 98 98 0% Thickness-1 .113 .113 .113 .113
Wt. In Air –1 4.7698 4.8035 4.8028 4.7983 --- -2 .112 .112 .112 .112
-2 4.7461 4.7755 4.7751 4.7721 --- % Swell --- 0 0 0%
% Change --- 0.66 0.65 0.57% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible

COMPOUND: HNBR-7530 (HNBR – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #3; Position#7]

Hardness 84 81 82 82 -2.4% Thickness -1 .072 .072 .072 .072

Tensile 3711 3595 3603 3478 -6.3% -2 .070 .070 .070 .070

Elongation 314 321 314 315 +0.3% % Change --- 0 0 0%

50 % Mod. 585 605 575 617 --- Wt in Air –1 4.0931 4.0889 4.0904 4.0886
100% Mod. 1299 1329 1245 1322 --- -2 4.1441 4.1393 4.1382 4.1352
200% Mod 2928 2926 2783 2767 --- % Change --- -0.11 -0.10 -0.16%
COMPOUND: HNBR-9030 (HNBR – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #4; Position#10]
Hardness 95 97 97 97 +2.1% Thickness–1 .085 .086 .086 .087

Tensile 2941 2871 2978 2858 -2.8% -2 .086 .088 .090 .090

Elongation 129 134 129 41 -68.2% % Change --- 1.75 2.91 3.50%
50% Mod. 1580 1611 1637 --- --- Wt. in Air -1 4.9504 4.8862 4.8773 4.8612
100% Mod. 2385 2232 2334 --- --- -2 4.9332 4.8884 4.8798 4.8662
% Change --- -1.10 -1.30 -1.58%

103
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 104 -

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (7/31) (8/1) (8/2) (8/7) Change (Date) (7/31) (8/1) (8/2) (8/7)
COMPOUND: 25% Glass Filled TEFLON - Strips…[Marked #5; Position #M]
Hardness (D) 61 61 62 63 +3.3%
Wt. in Air–5-1 6.5941 6.6306 6.6401 6.6258 --- Thickness-1 .132 .130 .131 .130
5-2 6.5608 6.5795 6.6036 6.5889 --- -2 .132 .131 .130 .130
% Change --- 0.46 0.67 0.45% --- % Swell --- -1.14 -1.14 -1.5%
COMPOUND: PEEK - Strips…[Marked #6; Position #P]
Hardness (D) 85 86 86 86 +1.2%
Wt in Air 6-1 3.7885 3.7961 3.7955 3.7922 --- Thickness-1 .128 .127 .127 .127
6-2 3.7189 3.7264 3.7259 3.7232 --- -2 .125 .125 .124 .124
% Change --- 0.20 0.19 0.11% --- % Swell --- -0.39 -0.79 -0.79%
COMPOUND: Ryton - Strips…[Marked #7; Position #19]
Hardness (D) 69 68 68 68 -1.4%
Wt in Air 7-1 5.8194 5.8159 5.8169 5.8122 --- Thickness-1 .133 .133 .131 .133
7-2 5.7918 5.7883 5.7908 5.7842 --- -2 .129 .130 .129 .128
% Change --- -0.06 -0.03 -0.13% --- % Swell --- 0.39 0.75 0.39%

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (8/7) (8/8) (8/9) (8/14) Change (Date) (8/7) (8/8) (8/9) (8/14)
COMPOUND: 7265 (Viton-ETP – Seals Eastern) O-Ring…[Marked #8 ; Position #1 ]
Hardness (A) 93 94 94 94 1.08% Thickness-1 .110 .110 .110 .111
Wt. In Air –1 5.3334 5.3648 5.3626 5.3710 --- -2 .110 .111 .111 .111
-2 5.3525 5.3814 5.3804 5.3660 --- % Swell --- 0.45 0.45 0.91%
% Change --- 0.56 0.53 0.48% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: 9062 (Viton – Parco) O-Ring…[Marked #9 ; Position #4 ]
Hardness (A) 99 99 99 99 0% Thickness-1 .106 .106 .106 .106
Wt. In Air –1 5.2437 5.2505 5.2488 5.2425 --- -2 .106 .107 .107 .107
-2 5.2639 5.2687 5.2669 5.2620 --- % Swell --- 0.47 0.47 0.47%
% Change --- 0.11 0.10 0.03% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: V8588 (Perflouroelastomer – Parker) O-Ring…[Marked #10; Position #7 ]
Hardness (A) 98 99 99 98 0% Thickness-1 .116 .116 .116
Wt In Air –1* 6.5381 6.5398 6.5388 6.5357 --- -2 .116 .116 .116
-2** 6.5366 6.5328 6.5361 6.5318 --- % Swell --- --- 0 0%
% Change --- -0.03 0 -0.06% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
* Sample-1: Batch #1128 ……..Sample-2: Batch #40000039
COMPOUND: Chemraz (Greene-Tweed) O-Ring…[Marked #11; Position #10]
Hardness (A) 95 95 95 95 0% Thickness-1 .104 .104 .104 .104
Wt. In Air –1 3.5283 3.5266 3.5255 3.5234 --- -2 .105 .106 .106 .106
-2 3.2138 3.2096 3.2089 3.2056 --- % Swell --- 0.48 0.48 0.48
% Change --- -0.09 0.15 0.20% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: Kalrez (DuPont) O-Ring…[Marked #11; Position #13]
Hardness (A) 90 90 91 91 1.11% Thickness-1 .109 .109 .109 .109
Wt. In Air –1 3.7585 3.7539 3.7565 3.7488 --- -2 .109 .109 .109 .109
-2 4.1292 4.1201 4.1189 4.1128 --- % Swell --- 0 0 0%
% Change --- -0.17 -0.15 -0.33% --- Notes --- Flex Flex Flexible
COMPOUND: 705-85 (EPDM – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #12; Position #16]
Hardness (A) 84 84 85 86 2.38% Thickness-1 .097 .097 .097 .097
Tensile 2859 2826 2930 2855 -0.14% -2 .098 .099 .098 .098
Elongation 238 231 221 203 -14.7% % Swell --- 0.51 0 0%
50% Mod. 517 539 580 636 --- Wt. in Air -1 5.1641 5.1394 5.1465 5.1399
100% Mod. 1022 1037 1135 1221 --- -2 5.1281 5.1319 5.1242 5.1165
200% Mod. 2392 2431 2549 2740 --- % Change --- -0.28 -0.21 -0.35%

104
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 105 -

Samples Below Tested @275°F (135°C) due to the Temperature Limit of the Compounds (Nitrile)

Time-hrs. 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week % Time-hrs 0 24 hr 48 hr 1 week

(Date) (8/14) (8/15) (8/16) (8/21) Change (Date) (8/14) (8/15) (8/16) (8/21)

COMPOUND: 320-60 (Nitrile – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #1; Position #A ]

Hardness (A) 70 70 70 71 1.43% Thickness-1 .083 .084 .085 .086
Tensile 2866 2975 2698 2768 -3.42% -2 .078 .079 .078 .079
Elongation 595 536 490 503 -15.46% % Swell --- 1.24 1.20 +2.45%
50% Mod. 230 265 267 264 --- Wt. in Air -1 4.2340 4.2351 4.2594 4.2359
100% Mod. 393 445 453 449 --- -2 4.0340 4.0338 4.0365 4.0436
200% Mod. 885 1041 1039 1016 --- % Change --- 0.01 0.33 +0.14%
300% Mod. 1499 1732 1702 1686 +12.5%
COMPOUND: 201-75 (Nitrile – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #2; Position #D ]
Hardness (A) 84 83 84 86 +2.38% Thickness-1 .065 .069 .069 .072
Tensile 3727 3381 3106 2701 -27.53% -2 .064 .068 .067 .069
Elongation 383 253 226 170 -55.61% % Swell --- 6.20 5.42 +9.29%
50% Mod. 524 571 591 762 --- Wt. in Air -1 3.7977 3.8006 3.7968 3.7939
100% Mod. 912 1105 1134 1498 +64.3% -2 3.8589 3.8603 3.8512 3.8506
200% Mod. 2140 2655 2729 --- ---- % Change --- 0.09 -0.11 -0.16%
COMPOUND: N-9029 (Nitrile – Halliburton) Dumbbells…[Marked #3; Position #G]
Hardness (A) 93 92 94 95 2.15% Thickness-1 .088 .093 .096 .097
Tensile 2301 2142 2059 2322 0.91% -2 .098 .102 .106 .106
Elongation 251 180 147 112 -55.38% % Swell --- 4.88 8.63 +9.20
50% Mod. 662 779 1017 1721 --- Wt. in Air -1 5.3117 5.2844 5.2261 5.2051
100% Mod. 986 1261 1554 2210 124.1% -2 5.8294 5.8066 5.7365 5.7192
200% Mod. 1943 --- --- --- --- % Change --- 0.45 -1.60 -1.69%

CONCLUSIONS:

1. All materials tested, except Nitrile and sulfur-cured HNBR, performed well in this fluid.
2. Sulfur-cured HNBR and all Nitrile rubber samples (Halliburton Proprietary rubber compounds:
HNBR-9030, 320-60, 201-75 & N-9029) showed a dramatic loss in flexibility (loss in elongation) in
the fluid. These compounds should not be used in this fluid.
3. All of the other materials tested (AFLAS, peroxide-cured HNBR, Glass filled TEFLON, PEEK,
Ryton, Viton-ETP, Fluorel, Viton, V8577 Perfluoroelastomer, Chemraz, Kalrez & EPDM) are
suitable for use in this fluid.

105
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 106 -
Field Tests 3) Add 1.0 mL of the fluid sample to the Erlenmeyer flask using the
Alkalinity: WBM syringe.
4) Stopper the flask and shake vigorously.
Objective 5) Add 200 mL of distilled water and 10 to 15 drops of
Determine the alkalinity (Pm) of a water-based mud (WBM). phenolphthalein indicator solution to the flask. Stopper the flask
Unit and shake vigorously for a minimum of two minutes.
mL 6) Allow the phases to separate.
Example
P = 1.2 mL of 0.02N (N/50) sulfuric acid solution 7)
If... Then...
Equipment
• Titration dish A pink color develops and remains, Go to Step 8.
• 3-mL syringe (without
A pink color does not develop, Alkalinity is zero. Go to Step 16.
needle)
• 5-mL pipette
• Stirring rod 8) Add 3 mL of sulfuric acid solution to the flask using the 5-mL
• 50-mL graduated cylinder pipette.
(250-mL for lime mud’s) 9) Stopper the flask and shake vigorously. Allow the phases to
• 0.02N (N/50) sulfuric acid separate.
solution
• Phenolphthalein indicator If... Then...
solution
The solution remains pink, Go to Step 11.
• Distilled water
Procedure The solution turns colorless, Go to Step 12.
Collect a fluid sample.
1. Transfer 1 mL of the sample to the titration dish using the 10) Continue to add sulfuric acid solution in 3-mL increments until the
syringe. pink color disappears.
2. Add 50 mL of distilled water to the titration dish and stir. Note Note: Shake the solution after each addition of sulfuric acid.
the color of the mixture for Step 5. 11) Record the volume of sulfuric acid used in mL. Back titrate with
3. Note: For lime mud’s, use 200 mL of distilled water. sodium hydroxide using the 1-mL pipette until the pink color first
4. Add 10 to 15 drops of phenolphthalein indicator solution to reappears and remains.
the titration dish and stir. Note: Shake the solution after each addition of sodium hydroxide. Add
5. Add the sulfuric acid solution one drop at a time to the sodium hydroxide only until the pink color reappears.
titration dish until the color changes from pink or red to the
original color. 12) Record the volume of sodium hydroxide used in mL.
6. Record the amount of sulfuric acid solution used (in mL) as P. 13) Calculate alkalinity.
14) Alkalinity = mL N/10 sulfuric acid - mL N/10 sodium hydroxide
If... Then... 15) Calculate excess lime pounds per barrel of mud.
A pink or red color develops, Go to Step 5. 16) Excess lime, lb/bbl = 1.3 × alkalinity

Alkalinity: Filtrate (Pf/Mf)

There is no color change, Pm equals zero. Go to Step 6. Objective
Determine the amounts of soluble ions that contribute to alkalinity in a
water-based drilling fluid.
Alkalinity: OBM/ Synthetics Note: If the mud contains high concentrations of organic thinners (i.e.,
CARBONOX), use the alternate filtrate alkalinity (P1 /P2) method.
Objective Unit
Determine the whole-mud alkalinity and lime content of an oil-based mL
mud (OBM) or synthetics. Example
Unit Pf = 0.3 mL of 0.02N (N/50) sulfuric acid solution
mL Mf = 1.3 mL of 0.02N (N/50) sulfuric acid solution
Example Equipment
Alkalinity = 1.8 mL of 0.1N (N/10) sulfuric acid solution • Titration dish
Equipment • 1-mL pipette
• 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask with a rubber stopper or a pint jar • 2-mL pipette
with a lid • 5-mL pipette
• 3-mL disposable syringe • Stirring rod
• 50-mL graduated cylinder • Distilled water
• 250-mL graduated cylinder • 0.02N (N/50) sulfuric acid solution
• Two 1-mL pipettes • Phenolphthalein indicator solution
• Two 5-mL pipettes • Methyl orange indicator solution
• Arcosol PNP® solvent Note: As an option, use methyl purple indicator solution or bromocresol
Note: If the solvent is not available, the base fluid can be used. green.
• Dionized water
Note: If dionized water is not available, distilled water can be used. The Procedure
pH of the water must be approximately seven (7).
1) Collect a filtrate sample using the API filtrate (LPLT) method.
• Phenolphthalein indicator solution
2) Transfer 1 mL of the filtrate to the titration dish using the 1-mL
• 0.1N (N/10) sulfuric acid solution
pipette.
• 0.1N (N/10) sodium hydroxide
Procedure 3) Add 10 to 15 drops of phenolphthalein indicator solution to the
1) Collect a drilling fluid sample. titration dish.
2) Measure 100 mL of Arcosol PNP solvent into the Erlenmeyer flask.

106
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 107 -

If... Then... Alkalinity: Alternate (P1 /P2)

Objective
There is a color change, Go to Step 4.
Determine the amounts of soluble ions that contribute to alkalinity in a
There is no color change, Pf water-based drilling fluid.
is zero. Go to Step 6. Unit
4) Add the sulfuric acid solution slowly to the titration dish (using the mL
2- or 5-mL pipette) until the color changes from pink or red to the Example
original filtrate color. P1 = 11.5 mL of 0.02N (N/50) hydrochloric acid solution
5) Record the amount of sulfuric acid solution used in mL as Pf. P2 = 9.8 mL of 0.02N (N/50) hydrochloric acid solution
6) Add 10 to 15 drops of methyl orange indicator solution to the
filtrate mixture. Equipment
7) Continue titration with the sulfuric acid solution until the color • 1-mL volumetric pipette
changes from orange to salmon pink. • 2-mL volumetric pipette
8) Record the total amount of sulfuric acid solution used, including • Titration dish C 25-mL graduated cylinder
the amount from the P test, as the Mf value. • 5-mL or 10-mL graduated cylinder
9) Calculate the concentration of hydroxyl (OH), carbonate (CO2), and • Stirring rod C 3-mL syringe C Distilled water
bicarbonate (HCO3) ions using the following table. • Barium chloride solution (10 percent, neutralized to pH 7 with
NaOH)
• Phenolphthalein indicator solution C 0.02N (N/50) hydrochloric
Concentration, mg/L
acid solution
• 0.1N (N/10) sodium hydroxide solution
Criteria OH- CO-2 HCO -
Procedure
Pf = 0 0 0 1,220 Mf 1) Collect a filtrate sample using the API filtrate (LPLT) method.
2) Determine the P alkalinity of the sample using
1,220 (Mf - Steps 2 through 5 of the Pf /Pm procedure
2Pf < M f 0 1,200 P f
2Pf)
Note: Substitute hydrochloric acid for sulfuric acid solution
2Pf = M f 0 1,200 P f 0 3) Determine the P1 alkalinity.
a) Transfer 1.0 mL of filtrate to the titration dish.
2Pf > M f 340 (2Pf - Mf ) 1,200 (Mf - Pf ) 0 b) Add 24 mL of distilled water to the titration dish.
c) Add exactly 2.0 mL of sodium hydroxide solution to the
Pf = M f 340 M f 0 0
titration dish using the volumetric pipette.
d) Add 3 mL of barium chloride solution to the titration dish
using the 3-mL syringe.
Warning: Barium chloride is extremely poisonous. Be sure to
use a syringe, and not a pipette, to add the barium chloride
solution to the titration dish.
e) Add 2 to 4 drops of phenolphthalein indicator solution while
stirring the contents of the titration dish.
f) Titrate the mixture with the hydrochloric acid solution (using
the 10-mL pipette) until the solution is colorless.
Note: If the pink color reappears, do not continue the
titration.
g) Record the volume of hydrochloric acid solution needed to
reach the endpoint as P1.
4) Determine the P2 alkalinity.
a) Add 25 mL of distilled water to a clean titration dish.
b) Repeat Steps 3c through 3f to determine P2 .
c) Record the volume of hydrochloric acid solution needed to
reach the endpoint as P2 .
d) Calculate the concentration of hydroxyl (OH-), carbonate
(CO3), or bicarbonate (HCO3) ions.
Concentration, mg/L
Concentration calculations. Use these calculations for
hydroxide (OH-), Criteria OH- CO3 HCO3-
Carbonate (CO -2 ), and bicarbonate (HCO -) ions in water-
based drilling fluids. 1,200 [Pf - (P1 -
P1 > P 2 340 (P1 - P2 ) 0
P2)]
Excess lime, lb/bbl ' = 0.26 x [Pm - (Pf x Fw)]
Excess lime, kg/m 3 = 0.74 x [Pm - (Pf x Fw )]
P1 = P 2 0 1,200 P f 0
An approximation of excess lime can be obtained by:
Excess lime, lb/bbl = (Pm - Pf)/4
Excess lime, kg/m 3 = (Pm - Pf) x 0.7 P1 < P 2 0 1,200 P f 1,220 (P2 - P1)

Where Concentration calculations. Use these calculations for hydroxide (OH-),

carbonate (CO -2 ), and bicarbonate (HCO) ions in water-based drilling
Pf is the phenolphthalein endpoint of the filtrate fluids.
Pm is the phenolphthalein endpoint of the mud
Fw is the water fraction

107
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 108 -
Brine clarity bedded layer of solids at the tip that will require probing with a fine
Objective wire to dislodge for cleaning.
Estimate the solids content in a completion/workover fluid by measuring
brine turbidity and or percent solids v/v. Solids Content Cross Reference
Units PPM / MgL Fraction Value % Solids Decimal
Nephelometric turbidity unit (NTU)
Percent Solids (0.00%) 1 1/1,000,000 0.0001 0.000001
Part Per Million (PPM / MgL)
Example 10 1/100,000 0.001 0.00001
• Brine clarity = 20 NTU
100 1/10,000 0.01 0.0001
• Percent Solids = 0.01%
• Part Per Million = 100 PPM or 100 MgL
1000 1/1000 0.1 0.001
Note: PPM and MgL or similar measurements but not synonymous
Equipment 10,000 1/100 1 0.01
Turbidimeter
Centrifugal Spin-Out Kit 100,000 1/10 10 0.1
Procedure
1) Collect a 100-mL fluid 1,000,000 1 100 1
sample from each
location of interest.
Locations of interest Clean NTU Values for Fluid Types
might include one or Fluid Type NTU Range (Clean)
more of the following:
• Mixing plant at low-pressure line NH4CL, NaCl & KCl 1 – 20
• Transport truck, after half the volume has flowed from the
CaCl, KBr & NaBr 4 – 20
truck
• Transport boat, before offloading
CaBr & ZnBr 8 - 30
• Rig site tank at low-pressure line or tank
• Rig site flow line
• Rig site filtration sample

2) Observe the sample; it should be: Brine specific gravity (density)

a) Gas/Air bubble free Objective
b) Hydrocarbon free Determine the weight per unit volume of a brine.
c) Floating solids / materials should be removed Note: Use this method for most fluids except those that are viscous
d) Viscous fluids (containing polymer) cannot be measured with and/or those that contain solids.
a Turbidimeter Unit
e) Fluids containing amines, cyanogen compounds or other sg or lb/gal
chemicals that will affect the path of a light beam across the Example
measurement cell of the turbidimeter, will give false values Brine sg = 1.247 (10.406 lb/gal)
Equipment
relative to solids content. If the fluid will be used under these
conditions, establish a base line NTU value by taking samples • Deaerator (optional)
from the filter system guard filter downstream port. Average • Glass cylinder
the values of samples to establish a median clean NTU value • Hydrometer
Note: Massive and or dense particles tend to settle quickly. If settled Caution: Do not drop the hydrometer; it may crack
solids content is observed or seen as likely, a spin out measurement is on contact with a hard surface.
necessary. An NTU reading will be misleading because the solids will Procedure
settle before the meter can obtain an accurate measurement. 1. Collect a fluid sample.
2. To deaerate the fluid sample:
3) Ensure that the solids content (visible or non-visible) is evenly • Allow the sample to stand 3 to 5 minutes while tapping gently
distributed by mild agitation. Do not shake or stir vigorously or on the cylinder. Or;
gases will be entrained and make NTU readings inaccurate. o Use the deaerator.
4) Fill two (2) spinout sample vials to the fill line and place in the o Pour the fluid sample into the deaerator.
centrifuge spin sheaths. o Secure the top on the container.
5) Fill a Turbidimeter sample vial to the top of the vial (no air o Agitate the sample while operating the vacuum
gap).The fluid sample must be free of entrained air/gas bubbles. If pump.
bubbles are adhering to the inside surfaces of the vial, lightly tap o Continue until the hand-operated vacuum pump can
the vial to dislodge the bubbles. Seal the vial and invert several no longer be pumped.
times to ensure that solids are dispersed evenly. Insert into the o Pull the release valve.
meter’s optical cell. o Open the container.
Note: Follow the manufactures guidelines for the equipment in use. No 3. Equilibrate the fluid at 70°F (21°C) or at the desired reference
two meters of the same or different type will yield the same NTU temperature.
reading for the same sample. Note: If necessary, cool the sample in the refrigerator or pack the
6) Observe and record the stable reading value given by the meter sample with ice or use the expansion factor equation to obtain the
7) Operate the centrifuge by rotating the hand crank at about 1 crank correct density @70o f..
per second for 1 to 2 minutes. Allow the header to stop and 4. Fill the glass cylinder with the fluid sample to within 1 to 2 inches
withdraw the sample vial. If the fluid appears hazy or cloudy, of the top by pouring the sample slowly down the side of the cylinder.
continue centrifuging for several more minutes. 5. Inspect the hydrometer to ensure that it is clean and dry.
Note: Viscous fluids will require centrifuge times of at least 5 minutes. 6. Place the hydrometer carefully into the cylinder, allowing it to
8) Observe and record the PPM or percent solids indicated on the vial gently settle to the proper measurement level.
graduations. Caution: Dropping the hydrometer too rapidly can wet the hydrometer
9) Dispose of sample fluid volumes and thoroughly clean the sample above the proper measurement level and cause false readings.
vials with clean fresh water. Centrifuge vials will often have a

108
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 109 -
7. Spin the hydrometer and record the reading at which the
hydrometer rests.

Volume expansion (Ve) factors

Ve Density, lb/gal (sg) Brine
0.000349 9.0 (1.08) NaCl
0.000406 9.5 (1.14) NaCl
0.000280 12.0 (1.44) NaBr
0.000333 9.0 (1.08) CaCl2
0.00030 9.5 (1.14) CaCl2
0.000289 10.0 (1.20) CaCl2
0.000260 10.5 (1.26) CaCl2
0.000240 11.0 (1.32) CaCl2
0.000239 11.5 (1.38) CaCl2
0.000271 12.0 (1.44) CaBr2 /CaCl2
Note: Read the hydrometer scale at the bottom of the meniscus of the
fluid in the cylinder. Because the walls of the glass cylinder are water- 0.000264 12.5 (1.50) CaBr2 /CaCl2
wet, the top of the fluid will have a curved surface (the meniscus). The
correct hydrometer reading will be the one aligned with the bottom 0.000257 13.0 (1.56) CaBr2 /CaCl2
boundary of the meniscus, as viewed from the side of the cylinder. 0.000254 13.5 (1.62) CaBr2 /CaCl2

8. Multiply the hydrometer reading (specific gravity) by 8.345 to 0.000253 14.0 (1.68) CaBr2 /CaCl2
convert it to density, lb/gal (sg × 8.345 = lb/gal). 0.000250 14.5 (1.74) CaBr /CaCl

9. Convert the sample density to the industry-standard reference 0.000250 15.0 (1.80) CaBr2 /CaCl2
density at 70°F (21°C).
0.000250 15.5 (1.86) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
/CaCl2
Dc = Dm (1 + Ve [Tm - 70])
0.000251 16.0 (1.92) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
/CaCl2
Where:
Dc = Corrected density at 70°F (21°C) 0.000252 16.5 (1.98) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
Dm = Density at temperature in lb/gal /CaCl2
Tm = Temperature of sample tested, °F 0.000254 17.0 (2.04) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
Ve = Volume expansion factors (dimensionless) /CaCl2
0.000259 17.5 (2.10) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
Note: Refer to the following table for Ve factors. /CaCl2
0.000264 18.0 (2.16) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
/CaCl2
0.000271 18.5 (2.22) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
/CaCl2
0.000278 19.0 (2.28) ZnBr2 /CaBr2
/CaCl2
Use this table to determine Ve factors.

109
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 110 -
Chloride content Note: Concentration of salt in lb/bbl can be calculated using the
Objective following formula:
Determine the chloride content of a water-based drilling fluid or
completion/workover fluid. lb/bbl salt = mg/L salt × 3.505 × 10-4
Note: If bromide is present, it will show up as chloride using this test
procedure. 12. Calculate brine sg (sg brine) using the table below.
Unit
Mg/L If the salt is... Then the sg brine is...
Example
Chloride = 15,000 mg/L Sea salt 0.998 + (1.359 × 10-6 ) (mg/L Cl– ) - (1.643 ×
Equipment 10-12 ) (mg/L Cl–)2
• Titration dish
• 1-mL pipette Sodium chloride 0.998 + (1.142 × 10-6 ) (mg/L Cl– ) - (4.926 ×
• 10-mL pipette (NaCl) 10-13 ) (mg/L Cl–)2
• Stirring rod
• Potassium chromate indicator Potassium chloride 0.998 + (1.312 × 10-6) (mg/L Cl–) - (5.970 ×
solution (KCl) 10-13) (mg/L Cl–)2
• 0.02N (N/50) sulfuric acid
solution Calcium chloride 0.998 + (1.243 × 10-6) (mg/L Cl–) - (3.715 ×
• Phenolphthalein indicator solution (CaCl2) 10-13) (mg/L Cl–)2
• Distilled water
• 0.0282N (1 mL = 0.001g Cl-/mL) or 0.282N (1 mL= 0.01g Cl-
/mL) silver nitrate (AgNO3) solution 13. Calculate the % by volume salt using the table below.

If testing a... Then use... If the salt is... Then the % by volume salt is (% by
Freshwater system 0.0282N AgNO3 volume dissolved solids)...
Saltwater system 0.282N AgNO3 Sea salt [7.368 × 10-6 + 4.804 × 10-7 × (mg/L Cl– )
+ 1.401 × 10-12 ×
Procedure (Mg/L Cl–)2] × % by vol water
1. Collect filtrate sample using the API filtrate (LPLT) method.
Sodium chloride [-3.025 × 10-4 + 5.068 × 10-7 × (mg/L Cl–)
2. Transfer 1 mL or more of filtrate to the titration dish. Note the
(NaCl) + 4.96 × 10-13 ×
color of the filtrate for Step 6.
(mg/L Cl–)2] × % by vol water
3. Add 20 to 50 mL of distilled water to the filtrate in the titration
dish. Potassium chloride [-2.479 × 10-4 + 7.922 × 10-7 × (mg/L Cl–)
4. Add 10 to 15 drops of phenolphthalein indicator solution. (KCl) + 6.011 × 10-13 ×
(Mg/L Cl–)2] × % by vol water
If... Then...
The color changes to pink or red, Go to Step 5. Calcium chloride [-5.538 × 10-4 + 3.181 × 10-7 × (mg/L Cl–)
No color change is observed, Go to Step 6. (CaCl2) + 3.795 × 10-13 ×
(mg/L Cl–)2] × % by vol water
5. Add the sulfuric acid solution slowly to the titration dish until
the color changes from pink or red to the original color.
6. Add 5 to 10 drops of potassium chromate indicator solution.
Crystallization point
7. Fill the 10-mL pipette with the silver nitrate solution.
8. Add the silver nitrate solution to the titration dish until the
Objective
color changes from yellow to orange or orange-red.
Determine the crystallization temperature of a high-density
9. Record the amount of silver nitrate solution used in mL.
completion/workover fluid, including:
10. Calculate the chloride content using the table below.
• First crystal to appear (FCTA)
• True crystallization temperature (TCT)
If using... Then the mg/L chloride content is...
• Last crystal to dissolve (LCTD)
0.0282N AgNO3 (1,000 × mL 0.0282N AgNO3) ÷ mL filtrate
Unit
°F (°C)
0.282N AgNO3 (10,000 × mL 0.282N AgNO3) ÷ mL filtrate Example
Crystallization point = 50°F (10°C)
11. Calculate the concentration of salt in the fluid using the table
below. Equipment
Note: Crystallization kit is available from FANN Instrument Company.
If the salt is... Then the mg/L salt is... • Digital thermometer (-50 to
Sea salt 1.804 × mg/L Cl– 100°F [-46 to 38°C]) with
thermometer probe
Sodium chloride (NaCl) 1.648 × mg/L Cl– • 25 × 150-mm test tube
Potassium chloride (KCl) 2.103 × mg/L Cl– • 20 × 150-mm test tube
2
• Seeding material (e.g., calcium
Calcium chloride (CaCl ) 1.565 × mg/L Cl– carbonate, diatomaceous earth)
• One or more of the cooling baths in the table below

Note: The temperature of the cooling bath should be no more than 20°F
(11°C) below the expected FCTA. Cool samples at a rate of no more
than 1°F (0.5°C) per minute.

110
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 111 -
Density: Baroid mud balance
If anticipated Then use... Note Objective
FCTA is... Measure the density of a drilling or completion/workover fluid with a
Baroid mud balance.
> 35°F Ice/water Cooling bath temperature will Units
(> 2°C) (50/50) be 32°F (0°C). lb/gal, lb/ft3 , g/cm3 , lb/in2/1,000 ft, sg
Example
Drilling fluid density = 12 lb/gal (1.44 g/cm3) or (1.44 sg)
> 10°F Ice/NaCl/water Cooling bath temperature will Equipment
(> -12°C) (50/50) be about 5 – 10°F (-15 – • Baroid mud balance
12°C). • 1-qt (946 cm3) graduated mud cup
NaCl solutions should contain • Thermometer: 32 to 220°F (0 to 104°C)
30 g NaCl in 90-cm3 water.
> -49°F Antifreeze/water Cooling bath is cooled by
(> -45°C) (60/40) placing the bath container in a
Ethylene glycol dry ice/acetone bath.
37% The bath should be cooled to
Note: 58.1 % 15°F (9°C) below the expected
volume FCTA.
= 50% weight
> -40°F Ice/CaCl2/water Cooling bath will cool brine to
(> -40°C) (50/50) -40°F (-40°C).
Note: 29.8%
weight by
volume CaCl2

Procedure
1. Transfer 25 mL of the sample brine into the 20 × 150-mm
test tube.
2. Add 0.03 g of seeding material to the brine.
3. Place the test tube containing the mixture into the 25 × 150-
mm test tube; then, put the test tubes in the cooling bath.
4. Place the thermometer in the brine mixture and use the
thermometer to slowly stir the mixture as it cools.
5. Record the following temperatures.
a. FCTA: The minimum temperature reached just
before crystallization occurs.
b. TCT: The maximum temperature reached just after
crystallization occurs.
Note: The brine will remain at the TCT temperature for about 10 to 20
seconds. If the temperature does not stabilize, suspect super cooling
and retest using a cooling bath with a warmer initial temperature.
6. Take the tubes out of the bath and stir the mixture as it
warms. Record the temperature of the brine just after all of
the crystals has dissolved, as the LCTD temperature.
7. Repeat the test at least three more times. The same sample
can be used.
8. Record the average of three tests. If the first test is
inconsistent with the remaining tests, do not include it in the
average.
Procedure
1. Place the base stand or carrying case on a flat, level surface.
2. Collect a fluid sample.
3. Measure and record the temperature of the sample; transfer
the sample to the mud balance cup.
4. Tap the side of the mud balance cup gently with the cup's lid
to break out any trapped air or gas.
Note: If trapped air or gas is present, use the pressurized fluid density
balance to determine mud weight. The procedure for using the
pressurized fluid density balance follows this procedure.
5. Place the lid on the mud balance cup with a twisting motion
and make sure some of the test sample is expelled through
the lid's vent hole.
6. Note: Immersing the lid in the fluid sample helps ensure a
better closing.
7. Seal the vent hole with a finger and clean the balance with
water, base oil, or solvent. Wipe off any excess water, base
oil, or solvent.
8. Fit the knife-edge of the balance into the fulcrum and balance
the assembly by moving the rider along the arm.

Note: The balance is level when the line on the sight glass is centered
across the bubble.

9. Record the density from the side of the rider nearest the
balance cup (the arrow on the rider points to this side).
Report the measurement to the nearest 0.1 lb/gal, 1 lb/ft3 ,
0.01 g/cm3, or 10.0 lb/in2/1,000 ft.

111
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 112 -
Density: Pressurized mud balance Fann convertible density
balance
Objective
Measure the density of a fluid with a pressurized mud balance.
Units
lb/gal, lb/ft3 , g/cm3 (sg), lb/in2/1,000 ft
Example
Drilling fluid density = 12 lb/gal (1.44 g/cm3) or (1.44 sg)
Equipment
• Fann (convertible density balance)
• 1-qt (946-mL) graduated mud cup
• Thermometer: 32 to 220°F (0 to 104°C)
Procedure
1. Collect a fluid sample.
2. Place the base stand or the carrying case on a flat, level
surface.
3. Measure and record the temperature of the sample, then
transfer the sample to the balance cup, filling to between 1/4
and 1/8 inch of the top. Tap the side of the cup several times
to break up any entrained air or gases.
4. Place the lid on the cup with the check valve in the down or
open position.
Note: Some of the test sample may be expelled through the valve.
5. Rinse the pressurization port and balance with water, base oil,
or solvent and dry.
6. Slide the cup housing over the balance cup from the bottom,
aligning the slot with the balance arm. Screw the closure over
the pressure lid and tighten as tight as possible by hand to
insure the pressure lid is completely seated.
7. Fill the pressurization pump with the test sample.
8. Push the nose of the pump onto the pressure port of the lid.
9. Pressurize the sample cup by maintaining a downward force
on the cylinder housing. At the same time, force the knob
down, with 50-70 lbs of force and release cylinder housing.
Remove the pump.
Note: The check valve in the lid is pressure-actuated. When there is
pressure in the cup, the check valve is pushed upward to the closed
position.
10. Clean the mud from the outside of the balance cup and lid.
Wipe off any excess water, base oil, or solvent.
11. Fit the knife-edge of the balance into the fulcrum and balance
the assembly by moving the rider along the arm.
Note: The mud balance is level when the line at the sight glass is
centered across the bubble.
12. Record the density from the side of the rider nearest the
balance cup. Report the measurement to the nearest 0.1
lb/gal, 1 lb/ft3, 0.01 g/cm3, or 10.0-lb/in2/1,000 ft.
13. Reconnect the empty plunger assembly and push downward
on the cylinder housing to release the pressure inside the cup.
14. Remove the pressure lid being careful not to spill the sample,
then pore out the sample. Clean and dry all of the parts of the
balance as soon as possible.
112
Density: Pressurized mud balance Halliburton Tru-Wate Cup
Objective
Measure the density of a fluid with a pressurized mud balance.
Units
lb/gal, lb/ft3 , g/cm3 , lb/in2/1,000 ft, sg
Example
Drilling fluid density = 12 lb/gal (1.44 g/cm3) or (1.44 sg)
Equipment
• Halliburton Tru-Wate Cup (fluid
density balance)
• 1-qt (946-mL) graduated mud
cup
• Thermometer: 32 to 220°F (0 to
104°C)
Procedure
1. Collect a fluid sample.
2. Place the base stand or the carrying case on a flat, level
surface.
3. Measure and record the temperature of the sample, then
transfer the sample to the balance cup.
4. Place the lid on the cup with the check valve in the down or
open position.
Note: Make sure some of the test sample is expelled through the valve.
5. Pull the check valve to the closed position.
6. Rinse the cap and threads with water, base oil, or solvent and
dry.
7. Tighten the threaded cap on the cup.
8. Fill the plunger assembly with the test sample.
9. Push the nose of the plunger onto the mating O-ring surface
of the check valve.
10. Pressurize the sample cup by maintaining a downward force
on the cylinder housing. At the same time, force the piston
rod down.
11. Note: The check valve in the lid is pressure-actuated. When
there is pressure in the cup, the check valve is pushed upward
to the closed position.
12. Clean the mud from the outside of the balance cup and lid.
Wipe off any excess water, base oil, or solvent.
13. Fit the knife-edge of the balance into the fulcrum and balance
the assembly by moving the rider along the arm.
14. Note: The mud balance is level when the line at the sight
glass is centered across the bubble.
15. Record the density from the side of the rider nearest the
balance cup. Report the measurement to the nearest 0.1
lb/gal, 1 lb/ft3, 0.01 g/cm3, or 10.0-lb/in2/1,000 ft.
16. Reconnect the empty plunger assembly and push downward
on the cylinder housing to release the pressure inside the cup.
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 113 -
Electrical stability

Objective
Measure the electrical stability of an oil-based or synthetic drilling fluid.

Unit
Volts (V)
Example
Electrical stability = 1,500 V
Equipment
• Fann model 23D electrical stability
tester
• 12-mesh screen or Marsh funnel
• Thermometer: 32 to 220°F (0 to
104°C)
• Heating cup
Procedure
1. Collect a drilling fluid sample.
2. Pour the sample through the 12-mesh screen or Marsh funnel.
3. Use the heating cup to adjust the temperature of the fluid to 120°F
(49°C).
4. Immerse the probe in the sample with the tester turned off. Ensure
the fluid covers the electrode surfaces.
5. Stir the sample with the probe for 15 to 30 seconds.
6. Turn the electrical stability tester on and press the Test button to
start the test.

Note: Do not move the probe during the test

7. Record the voltage when the values in the display stabilize.

Filtrate: LTLP
Objective
Measure the filtrate volume and filter cake of a drilling fluid using the
API filtrate (LPLT) method.
Unit
mL/30 min
Example
Filtrate = 4.3 mL/30 min
Equipment
• Filter press
• Filter paper
• 30-minute interval timer
• 25- or 50-mL graduated cylinder

Procedure
1. Collect a fluid sample.
2. Assemble the cell with the filter paper in place.
3. Pour the sample into the cell to within ½ inch (13 mm) from
the top.
4. Set the cell into the frame; place and tighten the top on the
cell.
5. Place a dry, graduated cylinder under the drain tube.
6. Close the relief valve and adjust the regulator so a pressure of
100 ± 5 psi (690 ± 35 kPa) is applied in 30 seconds or less.
7. Maintain the pressure at 100 ± 5 psi (690 ± 35 kPa) for 30
minutes.
8. Shut off the flow through the pressure regulator and open the
relief valve carefully.
9. Report the volume of filtrate in the graduated cylinder to the
nearest mL.

Note: If using a half-area filter press, multiply the filtrate volume by 2.

10. Release the pressure, verify that all pressure has been
relieved, and remove the cell from the frame.
11. Disassemble the cell and discard the mud.
12. Leave the filter cake on the paper and wash lightly with the
base fluid to remove any excess mud.
13. Measure and report the thickness of the filter cake to the
nearest 1/32-inch (1.0 mm).

113
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 114 -
Filtrate: HTHP Procedure
1. Collect a fluid sample.
Objective 2. Preheat the heating jacket to 10°F (6°C) above the desired
Measure the filtrate volume and filter cake of a drilling fluid using the test temperature.
high temperature/high pressure (HTHP) method.
Note: If necessary, adjust the thermostat to maintain this temperature.
Unit
mL/30 min 3. Close the bottom valve stem on the filter cell and pour a
Example stirred, fluid sample into the cell.
Filtrate = 8.3 mL/30 min
Equipment Note: Leave sufficient void space to allow for expansion of the mud.
• Baroid 175- or 500-mL HTHP filter press
Then the void space should be
Note: Use the Baroid 175 only with temperatures up to 300°F (149°C); If the temperature is °F (°C)...
Inches (cm)...
use the Baroid 500 for temperatures higher than 300°F (149°C).
Up to 300 (149) 1 (2.5)
• Filter paper
• 30-minute interval timer
300-350 (149-177) 1.5 (3.8)
• Thermometer up to 500°F (260°C) C 25- or 50-mL graduated
cylinder
• High-speed mixer 400-500 (204-260) 2.5-3.0 (6.3 - 7.5)
• Gas supply (CO2 or nitrogen)
Caution: Do not use nitrous oxide (N2O) as a pressure source 4. Place the filter paper in the cell.
for this test. N2O can detonate when under temperature and
5. Place the cap on the cell, tighten all set screws, and close the
pressure in the presence of oil, grease, or carbonaceous
valve stem on the cap.
materials. Use only carbon dioxide (CO2) or nitrogen (N2)!
Note: Apply Never-Seez® or an equivalent lubricant on the set screws
to prevent the set screws from seizing in place.

6. Place the cell in the heating jacket with the cell cap on the
bottom. Rotate the cell until it locks.
7. Put a thermometer in the cell thermometer well.
8. Connect the pressure unit to the top valve stem and lock the
unit in place.
9. Connect the pressure receiver to the bottom valve stem and
lock the receiver in place.
10. Apply 200 psi (1380 kPa) on the top and 100 psi (690 kPa) on
the bottom.
11. Open the top valve stem and maintain this pressure until the
desired test temperature is reached.
12. Open the bottom valve when the cell reaches the desired test
temperature.
13. Adjust the pressure immediately on the top and bottom
regulators. Use the following specifications as a guide.

The top regulator The bottom

If the temperature is
should be set to regulator should
°F (°C)...
(psi)... be set to (psi)...

Up to 300 (149) 600 100

300-400 (149-204) 700 200

400-500 (204-260) 800 300

14. Filter for 30 minutes while maintaining the temperature at ±

5°F (± 3°C) of the test temperature and maintaining the
pressure.

Caution: If the bottom pressure rises 20 psi (138 kPa) above

the specified pressure during the test, cautiously bleed off
pressure by draining a portion of the filtrate from the receiver
into a graduated cylinder.

(Continued on next page)

114
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 115 -
15. Close the top and bottom valve stems.
16. Release the pressure off the top regulator and disconnect the If... Then...
pressure system. A red or purple color develops, Go to Step 7.
17. Back off the T-screw on the bottom regulator. The blue or gray color remains, The mL of the THTS is zero.
18. Drain the filtrate cautiously from the receiver into a graduated Go to Step 9.
cylinder.
19. Wait a few seconds for the filtrate to drain to the bottom of 7. Titrate with the THTS slowly until the color changes from red
the receiver. or purple to blue, gray, or green.
20. Tighten the T-screw slowly to flush any filtrate remaining in 8. Record the volume of THTS required to titrate the filtrate to
the receiver into the graduated cylinder. the endpoint.
21. Release the pressure off the bottom regulator and disconnect 9. Calculate the calcium concentration, mg/L. (see next table)
the pressure system.
22. Remove the cell from the heating jacket and allow the cell to If... Then...
cool. 2-epm THTS was used, (mL THTS × 40) / mL filtrate = mg/L
hardness as calcium
Caution: The cell is extremely hot; therefore, remove it 20-epm THTS was (mL THTS × 400) / mL filtrate = mg/L
carefully from the heating jacket. used, hardness as calcium

23. Hold the filter cell with the cap down and loosen the filter 200-epm THTS was (mL THTS × 4,000) / mL filtrate = mg/L
cell's valve stem to release pressure. used, hardness as calcium
24. Close the valve stem when all the pressure has been released.
25. Hold the filter cell with the cap up and loosen the valve stem. Hardness: Total hardness
26. Loosen the setscrews and remove the cap. Objective
27. Remove and measure the filter cake to the nearest 1/32-inch Determine the total hardness of a water-based drilling fluid.
(1.0 mm).
28. Record the HTHP filtrate as two times the filtrate volume Note: Divalent ions, such as magnesium, zinc, calcium, etc., will
collected. contribute to total hardness.

Unit
Hardness: Calcium-hardness mg/L
Example
Objective Total hardness = 80 mg/L as calcium
Determine the calcium-ion concentration in a water-based fluid.
Equipment
Note: If zinc is present, it will show up as calcium using this test • Titration dish
procedure. • Two 1-mL pipettes
• 50-mL graduated cylinder
Unit • Distilled water
Mg/L • Total hardness titration
Example solution (THTS) in 2-, 20-,
Calcium concentration = 300 mg/L 200-epm concentrations
• Versenate hardness buffer
Equipment solution
• Titration dish • Versenate hardness indicator solution
• 5-mL pipette
• 1-mL pipette Procedure
• 50-mL graduated cylinder 1. Collect a filtrate sample using the API filtrate (LPLT) method.
• Total hardness titration solution (THTS) in 2-, 20-, or 200-epm 2. Add approximately 20 to 50 mL of distilled water to the
concentrations titration dish.
• Calcium buffer solution 3. Add 10 to 15 drops of Versenate hardness buffer solution to
• CalVer II indicator powder the titration dish.
• Distilled water 4. Add 10 to 15 drops of Versenate hardness indicator solution
to the titration dish.
Procedure
1. Collect a filtrate sample using the API filtrate (LPLT) method. If... Then...
2. Add 20 to 50 mL of distilled water to the titration dish. A red or purple color develops, Go to Step 5.
3. Add 5 drops of Calcium buffer solution. A blue color develops, Go to Step 6.
4. Add 0.25 to 0.5 g of CalVer II indicator powder.
5. Titrate with the THTS slowly until the color changes from red
If... Then... or purple to blue.
A red or purple color develops, Go to Step 5.
6. Transfer 1 mL or more of filtrate to the titration dish using a
A blue color develops, Go to Step 6.
pipette.
5. Titrate with the THTS slowly until the color changes from red
If... Then...
or purple to blue.
6. Transfer 1 mL or more of filtrate to the titration dish using a A red or purple color develops, Go to Step 7.
pipette.
The blue color remains, The mL of the THTS is zero.
Go to Step 9.

115
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 116 -
7. Titrate with the THTS slowly until the color changes from red Objective
or purple to blue, gray, or green. Determine the cation exchange capacity (CEC) and the equivalent
8. Record the volume of THTS required to titrate the filtrate to bentonite concentration of a water-based drilling fluid or
the endpoint. completion/workover fluid.
9. Calculate the total hardness content, mg/L.
Unit
lb/bbl
If... Then... Example
2-epm THTS was used, (mL THTS × 40) / mL filtrate = mg/L CEC = 5 meq/mL of fluid
hardness as calcium Equivalent bentonite concentration =
20-epm THTS was used, (mL THTS × 400) / mL filtrate = mg/L 25 lb/bbl (71 kg/m3)
hardness as calcium
Equipment
200-epm THTS was used, (mL THTS × 4,000) / mL filtrate = mg/L • 250-mL Erlenmeyer flask
hardness as calcium • 10-mL syringe (without
needle)
Iron content • Two 1-mL pipettes
• 25-mL graduated cylinder
Objective • Stirring rod
Determine approximate iron (Fe+2) content of brines. • Hot plate
Unit • Distilled water
ppm • Methylene blue solution (3.74 g/L; 1 mL =0.01meq)
Example • 3% hydrogen peroxide solution
50 ppm • 5N sulfuric acid solution
• API filter paper
Equipment
• 1-mL volumetric pipette
• 25-mL volumetric flask
• 1N nitric acid solution
• 1N hydrochloric acid solution
• EM Quant strip
• Ascorbic acid

Procedure
1. Put 1 mL of brine in a 25-mL flask using a 1-mL pipette.
2. Add 1 mL of 1N nitric acid or 1N hydrochloric acid to the flask.
3. Add 10 to 19 mL of deionized water to the flask.
4. Stopper the flask and shake.
5. Add 2 level tablespoons of ascorbic acid to the flask.
6. Stopper the flask and shake.
7. Fill the flask to the scribe line with deionized water.
8. Stopper the flask and shake.
9. Wait 5 minutes for the iron contaminant to convert from a
ferric (Fe+3 ) to a ferrous (Fe+2) state.
10. Insert the EM Quant strip into the brine preparation for 1
second.
11. Withdraw the strip and allow the indicator band color to
develop for 15 to 60 seconds.
12. Compare the color of the exposed strip to the color chart on
Procedure
the EM Quant strip tube label; use the number associated with
1. Collect a fluid sample.
the color that best matches the developed strip.
2. Add 10 mL of distilled water to the Erlenmeyer flask.
13. Calculate the approximate iron content of the brine.
3. Transfer 1 mL of the fluid sample to the Erlenmeyer flask;
swirl the flask to disperse the sample.
Iron content, ppm = color chart number × 25.
4. Add 15 mL of the hydrogen peroxide solution to the mixture.
5. Add 0.5 mL of the sulfuric acid solution to the mixture.
6. Place the flask on the hot plate, bring the mixture to a boil,
and slow-boil the mixture for 10 minutes.
7. Remove the flask from the hot plate and dilute the mixture to
50 mL with distilled water. Allow the mixture to cool.
8. Add 0.5 mL of methylene blue solution to the mixture.
9. Agitate the contents of the Erlenmeyer flask for approximately
20 seconds.
10. Transfer a drop of the mixture onto the filter paper with the
stirring rod.
If the drop... Then...
Develops a blue halo, Go to Step 11.
Does not develop a blue halo, Repeat Steps 8 - 10.

11. Agitate the mixture for 2 minutes.

12. Transfer a drop of the mixture onto the filter paper with the
stirring rod.
Methylene blue test (MBT)

116
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 117 -
If the drop... Then... pH: Meter method
Develops a blue halo, This is the endpoint. Go to
Objective
Step 13.
Determine the pH of a water-based drilling fluid or completion/workover
Does not develop a blue halo, Repeat Steps 8 - 12. fluid using the meter method.

13. Record the volume of methylene blue solution used to reach Unit
the endpoint. pH
14. Calculate the methylene blue CEC. Example
pH = 9.5
CEC, meq/mL of the fluid = mL of methylene blue solution ÷ mL of fluid
sample Equipment
• pH meter with electrode
15. Calculate the equivalent bentonite content. • Thermometer
Equivalent bentonite content, lb/bbl = 5 × (CEC) kg/m3 = 14 × (CEC) • pH buffer solutions (pH 7 and pH 10)
• Distilled water
pH: Strip method
Procedure
Objective 1. Collect a fluid sample.
Determine the pH of a water-based drilling fluid or completion/workover 2. Allow the fluid sample and buffer solutions to reach ambient
temperature.
fluid using the strip method. 3. Immerse a clean thermometer into the pH 7 buffer solution
and measure the temperature.
Unit 4. Set the temperature control on the pH meter to match the
pH temperature of the buffer solution.
Example 5. Clean the probe with distilled water and blot dry with a soft,
pH = 9.5 lint-free cloth.
6. Immerse the probe in the pH 7 buffer solution.
Equipment 7. Allow the reading to stabilize.
• pH strips 8. Set the pH meter to display 7.00 using the standardize knob.
9. Rinse with distilled water and blot dry the probe.
Note: Make sure the pH strip range 10. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 substituting pH 10 buffer solution for
encompasses the expected pH of the pH 7 buffer solution.
sample. 11. Set the meter display to 10.00 using the slope adjustment
Procedure knob.
1. Collect filtrate from a fluid sample using the API filtrate (LTLP) 12. Check the meter with the pH 7 buffer solution.
method. 13. Rinse with distilled water and blot dry the probe.
2. Immerse the end of a pH strip in the filtrate for 5 seconds. 14. Recheck the calibration by repeating Steps 6 through 10.
3. Take the pH strip out of the fluid and wait 10 seconds.
Note: If the meter cannot be calibrated, replace the electrodes and start
Note: Do not touch the wet part of the strip. the procedure over using fresh buffer solutions.

4. Compare the color change on the strip with the color table on 15. Rinse with distilled water and blot dry the probe.
the box of pH strips. 16. Immerse the probe in the sample to be tested and stir.
17. Stop the stirring (after 10-20 seconds) and wait for the
If... Then... reading to stabilize.
18. Record the pH to the nearest 0.1 unit.
Repeat Steps 1 - 4 using a range
The color is off the chart and cannot
of pH strip closer to the expected
be matched,
pH range.

5. Read and record the pH value.

117
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 118 -
Retort analysis

Objective 14. Calculate the oil: water (OWR) ratio or synthetic: water (SWR)
Determine the liquid and solids content of a drilling fluid. ratio if the fluid is an oil-based or synthetic mud.
Unit
Percent by volume
Oil fraction = 100 × % by vol oil/synthetic
Example
% by vol oil/synthetic% + % by vol water
Liquid content % vol = 80%
Water fraction = 100 - oil/synthetic fraction
Equipment
OWR = oil fraction: water fraction
• Complete retort kit
SWR =synthetic fraction: water fraction
• JP volumetric receiver
• Fine steel wool
15. Calculate % by volume-undissolved solids.
• High temperature
lubricant
% by vol undissolved solids = % by vol total solids - % by vol
• Pipe cleaners
dissolved solids
• Putty knife or spatula
with blade
Note: For calculation of dissolved solids in oil-based or synthetic fluids,
see the water-phase salinity calculations. For water-based fluids, see the
Procedure
chloride content calculations.
1. Collect a fluid sample and cool it to approximately 80°F
(27°C).
16. Calculate % by vol brine.
2. Pack the upper retort chamber with very fine steel wool.
3. Lubricate the threads on the sample cup and condenser with a
% by vol brine = % by volume water + % by volume
light coating of lubricating/anti-seizing compound.
dissolved solids
Note: This will prevent vapor loss through the threads and facilitate
17. Calculate average specific gravity of solids (ASG).
disassembly of the equipment and cleanup at the end of the test.
ASG = (Mud density,lb/gal) (11.98) - (% by vol oil)(sg oil) - (% by
4. Fill the retort sample cup with gas-free mud.
volume brine) (sg brine)
% by volume undissolved solids
Note: Any trapped air will cause false readings.
Note: For oil-based mud, see the water-phase salinity calculations for
5. Place the lid on the retort cup; rotate the lid slowly.
brine density sg. For water-based mud, see the chloride content
calculations for brine sg.
Note: Make sure some of the test sample is expelled through the vent
hole on the lid.
18. Calculate % by volume low-gravity solids (LGS).
6. Wipe off any excess mud and screw the retort sample cup into
the upper retort chamber.
%LGS = (sg wt mtl - ASG) x 100
7. Place the retort in the insulator block and put the insulator
(sg wt mtl - sg of the LGS)
cover in place.
8. Place the volumetric receiver under the drain of the
condenser.
9. Heat the sample until the liquid stops coming out through the 19. Calculate lb/bbl of LGS.
condenser drain tube, or until the pilot light goes out on the
thermostatically controlled units. lb/bbl LGS = % LGS × sg of the LGS × 3.505

Note: This usually takes 45 to 60 minutes. 20. Calculate % by volume high gravity solids (weight material).

10. Remove the volumetric receiver and examine the liquid % by vol weight material = % by vol undissolved solids - % by vol
recovered. LGS

21. Calculate lb/bbl weight material.

If...
Solids are in the liquid,
An emulsion band exists,
Then...
Whole mud has boiled over from lb/bbl high gravity solids (weight material) =
the sample cup and the test must % weight material × sg of the weight material × 3.505
be repeated.
Warm the volumetric receiver
slowly to
120°F (49°C).

11. Allow the volumetric receiver to cool to approximately 80°F

(27°C).
12. Read and record the volumes of oil, or synthetic and water in
the volumetric receiver.
13. Calculate % by volume of the liquid and solid components of
the fluid.
i) % by volume water = mL water × 10
ii) % by volume oil/synthetic = mL oil/synthetic × 10
iii) % by volume total solids = 100 - % by volume water -
% by volume oil/synthetic

118
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 119 -
Rheological properties: Marsh funnel
Note: High viscosity polymer / brine solutions require a plus
Objective five (+5) spring; Brine fluids require a negative five (-5) spring
Use a Marsh funnel to obtain the funnel viscosity value of a drilling or if accurate dial readings of200 rpm or less are required such as
completion/workover fluid. with annular n & K values. Rheometers require factory
installation and calibration of spring components. Check with
Unit the local field lab for plus and negative five configured units.
sec/qt
Example Procedure
Funnel viscosity = 57 sec/qt 1. Collect a fluid sample.
2. Place the sample in a thermostatically controlled viscometer
Equipment cup.
• Marsh funnel
• 1-qt (946 cm3) Note: Leave enough empty volume for the displacement of the bob and
graduated mud cup sleeve.
• Thermometer: 32 to
220°F (0 to 104°C) 3. Immerse the viscometer rotor sleeve exactly to the scribed
• Stopwatch line.
4. Heat the sample to the selected temperature.
Procedure
1. Collect a fluid sample.
2. Cover the funnel orifice with a finger and pour the fluid Note: To obtain a uniform sample temperature, stir the sample at an
sample through the screen until the sample level reaches the intermittent or constant shear of 600 rpm while heating the sample.
underside of the screen.
3. Hold the funnel over the graduated mud cup. 5. Rotate the viscometer sleeve at 600 rpm until a steady dial
4. Remove the finger covering the funnel orifice and reading is obtained. Record the dial reading (θ600).
simultaneously start the stopwatch. 6. Rotate the viscometer sleeve at 300 rpm until a steady dial
5. Record the time it takes for 1 qt of sample to run out of the reading is obtained. Record the dial reading (θ300).
funnel as the Marsh funnel viscosity. 7. Stir the sample for 10 to 15 seconds at 600 rpm, then let the
mud stand undisturbed for 10 seconds.
Note: Record the time in seconds per quart. The time for 1 qt of clean, 8. Rotate the viscometer sleeve at 3 rpm until the maximum dial
fresh water to run through the Marsh funnel at 70°F (21°C) is 26 reading is obtained.
seconds (± 0.5 seconds). 9. Record the maximum dial reading obtained as the 10-second
gel strength, lbf/100 ft2.
6. Measure and record the temperature of the fluid sample. 10. Re-stir the sample for 10 to 15 seconds at 600 rpm, then let
the sample stand undisturbed for 10 minutes.
11. Rotate the viscometer sleeve at 3 rpm until the maximum dial
Rheological properties: Rotational viscometer reading is obtained.
12. Record the maximum dial reading obtained as the 10-minute
Objective gel strength, lbf/100 ft2.
Determine viscometer readings to calculate the following for a drilling or
completion/workover fluid: Formulas
• Plastic viscosity (PV) PV, cP= θ600 - θ300 rpm
• Yield point (YP) YP, lbf/100 ft2 = θ300 rpm - PV
• Gel strength
AV, cP = θ600 rpm ÷ 2
• Apparent viscosity (AV)
N = 3.32 x log (θ600 ÷ θ300)
• Consistency index (K)
K, lbf secn /100 ft2 = 1.07 (θ300 ÷ 511n )
• Yield stress (YS)
Gel strength, lbf/100 ft2 = Max dial reading at 3 rpm
• Flow index (n)
YS, lbf/100 ft2 = (2 ×θ3 rpm) -θ6 rpm
• Tau 0 (τ0 )
Unit Note: The above calculation is for a standard viscometer.
PV, centipoise (cP)
YP, lbf/100 ft2 (kPa) Note: To calculate Tau 0, use Baroid's software program CFG+, DFG+
Gel strength, lbf/100 ft2 (kPa) and DFG+ Win.
Tau 0, lbf/100 ft2 (kPa)
AV, centipoise (cP)
n [unit less]
K, lbf × secn /100 ft2 (dyne × secn /cm2, or eq cP)
YS, lbf/100 ft2 (kPa)

Equipment
• Calibrated FANN
concentric cylinder
rotational viscometer
• Thermostatically
controlled viscometer
heater cup
• Thermometer: 32 to
220°F (0 to 104°C)

119
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 120 -
Water-phase salinity
6. Determine the sodium chloride content.
Objective a. Add 50 mL of distilled water to a titration dish.
Determine the water-phase salinity of an oil-based or synthetic drilling b. Add 10 to 15 drops of potassium chromate
fluid sample. indicator.
c. Add 1.0 or more mL of mud/solvent/ AKTAFLO-E
Unit emulsion to the titration dish.
ppm, mg/L
d. Titrate with silver nitrate solution (1 mL is
Example
equivalent to 0.001 g Cl– ion) to the first color
Water-phase salinity = 250,000 ppm CaCl2 (307,000 mg/L)
change (from yellow to orange, not brick red).
e. Record the volume of silver nitrate used.
Equipment
• 10-mL syringe
7. Calculate concentrations of calcium chloride and sodium
• 1-mL pipette
• Two 5-mL pipettes chloride, using the following methods.
• Magnetic stirrer with 1.5-inch (38-mm) coated stirring bar
• Hamilton Beach® mixer or Multimixer® with cup Where
• Titration dish L = lime, lb/bbl of mud
• AKTAFLO-E nonionic surfactant r = Retort water fraction (decimal equivalent)
• Distilled water THTS = mL of total hardness titration solution
• Arcosol PNP solvent or base fluid SN = mL of silver nitrate solution
• Calcium buffer solution and CalVer II indicator powder
a. Calculate lb/bbl calcium chloride (CaCl2) using the calcium
Note: Keep the Calcium buffer solution in a closed, sealed bottle to titration (CCa).
minimize absorption of CO2 from the air.
If... Then...
• Potassium chromate indicator solution L ≤ 1, C Ca, lb/bbl = (9.706)(THTS/mL emulsion) - (1.5 L)
• 0.0282N silver nitrate titration solution (1 mL is equivalent to L > 1, C Ca , lb/bbl = (9.706)(THTS/mL emulsion) - 1.5
0.001 g Cl)
• 0.01 molar EDTA standardized or total hardness titration b. Calculate lb/bbl CaCl2 using the chloride titration (CCl).
solution (1 mL = 20 epm calcium) CCl, lb/bbl = (13.72)(SN/mL emulsion)
c. Determine actual lb/bbl CaCl (C).
Procedure
1. Use a 10-mL syringe to transfer 10 mL of the fluid to be
If... Then...
tested into a stirring cup.
CCa > CCl , C, lb/bbl = CCl sodium chloride (NaCl), lb/bbl = 0
2. Add 20 mL of Arcosol PNP solvent or base fluid to the 10 mL
CCa < CCl , C, lb/bbl = CCa calculate NaCl, lb/bbl
of mud and mix thoroughly.
3. Add 20 mL of AKTAFLO-E and 200 mL of distilled water to the
d. Calculate lb/bbl maximum soluble CaCl2 (CMAX).
mixture.
CMAX, lb/bbl = 233 r
4. Mix on a Multimixer or a Hamilton Beach mixer for 5 minutes.
e. Determine lb/bbl soluble CaCl2 (CSOL).
5. Determine the calcium chloride content.
a) Add 50 mL of distilled water to a titration dish.
b) Add 10 to 15 drops of Calcium buffer solution and a
pinch of CalVer II indicator powder to the 50 mL of
distilled water. If... Then...
C < CMAX, CSOL, lb/bbl = C
If... Then...
A wine-red color Titrate to the blue endpoint with total hardness C ≥ CMAX CSOL , lb/bbl = CMAX ; C – CMAX = insoluble CaCl2,
develops titration solution (1 mL = 20 epm). lb/bbl; soluble NaCl, lb/bbl = 0

Note: Do not include this volume of titration solution in calculating the f. Calculate lb/bbl NaCl using the chloride titration (NCl).
calcium chloride content. This part of the test removes calcium from the NCl, lb/bbl = (14.445 SN/mL emulsion) - 1.05CSOL)
distilled water and is for calibration purposes only. g. Calculate lb/bbl maximum soluble NaCl (NMAX).
NMAX, lb/bbl = r[124.83 -(0.843 × (CSOL)) - (0.00329 × (CSOL2)
c) Add 1.0 or more mL of the mud/solvent/ AKTAFLO-E +(0.0000438 x CSOL3) – (0.000000103 x CSOL4)]
emulsion into the titration dish.
d) Titrate to the endpoint with the total hardness titration h. Determine lb/bbl soluble NaCl (NSOL).
solution (1 mL = 20 epm).
If... Then...
Note: The chemical reaction of calcium ions with EDTA (hardness NCL < NMAX NSOL , lb/bbl = NCl
titration solution active component) is very slow. There may be an initial
NSOL, lb/bbl = NMAX ; NCl – NMAX = insoluble NaCl,
color change to blue while titration for calcium, but the color may revert NCl ≥ NMAX
lb/bbl
to the violet/purple color after a few seconds. This is not the endpoint.
The endpoint is reached when the color change from purple or violet to i. Calculate mg/L whole mud chlorides (ClOM).
blue or blue-green remains stable for at least 1 minute. Continue ClOM, mg/L = 25,000 SN/mL emulsion
intermittent additions of hardness titration solution until this endpoint
occurs. j. Calculate lb/bbl total soluble salts (T).
T, lb/bbl = CSOL , lb/bbl + NSOL, lb/bbl
e) Record the total volume of total hardness titration solution k. Calculate water-phase salinity (WPS).
(THTS) used to reach the endpoint. Water phase salinity (WPS) = [1 ÷ (1 + 350 x r/T)] x 106

120
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 121 -
Note: Use the following salinity charts if calculating water-phase salinity
is not a practical option.

l. Calculate brine density.

Brine sg, g/cc = 0.3818 + 4.23 (WPS x 10-6)-4.151(WPS x 10-6)2

m. Calculate volume of brine.

% by volume brine (Vb) = (r x 100) ÷ [sg x (1 - (WPS x 10-6))]

n. Calculate volume of salt (dissolved solids).

% by volume dissolved salts (DS) = Vb - (r x 100)

Salt saturation curves; Use these salt saturation curves to determine

NaClMAX.

Water-phase salinity chart; Use this water-phase salinity chart to

determine salt percent by volume.

121
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 122 -

122
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 123 -
FORMULAE & CALCULATIONS Density and mass of common materials

Mass & Material Balance Equations Lb/ga Lb/b Sack/b

Material SG l bl bl
Fluid Material Balance
The basic material balance equation for drilling and completion fluids is:
BARACARB® (CaCO3) 2.7 22.53 946.3 18.92
V 1W 1 +V 2W 2 + ...=V f W f
V1 + V2 + ... = VF
Barite (BaSO4) 4.20 35.05 1472 14.72
V1 = Volume fluid 1, bbl
W1 = Density fluid 1, lb/gal
Bentonite Clay 2.596 21.66 910 9.1
V2 = Volume fluid 2, bbl
W2 = Density fluid 2, lb/gal
Vf = Volume fluid final, bbl
Wf = Density fluid final, lb/gal Weight-up calculations (volume increase tolerated)
Use the following formulas to calculate the amount of weight material
Use the following equation to raise or lower the weight of known volume required to increase the density of a drilling fluid when a volume
and weight. increase can be tolerated.
 (350.5)( ρ WM )( W F - W I) 
V1 W1 +W2 V 2 =(V1 +V 2 )W f B=  x VI
 (8.3454)( ρ WM ) - W F 
V1 = Volume fluid, bbl
W1 = Weight fluid, lb/gal B
W2 = Adjusted density, lb/gal V=
V2 = Volume of W2, bbl (350.5)( ρ WM )
Wf = Weight, lb/gal Where
B is the weight material to add, lb
V1 + V2 = Final volume
VI is the starting volume of mud, bbl
ρWM is the specific gravity of the weight material
Mixture Mass & Material Balance (Fluid Suspensions)
WF is the desired mud weight, lb/gal
WI is the starting mud weight, lb/gal
Mixture Mass & Material Balance (Fluid Suspensions)
V is the volume increase, bbl
Ideal fluids have a final volume that is equal to the sum of the
component volumes:
Weight-up calculations (final volume specified)
Use the following formulas to calculate a starting volume of mud and
Vt = Vl + ... + Vn amount of weight material required to increase the density of a drilling
fluid when the final volume is specified.
Where:
Vt = Volume Total  (8.3454)( ρ WM ) - W F 
Vl= Volume Component First VI =   x VD
…+Vn = Volume of each component  (8.3454)( ρ WM ) - W I 
The volume of a given mass of a solid with a certain density:
B = (V D - V I)( ρ WM )(350.5)
mi
Vi = ρ i Where
Where: VI is the starting volume of mud, bbl
Vi = Volume ρWM is the specific gravity of the weight material
mi = Mass WF is the desired mud weight, lb/gal
ρi = Density WI is the starting mud weight, lb/gal
VD is the desired final volume, bbl
B is the weight material to add, lb
Mixture density from the mass and volume added:
Decrease mud weight (volume increase tolerated)
ml + m 2 + ... + mn Use the following formula to calculate the volume of dilution fluid
ρ= required to decrease the density of a drilling fluid when a volume
Vl + V 2 + ... + Vn increase can be tolerated.

Where:
 WI - WF 
V DF = V I  
 W F - (8.3454)( ρ DF) 
ρ = solution density
mx = mass of each component
Vx = volume of each component
Where
VDF is the volume of dilution fluid required, bbl
VI is the starting volume of mud, bbl
WI is the starting mud weight, lb/gal
WF is the final mud weight, lb/gal
ρDF is the specific gravity of the dilution fluid

123
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 124 -
Decrease mud weight (final volume specified)
Use the following formula to calculate the starting volume of mud and a Calculate the amount of weight material required to increase density
volume of dilution fluid required to decrease the density of a drilling fluid back to original density. See the sections titled Weight-up calculations.
when the final volume is specified. Formulas for adjusting the density of a brine (Liquid/Liquid)
 (8.3454)( ρ DF) - W F  The following calculation sequences provide a means to determine the
VI =   x VD
 (8.3454)( ρ DF) - W I 
density adjustment factor for the entire system, the barrel fraction of
each component to generate exact volumes and a material balance to
verify the density adjustment factors.
V DF = V D - V I The sequence lends itself well to the use of a hand calculator under field
conditions.
Where
Increase the density of a brine
VI is the starting volume of mud, bbl
Increase the density of brine with higher density brine using the
ρDF is the specific gravity of the dilution fluid following formula sequence:
WF is the desired mud weight, lb/gal
WI is the starting mud weight, lb/gal
Df − Di
VD is the desired final volume, bbl = Dsf →
VDF is the volume of dilution fluid to add, bbl Ds − Df
Formulas for calculating material requirements to change Dsf + 1 = Vsb →
oil/water ratio (OWR)
Dsf
Use the following formulas to calculate the volume of oil or water = Dsv
required to change the oil/water ratio of a mud when a volume increase Vsb
can be tolerated.
1
Increase oil/water ratio = Div →
Increase the oil/water ratio by adding oil using the following formulas. Vsb
PW =
RW ( Dsv * Ds ) + ( Div * Di ) = Dmb
(R W + R O + VO)

Or Where
Df is the density of the final barrel (desired density)
RW -
VO = R W - RO Di is the density of the initial fluid (present density)
PW Ds is the density of the spike or higher density fluid
Dsf is the spike or higher density treatment factor
Vsb is the volume of the spike and initial fluid
W I + (8.3454)( ρ O)(VO ) Dsv is the fractional % of the spike fluid in the blend
WR =
1 + VO Div is the fractional % of the initial fluid in the blend
Where Dmb Is the material balance density of the blend
VO is the volume of oil to be added, bbl/bbl mud
RO is the % oil from retort, decimal equivalent
RW is the % water from retort, decimal equivalent
PW is the new % by volume water in the liquid phase, decimal Decrease the density of a brine
equivalent
Decrease the density of brine with lower density brine (or water) using
WR is the resulting mud weight, lb/gal the following formula sequence:
WI is the starting mud weight, lb/gal
ρO is the specific gravity of the oil
Di − Df
= Dcf →
Decrease oil/water ratio Df − Dc
Decrease the oil/water ratio by adding water using the following
formulas. Dcf + 1 = Vsb →
RO Dcf
PO = = Dcv
(R O + R W + V W )
Vsb
Or
RO - 1
VW = RO - R W = Div →
PO Vsb
W I + (8.3454)(V W )
( Dcv * Dc ) + ( Div * Di ) = Dmb
WR =
1 + VW
Where
Where Df is the density of the final barrel (desired density)
VW is the volume of water to be added, bbl/bbl mud Di is the density of the initial fluid (present density)
RO is the % oil from retort, decimal equivalent Dc is the density of the lower density fluid
RW is the % water from retort, decimal equivalent Dcf is the lower density treatment factor
PO is the new % by volume oil in the liquid phase, decimal Vsb is the volume of the cut fluid and initial fluid
equivalent Dcv is the fractional % of the lower density fluid in the blend
WR is the resulting mud weight, lb/gal Div is the fractional % of the initial fluid in the blend
WI is the starting mud weight, lb/gal Dmb Is the material balance density of the blend

124
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 125 -
Increase the density of a brine with sack salt
To increase the density of brine with a dry salt use the following median
values for the type salt desired.
Note: These values are a median and results may vary above or below
the desired density.
Hydrostatic Pressure Loss during Trip for dry pipe
The mass of one barrel of steel with a SG of 7.84 is 2748 lb.
Steel displaces 0.000364 bbl/lb
Displacement of pipe or collars

NaCl & KCl DPnw *0.000364 = DPd

• For each tenth of a lb/gal increase add 7.0 lbs of salt
• For each tenth of a lb/gal increase, reduce the starting volume
by 0.007 bbl
DCnw *0.000364 = DCd
CaCl
• For each tenth of a lb/gal increase add 5.9 lbs of salt Where
• For each tenth of a lb/gal increase, reduce the starting volume DPnw is the pipe nominal weight in lb/ft
by 0.005 bbl DPd is the displacement of the pipe in bbl
DCnw is the drill collar nominal weight in lb/ft
CaBr DCd is the displacement of the collar in bbl
• For each tenth of a lb/gal increase add 6.0 lbs of salt
• For each tenth of a lb/gal increase, reduce the starting volume Fluid Level Drop FLD
by 0.006 bbl FLD is a function of the displacement of pipe or collars as they exit the
well. The distance that the fluid level will drop is a function is a function
of the bbl/ft capacity of the top sections of the well.
Pressure Calculations
Pounds per gallon to pressure Conventional Well
ρ * 0.052 * TVD = psi A conventional well has 3 to 4 sections that are affected by the pipe and
collar exit.
• Bell Nipple
Pressure gradient to pressure
• BOP Stack
Psi/ft * TVD = psi • Surface Riser
• Casing (first 100 ft)
Pressure to pounds per gallon
To calculate the distance the fluid level will drop for each barrel
Ψ removed, calculate the capacity of each section:
= lb / gal
0.052* TVD ID2sec/1029.4 = Csec in bbl/ft

Pressure gradient to pounds per gallon Add the length of each section and find the percent of the composite
column for each section:
Ψ / ft
= lb / gal Secl / Ccl = C%
0.052
Find the Average Column Capacity, Ccavg,, by multiplying the bbl/ft factor
Pounds per gallon to pressure gradient for each section times its section percentage.
ρ * 0.052 = psi/ft
Csec * C% + … = Ccavg,

Pressure to pressure gradient Marine Riser Well

Wells with marine risers generally have only the riser ID as an affected
Ψ
= Ψ / ft section from pipe / collar displacement.
TVD To calculate the distance the fluid level will drop for each barrel
removed, calculate the capacity of the section:

Where ID2R/1029.4 = Csec in bbl/ft

ρ = Original mud weight, lb/gal
Pressure loss for one stand
TVD = True vertical depth, ft
ψ = Pressure ρ * 0.052 * (DPa * Ccavg) = psi/stand

Note: Substitute Csec for Ccavg for a marine riser well

Where
DPnw is the pipe nominal weight in lb/ft
DPd is the displacement of the pipe in bbl
DCnw is the drill collar nominal weight in lb/ft
DCd is the displacement of the collar in bbl
ρ is fluid density
ID2sec Section ID
ID2R Riser ID
Csec is the capacity of the section in bbl/ft
Secl is the section length in feet
Ccl is the column composite length in feet
C% is the percentage of column length
Ccavg Is the average capacity of the composite column in bbl/ft

125
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 126 -
Formulas for calculating area and volume
Annular volume (capacity)
Formulas for calculating pit and tank volume
(hole diameter )2 - (pipe diameter )2
Volume (bbl) = section length x
Rectangular tank 1029.4
Note: All dimensions are expressed in feet.
length x width x height (hole diameter )2 - (pipe diameter )2
Volume(bbl) = Volume(bbl/ft) =
5.6146 1029.4
length x width Drillpipe or drill collar capacity and displacement
Volume(bbl/ft) =
5.6146 (inside diameter )2
Capacity (bbl/ft) =
length x width 1029.4
Volume(bbl/in) =
67.375 Displacement (bbl/ft) =
(outside diameter )2 - (inside diameter )2
Vertical cylindrical tank
1029.4
(diameter )2 x height
Volume(bbl) = Calculations (metal only with couplings)
7.1486 0.002 * (weight of pipe/ft with couplings) * (depth, ft) =
Displacement of pipe, ft3
(diameter )2 0.000364 * (Weight of pipe/ft with couplings) * (depth, ft) =
Volume(bbl/ft) = Displacement of pipe, bbl
7.1486

(diameter )2
Volume(bbl/in) =
85.7833
Horizontal cylindrical tank (half full or less)
 h  x length
3
 0.3168 d h + 1.403 h 2 - 0.933 
d 
Volume (bbl) = 
5.6146

Where
h is the height of the fluid level, ft
d is the diameter of the tank, ft

Horizontal cylindrical tank (more than half full)

(diameter )2 x lenght
Volume(bbl) = -
7.1486

 h  x length
3
 0.3168 d h + 1.403 h 2 - 0.933 
d 
Volume (bbl) = 
5.6146

Where
h is the height of the empty portion of the tank, ft
d is the diameter of the tank, ft

Note: All diameters are expressed in inches; section lengths are

expressed in feet.

Hole volume (with no drillstring in the hole)

(hole diameter )2
Volume(bbl) = section length x
1029.4
2
(hole diameter )
Volume(bbl/ft) =
1029.4

126
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 127 -

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

127
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 128 -
CHEMICAL AND FLUID DATA TABLES
Chemical properties
The following table identifies the chemical properties of
some elements used in the oilfield. Pounds chemical to remove certain contaminants

Atomic
Element Symbol Atomic weight Chemical used to Conversion factor mg/L
number Contaminant to
Aluminum Al 26.98 13 remove (Contaminant) × factor
be Removed
Arsenic As 74.92 33 contaminant = lb/bbl chemical to add
Barium Ba 137.36 56
Bromine Br 79.916 35
Calcium Ca 40.08 20 Ca ++ Soda ash 0.000925
Carbon C 12.011 6
Ca ++ Sodium bicarbonate 0.000734
Cesium Cs 132.91 55
Chlorine Cl 35.457 17 Mg ++ Caustic soda 0.00115
Chromium Cr 52.01 24 CO3-2 Lime 0.00043
Copper Cu 63.54 29
HCO3-1 Lime 0.00043
Fluorine F 19 9
Hydrogen H 1.008 1 H2 S Lime 0.00076
Iodine I 126.91 53 H2S Zinc carbonate 0.00128
Iron Fe 55.85 26
Lead Pb 207.21 82 H2S Zinc oxide 0.000836
Lithium Li 6.94 3
Magnesium Mg 24.32 12
Manganese Mn 54.94 25 Note: Due to the extreme danger associated with
Mercury Hg 200.61 80 Hydrogen sulfide (H2S), it is recommended that a
Nitrogen N 14.008 7 Minimum of 1 ½ times the calculated amount of
Oxygen O 16 8 Chemical be added.
Phosphorous P 30.975 15
Potassium K 39.1 19
Silicon Si 28.09 14
Density of The following table gives specific gravities and
Silver Ag 107.873 47
common materials densities for common materials.
Sodium Na 22.991 11
Sulfur S 32.066 16 Material Specific gravity lb/gal lb/bbl
Titanium Ti 47.9 22 Barite 4.2 to 4.3 35.0 to 35.8 1470 to 1504
Tungsten W 183.86 74 Calcium carbonate 2.7 22.5 945
Zinc Zn 65.38 30 Cement 3.1 to 3.2 25.8 to 26.7 1085 to 1120
Clays and/or drilled
2.4 to 2.7 20.0 to 22.5 840 to 945
solids
Chemical conversions Diesel oil 0.84 7.0 294
Epm to ppm conversion
Dolomite 2.8 to 3.0 23.3 to 25.0 980 to 1050
The following table lists the equivalent weight of various cations
Feldspar 2.4 to 2.7 20.0 to 22.5 840 to 945
and anions.
Fresh water 1.0 8.33 350
Ion Equivalent weight
Ca +2 20.0 Galena 6.5 54.1 2275
Mg +2 12.2 Gypsum 2.3 19.2 805
Fe +3 18.6 Halite (rock salt) 2.2 18.3 770
Na + 23.0 Iron 7.8 65.0 2730
Cl- 35.5 Iron oxide (hematite) 5.1 42.5 1785
SO4-2 48.0 Lead 11.4 95.0 3990
OH- 17.0 Limestone 2.7 to 2.9 22.5 to 24.2 945 to 1015
CO3-2 30.0 Slate 2.7 to 2.8 22.5 to 23.3 945 to 980
HCO3- 61.0 Steel 7.0- to 8.0 58.3 to 66.6 2450 to 2800
PO4-3 31.7
Use the following equation to convert concentration in
equivalents per million (epm) to parts per million (ppm).
Equivalent weight × epm = ppm

128
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 129 -

Reaction Products and Properties of Hydrochloric Acid

Saltwater Data Saltwater constants
Tables The following table gives maximum solubility of (Numbers based on 1,000 gal acid or the reaction of 1,000 gal acid)
Sodium chloride.
Percent HCl
Maximum solubility of sodium chloride in water
Product or
Temperature °F (°C) % NaCl by weight (in saturated solution) Property 7.50% 15% 20% 25% 28%
32 (0) 26.3 Density Acid
(lb/gal) 8.644 8.961 9.169 9.385 9.521
68 (20) 26.5 Specific Gravity
122 (50) 27.0 (60°F) 1.037 1.075 1.1 1.126 1.142
Gallons of water in
212 (100) 28.5 acid 959 914 879 846 822

Pounds of HCl Gas

Seawater composition chemicals in Acid 648 1,344 1,834 2,346 2,666
The following table identifies typical chemicals in seawater Pounds of
(Average sg = 1.025) and gives their concentrations. Limestone
dissolved (as
Average composition of sea water calcite) 888 1,843 2,512 3,213 3,652
Cubic feet of
Constituent Parts per million Equivalent Limestone
parts per million dissolved 5.25 10.9 14.9 19 21.6
Pounds of Dolomite
Sodium 10440 454.0 dissolved 824 1,700 2,315 2,960 3,367

Potassium 375 9.6 Cubic feet of

Dolomite dissolved 4.6 9.5 12.93 16.56 18.8
Magnesium 1270 104.6 Pounds of Carbon
Dioxide Formed 391 811 1,105 1,414 1,607
Calcium 410 20.4 Cubic feet of
Carbon Dioxide @
Chloride 18970 535.0 STP 3,190 6,620 9,015 11,540 13,115
Pounds of Water
Sulfate 2720 57.8
Formed 160 331 452 579 657

Carbon dioxide 90 4.1 Gallons of Water

Formed 19.2 39.7 54.2 69.5 78.8
Other constituents 80 n/a Approximate
gallons of Spent
Acid 1,011 1,020 1,025 1,032 1,035
Viscosity of Acid
(water = 1) 1.14 1.33 1.59 1.7 1.87
Viscosity of Spent
Acid (water = 1) 1.35 1.94 2.69 3.4 3.9

Specific Gravity of
Spent Acid 1.096 1.175 1.233 1.295 1.34

Density of Spent
Acid (lb/gal) 9.14 9.79 10.28 10.79 11.17

Conc. Spent Acid

as Calcium Chloride 11% 20% 26% 32% 36%

129
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 130 -
Ammonium Chloride Blend Tables & Property
Tables

NH4Cl @ Fresh
Lb/Ga TC PSI/F Appx. %
SpG Lb/Cu.Ft. 100% Water
l T t NH4Cl
Purity Lb Gal
1.001
8.36 62.61 4 41.7 31 0.435 1
3
1.004
8.38 62.81 7 41.3 30 0.436 2
5
1.010
8.43 63.20 14 40.8 27 0.439 4
7
1.016
8.49 63.58 21 40.1 25 0.441 6
8
1.022
8.53 63.95 29 39.5 22 0.444 8
7
1.028
8.58 64.32 36 38.9 19 0.446 10
6
1.034
8.63 64.68 43 38.3 17 0.449 12
4
1.040
8.68 65.04 51 37.6 14 0.451 14
1
1.045
8.73 65.39 59 36.9 11 0.454 16
7
1.051
8.77 65.73 66 36.3 8 0.456 18
2
1.056
8.82 66.08 74 35.5 * 0.459 20
7
1.062
8.86 66.42 82 34.8 * 0.461 22
1
1.067
8.91 66.75 90 34.1 * 0.463 24
4

130
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 131 -

Sodium chloride solution requirements to make 1 bbl

Sodium Chloride Properties (42 gal)

Using sacked NaCl Brine Specific CP Using 10.0 lb/gal

density gravity, (LCTD)
NaCl per
Vol of Final Fresh 100% at 70F sg F (C) Water 10
NaCl Conc. bbl of NaCl Cl Lb/Cu.F 0.998 4 8.4 1.01 31 (-0.6) 0.96 0.04
Solution (ppg)
(% by wt.) Water (mg/l) (mg/l) t
(bbl 0.993 9 8.5 1.02 29 (-1.7) 0.90 0.10
(lb/bbl)
0.986 16 8.6 1.03 27 (-2.8) 0.84 0.16
0 0 1 0 0 8.34 62.4
0.981 22 8.7 1.04 26 (-3.3) 0.78 0.22
1 3.54 1.0036 10050 6100 8.37 62.7 0.976 28 8.8 1.05 24 (-4.4) 0.72 0.28

0.969 35 8.9 1.07 22 (-5.6) 0.66 0.34

2 7.14 1.0074 20250 12290 8.43 63.2
0.962 41 9.0 1.08 19 (-7.2) 0.60 0.40
4 14.58 1.0152 41070 24920 8.55 64.1 0.955 47 9.1 1.09 17(-8.3) 0.54 0.46

0.948 54 9.2 1.10 14 (-0.0) 0.48 0.52

6 22.34 1.0232 62480 37910 8.67 65
0.940 61 9.3 1.11 11 (-1.7) 0.42 0.58
8 30.43 1.0317 84470 51260 8.8 65.9 0.933 68 9.4 1.13 9 (-12.8) 0.36 0.64

0.926 74 9.5 1.14 6 (-14.4) 0.30 0.70

10 38.89 1.0405 107100 64990 8.92 66.8
0.919 81 9.6 1.15 3 (-16.1) 0.24 0.76
12 47.73 1.0497 130300 79070 9.04 67.7 0.910 88 9.7 1.16 -1 (-18.3) 0.18 0.82

0.902 95 9.8 1.17 -5 (-20.5) 0.12 0.88

14 56.98 1.0593 163100 92900 9.17 68.7
0.895 102 9.9 1.19 5 (-15.0) 0.06 0.94

16 66.67 1.0694 178600 108370 9.3 69.7 0.888 109 10.0 1.20 25 (-3.9) --- 1.00

18 76.83 1.08 202700 123000 9.43 70.6

20 87.5 1.0912 229600 139320 9.56 71.6

22 98.72 1.1029 256100 155400 9.7 72.6

24 110.53 1.1152 293300 171910 9.83 73.7

26 122.97 1.1282 311300 188890 9.97 74.7

26.4 126 1.133 315500 191210 9.99 74.8

131
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 132 -

Potassium chloride solution requirements to make 1 bbl

Potassium Chloride - Properties (42 gal)

Using sacked Brine Speci CP Potassiu Chloride, % by

% by KCl (100%) densi fic (LCTD) F m, ppm ppm weight
Specific Bbl Lbs. ppm ppm mg/l mg/l ty gravit (C) KCl
PPG TCT Weigh
Gravity Water KCl KCl Cl KCl Cl at y, sg
t Fresh 100
70F
water, %
(21C)
bbl KCl,
8.4 1.008 0.995 4.0 31 11,338 5,392 11,413 5,428 1.1% ,
lb
lb/gal
8.5 1.020 0.986 11.6 29 32,493 15,453 33,099 15,741 3.2% 0.995 4.0 8.4 1.01 31 (-0.6) 5946 5392 1.1

8.6 1.032 0.976 18.9 28 52,326 24,884 53,929 25,647 5.2% 0.986 11.6 8.5 1.02 29 (-1.7) 17041 15452 3.2

8.7 1.044 0.969 26.1 26 71,429 33,969 74,473 35,417 7.1% 0.976 18.9 8.6 1.03 28 (-2-2) 27441 24882 5.2

0.969 26.1 8.7 1.04 26 (-3.3) 37460 33969 7.1

8.8 1.056 0.960 33.4 25 90,368 42,976 95,303 45,323 9.0%
0.960 33.4 8.8 1.05 25 (-3.9) 47392 42976 9.1
8.9 1.068 0.950 40.7 23 108,882 51,781 116,132 55,229 10.9%
0.950 40.7 8.9 1.07 23 (-5.0) 57102 51780 10.
9.0 1.080 0.943 47.9 22 126,720 60,264 136,676 64,999 12.7% 0.943 47.9 9.0 1.08 22 (-5.6) 66456 60263 12.

9.1 1.092 0.933 55.2 20 144,427 68,685 157,506 74,905 14.4% 0.933 55.2 9.1 1.09 20 (-6.7) 75743 68684 14.4

9.2 1.104 0.924 62.4 18 161,491 76,800 178,050 84,675 16.1% 0.924 62.4 9.2 1.10 18 (-7.8) 84692 76799 16.1

0.917 69.7 9.3 1.11 16 (-8.9) 93582 84861 17.8

9.3 1.116 0.917 69.7 16 178,443 84,862 198,880 94,581 17.8%
0.907 76.9 9.4 1.13 14 (- 102151 92631 19.5
104,35 10.0)
9.4 1.128 0.907 76.9 14 194,782 92,632 219,424 19.5%
1 0.898 84.2 9.5 1.14 18 (-7.8) 110671 100357 21.1
100,35 114,25
9.5 1.140 0.898 84.2 18 211,028 240,254 21.1% 0.890 91.5 9.6 1.15 40 (4.4) 119013 107922 22.7
8 7
107,92 124,16 0.881 98.7 9.7 1.16 60 127054 115214 24.2
9.6 1.152 0.890 91.5 40 226,935 261,083 22.7% (15.6)
3 3
115,21 133,93
9.7 1.164 0.881 98.7 60 242,268 281,627 24.2%
5 3

132
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 133 -
Calcium chloride solution requirements to make 1 bbl
Calcium Chloride - Properties (42 gal)

Using sacked
Specific Bbl Lbs. ppm ppm mg/l mg/l % By CaCl2 Brine Specific CP Using 11.6 lb/gal
PPG TCT (94-97%) density gravity, (LCTD) F (C) CaCl2 brine (38%)
Gravity Water CaCl CaCl Cl CaCl Cl Weight
Fresh at 70F sg Fresh 11.6
8.4 1.008 0.999 2.9 31 8,220 5,253 8,275 5,288 0.8% water, CaCl2, (21C), water, lb/gal
bbl lb lb/gal bbl CaCl2,
8.5 1.020 0.997 8.2 22,969 14,677 23,398 14,951 2.3% bbl

8.6 1.032 0.994 13.4 37,099 23,706 38,235 24,432 3.7% 0.998 3.8 8.4 1.01 31 (-.6) 0.979 0.021

8.7 1.044 0.991 18.7 28 51,177 32,702 53,358 34,096 5.1% 0.997 8.2 8.5 1.02 30 (-.1) 0.948 0.052

0.994 13.4 8.6 1.03 29 (-.7) 0.917 0.083

8.8 1.056 0.987 24.2 65,476 41,839 69,052 44,124 6.5%
0.991 18.7 8.7 1.04 27 (-.8) 0.887 0.113
8.9 1.068 0.984 29.4 78,652 50,258 83,889 53,605 7.9%
0.987 24.2 8.8 1.05 25 (-.9) 0.856 0.144
9.0 1.080 0.980 35.1 26 92,857 59,336 100,153 63,998 9.3%
0.984 29.4 8.9 1.07 24 (-.4) 0.826 0.174
9.1 1.092 0.977 40.5 105,965 67,712 115,561 73,844 10.6%
0.980 35.1 9.0 1.08 22 (-.6) 0.795 0.205
9.2 1.104 0.972 46.2 119,565 76,402 131,826 84,237 12.0%
0.977 40.5 9.1 1.09 20 (-.7) 0.765 0.235
9.3 1.116 0.968 52.0 19 133,129 85,069 148,375 94,812 13.3%
0.972 46.2 9.2 1.10 18 (-.8) 0.734 0.266
9.4 1.128 0.963 57.8 146,403 93,552 164,925 105,387 14.6%
0.968 52.0 9.3 1.11 15 (-.4) 0.703 0.297
9.5 1.140 0.959 63.4 158,897 101,535 180,904 115,597 15.9%
0.963 57.8 9.4 1.13 13 (-.6) 0.673 0.327
9.6 1.152 0.954 69.3 11 171,875 109,828 197,738 126,355 17.2%
0.959 63.4 9.5 1.14 10 (-.2) 0.642 0.358
9.7 1.164 0.949 75.4 185,076 118,264 215,144 137,477 18.5%
0.954 69.3 9.6 1.15 7 (-3.9) 0.612 0.388
9.8 1.176 0.944 81.5 198,008 126,527 232,550 148,599 19.8%
0.949 75.4 9.7 1.16 4 (-5.6) 0.581 0.419
9.9 1.188 0.939 87.4 1 210,197 134,316 249,384 159,357 21.0%
0.944 81.5 9.8 1.17 0 (-7.8) 0.550 0.450
10.0 1.200 0.934 93.2 221,905 141,797 265,934 169,932 22.2%
0.939 87.4 9.9 1.19 -4 (-.0) 0.520 0.480
10.1 1.212 0.929 99.3 234,088 149,582 283,339 181,054 23.4%
0.934 93.2 10.0 1.20 -9 (-.8) 0.489 0.511
10.2 1.224 0.923 105.4 -14 246,032 157,214 300,745 192,176 24.6% -13 (-15.0)
0.929 99.3 10.1 1.21 0.459 0.541
-18(-27.8)
10.3 1.236 0.918 111.3 257,282 164,403 317,580 202,934 25.7% 0.923 105.4 10.2 1.22 0.428 0.572
-23 (-30.6)
10.4 1.248 0.912 117.6 269,231 172,038 335,556 214,420 26.9% 0.918 111.3 10.3 1.23 0.398 0.602
-29 (-33.9)
10.5 1.261 0.908 123.5 -28 280,045 178,949 352,391 225,178 28.0% 0.912 117.6 10.4 1.25 0.367 0.633
-36 (-37.8)
10.6 1.273 0.902 129.8 291,554 186,303 370,367 236,665 29.2% 0.908 123.5 10.5 1.26 0.336 0.640
-43 (-41.7)
10.7 1.285 0.895 136.3 303,293 193,804 388,914 248,516 30.3% 0.902 129.8 10.6 1.27 0.306 0.694
-51 (-46.1)
10.8 1.297 0.891 142.0 -47 313,051 200,040 405,178 258,909 31.3% 0.895 136.3 10.7 1.28 0.275 0.725
-57 (-49.4)
10.9 1.309 0.885 148.3 323,941 206,998 423,155 270,396 32.4% 0.891 142.0 10.8 1.29 0.245 0.755
-35 (-37.2)
11.0 1.321 0.878 155.0 335,498 214,383 442,272 282,612 33.5% 0.885 148.3 10.9 1.31 0.214 0.786
-19 (-8.3)
11.1 1.333 0.872 161.3 4 345,989 221,087 460,248 294,099 34.6% 0.878 155.0 11.0 1.32 0.183 0.817
-6 (-1.1)
11.2 1.345 0.866 167.6 356,293 227,671 478,225 305,586 35.6% 0.872 161.3 11.1 1.33 0.153 0.847
7 (-13.9)
11.3 1.357 0.859 174.1 366,835 234,408 496,771 317,437 36.7% 0.866 167.6 11.2 1.34 0.122 0.878

0.859 174.1 11.3 1.35 19 (-7.8) 0.092 0.908

11.4 1.369 0.853 180.4 32 376,775 240,759 514,748 328,924 37.7%
0.853 180.4 11.4 1.37 27 (-2.8) 0.061 0.939
11.5 1.381 0.846 186.9 386,957 247,265 533,295 340,775 38.7%
0.846 186.9 11.5 1.38 36 (2.2) 0.031 0.969
11.6 1.393 0.840 193.2 34 396,552 253,397 551,271 352,262 39.7%
0.840 193.2 11.6 1.39 44 (6.7) --- 1.000

133
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 134 -

Sodium bromide solution requirements to make 1 bbl Sodium bromide/sodium chloride solution requirements to
(42 gal) make 1 bbl (42 gal)

Using 10.0 lb/gal NaCl, 12.3 lb/gal NaBr, and

Using sacked NaBr (95%) sacked (95%) NaBr
Brine density at CP
Fresh water, 70F (21C), Specific (LCTD) Brine
bbl 95% NaBr, lb lb/gal gravity, sg F (C) Fresh 10 12.3 density Speci
water, lb/gal lb/gal 95% at 70F fic CP
0.999 2.1 8.4 1.01 31 (-0.6) bbl NaCl, NaBr, NaBr, (21C), gravit (LCTD)
bbl bbl lb lb/gal y, sg F (C)
0.996 7.6 8.5 1.02 30 (-1.1)
0.982 --- 0.018 --- 8.4 1.01 31 (-.6)
0.992 13.7 8.6 1.03 29 (-1.7)
0.957 --- 0.043 --- 8.5 1.02 30 (-.1)
0.989 19.2 8.7 1.04 29 (-1.7)
0.932 --- 0.068 --- 8.6 1.03 29 (-1.7)
0.984 25.0 8.8 1.05 28 (-2.2)
0.907 --- 0.093 --- 8.7 1.04 29 (-1.7)
0.979 31.0 8.9 1.07 26 (-3.3)
0.882 --- 0.118 --- 8.8 1.05 28 (-2.2)
0.975 36.7 9.0 1.08 25 (-3.9)
0.856 --- 0.144 --- 8.9 1.07 26 (-3.3)
0.970 42.6 9.1 1.09 24 (-4.4)
0.831 --- 0.169 --- 9.0 1.08 25 (-3.9)
0.966 48.3 9.2 1.10 23 (-5.0)
0.806 --- 0.194 --- 9.1 1.09 24 (-4.4)
0.961 54.2 9.3 1.11 22 (-5.6)
0.781 --- 0.219 --- 9.2 1.10 23 (-5.0)
0.956 60.2 9.4 1.13 21 (-6.1)
0.756 --- 0.244 --- 9.3 1.11 22 (-5.6)
0.950 66.4 9.5 1.14 20 (-6.7)
0.730 --- 0.270 --- 9.4 1.13 21 (-6.1)
0.946 72.0 9.6 1.15 19 (-7.2)
0.705 --- 0.295 --- 9.5 1.14 20 (-6.7)
0.941 77.9 9.7 1.16 18 (-7.8)
0.680 --- 0.320 --- 9.6 1.15 19 (-7.2)
0.937 83.6 9.8 1.17 16 (-8.9)
0.655 --- 0.345 --- 9.7 1.16 18 (-7.8)
0.933 89.2 9.9 1.19 15 (-9.4)
0.630 --- 0.370 --- 9.8 1.17 16 (-8.9)
0.927 95.4 10.0 1.20 14 (-10.0)
0.605 --- 0.395 --- 9.9 1.19 15 (-9.4)
0.923 101.1 10.1 1.21 12 (-11.1)
0.579 --- 0.421 --- 10.0 1.20 14 (-10.0)
0.918 107.1 10.2 1.22 11 (-11.7)
--- 0.957 0.043 --- 10.1 1.21 25 (-3.9)
0.914 112.6 10.3 1.23 10 (-12.2)
--- 0.913 0.087 --- 10.2 1.22 26 (-3.3)
0.910 118.2 10.4 1.25 8 (-13.3)
--- 0.870 0.130 --- 10.3 1.23 26 (-3.3)
0.905 124.1 10.5 1.26 6 (-14.4)
--- 0.826 0.174 --- 10.4 1.25 27 (-2.8)
0.900 130.2 10.6 1.27 5 (-15.0)
--- 0.782 0.218 --- 10.5 1.26 27 (-2.8)
0.895 136.0 10.7 1.28 4 (-15.6)
--- 0.739 0.261 --- 10.6 1.27 27 (-2.8)
0.891 141.7 10.8 1.29 2 (-16.7)
--- 0.696 0.304 --- 10.7 1.28 28 (-2.2)
0.886 147.6 10.9 1.31 0 (-17.8)
--- 0.652 0.348 --- 10.8 1.29 28 (-2.2)
0.882 153.3 11.0 1.32 -2 (-18.8)
--- 0.609 0.391 --- 10.9 1.31 29 (-.7)
0.877 159.2 11.1 1.33 -3 (-19.4)
--- 0.565 0.435 --- 11.0 1.32 29 (-1.7)
0.872 165.1 11.2 1.34 -5 (-20.6)
--- 0.522 0.478 --- 11.1 1.33 29 (-1.7)
0.867 171.1 11.3 1.35 -7 (-21.7)
--- 0.478 0.522 --- 11.2 1.34 30 (-1.1)
0.862 177.0 11.4 1.37 -9 (-22.8)
--- 0.435 0.565 --- 11.3 1.35 30 (-1.1)
0.857 183.0 11.5 1.38 -11 (-23.9)
--- 0.391 0.609 --- 11.4 1.37 31 (-0.6)
0.853 188.6 11.6 1.39 -14 (-25.6)
--- 0.348 0.652 --- 11.5 1.38 31 (-0.6)
0.847 194.8 11.7 1.40 -16 (-26.7)
--- 0.304 0.696 --- 11.6 1.39 31 (-0.6)
0.844 200.2 11.8 1.41 -19 (-28.3)
--- 0.261 0.739 --- 11.7 1.40 32 (0.0)
0.839 206.2 11.9 1.43 -10 (-23.3)
--- 0.217 0.783 --- 11.8 1.41 32 (0.0)
0.834 212.0 12.0 1.44 6 (-14.4)
--- 0.174 0.826 --- 11.9 1.43 32 (0.0)
0.831 217.3 12.1 1.45 14 (-10.0)
--- 0.130 0.870 --- 12.0 1.44 33 (0.6)
0.825 223.6 12.2 1.46 27 (-2.8)
--- 0.087 0.913 --- 12.1 1.45 33 (0.6)
0.823 228.5 12.3 1.47 34 (1.1)
--- 0.043 0.957 --- 12.2 1.46 33 (0.6)
0.816 235.1 12.4 1.49 43 (6.1)
--- --- 1.000 --- 12.3 1.47 34 (1.1)
0.812 240.7 12.5 1.50 50 (10.0)
--- --- 0.996 6.6 12.4 1.49 43 (6.1)
0.807 246.7 12.6 1.51 57 (13.9)
--- --- 0.993 12.2 12.5 1.50 50 (10.0)
0.804 252.0 12.7 1.52 63 (17.2)
--- --- 0.989 18.2 12.6 1.51 57 (13.9)
--- --- 0.986 23.5 12.7 1.52 63

134
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 135 -

Calcium bromide solution requirements to make 1 bbl

(42 gal) Calcium bromide/calcium chloride solution requirements to
make 1 bbl (42 gal)
Using sacked CaBr2 (95%)
Brine density CP Using 11.6 lb/gal CaCl2, 14.2 lb/gal CaBr2,
Fresh water, 95% CaBr2, at 70F (21C), Specific (LCTD) and sacked CaCl2 (94-97%) Brine
Specific CP
bbl lb lb/gal gravity, sg F (C) density at
gravity, (LCTD)
70F (21C),
0.822 197 11.7 1.40 -19 (-28.3) sg F (C)
11.6 lb/gal 14.2 lb/gal Sacked CaCl2 lb/gal
CaCl2, bbl CaBr2, bbl (94-97%), lb
0.817 203 11.8 1.41 -23 (-30.6)
0.9714 0.0254 2.86 11.7 1.40 45 (7.2)
0.811 210 11.9 1.43 -25 (-31.7)
0.9429 0.0507 6.06 11.8 1.41 51 (10.6)
0.806 216 12.0 1.44 -28 (-33.3)
0.9143 0.0768 9.09 11.9 1.43 52 (11.1)
0.801 222 12.1 1.45 -30 (-34.4)
0.8857 0.1016 12.13 12.0 1.44 54 (12.2)
0.795 228 12.2 1.46 -34 (-36.7)
0.8572 0.1269 15.15 12.1 1.45 55 (12.8)
0.790 233 12.3 1.47 -36 (-37.8)
0.8286 0.1524 18.18 12.2 1.46 55 (12.8)
0.784 240 12.4 1.49 -40 (-40.0)
0.8000 0.1778 21.22 12.3 1.47 56 (13.3)
0.778 247 12.5 1.50 -44 (-42.2)
0.7715 0.2032 24.24 12.4 1.49 56 (13.3)
0.773 252 12.6 1.51 -47 (-43.9)
0.7429 0.2286 27.28 12.5 1.50 57 (13.9)
0.767 259 12.7 1.52 -52 (-46.7)
0.7143 0.2540 30.31 12.6 1.51 57 (13.9)
0.762 265 12.8 1.53 -55 (-48.3)
0.6847 0.2794 33.34 12.7 1.52 58 (14.4)
0.756 272 12.9 1.55 -61 (-51.7)
0.6472 0.3048 36.37 12.8 1.53 58 (14.4)
0.750 277 13.0 1.56 -63 (-52.8)
0.6286 0.3302 39.41 12.9 1.55 59 (15.0)
0.746 282 13.1 1.57 -66 (-54.4)
0.6000 0.3556 42.44 13.0 1.56 59 (15.0)
0.739 290 13.2 1.58 -71 (-57.2)
0.5714 0.3810 45.47 13.1 1.57 60 (15.6)
0.732 298 13.3 1.59 -76 (-60.0)
0.5429 0.4064 48.49 13.2 1.58 60 (15.6)
0.728 302 13.4 1.61 -79 (-61.7)
0.5143 0.4318 51.53 13.3 1.59 60 (15.6)
0.723 308 13.5 1.62 -81 (-62.8)
0.4857 0.4572 54.56 13.4 1.61 61 (16.1)
0.717 315 13.6 1.63 -81 (-62.8)
0.4572 0.4826 57.59 13.5 1.62 61 (16.1)
0.711 322 13.7 1.64 -81 (-62.8)
0.4286 0.5080 60.62 13.6 1.63 62 (16.7)
0.704 328 13.8 1.65 -81 (-62.8)
0.4000 0.5334 63.66 13.7 1.64 62 (16.7)
0.699 334 13.9 1.67 -80 (-62.2)
0.3714 0.5589 66.69 13.8 1.65 63 (17.2)
0.692 342 14.0 1.68 -50 (-45.5)
0.3429 0.5842 69.72 13.9 1.67 63 (17.2)
0.687 348 14.1 1.69 -40 (-40.0)
0.3143 0.6069 72.75 14.0 1.68 64 (17.8)
0.681 354 14.2 1.70 5 (-15.0)
0.2857 0.6351 75.78 14.1 1.69 64 (17.8)
0.676 360 14.3 1.71 10 (-12.2)
0.2572 0.6604 78.81 14.2 1.70 64 (17.8)
0.669 368 14.4 1.73 23 (-5.0)
0.2286 0.6858 81.84 14.3 1.71 65 (18.3)
0.662 376 14.5 1.74 35 (1.7)
0.2000 0.7113 84.88 14.4 1.73 65 (18.3)
0.655 383 14.6 1.75 37 (2.8)
0.1715 0.7366 87.90 14.5 1.74 65 (18.3)
0.651 388 14.7 1.76 44 (6.7)
0.1429 0.7620 90.94 14.6 1.75 66 (18.9)
0.645 394 14.8 1.77 51 (10.6)
0.1143 0.7875 93.97 14.7 1.76 66 (18.9)
0.640 400 14.9 1.79 56 (13.3)
0.0858 0.8128 96.99 14.8 1.77 67 (19.4)
0.637 405 15.0 1.80 60 (15.6)
0.0572 0.8382 100.03 14.9 1.79 67 (19.4)
0.632 410 15.1 1.81 65 (18.3)
0.0286 0.8637 103.06 15.0 1.80 67 (19.4)
0.626 415 15.2 1.82 70 (21.1)
0.0000 0.8891 106.10 15.1 1.81 68 (20.0)
0.621 421 15.3 1.83 76 (24.4)

0.616 427 15.4 1.85 79 (26.1)

0.611 433 15.5 1.86 81 (27.2)

135
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 136 -

Calcium Chloride/Calcium Bromide/Zinc Bromide Solution

Requirements. Using 14.2 lb/gal CaBr2 /CaCl2* and 19.2 lb/gal
ZnBr2/CaBr2

Brine Density To Make 1 bbl (42 gal) Crystallization

at 70 F Point
lb/gal 14.2 lb/gal 19.2 lb/gal (LCTD), F
CaBr2,CaCl2*, ZnBr2, CaBr2 bbl
15.0 0.840 0.160 51

15.1 0.820 0.180 51

15.2 0.800 0.200 50

15.3 0.780 0.220 49

15.4 0.760 0.240 48

15.5 0.740 0.260 47

15.6 0.720 0.280 46

15.7 0.700 0.300 44

15.8 0.680 0.320 43

15.9 0.660 0.340 41

16.0 0.640 0.360 40

16.1 0.620 0.380 40

16.2 0.600 0.400 39

16.3 0.580 0.420 38

16.4 0.560 0.440 37

16.5 0.540 0.460 36

16.6 0.520 0.480 35

16.7 0.500 0.500 34

16.8 0.480 0.520 33

16.9 0.460 0.540 32

17.0 0.440 0.560 32

17.1 0.420 0.580 32

17.2 0.400 0.600 31

17.3 0.380 0.620 30

17.4 0.360 0.640 30

17.5 0.340 0.660 30

17.6 0.320 0.680 29

17.7 0.300 0.700 29

17.8 0.280 0.720 29

17.9 0.260 0.740 28

18.0 0.240 0.760 27

18.1 0.220 0.780 27

18.2 0.200 0.800 27

18.3 0.180 0.820 27

18.4 0.160 0.840 26

18.5 0.140 0.860 25

18.6 0.120 0.880 25

18.7 0.100 0.900 24

18.8 0.080 0.920 23

18.9 0.060 0.940 23

19.0 0.040 0.960 22

19.1 0.020 0.980 21

19.2 0.000 1.000 20

136
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 137 -

14.2 ppg Calcium Bromide Spike Chart 15.1 ppg Calcium Bromide Spike Chart

Starting Amount of Weight Up

Starting Amount of Weight Up
Density 1 Point 2 Points 3 Points 4 Points 5 Points
Density
1 Point 2 Points 3 Points 4 Points 5 Points
11.4 0.028 0.058 0.089 0.122 0.157
11.4 0.038 0.077 0.120 0.167 0.218
11.5 0.029 0.059 0.091 0.125 0.162
11.5 0.039 0.080 0.125 0.174 0.228 11.6 0.030 0.061 0.094 0.130 0.167
11.6 0.040 0.084 0.131 0.182 0.239 11.7 0.031 0.063 0.097 0.134 0.173

11.7 0.042 0.087 0.137 0.191 0.250 11.8 0.032 0.065 0.100 0.138 0.179
11.9 0.033 0.067 0.104 0.143 0.186
11.8 0.044 0.091 0.143 0.200 0.264
12.0 0.034 0.069 0.108 0.149 0.193
11.9 0.046 0.096 0.150 0.211 0.278
For 1 bbl Starting Volume and Starting Density

12.1 0.035 0.072 0.112 0.154 0.200

12.0 0.048 0.100 0.158 0.223 0.295
12.2 0.036 0.075 0.116 0.160 0.209
12.1 0.050 0.106 0.167 0.236 0.313 12.3 0.038 0.077 0.120 0.167 0.218
12.2 0.053 0.112 0.177 0.250 0.334 12.4 0.039 0.080 0.125 0.174 0.228

For 1 bbl Starting Volume and Starting Density

12.3 0.056 0.118 0.188 0.267 0.358 12.5 0.040 0.084 0.131 0.182 0.239

12.4 0.059 0.125 0.200 0.286 0.385 12.6 0.042 0.087 0.137 0.191 0.250
12.7 0.044 0.091 0.143 0.200 0.264
12.5 0.063 0.134 0.215 0.308 0.417
12.8 0.046 0.096 0.150 0.211 0.278
12.6 0.067 0.143 0.231 0.334 0.455
12.9 0.048 0.100 0.158 0.223 0.295
12.7 0.072 0.154 0.250 0.364 0.500
13.0 0.050 0.106 0.167 0.236 0.313
12.8 0.077 0.167 0.273 0.400 0.556 13.1 0.053 0.112 0.177 0.250 0.334
12.9 0.084 0.182 0.300 0.445 0.625 13.2 0.056 0.118 0.188 0.267 0.358

13.0 0.091 0.200 0.334 0.500 0.715 13.3 0.059 0.125 0.200 0.286 0.385
13.4 0.063 0.134 0.215 0.308 0.417
13.1 0.100 0.223 0.375 0.572 0.834
13.5 0.067 0.143 0.231 0.334 0.455
13.2 0.112 0.250 0.429 0.667 1.000
13.6 0.072 0.154 0.250 0.364 0.500
13.3 0.125 0.286 0.500 0.800 1.250
13.7 0.077 0.167 0.273 0.400 0.556
13.4 0.143 0.334 0.600 1.000 1.667 13.8 0.084 0.182 0.300 0.445 0.625
13.5 0.167 0.400 0.750 1.334 2.500 13.9 0.091 0.200 0.334 0.500 0.715
14.0 0.100 0.223 0.375 0.572 0.834
Instructions 14.1 0.112 0.250 0.429 0.667 1.000
• Find the starting density in the left column
• Follow across to the amount of weight up desired 14.2 0.125 0.286 0.500 0.800 1.250
• Multiply the corresponding number by the starting volume 14.3 0.143 0.334 0.600 1.000 1.667
• This gives the total amount of spike required
14.4 0.167 0.400 0.750 1.334 2.500
Example: 14.5 0.200 0.500 1.000 2.000 5.000
• Weight up a 13.0 ppg 3 points to a 13.3 ppg
• Follow across the 13.0 row to the number in the column for 3 14.6 0.250 0.667 1.500 4.000 n/a
points. 14.7 0.334 1.000 3.000 n/a n/a
• The number is .167
• For 750 bbl starting volume 750 x .167 = 125.25
Instructions
• Find the starting density in the left column.
• Follow across to the amount of weight up desired
• Multiply the corresponding number by the starting volume
• This gives the total amount of spike required
Example
• Weight up a 13.0 ppg 3 points to 13.3 ppg
• Follow across the 13.0 row to the number in the column for 3
points.
• The number is .167
• For 750 bbl starting volume 750 x .167 = 125.25 bbl

137
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 138 -
19.2 ZnBr Spike Table Instructions

19.2 ppg Zinc Bromide Spike Chart Instructions

• Find the starting density in the left column
Amount of Weight Up • Follow across to the amount of weight up desired
Starting
• Multiply the corresponding number by the starting volume
Density 1 Point 2 Points 3 Points 4 Points 5 Points • This gives the total amount of spike required
14.5 0.022 0.045 0.069 0.094 0.120
Example
14.6 0.023 0.046 0.070 0.096 0.122 • Weight up a 15.7 ppg 3 points to a 16.0 ppg
• Follow across the 15.7 row to the number in the column for 3
14.7 0.023 0.047 0.072 0.098 0.125 points
14.8 0.024 0.048 0.074 0.100 0.129 • The number is .094
• For 750 bbl starting volume 750 x .094 = 70.5 bbl
14.9 0.024 0.049 0.075 0.103 0.132
15.0 0.025 0.050 0.077 0.106 0.136
15.1 0.025 0.052 0.079 0.109 0.139
15.2 0.026 0.053 0.082 0.112 0.143
15.3 0.027 0.055 0.084 0.115 0.148
15.4 0.028 0.056 0.086 0.118 0.152
15.5 0.028 0.058 0.089 0.122 0.157
15.6 0.029 0.059 0.091 0.125 0.162
15.7 0.030 0.061 0.094 0.130 0.167
15.8 0.031 0.063 0.097 0.134 0.173
For 1 bbl Starting Volume and Starting Density

15.9 0.032 0.065 0.100 0.138 0.179

16.0 0.033 0.067 0.104 0.143 0.186
16.1 0.034 0.069 0.108 0.149 0.193
16.2 0.035 0.072 0.112 0.154 0.200
16.3 0.036 0.075 0.116 0.160 0.209
16.4 0.038 0.077 0.120 0.167 0.218
16.5 0.039 0.080 0.125 0.174 0.228
16.6 0.040 0.084 0.131 0.182 0.239
16.7 0.042 0.087 0.137 0.191 0.250
16.8 0.044 0.091 0.143 0.201 0.264
16.9 0.046 0.096 0.150 0.211 0.278
17.0 0.048 0.100 0.158 0.223 0.295
17.1 0.051 0.106 0.167 0.236 0.313
17.2 0.053 0.112 0.177 0.251 0.334
17.3 0.056 0.118 0.188 0.267 0.358
17.4 0.059 0.126 0.201 0.286 0.385
17.5 0.063 0.134 0.215 0.308 0.417
17.6 0.067 0.143 0.231 0.334 0.455
17.7 0.072 0.154 0.251 0.364 0.501
17.8 0.077 0.167 0.273 0.401 0.556
17.9 0.084 0.182 0.301 0.445 0.626
18.0 0.091 0.201 0.334 0.501 0.715
18.1 0.101 0.223 0.376 0.572 0.834
18.2 0.112 0.251 0.429 0.667 1.001
18.3 0.126 0.286 0.501 0.801 1.251
18.4 0.143 0.334 0.601 1.001 1.667

138
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 139 -

Sodium Formate HOOCNa

POTASSIUM FORMATE PROPERTIES
HOOCK
BBL of
Sodium Lb of
Formate % Sodium Sodium Density HOOCK Water TCT
HOOCK
11.1 lb/gal BBL Formate in Formate @
%
Density solution Water Solution 100% Purity
ppg SG w/w lb bbl C F
8.3 0 1 0 0
8.4 1.007 1.5 5.29 0.993 -1 30.2
8.4 0.022 0.978 0.98 0.1 8.6 1.031 5.1 22.79 0.969 -2 28.4
8.5 0.058 0.942 2.61 0.5 8.8 1.055 10.3 40.34 0.947 -3 26.6
8.6 0.094 0.906 4.24 1.4 9 1.078 14.3 58.29 0.926 -4 24.8
8.7 0.13 0.87 5.87 2.8 9.2 1.102 18.1 77.63 0.903 -5 23
8.8 0.167 0.833 7.5 4.6 9.4 1.126 21.7 96.86 0.883 -7 19.4

8.9 0.203 0.797 9.13 6.9 9.6 1.150 25.2 118.06 0.861 -9 15.8

9 0.239 0.761 10.76 9.7 9.8 1.174 28.6 140.37 0.839 -11 12.2

9.1 0.275 0.725 12.39 13 10 1.198 31.9 163.89 0.817 -14 6.8
10.2 1.222 35.1 193.80 0.794 -20 -4
9.2 0.312 0.688 14.02 16.9
10.4 1.246 38.3 217.13 0.77 -27 -16.6
9.3 0.348 0.652 15.65 21.3
10.6 1.270 41.3 246.67 0.746 -34 -29.2
9.4 0.384 0.616 17.28 26.2
10.8 1.294 44.4 279.92 0.72 -42 -43.6
9.5 0.42 0.58 18.91 31.7
11 1.318 47.5 315.71 0.695 -48 -54.4
9.6 0.457 0.543 20.54 37.8
11.1 1.330 48.8 333.55 0.682 -52 -61.6
9.7 0.493 0.507 22.17 44.5
11.2 1.342 50.2 353.13 0.669 -54 -65.2
9.8 0.529 0.471 23.8 51.8
11.3 1.354 51.6 373.49 0.656 -57 -70.6
9.9 0.565 0.435 25.43 59.8 11.4 1.366 53 394.66 0.643 -59 -74.2
10 0.601 0.399 27.07 68.4 11.5 1.378 54.4 417.94 0.629 -60 -76
10.1 0.638 0.362 28.7 77.6 11.6 1.390 55.8 442.27 0.615 -62 -79.6
10.2 0.674 0.326 30.33 87.6 11.7 1.402 57.2 467.73 0.601 -60 -76
10.3 0.71 0.29 31.96 98.2 11.8 1.414 58.5 494.42 0.587 -59 -74.2

10.4 0.746 0.254 33.59 109.5 11.9 1.426 59.8 520.88 0.574 -57 -70.6

10.5 0.783 0.217 35.22 121.5 12 1.438 61.2 551.79 0.559 -54 -65.2

10.6 0.819 0.181 36.85 134.3 12.1 1.450 62.5 582.68 0.545 -51 -59.8
12.2 1.462 63.7 615.21 0.531 -48 -54.4
10.7 0.855 0.145 38.48 147.9
12.3 1.474 65 651.43 0.516 -44 -47.2
10.8 0.891 0.109 40.11 162.2
12.4 1.486 66.3 689.83 0.501 -40 -40
10.9 0.928 0.072 41.74 177.2
12.5 1.498 67.5 728.37 0.487 -37 -34.6
11 0.964 0.036 43.37 193.1
12.6 1.510 68.8 771.57 0.472 -33 -27.4
11.1 1 0 45 209.8
12.7 1.522 70 817.60 0.457 -29 -20.2
12.8 1.534 71.3 869.52 0.441 -25 -13
12.9 1.546 72.5 922.35 0.426 -22 -7.6
13 1.558 73.8 985.54 0.409 -19 -2.2
13.1 1.570 75 1050.64 0.393 -16 3.2
13.2 1.582 76.3 1129.11 0.375 -2 28.4
13.3 1.594 77.6 1215.49 0.357 9 48.2

139
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 140 -

EQUATIONS FOR CALCULATING VELOCITY AND HORSEPOWER

Feet per second = B.P.H. x .2859 / (Diameter in inches)2
Feet per second = B.P.D. x .0119 / (Diameter in inches)2
Feet per second = G.P.M. x .4085 / (Diameter in inches)2

Hydraulic Horsepower = B.P.H. x Pressure (psi) / 2447

Hydraulic Horsepower = B.P.H. x Pressure (psi) x
.000408
Hydraulic Horsepower = B.P.D. x Pressure (psi) x
.000017
Hydraulic Horsepower = B.P.M. x Pressure (psi) x
.0245
Hydraulic Horsepower = G.P.M. x Pressure (psi) x
.000583

Brake Horsepower = B.P.H. x Pressure (psi) x .000408 /

Efficiency
Brake Horsepower =B.P.D. x Pressure (psi) x .000017 /
Efficiency
Brake Horsepower = G.P.M. x Pressure (psi) x .000583 /
Efficiency
NOTE:
B.P.M. = Barrels per minute
B.P.D. = Barrels per day
B.P.H. = Barrels per hour
psi = Pounds per square inch

EQUATIONS FOR CALCULATING VELOCITY AND POWER

Meters per second = m3/hr x 353.68 / D2
Meters per second = m3/day x 14.737 / D2
Meters per second = L/min x 21.221 / D2
Kilowatt = L/min x MPa x .0167
Kilowatt = m3/min x MPa x 16.7
Kilowatt = m3/hr x MPa x 1000
Kilowatt = m3/day x MPa x 24000

140
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 141 -

DEVIATED WELL CALCULATIONS

The cosine is the ratio of the True Vertical Depth (TVD) compared to the
Measured Depth (MD). For example the Cosine (COS) of a 45 degree
angle is 0.7071. This means that for every foot of measured depth the
true vertical depth is only 0.7071 feet.

Example:
A well is deviated from the surface at a 30-degree angle. The MD is 800
feet. If the well is loaded with 11.4 lb/gal drilling fluid what is the
hydrostatic pressure at the TD?
COS 30 = 0.8660
800 ft x 0.8660 x 0.5922 psi/ft = 410.2762 psi

DEVIATED WELL CALCULATIONS

COSINE TABLE
Degree Cosine Degree Cosine Degree Cosine
1 0.9998 31 0.8572 61 0.4848
2 0.9994 32 0.8480 62 0.4695
3 0.9986 33 0.8387 63 0.4540
4 0.9976 34 0.8290 64 0.4384
5 0.9962 35 0.8192 65 0.4226
6 0.9945 36 0.8090 66 0.4067
7 0.9925 37 0.7986 67 0.3907
8 0.9903 38 0.7880 68 0.3746
9 0.9877 39 0.7771 69 0.3584
10 0.9848 40 0.7660 70 0.3420
11 0.9816 41 0.7547 71 0.3256
12 0.9781 42 0.7431 72 0.3090
13 0.9744 43 0.7314 73 0.2924
14 0.9703 44 0.7193 74 0.2756
15 0.9659 45 0.7071 75 0.2588
16 0.9613 46 0.6947 76 0.2419
17 0.9563 47 0.6820 77 0.2250
18 0.9511 48 0.6691 78 0.2079
19 0.9455 49 0.6561 79 0.1908
20 0.9397 50 0.6428 80 0.1736
21 0.9336 51 0.6293 81 0.1564
22 0.9272 52 0.6157 82 0.1392
23 0.9205 53 0.6018 83 0.1219
24 0.9135 54 0.5878 84 0.1045
25 0.9063 55 0.5736 85 0.0872
26 0.8988 56 0.5592 86 0.0698
27 0.8910 57 0.5446 87 0.0523
28 0.8829 58 0.5299 88 0.0349
29 0.8746 59 0.5150 89 0.0175
30 0.8660 60 0.5000 90 0.0000

141
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 142 -

CALCULATE LENGTHS, AREAS AND VOLUMES WEIGHTS AND MEASURES

• Linear Measurements (Length):
ENGLISH/METRIC UNITS
• To find the circumference of a circle multiply the diameter by
3.1416. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
• To find the diameter of a circle divide the circumference by 231 Cu. In. – 3785.4 cm3.
3.1416. 1 U.S. gal equals 0.1337 Cu. Ft. – .00379 m3.
• The radius of a circle is one-half the diameter. 0.0238 bbl. – 3.785 L.
• Square Measurement (Area):
• To find the area of a square multiply the length by the width. 1 U.S. gal. Water at 20ºC. (68ºF.)
• To find the area of a rectangles multiply the length by the width. 8.33 Lbs. – 3.778 kg.
weighs
• To find the area of a circle, multiply one-half the diameter by
1 Imperial or English gal. Equals 277.420 Cu. In. – 4.54596 L.
one-half the diameter and multiply the answer by 3.1416, or
1 Imperial gal. Of water weighs 10 Lbs. – 4.535924 kg.
diameter x diameter x .7854.
• To find the vertical surface area of a cylinder standing on it’s end 1 Square Foot equals 144 square In. – .092903 m2.
multiply the circumference by its vertical height. .0043291 Gals. – .016387 L.
1 Cubic Inch equals
• To find the surface area of a sphere, multiply the circumference .0005787 Cu. Ft. – .000016 m3.
by the diameter. 1728 Cu. In.– 2832.4 cm3.
• Cubic Measurement (Volume, capacity and displacement): 1 Cubic Foot equals 7.4805 U.S. Gal.–28.32 L.
• To find the volume of a cube or rectangular solid multiply the 0.1781 bbl.–28.32 L.
length by the height and multiply the answer by the width.
• To find the volume, capacity or displacement of a square or 1 cu. ft. water at 20ºC. (68ºF.)
62.31 Lbs.–28.263341 kg.
rectangular tank multiply the length by the height, then multiply weighs
the answer by the width. 1 cu. ft. salt water (4.6%) weighs 64.3 Lbs.–29.165989 kg.
• To find the volume, capacity or displacements of a cylinder 1 cu. ft. Saturated Salt Water
multiply the area of its end by its height. 74.7 Lbs.–33.8335 kg.
weighs
• To find the volume, capacity or displacement of a sphere or 1 Standard Barrel equals 31.5 U.S. Gals.–119.2379 L.
spherical tank, multiply one-half of the diameter by the surface 42 Gals. –158.98386 L.
area and divide the answer by three. 1 Barrel of Oil equals 9702 Cu. In.–158987.6 cm3.
5.6146 Cu. Ft.–. 159 m3.
1 cu. in. of water weighs .03606 Lbs.–. 01636 kg.
12 cu. in. of water weighs .433 Lbs.–. 1964 kg.

• A pressure of one lb. per sq. in. is exerted by a column of

water 2.3110 feet high, or 27.73 inches high, at 20ºC.
(68ºF.).
• A pressure of 1 kPa is exerted by a column of water .102
meters high at 20ºC. A column of water, at 20ºC (68ºF.) one
foot high presses on the base with a force of .433 lbs. per
square inch.
• A column of water, at 20ºC (68ºF.) one foot high presses on
the base with a force of 9.807 kPa.
• To find the pressure in lbs. per sq. in. of a column of water
multiply the height of the column in feet by .433.
• To find the pressure in kPa of a column of water multiply the
height of the column in meters by 9.807.
• To find the capacity of a mud pit per inch (mm) of depth
multiply the length by the width in feet (m), which gives the
area in square feet (m2), then multiply by the depth in feet
(m), which gives total capacity of pit in CFt. (m3). Now divide
the depth in inches (mm) to get Cu. Ft. per In. (m3) of depth.
If it is desired to convert the cubic feet (m3/mm) into gallons
(L) multiply by 7.48 (1000).
• Doubling the inside diameter of a pipe increases its capacity
four times. Friction of liquids in pipe increases as the square
of the velocity.
• A horsepower is equivalent to raising 33,000 Lbs. 1 foot per
minute, or 745.6999 W. Steam rising from water at its boiling
point has a pressure of 14.7 psi (101.34 kPa) at sea level.

142
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 143 -
when:
eT = change in length in inches
depth = feet
T = average temperature change

EQUATIONS FOR CALCULATING

CAPACITY OF PIPE
Barrels per lineal foot = .0009714 x D2
Lineal feet per barrel = 1029.4 D2 CALCULATING CONTENTS OF
Cubic feet per lineal foot = .005454 x D2 HORIZONTAL CYLINDRICAL TANKS
Lineal feet per cubic foot = 183.35 D2 First calculate the depth ratio (D) by dividing the depth of water or
Gallons per lineal foot = .0408 x D2 24.51 other fluid in the tank in inches (h) by the diameter of the tank in
Lineal feet per gallon = D2 inches (d).
D = Diameter in inches Opposite this value for the depth ratio (D) in the following table, you
will find the percentage of the total capacity of the tank. Multiplying
EQUATIONS FOR VOLUME AND HEIGHT BETWEEN MULTIPLE the capacity of the tank by this percentage gives the contents of the
TUBING STRINGS tank for that fluid depth.
AND HOLE (OR CASING)
Barrels per lineal foot = (D2 – nd2) 0.0009714 Percent of Percent of Percent of
Lineal feet per barrel = 1029.4 / D2 – nd2 D Capacity D Capacity D Capacity
Cubic feet per lineal foot = (D2 – nd2) 0.005454
Lineal feet per cubic foot = 183.35 / D2 – nd2 .02 .004799 .34 .299762 .66 .700238
Gallons per lineal foot = (D2 – nd2) 0.0408 .04 .013480 .36 .324061 .68 .724271
Lineal feet per gallon = 24.51 / D2 – nd2
WHERE: .06 .024509 .38 .348667 .70 .747702
D= Diameter of hole, inches (or ID of casing) .08 .037501 .40 .373539 .72 .770805
d = Outside diameter of tubing, inches
n = Number of tubing strings .10 .052025 .42 .398525 .74 .79348
.12 .067979 .44 .423749 .76 .815334
EQUATIONS FOR CALCULATING CAPACITY OF PIPE Metric
Cubic meters per lineal meter = D2 / 1,273,000 .14 .085114 .46 .449132 .78 .836923
Lineal meters per cubic meter = 1,273,000 / D2
.16 .103234 .48 .464560 .80 .857654
Hectoliter per lineal meter = D2 / 127,300
Lineal meter per hectoliter = 127,300 / D2 .18 .122421 .50 .500000 .82 .877579
Liter per Lineal meter = D2 / 1273
Lineal meter per liter =1273 / D2 .20 .14346 .52 .525440 .84 .896766
D = Diameter in mm .22 .163077 .54 .550868 .86 .914886
.24 .184466 .56 .576251 .88 .932021
EQUATIONS FOR VOLUME AND HEIGHT BETWEEN MULTIPLE
TUBING STRINGS AND .26 .206502 .58 .601475 .90 .947975
HOLE (OR CASING) .28 .229195 .60 .626461 .92 .962499
Cubic meter per meter = (D2 – nd2) / 1,273,000
Meter per cubic meter = 1,273,000 / (D2 – nd2) .30 .252298 .62 .651333 .94 .975491
Hectoliter per meter =(D2 – nd2) / 127,300 .32 .275729 .64 .675939 .96 .986520
Meter per hectoliter = 127,300 / (D2 – nd2)
Liter per meter =(D2 – nd2) / 1273 .98 .995201
Meter per liter =1273 / (D2 – nd2) Example: Find contents of tank 60” in
WHERE: diameter (d), which has 24” of water in it.
D = Diameter of hole or ID of casing, Tank is 10 feet long.
mm d = Outside diameter of tubing, (Capacity of tank is
mm n = Number of tubing strings 1469 gal.)

FORMULA FOR DETERMINING STRETCH IN PIPE

D = 24/60= .40 and from table,
S = L X P X C / 1000 X 1000
the percent of capacity is .373539.
(Use to set tension packer with no weight indication)
Contents = 1469 x .373539 = 550.62 gal.

FORMULA FOR DETERMINING PULL OF PIPE

P = 1000 X 1000 X S / C X L

FORMULA FOR FREE PIPE DEPTH

L = S X 1000 X 1000 / P X C
Courtesy of Missouri Water Well & Pump Contractors
Where:
Assn., Inc.
L = Length of free pipe in feet.
S = Stretch pulled in pipe, in inches.
P = Pull on pipe to get the stretch “S” in pounds
C = Constant for given pipe size and weight being stretched.
(For this equation use C factor at pipe length of 1000 ft.)

EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON STEEL

Steel expands or contracts .0000828” per foot per degree (F)
of temperature change.
Therefore:
eT = depth x .0000828 x∆T (F°)
143
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 144 -

Dimensions and Capacities

API Casing
Size Weight ID Drift Capacity
Inches mm lb/ft Inches mm Inches mm bbl/100ft
9.5 4.09 103.89 3.965 100.71 1.63
10.5 4.052 102.92 3.927 99.75 1.59
11.6 4 101.6 3.875 98.43 1.55
12.6 3.958 100.53 3.833 97.36 1.52
13.5 3.92 99.57 3.795 96.39 1.49
15.1 3.826 97.18 3.701 94.01 1.42
16.6 3.754 95.35 3.629 92.18 1.37
16.9 3.74 95 3.615 91.82 1.36
17.7 3.696 93.88 3.571 90.7 1.33
4 1/2 114.3
18.8 3.64 92.46 3.515 89.28 1.29
21.6 3.5 88.9 3.375 85.73 1.19
24.6 3.38 85.85 3.255 82.68 1.11
26.5 3.24 82.3 3.115 79.12 1.02
11.5 4.56 115.82 4.435 112.65 2.02
13 4.494 114.15 4.369 110.97 1.96
15 4.408 111.96 4.283 108.79 1.89
18 4.276 108.61 4.151 105.44 1.78
20.3 4.184 106.27 4.059 103.1 1.7
20.8 4.156 105.56 4.031 102.39 1.68
21.4 4.126 104.8 4.001 101.63 1.65
23.2 4.044 102.72 3.919 99.54 1.59
24.2 4 101.6 3.875 98.43 1.55
26.7 3.876 98.45 3.751 95.28 1.46
5 127 32 3.62 91.95 3.495 88.77 1.27
13 5.044 128.12 4.919 124.94 2.47
14 5.012 127.3 4.887 124.13 2.44
15.5 4.95 125.73 4.825 122.56 2.38
17 4.892 124.26 4.767 121.08 2.32
20 4.778 121.36 4.653 118.19 2.22
23 4.67 118.62 4.545 115.44 2.12
26 4.548 115.52 4.423 112.34 2.01
28.4 4.44 112.78 4.315 109.6 1.91
29.7 4.376 111.15 4.251 107.98 1.86
5 1/2 139.7 32.3 4.276 108.61 4.151 105.44 1.78
36.4 4.09 103.89 3.965 100.71 1.62
39.3 4.044 102.72 3.919 79.54 1.59
15 5.542 140.77 5.399 137.13 2.98
18 5.424 137.77 5.299 134.59 2.86
20 5.352 135.94 5.227 132.77 2.78
23 5.24 133.1 5.115 129.92 2.67
26 5.132 130.35 5.007 127.18 2.56
6 152.4
17 6.135 155.83 6.01 152.65 3.66
20 6.049 153.64 5.924 150.47 3.55
24 5.921 150.39 5.796 147.22 3.41
28 5.791 147.09 5.666 143.92 3.26
32 5.675 144.15 5.55 140.97 3.13
35 5.575 141.61 5.45 138.43 3.02
43.2 5.375 136.53 5.25 133.35 2.81
69.63 4.375 111.13 4.25 107.95 1.86
17 6.538 166.07 6.413 162.89 4.15
6 5/8 168.2
20 6.456 163.98 6.331 160.81 4.05
23 6.366 161.7 6.241 158.52 3.94
26 6.276 159.41 6.151 156.24 3.83
29 6.184 157.07 6.059 153.9 3.71
32 6.094 154.79 5.969 151.61 3.61
35 6.004 152.5 5.879 149.33 3.5

144
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 145 -

Dimensions and Capacities

API Casing
Size Weight ID Drift Capacity API Casing
Inches mm lb/ft Inches mm Inches mm bbl/100ft Size Weight ID Drift Capacity
38 5.92 150.37 5.795 147.19 3.4 Inches mm lb/ft Inches mm Inches mm bbl/100ft
41 5.82 147.83 5.695 144.65 3.29 60.7 9.66 245.36 9.504 241.4 9.06
42.7 5.75 146.05 5.625 142.88 3.21 65.7 9.56 242.82 9.404 238.86 8.88
44 5.72 145.29 5.595 142.11 3.18 71.1 9.45 240.03 9.294 236.07 8.67
45.4 5.66 143.76 5.535 140.59 3.11 73.2 9.406 238.91 9.25 234.95 8.59
49.5 5.54 140.72 5.415 137.54 2.98 76 9.35 237.49 9.194 233.53 8.49
56.1 5.376 136.55 5.251 133.38 2.81 79.2 9.282 235.76 9.126 231.8 8.37
7 177.8
58 5.24 133.1 5.115 129.92 2.67 81 9.25 234.95 9.094 230.99 8.31
10 3/4 273.05
66.5 5.04 128.02 4.915 124.84 2.47 38 11.15 283.21 10.994 279.25 12.08
20 7.125 180.98 7 177.8 4.93 42 11.084 281.53 10.928 277.57 11.93
24 7.025 178.44 6.9 175.26 4.79 47 11 279.4 10.844 275.44 11.75
26.4 6.969 177.01 6.844 173.84 4.72 54 10.88 276.35 10.724 272.39 11.5
29.7 6.875 174.63 6.75 171.45 4.59 60 10.772 273.61 10.616 269.65 11.27
33.7 6.765 171.83 6.64 168.66 4.45 65 10.682 271.32 10.526 267.36 11.08
39 6.625 168.28 6.5 165.1 4.26 66.7 10.656 270.66 10.5 266.7 11.03
42.8 6.501 165.13 6.376 161.95 4.11 71 10.586 268.88 10.43 264.92 10.89
45.3 6.435 163.45 6.31 160.27 4.02 73.6 10.532 267.51 10.376 263.55 10.78
7 5/8 193.6 47.1 6.375 161.93 6.25 158.75 3.95 75 10.514 267.06 10.358 263.09 10.74
51.2 6.249 158.72 6.125 155.58 3.8 76 10.5 266.7 10.344 262.74 10.71
52.8 6.201 157.81 6 152.4 3.74 11 3/4 298.45 79 10.438 265.13 10.282 261.16 10.58
55.75 6.201 157.51 6.176 156.87 3.74 80.5 10.406 264.31 10.25 260.35 10.52
46.1 6.56 166.62 6.5 165.1 4.18 83 10.368 263.35 10.212 259.38 10.44
24 8.097 205.66 7.972 202.49 6.37 87.2 10.282 261.16 10.126 257.2 10.27
7 3/4 196.85
28 8.017 203.63 7.892 200.46 6.24 95 10.124 257.15 9.968 253.19 9.96
32 7.921 201.19 7.796 198.02 6.09 71.8 10.711 272.06 10.625 269.88 11.14
36 7.825 198.76 7.7 195.58 5.95 48 12.715 322.96 12.559 319 15.71
40 7.725 196.22 7.6 193.04 5.8 54.5 12.615 320.42 12.459 316.46 15.46
8 5/8 219.08 44 7.625 193.68 7.5 190.5 5.65 61 12.515 317.88 12.359 313.92 15.21
11 7/8 301.63
49 7.511 190.78 7.386 187.6 5.48 68 12.415 315.34 12.259 311.38 14.97
52 7.435 188.85 7.31 185.67 5.37 72 12.347 313.61 12.191 309.65 14.81
49.7 7.636 193.95 7.5 190.5 5.66 77 12.275 311.79 12.119 307.82 14.64
29.3 9.063 230.2 8.907 226.24 7.98 80.7 12.215 310.26 12.059 306.3 14.49
32.3 9.001 228.63 8.845 224.66 7.87 83 12.175 309.25 12.019 305.28 14.4
8 3/4 222.25 36 8.921 226.59 8.765 222.63 7.73 85 12.159 308.84 12.003 304.88 14.36
38 8.885 225.68 8.76 222.5 7.67 86 12.125 307.98 11.969 304.01 14.28
40 8.835 224.41 8.679 220.45 7.58 91 12.055 306.2 11.899 302.23 14.12
43.5 8.755 222.38 8.599 218.41 7.45 13 3/8 339.73 92 12.031 305.59 11.875 301.63 14.06
47 8.681 220.5 8.525 216.54 7.32 96 11.975 304.17 11.819 300.2 13.93
53.5 8.535 216.79 8.379 212.83 7.08 98 11.937 303.2 11.781 299.24 13.84
58.4 8.435 214.25 8.279 210.29 6.91 100.3 11.907 302.44 11.751 298.48 13.77
59.4 8.407 213.54 8.251 209.58 6.87 102 11.889 301.98 11.733 298.02 13.73
9 5/8 244.48
61.1 8.375 212.73 8.219 208.76 6.81 13 1/2 342.9 81.4 12.34 313.44 12.25 311.15 14.79
64.9 8.281 210.34 8.125 206.38 6.66 13 5/8 346.08 88.2 12.375 314.33 12.25 311.15 14.88
70.3 8.157 207.19 8.001 203.23 6.46
71.8 8.125 206.38 7.969 202.41 6.41
9 3/4 247.65 59.2 8.56 217.42 8.5 215.9 7.12
62.8 8.625 219.08 8.5 215.9 7.23
32.75 10.192 258.88 10.036 254.91 10.09
35.75 10.136 257.45 10.011 254.28 9.98
9 7/8 250.83 40.5 10.05 255.27 9.894 251.31 9.81
45.5 9.95 252.73 9.794 248.77 9.62
51 9.85 250.19 9.694 246.23 9.42
55.5 9.76 247.9 9.604 243.94 9.25

145
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 146 -

API DRILL PIPE

High Strength New Drill Pipe Data
Tube Weight Tool Joint
Weight Lb/Ft
OD ID Inches Grade
OD ID Tube & joint OD range ID range T&C Plain End
E
(In) (In) (Lb/ft) (In) (In)
X-95
4.85 4.43 1.995
G-105
1.995 4.85 3 1/8 -3 3/8 1 3/4 -2 2 3/8 S-135
2 3/8 2.325 E
1.815 6.65 2 7/8 -3 3/8 1 3/8 -2 X-95
6.65 6.26 1.815
2.441 6.85 3 3/4-4 1/8 2 1/8-2 7/16 G-105
S-135
2 7/8 E
2.151 10.4 3 1/8-4 1/4 1 1/2-2 5/32 X-95
2.992 9.5 4 5/8-4 3/4 2 11/16-3 6.85 6.16 2.441
G-105
3 1/2 2.764 13.3 4 1/8-5 1/4 2 1/8-2 3/4 2 7/8 S-135
2.602 15.5 5 - 5 1/2 2 1/4-2 9/16 2.875 E
3.476 11.85 5 1/4-6 2 13/16-3 15/32 X-95
10.4 9.72 2.151
G-105
3.34 14 4 5/8-6 2 1/4-3 1/4
4 S-135
3.24 15.7 5 1/4-6 2 7/16-3 1/4
E
3.958 13.75 5 3/4-6 3/8 3 1/4-3 7/8 X-95
9.5 8.81 2.992
3.826 16.6 5 7/8-6 3/8 2 3/4-3 3/4 G-105
S-135
4 1/2
3.64 20 6 - 6 5/8 2 1/2-3 5/8 E
3 1/2 X-95
3.5 22.82 6 1/4-6 5/8 2 1/4-3 5/8 13.3 12.31 2.764
3.5 G-105
4.408 16.25 - - S-135
5 4.276 19.5 6 3/8-7 1/4 2 3/4-3 1/2 E
4 25.6 6 3/8-7 1/4 2 3/4-3 1/2 X-95
15.5 14.63 2.602
4.892 19.2 - - G-105
S-135
5 1/2 4.778 21.9 7 - 7 1/2 3 to 4
E
4.67 24.7 7 - 7 1/2 3 to 4
X-95
6 5/8 5.965 25.2 8 5 11.85 10.46 3.476
G-105
S-135
E
X-95
4 14 12.93 3.34
G-105
HEAVY WEIGHT DRILL PIPE
S-135
E
Nominal
Nominal size Bore Tool joint Connection X-95
weight 15.7 14.69 3.24
G-105
(In) (In) (Lb/ft) (In) S-135
4 1/2 E
4.0 X-95
3 1/2 2.036 25.3 3 1/2IF (NC 38) 13.75 12.24 3.958
G-105
S-135
4 2.563 29.7 4 FH (NC 40) E
X-95
16.6 14.98 3.826
4 1/2 2.75 39.9 4 IF (NC 46) G-105
S-135
E
5 3 48.5 4 1/2IF (NC 50)
X-95
20 18.69 3.64
G-105
S-135
146
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 147 -
E
X-95
22.82 21.36 3.5
G-105
S-135

Drill Collar linear Weight Rotary Shouldered Interchange Chart

Bore of collar in inches
Connection Size Equivalent
O.D. drill
collar (in) 1 1 2 213/ 3 (In) (In)
1 1 1/4 1 3 2 1 2 1/2 3 1 3 1/2 33/4 4
/2 /4 /4 16 /4
Internal Flush (IF) 2 3/8 2 7/8 Slim Hole (NC 26)
2 7/8 3 1/2 Slim Hole (NC 31)
27/8 19 18 16 3 1/2 4 1/2 Slim Hole (NC 38)
3 21 20 18 4 4 1/2 Extra Hole (NC 46)
31/8 22 22 20 4 1/2 5 Extra Hole (NC 50)
31/4 26 24 22 51/2 Double Streamline
31/2 30 29 27 Full Hole (FH) 4 4 1/2 Double Streamline (NC 40)
33/4 35 33 32 Extra Hole (XH) (EH) 2 7/8 3 1/2 Double Streamline
4 40 39 37 35 32 29 3 1/2 4 Slim Hole
41/8 43 41 39 37 35 32 4 1/2 External Flush
41/4 46 44 42 40 38 35 4 1/2 4 Internal Flush NC (46)
41/2 51 50 48 46 43 41 5 4 1/2 Internal Flush NC (50)
43/4 54 52 50 47 44 5 1/2 Double Streamline
5 61 59 56 53 50 Slim Hole (SH) 2 7/8 2 3/8 Internal Flush (NC 26)
1
5 /4 68 65 63 60 57 3 1/2 2 7/8 Internal Flush (NC 31)

51/2 75 73 70 67 64 60 4 3 1/2 Extra Hole

3
5 /4 82 80 78 75 72 67 64 60 4 1/2 External Flush
4 1/2. 3 1/2 Internal Flush (NC 38)
6 90 88 85 83 79 75 72 68
Double 3 1/2 2 7/8 Extra Hole
61/4 98 96 94 91 88 83 80 76 72
1 Streamline (DSL) 4 1/2 4 Full Hole (NC 40)
6 /2 107 105 102 99 96 91 89 85 80
3 5 1/2 4 1/2 Internal Flush
6 /4 116 114 111 108 105 100 98 93 89
5 Extra Hole (NC 50)
7 125 123 120 117 114 110 107 103 98 93 84
Numbered 26 2 3/8 Internal Flush
71/4 134 132 130 127 124 119 116 112 108 103 93
Connections (NC) 2 7/8 Slim Hole
71/2 144 142 139 137 133 129 126 122 117 113 102
31 2 7/8. Internal Flush
73/4 154 152 150 147 144 139 136 132 128 123 112
3 1/2 Slim Hole
8 165 163 160 157 154 150 147 143 138 133 122
38 3 1/2 Internal Flush
81/4 176 174 171 168 165 160 158 154 149 144 133
4 1/2 Slim Hole
81/2 187 185 182 179 176 172 169 165 160 155 150
40 4 Full Hole
9 210 208 206 203 200 195 192 188 184 179 174
4 1/2 Double Streamline
91/2 234 232 230 227 224 220 216 212 209 206 198
46 4 Internal Flush
93/4 248 245 243 240 237 232 229 225 221 216 211 4 1/2 Extra Hole
10 261 259 257 254 251 246 243 239 235 230 225 50 4 1/2 Internal Flush
11 317 315 313 310 307 302 299 295 291 286 281 5 Extra Hole
12 379 377 374 371 368 364 361 357 352 347 342 5 1/2 Double Streamline
External Flush (EF) 4 1/2 4 Slim Hole
3 1/2 Extra Hole

147
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 148 -

Dimension & Weight Properties Of New Tool Joints And New

Grade E Drill Pipe Dimension & Weight Properties Of New Tool Joints And New
Drill Pipe Data Tool Joint Data Grade E Drill Pipe
Nominal Nominal Approx. Drift Drill Pipe Data Tool Joint Data
Type OD ID
Size Weight Weight Conn Diameter Nominal Nominal Approx. ID Drift
Upset Inches Inches Type OD
Inches Lb/Ft Lb/Ft Inches Size Weight Weight Conn Inche Diameter
Upset Inches
5.3 EU NC26(IF) 3.375 1.75 1.625 Inches Lb/Ft Lb/Ft s Inches
5.1 EU WO 3.375 2 1.807
4.85
4.9 EU OH 3.125 2 1.807 NC50
15.4 EU 6.375 3.75 3.625
5 EU SL-H90 3.125 2 1.85 (IF)
2 3/8 NC50
14.8 EU 6.125 3.875 3.75
2.375 7 EU NC26(IF) 3.375 1.75 1.625 (WO)
13.75
6.9 EU OH 3.25 1.75 1.625 3.968
6.65 14.1 EU OH 5.75 3.77
75
6.8 IU PAC 2.875 1.375 1.25
15.2 IU H90 6 3.25 3.125
7.5 EU NC31(IF) 4.125 2.125 2
7.3 EU WO 4.125 2.4375 2.253 NC50
6.85 18 EU 6.375 3.75 3.625
6.9 EU OH 3.75 2.4375 2.253 (IF)
7.1 EU SL-H90 3.875 2.4375 2.296 17.1 EU OH 5.875 3.75 3.625
4 1/2
10.9 EU NC31(IF) 4.125 2.125 1.963 4.50 NC46(XH
2 7/8 16.6 18.4 IEU 6.25 3.25 3.125
10.6 EU OH 3.875 2.15625 1.963 )
2.875 18.2 IEU FH 6 3 2.875
10.6 EU SL-H90 3.875 2.15625 2.006
17.9 IEU H90 6 3.25 3.125
10.4 NC38(SH 2.687
11.2 IU XH 4.25 1.875 1.75 16.8 IEU 5 2.563
) 5
10.4 IU NC26(SH) 3.375 1.75 1.625

21.6 EU NC50(IF) 6.325 3.625 3.452

10.3 IU PAC 3.125 1.5 1.375

NC46(XH
10.6 EU NC38(IF) 4.75 2.6875 2.563 20 22.1 IEU 6.25 3 2.875
)
10.3 EU NC38(WO) 4.75 3 2.804
9.5 21.7 IEU FH 6 3 2.875
10 EU OH 4.5 3 2.804
21.7 IEU H90 6 3 2.875
10.2 EU SL-H90 4.625 3 2.847

NC50(XH
3 1/2 14 EU NC38(IF) 4.75 2.6875 2.457 20.9 IEU 6.325 3.75 3.625
19.5 )
3.50 14 EU OH 4.75 2.6875 2.414
22.1 IEU 5 1/2 FH 7 3.75 3.625
13.3
5
14.2 IU XH 4.75 2.4375 2.313
NC50(XH
13.6 IU NC31(SH) 4.125 2.125 2 26.9 IEU 6.325 3.5 3.375
25.6 )
28.1 IEU 5 1/2 FH 7 3.5 3.375
15.5 16.6 EU NC38(IF) 5 2.5625 2.414
21.9 23.8 IEU FH 7 4 3.875
13.5 EU NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.125 5 1/2
13.3 EU NC46(WO) 5.75 3.4375 3.313 5.5
24.7 26.3 IEU FH 7 4 3.875
11.85 12.1 EU OH 5.25 3.4678 3.287
6 5/8 25.2 27.3 IEU FH 8 5 4.875
13.1 IU H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688 6.625

15.9 EU NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.125

15 EU OH 5.5 3.25 3.125
4
14
15.1 IU NC40(FH) 5.25 2.8125 2.688
14.4 IU SH 4.625 2.5625 2.438

17.5 EU NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.095

15.7
16.8 IU NC40(FH) 5.25 2.6875 2.563
17.1 IU H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688

148
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 149 -

18.1 EU-135 NC46(IF) 6 3 2.875

17.3 IU-95 NC40(FH) 5.5 2.4375 2.313

17.2 IU-95 H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688

17.3 IU-105 NC40(FH) 5.5 2.4375 2.313

17.2 IU-105 H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688

Dimension & Weight Properties Of New Tool Joints And New Dimension & Weight Properties Of New Tool Joints And New
High Strength Drill Pipe High Strength Drill Pipe
Drill Pipe Data Tool Joint Data Drill Pipe Data Tool Joint Data
Type
Nominal Nominal Approx. Drift Nominal Nominal Approx. Type Upset Drift
Upset & OD ID OD ID
Size Weight Weight Conn. Diameter Size Weight Weight & Pipe Conn. Diameter
Pipe Inches Inches Inches Lb/Ft Lb/Ft Grade
Inches Inches
Inches
Inches Lb/Ft Lb/Ft Inches
Grade
18.3 EU-95 NC50(IF) 6.325 3.75 3.625
7.1 EU-95 NC26(IF) 3.325 1.75 1.625

2 3/8 7 EU-95 SL-H90 3.25 1.8125 1.67 18.3 EU-105 NC50(IF) 6.325 3.75 3.625
6.65
2.325
7.1 EU-105 NC26(IF) 3.325 1.75 1.625 18.6 EU-135 NC50(IF) 6.325 3.5 3.375
7 EU-105 SL-H90 3.25 1.8125 1.67
18.7 IEU-95 NC46(XH) 6.25 3 2.875
11.1 EU-95 NC31(IF) 4.125 2 1.875 18.3 IEU-95 FH 6 3 2.875
10.9 EU-95 SL-H90 4 2 1.875 16.6 18 IEU-95 H-90 6 3.25 3.125

2 7/8 11.1 EU-105 NC31(IF) 4.125 2 1.875 18.9 IEU-105 NC46(XH) 6.25 3 2.875
10.4
2.875 10.9 EU-105 SL-H90 4 2 1.875 19.1 IEU-105 FH 6 3 2.625
18.3 IEU-105 H-90 6 3.25 3.125
11.5 EU-135 NC31(IF) 4.325 1.625 1.5
11.3 EU-135 SL-H90 4.125 1.625 1.5 18.9 IEU-135 NC46(XH) 6.25 2.75 2.625
19.1 IEU-135 FH 6.25 2.5 2.375
4 1/2
14.6 EU-95 NC38(IF) 5 2.5625 2.438 4.5 18.3 IEU-135 H-90 6 3 2.875
14.2 EU-95 SL-H90 4.75 2.5625 2.438
22 EU-95 NC50(IF) 6.325 3.5 3.25

14.7 EU-105 NC38(IF) 5 2.4375 2.313

22 EU-105 NC50(IF) 6.325 3.5 3.375
13.3 14.2 EU-105 SL-H90 4.75 2.5625 2.438
22 EU-135 NC50(IF) 6.325 3 2.875
14.9 EU-135 NC38(IF) 5 2.125 2
3 1/2
14.9 EU-135 SL-H90 5 2.125 2 22.6 IEU-95 NC46(XH) 6.25 2.75 2.625
3.5
15.3 EU-135 NC40(4FH) 5.325 2.4375 2.313 20 22.3 IEU-95 FH 6 2.5 2.375
21.7 IEU-95 H-90 6 3.25 3.125
16.8 EU-95 NC38(IF) 5 2.4375 2.313
22.8 IEU-105 NC46(XH) 6.25 2.5 2.375
15.5 17 EU-105 NC38(IF) 5 2.125 2 22.3 IEU-105 FH 6 2.5 2.375
21.9 IEU-105 H-90 6 3 2.875
17.8 EU-135 NC40(4FH) 5.5 2.25 2.125
23 IEU-135 NC46(XH) 6.25 2.25 2.125
4 16.2 EU-95 NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.125
21.4 IEU-95 NC50(XH) 6.325 3.5 3.375
22.4 IEU-95 5 1/2 FH 7 3.75 3.625
16.2 EU-105 NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.125
21.9 IEU-105 NC50(XH) 6.5 3.25 3.125
16.4 EU-135 NC46(IF) 6 3 2.875 19.5
22.4 IEU-105 5 1/2 FH 7 3.75 3.625

15.3 IU-95 NC49(FH) 5.25 2.6875 2.563 22.5 IEU-135 NC50(XH) 6.625 2.75 2.625
14
15.6 IU-95 H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688 5
23.2 IEU-135 5 1/2 FH 7.25 3.5 3.375
27.8 IEU-95 NC50(XH) 6.5 3 2.875
15.9 IU-105 NC49(FH) 5.5 2.4375 2.313
28.3 IEU-95 5 1/2 FH 7 3.5 3.375
15.6 IU-105 H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688
25.6
28.3 IEU-105 NC50(XH) 6.625 2.75 2.625
16.1 IU-135 NC40(FH) 5.5 2 1.875 28.9 IEU-105 5 1/2 FH 7.25 3.5 3.375
15.6 IU-135 H-90 5.5 2.8125 2.688 29.2 IEU-135 5 1/2 FH 7.25 3.25 3.125
5 1/2 21.9 24.4 IEU-95 FH 7 3.75 3.625
15.7 17.8 EU-95 NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.125 5.5

25.3 IEU-105 FH 7.25 3.5 3.375

17.8 EU-105 NC46(IF) 6 3.25 3.125
149
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 150 -

26.4 IEU-135 FH 7.5 3 2.875

27.8 IEU-95 FH 7.25 3.5 3.375

24.7 27.8 IEU-105 FH 7.25 3.5 3.375

28.9 IEU-135 FH 7.5 3 2.875

API TUBING
Tubing Nominal API TUBING
Size Weight Tubing Nominal
T&C Size Weight
T&C Wall Inside Drift T&C
Nom. OD Non- T&C Wall Inside Drift
Upset Grade Thickness Dia. Dia. Nom. OD Non-
In. In. Upset Upset Grade Thickness Dia. Dia.
Lb/ft In. In. In. In. In. Upset
Lb/ft Lb/ft In. In. In.
H-40 Lb/ft
J-55
6.4 6.5 N-80 0.217 2.441 2.347
C-75 8.6 8.7 N-80 0.308 2.259 2.165
0.75 1.05 1.14 1.2 N-80 0.113 0.824 0.73 6.4 6.5 P-105 0.217 2.441 2.347
H-40 8.6 8.7 P-105 0.308 2.259 2.165
J-55 7.7 H-40 0.216 3.068 2.943
2.875 2.875 9.2 9.3 H-40 0.254 2.992 2.867
10.2 H-40 0.289 2.922 2.797
7.7 J-55 0.216 3.068 2.943
C-75 0.113 1.049 9.2 9.3 J-55 0.254 2.992 2.867
N-80 10.2 J-55 0.289 2.922 2.797
1 1.315 1.7 1.8 0.955 7.7 C-75 0.216 3.068 2.943
H-40 0.125 1.41
H-40 0.14 1.38 9.2 9.3 C-75 0.254 2.992 2.867
J-55 0.125 1.41
10.2 C-75 0.289 2.922 2.797
J-55 0.14 1.38 12.7 12.95 C-75 0.375 2.75 2.625
C-75 0.14 1.38 7.7 N-80 0.216 3.068 2.943
1.25 1.66 2.3 2.4 N-80 0.14 1.38 1.286 9.2 9.3 N-80 0.254 2.992 2.867
H-40 0.125 1.65 10.2 N-80 0.289 2.922 2.797
H-40 0.145 1.61 12.7 12.95 N-80 0.375 2.75 2.625
3.5 3.5
J-55 0.125 1.65 9.2 9.3 P-105 0.254 2.992 2.867
12.7 12.95 P-105 0.375 2.75 2.625
J-55 0.145 1.61 H-40 0.226 3.548 3.423
C-75 0.145 1.61 H-40 0.262 3.476 3.351
1.5 1.9 2.75 2.9 1.516 J-55 0.226 3.548 3.423
N-80 0.145 1.61
H-40 J-55 0.262 3.476 3.351
J-55

C-75 0.156 1.751 C-75 0.226 3.548 3.423

N-80 C-75 0.262 3.476 3.351
4 H-40 0.167 2.041 1.947 4 4 9.5 11 N-80 0.226 3.548 3.423
2.325 2.063 4.6 4.7 H-40 0.19 1.995 1.901 N-80 0.262 3.476 3.351
4 J-55 0.167 2.041 1.947 H-40
4.6 4.7 J-55 0.19 1.995 1.901 J-55
4 C-75 0.167 2.041 1.947
4.6 4.7 C-75 0.19 1.995 1.901 4.5 4.5 12.6 12.75 C-75 0.271 3.958 3.833
N-80
5.8 5.95 C-75 0.254 1.867 1.773
4 N-80 0.167 2.041 1.947
4.6 4.7 N-80 0.19 1.995 1.901
5.8 5.95 N-80 0.254 1.867 1.773
2.375 2.375 4.6 4.7 P-105 0.19 1.995 1.901
5.8 5.95 P-105 0.254 1.867 1.773
6.4 6.5 H-40 0.217 2.441 2.347
6.4 6.5 J-55 0.217 2.441 2.347
6.4 6.5 C-75 0.217 2.441 2.347
8.6 8.7 C-75 0.308 2.259 2.165

150
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 151 -
3.5 0.156 3.188 1.6389 5.571 9.873
3.5 0.175 3.15 1.828 6.215 9.639
3.5 0.188 3.124 1.9561 6.65 9.48
3.5 0.203 3.094 2.1026 7.148 9.299

COIL TUBING
COILED TUBING TECHNICAL DATA
Wash Pipe Dimensions
Specified Wall Cross- Volume N-80 Wash Pipe
Outside Wall Inside Section Weight Internal
Diameter Thickness* Diameter Area Capacity Size
Weight Wall ID
D t d At W Vi OD
In. In. In. Sq. in. Lb/ft Bbl/1000 ft (In.) (mm) (Lbs/ft) (Kg/m) (In.) (mm) (In.) (mm)
2.25 57.2 4.12 6.12 0.19 4.7 1.875 47.6
1 0.08 0.84 0.2312 0.7861 0.6854
2.75 69.9 6.68 9.93 0.25 6.4 2.25 57.2
1 0.087 0.826 0.2495 0.8483 0.6628
3.25 82.6 8 11.89 0.25 6.4 2.75 69.9
1 0.095 0.81 0.2701 0.9182 0.6373
3.50 88.9 9.91 14.73 0.29 7.3 2.922 74.2
1 0.102 0.796 0.2878 0.9783 0.6155
3.75 95.3 9.32 13.85 0.25 6.4 3.25 82.6
1 0.109 0.782 0.3051 1.037 0.594
1.25 0.08 1.09 0.2941 1 1.154 4.00 101.6 11.6 17,24 0.29 7.3 3.428 87.1
1.25 0.087 1.076 0.3179 1.081 1.125 4.00 101.6 14 20.81 0.33 8.4 3.34 84.8
1.25 0.095 1.06 0.3447 1.172 1.091 4.00 101.6 15.7 23.33 0.38 9.7 3.24 82.3
1.25 0.102 1.046 0.3679 1.251 1.063 4.38 111.1 12 17.84 0.28 7.0 3.825 97.2
1.25 0.109 1.032 0.3907 1.328 1.035 4.50 114.3 11.6 17.24 0.25 6.4 4 101.6
1.25 0.125 1 0.4418 1.502 0.9714 4.50 114.3 16.6 24.67 0.34 8.6 3.826 97.2
1.25 0.134 0.982 0.4698 1.597 0.9367 5.00 127.0 15 22.29 0.3 7.5 4.408 112.0
1.25 0.156 0.938 0.5362 1.823 0.8547 5.00 127.0 18 26.75 0.36 9.2 4.276 108.6
1.5 0.095 1.31 0.4193 1.426 1.667 5.50 139.7 17 25.27 0.3 7.7 4.892 124.3
1.5 0.102 1.296 0.448 1.523 1.632 5.63 142.9 17.7 26.31 0.31 7.9 5 127.0
1.5 0.109 1.282 0.4763 1.619 1.597 5.75 146.1 18 26.75 0.31 8.0 5.125 130.2
1.5 0.125 1.25 0.54 1.836 1.518
5.75 146.1 22.5 33.44 0.38 9.7 4.99 126.7
1.5 0.134 1.232 0.575 1.955 1.474
6.00 152.4 20 29.73 0.32 8.2 5.352 135.9
1.5 0.156 1.188 0.6587 2.239 1.371
6.33 161.9 24 35.67 0.38 9.5 5.625 142.9
1.5 0.175 1.15 0.7285 2.476 1.285
1.75 0.109 1.532 0.5619 1.91 2.28 6.63 168.3 24 35.67 0.35 8.9 5.921 150.4
1.75 0.125 1.5 0.6381 2.169 2.186 7.00 177.8 26 38.64 0.36 9.2 6.276 159.4
1.75 0.134 1.482 0.6803 2.313 2.134 7.33 187.3 29 43.10 0.38 9.5 6.625 168.3
1.75 0.156 1.438 0.7812 2.666 2.009 7.50 190.5 28 41.62 0.37 9.3 6.765 171.8
1.75 0.175 1.4 0.8659 2.944 1.904 7.65 193.7 29.7 44.14 0.38 9.5 6.875 174.6
1.75 0.188 1.374 0.9225 3.136 1.834 8.13 206.4 39.5 58.71 0.47 11.9 7.185 182.5
2 0.109 1.782 0.6475 2.201 3.085 8.33 212.7 35.5 52.76 0.38 9.5 7.625 193.7
2 0.125 1.75 0.7363 2.503 2.975 8.63 219.1 36 53.51 0.4 10.2 7.825 198.8
2 0.134 1.732 0.7855 2.671 2.914 9.00 228.6 40 59.45 0.43 10.8 8.15 207.0
2 0.156 1.688 0.9037 3.072 2.768 9.63 244.5 43.5 64.65 0.44 11.0 8.755 222.4
2 0.175 1.65 1.0033 3.411 2.645 10.75 273.1 51 75.80 0.45 11.4 9.85 250.2
2 0.188 1.624 1.0702 3.638 2.562 11.75 298.5 60 89.18 0.49 12.4 10.77 273.6
2 0.203 1.594 1.146 3.896 2.468 13.33 339.7 72 107.01 0.51 13.1 12.35 313.6
2.375 0.109 2.157 0.776 2.638 4.52
16.00 406.4 84 124.85 0.5 12.6 15.01 381.3
2.375 0.125 2.125 0.8836 3.004 4.386
2.375 0.134 2.107 0.9434 3.207 4.312
2.375 0.156 2.063 1.0875 3.697 4.134
2.375 0.175 2.025 1.2095 4.112 3.983
2.375 0.188 1.999 1.2917 4.391 3.882
2.375 0.203 1.969 1.3852 4.709 3.766
2.875 0.125 2.625 1.0799 3.671 6.694
2.875 0.134 2.607 1.1539 3.923 6.602
2.875 0.156 2.563 1.3326 4.53 6.381
2.875 0.175 2.525 1.4844 5.046 6.193
2.875 0.188 2.499 1.587 5.395 6.066
2.875 0.203 2.469 1.7041 5.793 5.922
3.5 0.134 3.232 1.417 4.817 10.15

151
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 152 -

BOUYANCY FACTORS FOR STEEL PIPE SAND (20-40 MESH) FILL-UP IN CASING
Mud Mud Mud Mud Pounds Linear Feet per
Buoyancy Buoyancy Buoyancy Buoyancy Size Weight ID Capacity Capacity Sand per Per Pound
wt. wt. wt. wt.
in. lb/ft in. Ft3/ft Ft/ft3 Linear Foot of Sand
(ppg) Factor (ppg) Factor (ppg) Factor (ppg) Factor
9.5 4.09 0.0912 10.9604 9.7259 0.1028
8.3 0.873 10.8 0.835 13.2 0.8 15.7 0.762 10.5 4.052 0.0896 11.1669 9.546 0.1048
8.4 0.872 10.9 0.834 13.3 0.798 15.8 0.76 4½ 11.6 4 0.0873 11.4592 9.3026 0.1075
13.5 3.92 0.0838 11.9316 8.9342 0.1119
8.5 0.87 11 0.832 13.4 0.797 15.9 0.759 11.5 4.56 0.1134 8.8174 12.0897 0.0827
8.6 0.869 11.1 0.831 13.5 0.795 16 0.757 13 4.494 0.1102 9.0783 11.7422 0.0852
15 4.408 0.106 9.436 11.2971 0.0885
8.7 0.867 11.2 0.829 13.6 0.794 16.1 0.756
18 4.276 0.0997 10.0276 10.6307 0.0941
8.8 0.866 11.3 0.827 13.7 0.792 16.2 0.754 21 4.154 0.0941 10.6253 10.0327 0.0997
5
13 5.044 0.1388 7.2065 14.7923 0.0676
8.9 0.864 11.4 0.826 13.8 0.791 16.3 0.753
14 5.012 0.137 7.2988 14.6052 0.0685
9 0.863 11.5 0.824 13.9 0.789 16.4 0.751 15 4.974 0.1349 7.4107 14.3845 0.0695
9.1 0.861 11.6 0.823 14 0.788 16.5 0.75 15.5 4.95 0.1336 7.4828 14.2461 0.0702
17 4.892 0.1305 7.6613 13.9142 0.0719
9.2 0.86 11.7 0.821 14.1 0.786 16.6 0.748 20 4.778 0.1245 8.0312 13.2732 0.0753
9.3 0.858 11.8 0.82 14.2 0.785 16.7 0.747 23 4.67 0.1189 8.407 12.68 0.0789
5½ 17 6.538 0.2331 4.2893 24.8527 0.0402
9.4 0.856 11.9 0.818 14.3 0.783 16.8 0.745 20 6.456 0.2273 4.3989 24.2332 0.0413
9.5 0.855 12 0.817 14.4 0.782 16.9 0.744 22 6.398 0.2233 4.479 23.7998 0.042
23 6.366 0.221 4.5242 23.5623 0.0424
9.6 0.853 12.1 0.815 14.5 0.78 17 0.742
24 6.336 0.219 4.5671 23.3408 0.0428
9.7 0.852 12.2 0.814 14.6 0.779 17.1 0.74 26 6.276 0.2148 4.6549 22.9008 0.0437
28 6.214 0.2106 4.7482 22.4506 0.0445
9.8 0.85 12.3 0.812 14.7 0.777 17.2 0.739
29 6.184 0.2086 4.7944 22.2343 0.045
9.9 0.849 12.4 0.811 14.8 0.776 17.3 0.737 30 6.154 0.2066 4.8413 22.0191 0.0454
10 0.847 12.5 0.809 14.9 0.774 17.4 0.736 32 6.094 0.2026 4.9371 21.5918 0.0463
34 6.04 0.199 5.0257 21.2109 0.0471
10.1 0.846 12.6 0.808 15 0.773 17.5 0.734 7
35 6.004 0.1966 5.0862 20.9588 0.0477
10.2 0.844 12.7 0.806 15.1 0.771 17.6 0.733 38 5.92 0.1911 5.2315 20.3764 0.0491
40 5.836 0.1858 5.3832 19.8023 0.0505
10.3 0.843 12.8 0.805 15.2 0.769 17.7 0.731
20 7.125 0.2769 3.6116 29.5158 0.0339
10.4 0.841 12.9 0.803 15.3 0.768 17.8 0.73 24 7.025 0.2692 3.7152 28.6931 0.0349
26.4 6.969 0.2649 3.7751 28.2375 0.0354
10.5 0.84 15.4 0.766 17.9 0.728
29.7 6.875 0.2578 3.8791 27.4808 0.0364
10.6 0.838 15.5 0.765 18 0.727 33.7 6.765 0.2496 4.0062 26.6085 0.0376
10.7 0.837 15.6 0.763 39 6.625 0.2394 4.1773 25.5186 0.0392
43.5 6.435 0.2259 4.4277 24.0759 0.0415
7 5/8
24 8.097 0.3576 2.7966 38.1182 0.0262
28 8.017 0.3506 2.8527 37.3687 0.0268
32 7.921 0.3422 2.9222 36.4791 0.0274
36 7.825 0.334 2.9944 35.6003 0.0281
8 5/8 38 7.775 0.3297 3.033 35.1468 0.0285
40 7.725 0.3255 3.0724 34.6962 0.0288
43 7.651 0.3193 3.1321 34.0346 0.0294
44 7.625 0.3171 3.1535 33.8037 0.0296
49 7.511 0.3077 3.25 32.8005 0.0305
29.3 9.063 0.448 2.2322 47.7561 0.0209
32.3 9.001 0.4419 2.263 47.1049 0.0212
36 8.921 0.4341 2.3038 46.2713 0.0216
38 8.885 0.4306 2.3225 45.8986 0.0218
152
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 153 -
40 8.835 0.4257 2.3489 45.3835 0.022
43.5 8.755 0.4181 2.392 44.5653 0.0224
47 8.681 0.411 2.4329 43.8151 0.0228
53.5 8.535 0.3973 2.5169 42.3537 0.0236
9 5/8
58.4 8.435 0.3881 2.5769 41.3671 0.0242
61.1 8.375 0.3826 2.614 40.7807 0.0245
71.8 8.125 0.3601 2.7773 38.3823 0.0261

DENSITY & PRESSURE GRADIENT DENSITY & PRESSURE GRADIENT

Density Density Spec. Press. Density Density Spec. Press.
(lb/gal) (lb/ft(3)) Gravity Gradient (lb/gal) (lb/ft(3)) Gravity Gradient
(psi/ft) (psi/ft)
8.3 62.38 1 0.433 13 97.24 1.56 0.675
8.4 62.83 1.01 0.436 13.1 97.99 1.57 0.68
8.5 63.58 1.02 0.441 13.2 98.74 1.58 0.685
8.6 64.33 1.03 0.447 13.3 99.48 1.6 0.69
8.7 65.08 1.04 0.452 13.4 100.23 1.61 0.696
8.8 65.92 1.06 0.457 13.5 100.98 1.62 0.701
8.9 66.57 1.07 0.462 13.6 101.73 1.63 0.706
9 67.32 1.08 0.467 13.7 102.48 1.64 0.711
9.1 68.07 1.09 0.472 13.8 103.22 1.66 0.717
9.2 68.82 1.1 0.478 13.9 103.97 1.67 0.722
9.3 69.56 1.12 0.483 14 104.72 1.68 0.727
9.4 70.31 1.13 0.488 14.1 105.47 1.69 0.732
9.5 71.06 1.14 0.493 14.2 106.22 1.7 0.737
9.6 71.81 1.15 0.498 14.3 106.96 1.72 0.742
9.7 72.56 1.16 0.504 14.4 107.71 1.73 0.748
9.8 73.3 1.18 0.509 14.5 108.46 1.74 0.753
9.9 74.05 1.19 0.514 14.6 109.21 1.75 0.758
10 74.8 1.2 0.519 14.7 109.96 1.76 0.763
10.1 75.55 1.21 0.524 14.8 110.7 1.78 0.768
10.2 76.3 1.22 0.53 14.9 111.45 1.79 0.774
10.3 77.04 1.24 0.535 15 112.2 1.8 0.779
10.4 77.79 1.25 0.54 15.1 112.95 1.81 0.784
10.5 78.54 1.26 0.545 15.2 113.7 1.82 0.79
10.6 79.29 1.27 0.55 15.3 114.44 1.84 0.794
10.7 80.04 1.28 0.556 15.4 115.19 1.85 0.78
10.8 80.78 1.3 0.561 15.5 115.94 1.86 0.805
10.9 81.53 1.31 0.566 15.6 116.69 1.87 0.81
11 82.28 1.32 0.571 15.7 117.44 1.88 0.815
11.1 83.03 1.33 0.576 15.8 118.18 1.9 0.821
11.2 83.78 1.34 0.581 15.9 118.93 1.91 0.825
11.3 84.52 1.36 0.587 16 119.68 1.92 0.831
11.4 85.27 1.37 0.591 16.1 120.43 1.93 0.836
11.5 86.02 1.38 0.597 16.2 121.18 1.94 0.841
11.6 86.77 1.39 0.602 16.3 121.92 1.96 0.846
11.7 87.52 1.4 0.607 16.4 122.67 1.97 0.851
11.8 88.26 1.42 0.613 16.5 123.42 1.98 0.857
11.9 89.01 1.43 0.618 16.6 124.17 1.99 0.862
12 89.76 1.44 0.623 16.7 124.92 2 0.867
12.1 90.51 1.45 0.628 16.8 125.66 2.02 0.872
12.2 91.26 1.46 0.633 16.9 126.41 2.03 0.877
12.3 92 1.48 0.639 17 127.16 2.04 0.833
12.4 92.75 1.49 0.644
12.5 93.5 1.5 0.649
12.6 94.25 1.51 0.654
12.7 95 1.52 0.659
12.8 95.74 1.54 0.664
12.9 96.49 1.55 0.67

153
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 154 -
27. .893 7.45 55.7 2.58 .387
DETERMINE THE API GRAVITY OF AN OIL 26. .898 7.49 56 2.57 .389
25. .904 7.54 56.4 2.55 .392
Use the API Hydrometer and obtain the gravity of the oil. At the same 24. .910 7.59 56.8 2.54 .394
time obtain the temperature of the oil. The gravity should be reported 23. .916 7.64 57.2 2.52 .397
in API* at 60ºF. If the temperature of the oil is not 60ºF., a correction
22. .922 7.69 57.5 2.51 .399
must be made. If the oil is above 60ºF., the correction is (–) minus. If
20. .934 7.79 58.3 2.47 .405
the oil is below 60ºF., the correction is (+) plus. The correction is 1º
API for every 10ºF. over or under 60ºF. (15.56ºC.)* 19. .940 7.84 58.7 2.46 .407
18. .946 7.89 59.0 2.44 .410
Example:
17. .953 7.95 59.5 2.42 .413
Temperature above 60ºF. 16. .959 8.00 59.8 2.40 .416
Observed API Gravity = 35.2º API 15. .966 8.06 60.3 2.39 .419
Observed Temperature = 77ºF.
14. .973 8.11 60.7 2.38 .421
Correction is (–) minus 77-60
13. .979 8.16 61.0 2.36 .424
Temperature is above 60ºF. = 17 / 10
Correction = 1.7 12. .986 8.22 61.5 2.34 .427
The API Gravity corrected to 60ºF., is: 11. .993 8.28 61.9 2.33 .430
35.2 – 1.7 = 33.5º API @ 60ºF. 10o API or 1.00 8.34 62.4 2.31 .433
Temperature below 60ºF. Pure Water 1.01 8.4 62.8 2.29 .436
Observed API Gravity = 38.3º API 1.03 8.6 64.3 2.24 .447
Observed Temperature = 51.0ºF. 1.06 8.8 65.8 2.19 .457
Correction is (+) plus as 60-51 1.08 9.0 67.3 2.14 .468
Temperature is below 60ºF., = 9 / 10 1.10 9.2 68.8 2.09 .478
Correction = 0.9 1.13 9.4 70.3 2.05 .488
The API Gravity corrected to 60ºF., is: 1.15 9.6 71.8 2.00 .499
38.3 + 0.9 = 39.2º API @ 60ºF. Salt Water 1.154 9.625 72.0 2.00 .500
*
1.18 9.8 73.3 1.96 .509
Must convert Celsius (°C) to Fahrenheit (F°) for this correction.
1.20 10.0 74.8 1.93 .519
1.22 10.2 76.3 1.89 .530
API Gravity/Density Conversion Table 1.25 10.4 77.8 1.85 .540
1.27 10.6 79.3 1.81 .551
Weight (Density) Fluid Head 1.29 10.8 80.8 1.78 .561
Height 1.32 11.0 82.3 1.75 .571
Cubi Pressure 1.34 11.2 83.8 1.72 .582
Degrees Specific Gallon Per
c Per Foot 1.37 11.4 85.3 1.69 .590
API Gravity Pounds Pound
Foot Lb/sq in.
Feet 1.39 11.6 86.8 1.66 .603
60. .739 6.16 46.1 3.13 .320 1.41 11.8 88.3 1.63 .613
59. .743 6.20 46.4 3.11 .322 1.44 12.0 89.8 1.61 .623
58. .747 6.23 46.6 3.09 .324 1.46 12.2 91.3 1.58 .634
57. .751 6.26 46.8 3.08 .325 1.49 12.4 92.8 1.55 .644
56. .755 6.30 47.1 3.06 .327 1.51 12.6 94.3 1.53 .655
55. .759 6.33 47.4 3.04 .329 1.53 12.8 95.8 1.50 .665
54. .763 6.36 47.6 3.03 .330 1.56 13.0 97.3 1.48 .675
53. .767 6.40 47.9 3.01 .332 1.58 13.2 98.7 1.46 .686
52. .771 6.43 48.1 2.99 .334 1.61 13.4 100. 1.44 .696
51. .775 6.46 48.3 2.98 .336 1.63 13.6 102. 1.42 .706
50. .780 6.51 48.7 2.96 .338 1.65 13.8 103. 1.39 .717
49. .784 6.54 48.9 2.94 .340 1.68 14.0 105. 1.38 .727
48. .788 6.57 49.2 2.93 .341 1.70 14.2 106. 1.36 .738
47. .793 6.61 49.5 2.92 .343 1.73 14.4 108. 1.34 .748
46. .797 6.65 49.8 2.90 .345 1.75 14.6 109. 1.32 .758
45. .802 6.69 50.0 2.87 .348 1.77 14.8 111. 1.30 .769
44. .806 6.72 50.3 2.87 .349 1.80 15.0 112. 1.28 .779
43. .811 6.76 50.6 2.85 .351 1.82 15.2 114. 1.27 .790
42. .816 6.81 50.9 2.82 .354 1.85 15.4 115. 1.25 .800
41. .820 6.84 51.2 2.82 .355 1.87 15.6 117. 1.23 .810
40. .825 6.88 51.5 2.80 .357 1.89 15.8 118. 1.22 .821
39. .830 6.92 51.8 2.79 .359
38. .835 6.96 52.1 2.76 .362
37. .840 7.01 52.4 2.75 .364
36. .845 7.05 52.7 2.73 .366
35. .850 7.09 53.0 2.72 .368
34. .855 7.13 53.3 2.70 .370
33. .860 7.17 53.6 2.69 .372
32. .865 7.21 53.9 2.67 .375
31. .871 7.26 54.3 2.65 .377
30. .876 7.31 54.7 2.63 .380
29. .882 7.36 55.1 2.62 .382
28. .887 7.4 55.4 2.6 .384

154
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 155 -
API Gravity/Density Conversion Table
GAS TABLES
Weight (Density) Fluid Head
Height Per Pressure To find the bottomhole pressure, multiply the surface pressure by the
Degrees Specific Gallon Cubic
Pound Per Foot factor corresponding to the well depth and gravity of the gas.
API Gravity Pounds Foot
Feet Lb/sq in.
Correction Factors Correction Factors
Common 1.92 16.0 120. 1.20 .831
Well 0.6 0.7 0.8 Well 0.6 0.7 0.8
Cement 1.94 16.2 121. 1.19 .842
Depth Gravity Gravity Gravity Depth Gravity Gravity Gravity
Slurry 1.97 16.4 123. 1.17 .852
4,500 1.099 1.116 1.132 7,500 1.171 1.195 1.227
1.99 16.6 124. 1.16 .862
5,000 1.110 1.130 1.149 8,000 1.181 1.210 1.241
2.01 16.8 126. 1.15 .873
2.04 17.0 127. 1.13 .883 5,500 1.120 1.141 1.163 8,500 1.190 1.230 1.260
2.06 17.2 129. 1.12 .894 6,000 1.132 1.155 1.181 9,000 1.202 1.240 1.273
2.09 17.4 130. 1.11 .904 6,500 1.143 1.175 1.195 9,500 1.215 1.250 2.285
2.11 17.6 132. 1.09 .914 7,000 1.155 1.184 1.211 10,000 1.225 1.265 1.305
2.13 17.8 133. 1.08 .925
2.16 18.0 135. 1.07 .935
2.18 18.2 136. 1.06 .945
2.21 18.4 138. 1.05 .956
2.23 18.6 139. 1.04 .966
2.25 18.8 141. 1.02 .977
2.28 19.0 142. 1.01 .987
2.30 19.2 144. 1.00 .997
2.33 19.4 145. .992 1.01
2.35 19.6 147. .982 1.02
2.37 19.8 148. .972 1.03
2.40 20.0 150. .962 1.04
2.42 20.2 151. .953 1.05
2.45 20.4 153. .943 1.06
2.47 20.6 154. .935 1.07
2.49 20.8 156. .925 1.08
2.52 21.0 157. .917 1.09
2.54 21.2 159. .908 1.10
2.57 21.4 160. .899 1.11
2.59 21.6 162. .891 1.12
2.61 21.8 163. .883 1.13

155
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 156 -
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE AND FLUID
WEIGHT CONVERSION TABLES
STRETCH DATA FOR DRILL PIPE, TUBING AND CASING
To find the Hydrostatic pressure of a column of fluid, multiply the
appropriate value in Lbs./Sq. in. per foot of depth times the depth in
Stretch Per Pull Above Stretch
Due To Own feet.
Length 1000 Lb. Weight of
Size of Weight Example: find the Hydrostatic Pressure at a depth of 13,760 feet (4
of Pipe Pull Above Pipe Per
Tubing, D.P. Suspended 194m) in a hole filled with mud weighing 12.3 Lbs./Gal. (92.01 Lbs./Cu.
Suspended Wt. of Pipe, In. Stretch
or Casing in Water, Ft.) (1.474 kg/L) The value 0.6390 is found opposite 12.3 Lbs./Gal. in
in Well, Inches of Pipe
Inches the table. Then 0.6390 x 13760 = 8793 Lbs. per Sq. In. (or 14.455
Feet Factor C Pounds
kPa/mX 4 194m = 60 624 kPa) hydrostatic pressure.
500 .115 6,450 .14
1,000 .310 3,225 .56
2.375” HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE AND FLUID WEIGHT
2,000 .620 1,612 2.22
Upset
3,000 .930 1,075 5.00
Tubing Lbs./Sq. In.
4.70 #/Ft. 4,000 1.240 806 8.88 Lbs./Cu. Sp.
Lbs./Gal. Per Ft. of kg/L kPa/m
5,000 1.550 644 13.88 Ft. Gr.
Depth
10,000 3.100 322 55.51
500 .110 9,080 .14 7.0 52.36 0.84 0.3636 0.839 8.225
1,000 .220 4,540 .56 7.1 53.11 0.85 0.3688 0.851 8.342
2.875” 7.2 53.86 0.86 0.3740 0.863 8.460
2,000 .440 2,270 2.22
Upset 7.3 54.61 0.87 0.3792 0.875 8.578
3,000 .660 1,513 5.00
Tubing 7.4 55.36 0.89 0.3844 0.887 8.695
6.50 #/Ft. 4,000 .880 1,135 8.88
5,000 1.100 908 13.88 7.5 56.10 0.90 0.3896 0.899 8.813
10,000 2.200 454 55.51 7.6 56.85 0.91 0.3948 0.911 8.931
500 .0772 12,960 .14 7.7 57.60 0.92 0.4000 0.923 9.048
1,000 .1544 6,480 .56 7.8 58.35 0.93 0.4052 0.935 9.166
3.500” 7.9 59.10 0.95 0.4104 0.947 9.283
2,000 .3088 3,240 2.22
Upset 8.0 59.84 0.96 0.4156 0.959 9.401
3,000 .4632 2,160 5.00
Tubing 8.1 60.59 0.97 0.4208 0.971 9.519
9.30 #/Ft. 4,000 .6176 1,620 8.88
8.2 61.34 0.98 0.4260 0.983 9.636
5,000 .7720 1,296 13.88
8.3 62.09 0.99 0.4312 0.995 9.754
10,000 1.544 648 55.51
8.33* 62.31 1.00 0.4330 1.000 9.807
500 .070 14,300 .14
8.4 62.84 1.01 0.4364 1.007 9.872
1,000 .140 7,150 .56
8.5 63.58 1.02 0.4416 1.019 9.989
2.875” 2,000 .280 3,575 2.22
8.6 64.33 1.03 0.4468 1.031 10.107
Drill Pipe 3,000 .420 2,383 5.00
8.7 65.08 1.04 0.4519 1.043 10.222
10.40 #/Ft. 4,000 .560 1,787 8.88 8.8 65.83 1.05 0.4571 1.054 10.340
5,000 .700 1,430 13.88 8.9 66.58 1.07 0.4623 1.066 10.457
10,000 1.40 715 55.51 9.0 67.32 1.08 0.4675 1.078 10.575
500 .055 18,200 .14 9.1 68.07 1.09 0.4727 1.090 10.693
1,000 .110 9,100 .56 9.2 68.82 1.10 0.4779 1.102 10.810
3.500” 2,000 .220 4,550 2.22 9.3 69.57 1.11 0.4831 1.114 10.928
Drill Pipe 3,000 .330 3,033 5.00 9.4 70.32 1.13 0.4883 1.126 11.046
13.30 #/Ft. 4,000 .440 2,275 8.88 9.5 71.06 1.14 0.4935 1.138 11.163
5,000 .550 1,820 13.88 9.6 71.81 1.15 0.4987 1.150 11.281
10,000 1.10 910 55.51 9.7 72.56 1.16 0.5039 1.162 11.399
500 .0450 22,200 .14 9.8 73.31 1.17 0.5091 1.174 11.516
1,000 .0900 11,100 .56 9.9 74.06 1.19 0.5143 1.186 11.634
4.500” 2,000 .180 5,550 2.22 10.0 74.80 1.20 0.5195 1.198 11.751
Drill Pipe 3,000 .270 3,700 5.00 10.1 75.55 1.21 0.5247 1.210 11.869
16.60 #/Ft. 4,000 .360 2,775 8.88 10.2 76.30 1.22 0.5299 1.222 11.987
5,000 .450 2,220 13.88 10.3 77.05 1.23 0.5351 1.234 12.104
10,000 .900 1,110 55.51 10.4 77.80 1.25 0.5403 1.246 12.222
500 .0402 24,800 .14 10.5 78.55 1.26 0.5455 1.258 12.340
1,000 .0804 12,400 .56 10.6 79.29 1.27 0.5506 1.270 12.455
5.500” 2,000 .160 6,230 2.22 10.7 80.04 1.28 0.5558 1.282 12.573
Casing 3,000 240 4,133 5.00 10.8 80.79 1.29 0.5610 1.294 12.690
17 #/Ft. 4,000 .320 3,100 8.88 10.9 81.54 1.31 0.5662 1.306 12.808
5,000 .402 2,480 13.88 11.0 82.29 1.32 0.5714 1.318 12.925
10,000 804 1,240 55.51 11.1 83.03 1.33 0.5766 1.330 13.043
500 .0301 33,220 .14 11.2 83.78 1.34 0.5818 1.342 13.161
1,000 .0602 16,610 .56 11.3 84.53 1.35 0.5870 1.354 13.278
7.000” 2,000 .120 8,305 2.22 11.4 85.28 1.37 0.5922 1.366 13.396
Casing 3,000 .181 5,537 5.00 11.5 86.03 1.38 0.5974 1.378 13.514
23 #/Ft. 4,000 241 4,152 8.88 11.6 86.77 1.39 0.6026 1.390 13.631
5,000 .301 3,322 13.88 11.7 87.52 1.40 0.6078 1.402 13.749
10,000 .602 1,661 55.51 11.8 88.27 1.412 0.6130 1.414 13.866
11.9 89.02 1.43 0.6182 1.426 13.984
12.0 89.77 1.44 0.6234 1.438 14.102

156
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 157 -

HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE AND FLUID WEIGHT HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE AND FLUID WEIGHT

Lbs./Sq. In. Lbs./Sq.

Lbs./Gal. Lbs./Cu. Ft. Sp. Gr. Per Ft. of kg/L kPa/m Lbs./Cu. Sp. In.
Depth Lbs./Gal. kg/L kPa/m 21.153
Ft. Gr. Per Ft. of
12.1 90.51 1.45 0.6286 1.450 14.219 Depth
12.2 91.26 1.46 0.6338 1.462 14.337 18.1 135.40 2.17 0.9403 2.169 21.270
12.3 92.01 1.47 0.6390 1.474 14.455 18.2 136.15 2.18 0.9455 2.181 21.388
12.4 92.76 1.49 0.6442 1.486 14.572 18.3 136.89 2.19 0.9506 2.193 21.503
12.5 93.51 1.50 0.6493 1.498 14.688 18.4 137.64 2.20 0.9558 2.205 21.621
12.6 94.25 1.51 0.6545 1.510 14.805 18.5 138.39 2.22 0.9610 2.217 21.738
12.7 95.00 1.52 0.6597 1.522 14.923 18.6 139.14 2.23 0.9662 2.229 21.856
12.8 95.75 1.53 0.6649 1.534 15.040 18.7 139.89 2.24 0.9714 2.241 21.974
12.9 96.50 1.55 0.6701 1.546 15.158 18.8 140.63 2.25 0.9766 2.253 22.091
13.0 97.25 1.56 0.6753 1.558 15.276 18.9 141.38 2.26 0.9818 2.265 22.209
13.1 97.99 1.57 0.6805 1.570 15.393 19.0 142.13 2.28 0.9870 2.277 22.327
13.2 98.74 1.58 0.6857 1.582 15.511 19.1 142.88 2.29 0.9922 2.289 22.444
13.3 99.49 1.59 0.6909 1.594 15.629 19.2 143.63 2.30 0.9974 2.301 22.562
13.4 100.24 1.61 0.6961 1.606 15.746 19.3 144.37 2.31 1.0026 2.313 22.679
13.5 100.99 1.62 0.7013 1.618 15.864 19.4 145.12 2.32 1.0078 2.325 22.797
13.6 101.73 1.63 0.7065 1.630 15.981 19.5 145.87 2.34 1.0130 2.337 22.915
13.7 102.48 1.64 0.7117 1.624 16.099 19.6 146.62 2.35 1.0182 2.349 23.032
13.8 103.23 1.65 0.7169 1.654 16.217 19.7 147.37 2.36 1.0234 2.361 23.150
13.9 103.98 1.67 0.7221 1.666 16.334 19.8 148.11 2.37 1.0286 2.373 23.268
14.0 104.73 1.68 0.7273 1.678 16.452
19.9 148.86 2.38 1.0338 2.385 23.385
14.1 105.48 1.69 0.7325 1.690 16.570
20.0 149.61 2.40 1.0390 2.397 23.503
14.2 106.22 1.70 0.7377 1.702 16.687
20.1 150.36 2.41 1.0442 2.409 23.620
14.3 106.97 1.71 0.7429 1.714 16.805
20.2 151.11 2.42 1.0493 2.421 23.736
14.4 107.72 1.73 0.7480 1.726 16.920
20.3 151.85 2.43 1.0545 2.433 23.853
14.5 108.47 1.74 0.7532 1.738 17.038
20.4 152.60 2.44 1.0597 2.445 23.971
14.6 109.22 1.75 0.7584 1.750 17.155
14.7 109.96 1.76 0.7636 1.761 17.273 20.5 153.35 2.46 1.0649 2.456 24.089
14.8 110.71 1.77 0.7688 1.773 17.391 20.6 154.10 2.47 1.0701 2.468 24.206
14.9 111.46 1.79 0.7740 1.785 17.508 20.7 154.85 2.48 1.0753 2.480 24.324
15.0 112.21 1.80 0.7792 1.797 17.626 20.8 155.59 2.49 1.0805 2.492 24.442
15.1 112.96 1.81 0.7844 1.809 17.744 20.9 156.34 2.50 1.0857 2.504 24.559
15.2 113.70 1.82 0.7896 1.821 17.861 21.0 157.09 2.52 1.0909 2.516 24.677
15.3 114.45 1.83 0.7948 1.833 17.979 21.1 157.84 2.53 1.0961 2.528 24.794
15.4 115.20 1.85 0.8000 1.845 18.096 21.2 158.59 2.54 1.1013 2.540 24.912
15.5 115.95 1.86 0.8052 1.857 18.214 21.3 159.33 2.55 1.1065 2.552 25.030
15.6 116.70 1.87 0.8104 1.869 18.332 21.4 160.08 2.56 1.1117 2.564 25.147
15.7 117.44 1.88 0.8156 1.881 18.449 21.5 160.83 2.58 1.1169 2.576 25.265
15.8 118.19 1.89 0.8208 1.893 18.567 21.6 161.58 2.59 1.1221 2.588 25.383
15.9 118.94 1.91 0.8260 1.905 18.685 21.7 162.33 2.60 1.1273 2.600 25.500
16.0 119.69 1.92 0.8312 1.917 18.802 21.8 163.07 2.61 1.1325 2.612 25.618
16.1 120.44 1.93 0.8364 1.929 18.920 21.9 163.82 2.62 1.1377 2.624 25.735
16.2 121.18 1.94 0.8416 1.941 19.037 22.0 164.57 2.64 1.1429 2.636 25.853
16.3 121.93 1.95 0.8468 1.953 19.155 22.1 165.32 2.65 1.1480 2.648 25.968
16.4 122.68 1.97 0.8519 1.965 19.270 22.2 166.07 2.66 1.1532 2.660 26.086
16.5 123.43 1.98 0.8571 1.977 19.388 22.3 166.82 2.67 1.1584 2.672 26.204
16.6 124.18 1.99 0.8623 1.989 19.506 22.4 167.56 2.68 1.1636 2.684 26.321
16.7 124.92 2.00 0.8675 2.001 19.623 22.5 168.31 2.70 1.1688 2.696 26.439
16.8 125.67 2.01 0.8727 2.013 19.741 22.6 169.06 2.71 1.1740 2.708 26.557
16.9 126.42 2.03 0.8779 2.025 19.859
22.7 169.81 2.72 1.1792 2.720 26.674
17.0 127.17 2.04 0.8831 2.037 19.976
22.8 170.56 2.73 1.1844 2.732 26.792
17.1 127.92 2.05 0.8883 2.049 20.094
22.9 171.30 2.74 1.1896 2.744 26.909
17.2 128.66 2.06 0.8935 2.061 20.211
23.0 172.05 2.76 1.1948 2.756 27.027
17.3 129.41 2.07 0.8987 2.073 20.329
17.4 130.16 2.09 0.9039 2.085 20.447
17.5 130.91 2.10 0.9091 2.097 20.564
17.6 131.66 2.11 0.9143 2.109 20.682
17.7 132.40 2.12 0.9195 2.121 20.800
17.8 133.15 2.13 0.9247 2.133 20.917
17.9 133.90 2.14 0.9299 2.145 21.035

157
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 158 -
Conversion Factors
Cu. Ft. 28.3168 Liter
TO CONVERT MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN

Acres 43,560 Sq. Ft. Cu. Ft. 0.0283168 Cu. Meters

Acres 4,047 Sq. Meters Cu. Ft. 0.1781 BBL

Atmosphere 14.7 lb / Sq. Inch Cu. Ft. 7.48 Gallon(US)

Atmosphere 101,325 Pascals Cu. Ft. (steel) 489.6 lb(Steel)

Bar 14.50 lb / Sq. Inch Cu. Ft. 1728 Cu. Inch

Bar 0.987 Atmospheres Cu. Ft. /Sec 448.83 Gallon(US) / Min

Bar 100,000 Pascals Cu. Ft. /Min 472 Cu. cm / Second

Barrel(US)(liquid) 9702 Cu. Inch Cu. Ft. /Min 0.1247 Gallon / Second

Barrel(US)(liquid) 5.6146 Cu. Ft. Cu. Ft. /Min 0.472 Liter / Second

Barrel(US)(liquid) 42 Gallons(US) Cu. in 16.39 Cu. Centimeters

Barrel(US)(liquid) 34.974 Gallons(UK) Cu. in 5.787x 10-4 Cu. Ft.

Barrel(US)/ Cu. in 4.329x 10-3 Gallon(US)

0.700 GPM(US)
Hour(liquid)

Barrel(US)(liquid) 0.158984 Cu. Meters Cu. in 1.639x 10-2 Liter

Barrel(US)/ Day(liquid) 0.02917 GPM(US) Cu. in 3.463x 10-2 Pint(liquid) (US)

Barrel(US) / Day(liquid) 0.00662433 Cu. Meters / hour Cu. in 1.732x 10-2 Quart(liquid) (US)

6
Centimeters 0.3937 Inches Cu. M 1x 10 Cu. Centimeters

Centimeters 0.0328 Ft. Cu. M 35.31 Cu. Ft.

Centimeters 10 Millimeters Cu. M 264.2 Gallon (US)

3
Centimeters 0.0100 Meters Cu. M 1x 10 Liter

Centimeters 0.00001 Kilometers Cu. M 2113 Pint (liquid) (US)

Centimeters / Second 1.969 Ft./Min Cu. M 1057 Quart (liquid)(US)

Centimeters / Second 0.036 Kilometers / Hour

Centimeters / Second 0.02237 Miles/Hour

Centipoise 0.0001 Pascal - Second

Centistoke 1.0x 10-6 Sq. Meter / Second

Cu.Centimeters 6.102x 10-2 Cu. Inch

Cu.Centimeters 3.531x 10-5 Cu. Ft.

Cu.Centimeters 1x 10-6 Cu. Meter

Cu.Centimeters 2.642x 10-4 Gallons(US)

Cu.Centimeters 2.11x 10-3 Pint(liquid) (US)

Cu.Centimeters 1.057x 10-3 Quart(liquid) (US)

Cu.Centimeters 1 x 10-3 Liters

158
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 159 -
Conversion Factors Conversion Factors
TO CONVERT MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN TO CONVERT MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
Fahrenheit Degree Horsepower 33,000 Ft-lb / min
Celsius Degree (°C) 1.8(°C)+ 32
(°F) Horsepower 550 Ft-lb / sec
Degree (Angle) 60 Minutes Horsepower 1.014 Hp Metric
Degree (Angle) 0.01745 Radians Horsepower 0.7457 Kilowatt
Degree (Angle) 3600 Seconds Horsepower 745.7 Watts
Degree/Second 0.01745 Radians / Second Joule 1.0 Newton.Meters
Degree/Second 0.1667 Revolutions / Minute Joule / Sec 1.0 Watts
Degree/Second 0.002778 Revolutions / Second Kilogram(force) 2.205 lb (force)
Fahrenheit Degree(°F) (°F - 32)/1.8 Celsius Degree(°C) Kilogram (force) 9.807 Newtons
Ft. 30.48 Centimeters Kilogram / Meter 0.6720 lb / Ft.
Ft. 0.3048 Meters Kilogram / Sq. Meter 9.678x 10-5 Atmosphere
Ft. / Minute 0.508 Centimeter / Second Kilogram / Sq. Meter 0.2048 lb / Sq. Ft.
Ft. / Minute 0.01667 Ft. / Second Kilogram / Sq. Meter 1.4223x 10-3 psi
Ft. / Minute 0.01829 Kilometer / Hour Kilogram / Sq. Meter 9.80665 Pascal(Pa)
Ft. / Minute 0.01136 MPH Kilometer 1x 10 5 Centimeter
Ft. / Second 30.48 Centimeter / Second Kilometer 3281 Ft.
Ft. / Second 1.097 Kilometer / Hour Kilometer 0.6214 Miles
Ft. / Second 18.29 Meter / Minute Kilometer / Hour 27.78 Centimeter / Second
Ft. / Second 0.6818 MPH Kilometer / Hour 54.68 Ft. / Minute
Kilometer / Hour 0.9113 Ft. / Second
Ft. / Second 0.01136 Miles / Minute
Kilometer / Hour 16.67 Meter / Minute
Ft-lb 5.050x 10-7 HP - Hour
Kilometer / Hour 0.6214 Miles / Hour
Ft-lb 1.35582 N-m (Joule)
Liter 1x 10 3 Cu. Centimeter
Ft-lb 0.1383 Kilogram-meter
Liter 0.03531 Cu. Ft.
Ft-lb 3.766x 10-7 Kw - Hour
Liter 61.02 Cu. Inch
Ft-lb / Minute 0.01667 Ft-lb / Second
Liter 1x 10-3 Cu. Meter
Ft-lb / Minute 3.030x 10-5 Hp
Liter 0.2642 Gallon(U.S.)
Ft-lb / Minute 2.260x 10-5 Kw
Liter 0.2149 Gallon(Imp)
Ft-lb / Second 1.818x 10-3 Hp
Liter 2.113 Pint(U.S.)liquid
Ft-lb / Second 1.35582 Watts Liter 1.057 Quart(U.S.)liquid
Gallons(US) 3785 Cu. Centimeters Liter / Minute 5.866x 10-4 Cu. Ft. / Second
Gallons(US) 0.1337 Cu. Ft. Liter / Minute 4.403x 10-3 Gallon(US) / Second
Gallons(US) 231 Cu. Inch Meter 0.00062 Mile
Gallons(US) 3.785x 10-3 Cu. Meters Meter 100 Centimeter
Gallons(US) 3.785 Liter Meter 3.281 Feet
Gallons(UK) 4.546 Liter Meter 39.37 Inches
Gallons(US) 8 Pint(liquid) Meter 1x 10-3 Kilometers
Gallons(US) 4 Quart(liquid) Meter 1x 10 3 Millimeters
Gallons(UK) Imp 1.2009 Gallon(U.S.) Meter 1x 10 6 Micrometers
Gallons(US) 0.83267 Gallon(Imp) Meter / Minute 1.667 Centimeter / Second
Gallons(US) Water 8.3453 lb Water Meter / Minute 3.281 Ft. / Minute
Gallons(US) / Minute 0.06308 Liter / Second Meter / Minute 0.05468 Ft. / Second
Gallons(US) / Minute 8.0208 Cu. Ft. / Hour Meter / Minute 0.06 Kilometer / Hour
Gallons(US) / Minute 0.0022228 Cu. Ft. / Second Meter / Minute 0.03728 MPH
Gallons(US) Water / Min 6.0086 Tons / Day Meter / Second 196.8 Ft. / Minute
Gallons(US) 0.02381 bbl Meter / Second 3.281 Ft. / Second
Gallons(US) / Minute 34.2857 Barrel / Day Meter / Second 3.6 Kilometer / Hour
Gallons(US) / Minute 1.429 Barrel / Hour Meter / Second 0.06 Kilometer / Min
Grains (Troy ) 1.0 Grains avdp Meter / Second 2.237 MPH
Grains (Troy) 0.06480 Grams Meter / Second 0.03728 Miles / Minute
Grains (Troy) 2.0833x 10-3 Ounce Troy Milligrams / Liter 1.0x Sol' Density ppm
Grains / Gallon(US) 17.118 ppm Miles 5280 Feet
Grains 1.429x 10-4 lb Miles 1.609 Kilometers
Grams 0.03527 Ounces(avdp) Pascal 1.00 Newton / Sq. Meter
Grams 0.03215 Ounces(troy) Kilopascal 0.1450377 psi
Grams 1x10-3 Kilogram Megapascal 145.0377 psi
Grams 1x10 3 Milligram Parts per Million 0.0584 Grains / Gallon(U.S.)
Grams 2.205 10-3 lb Parts per Million 0.07016 Grains / Gallon(Imp)
Grams / Centimeter 5.6x 10-3 lb / Inch lb/Million Gallon
Parts per Million 8.345
(U.S.)
Grams / Cu. Centimeter 62.43 lb / Cu. Ft.
Pint(U.S.) 28.875 Cu. Inches
Grams / Cu. Centimeter 0.03613 lb / Cu. Inches
Pint(U.S.) 0.125 Gallon(U.S.)
Grams / Liter 58.417 Grains / Gallon
Grams / Liter 0.062427 lb / Cu. Ft.

159
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 160 -
Conversion Factors
TO CONVERT MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN MILLIMETER & DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS
lb / Gallon(U.S.) 0.1198 Grams / Cu. Cm Fraction mm Decimal Fraction mm Decimal
1 33
lb / Gallon(U.S.) 119.84 Grams / Litre /64 0.4 .015625 /64 13.0 .515625
1 17
lb 16.0 Ounces /32 0.8 .03125 /32 13.5 .53125
3 35
lb 453.6 Grams /64 1.2 .046875 /64 14.0 .546875
1 9
lb 7000 Grains /16 1.6 .0625 /16 14.3 .5625
5 37
lb 0.4536 Kilograms /64 2.0 .078125 /64 14.7 .578125
3 19
lb(force) 4.44822 Newtons /32 2.4 .09375 /32 15.0 .59375
7 39
lb Water 0.01602 Cu. Feet /64 2.8 .109375 /64 15.5 .609375
1 5
lb Water 27.68 Cu. Inches /8 3.2 .125 /8 16.0 .625
lb Water 0.1198 Gallon(U.S.) 9
/64 3.6 .140625 41
/64 16.3 .640625
lb Water / Minute 2.67x 10-4 Cu. Ft. / Second 5
/32 4.0 .15625 21
/32 16.7 .65625
lb / cu. Foot 0.01602 Gram/Cu. Centimeter 11
/64 4.4 .171875 43
/64 17.0 .671875
lb / cu. Foot 16.02 Kilogram / Cu. Meter 3
/16 4.8 .1875 11
/16 17.5 .6875
lb / cu. Foot 5.787x 10-4 lb / Cu. Inch 13
/64 5.2 .203125 45
/64 18.0 .703125
lb / cu. Inch 27.68 Gram/Cu. Centimeter 7
/32 5.6 .21875 23
/32 18.3 .71875
lb / cu. Inch 2.768x 10-4 Kilogram / Cu. Meter 15
/64 6.0 .234375 47
/64 18.7 .734375
lb / cu. Inch 1728 lb / Cu. Foot 1
/4 6.4 .250 3
/4 19.0 .750
lb / Foot 1.488 Kilogram / Meter 17
/64 6.8 .265625 49
/64 19.5 .765625
lb / Inch 178.6 Gram / Centimeter 9
/32 7.2 .28125 25
/32 20.0 .78125
lb / Sq. Foot 4.883 Kilogram / Sq. Meter 19
/64 7.6 .296875 51
/64 20.3 .796875
lb / Sq. Foot 6.945x 10-3 psi 5
/16 8.0 .3125 13
/16 20.7 .8125
lb / Sq. Inch 703.1 Kilogram / Sq. Meter 21
/64 8.4 .328125 53
/64 21.0 .828125
lb / Sq. Inch 0.06804 Atmospheres 11
/32 8.8 .34375 27
/32 21.5 .84375
lb / Sq. Inch 0.06895 Bars 23
/64 9.2 .359375 55
/64 22.0 .859375
lb / Sq. Inch 1.450377 N / Sq. Centimeters 3
/8 9.6 .375 7
/8 22.3 .875
Revolutions 6.283 Radians 25
/64 10.0 .390625 57
/64 22.7 .890625
RPM 0.1047 Radians / Second 13
/32 10.4 .40625 29
/32 23.0 .90625
Radians 2.0627x 10-3 Seconds(angle) 27
/64 10.8 .421875 59
/64 23.5 .921875
Sq. Centimeter 1.076x 10-3 Sq. Feet 7
/16 11.2 .4375 15
/16 24.0 .9375
Sq. Centimeter 0.1550 Sq. Inch 29
/64 11.5 .453125 61
/64 24.2 .953125
Sq. Centimeter 1x 10-4 Sq. Meter 15
/32 12.0 .46875 31
/32 24.6 .96875
Sq. Feet 2.296x 10-5 Acres 31
/64 12.3 .484375 63
/64 25.0 .984375
Sq. Feet 929.0 Sq. Centimeter 1
/2 12.7 .500 1 25.4 1.000
Sq. Feet 0.0929 Sq. Meter
Sq. Feet 3.587x 10-8 Sq. Miles Formulas for calculating pump output
Sq. Inches 6.452 Sq. Centimeter Duplex pump
Sq. Inches 6.944x 10-3 Sq. Feet
Sq. Inches 645.2 Sq. Millimeter
Sq. Kilometer 247.1 Acres
Sq. Kilometer 10.76x 10 6 Sq. Feet
Sq. Kilometer 0.3861 Sq. Miles
Sq. Meter 2.471x 10-4 Acres
Sq. Meter 10.76 Sq. Feet
Sq. Meter 3.861x 10-7 Sq. Miles
Sq. Miles 640 Sq. Acres
Sq. Miles 27.88x 106 Sq. Feet
Sq. Miles 2.59 Sq. Kilometer Duplex pump capacities
The capacities of duplex pumps are given in barrels per cycle at
Sq. Millimeter 1.55x 10-3 Sq. Inches
different liner bores and strokes.
Tons(long) 1016 Kilogram
Note: No allowance is made for the volume occupied by the pump rods.
Tons(long) 2240 lb(avdp)
Tons (long) 1.12 Tons(short)
Tons(metric) 1000 Kilogram
Tons(metric) 2205 lb
Tons(short) 2000 lb
Tons(short) 907.185 Kilogram
Tons(short) 0.89287 Tons(long)
Tons(short) 0.90718 Tons(metric)
Watt 44.26 Ft-lb / Minute
Watt 0.7376 Ft-lb / Minute
Watt 1.341x 10-3 Hp
Watt 1.0 Joule / Second
Kilowatt 1x 103 Watt

160
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 161 -

Triplex pump capacities

Volume, bbl/cycle (L) at The following tables give capacities for various stroke triplex pumps.
Liner bore, in (mm) Stroke, in (mm) 100% pump efficiency
4.00 (102) 10 (254) 0.0518 (8.24) Diameter, in Stroke, in Displacement,
4.50 (114) 10 (254) 0.0656 (10.4) (mm) (mm) bbl/cycle (L)
5.00 (127) 10 (254) 0.0810 (12.9) 7.00 (178) 7 (178) 0.083 (13.25)
5.25 (133) 10 (254) 0.0893 (14.2) 6..50 (165) 7 (178) 0.072 (11.43)
5.50 (140) 10 (254) 0.098 (15.6) 6.00 (152) 7 (178) 0.061 (9.73)
5.75 (146) 10 (254) 0.107 (17.0)
5.00 (140) 7 (178) 0.051 (8.18)
6.00 (152) 10 (254) 0.117 (18.6)
6.25 (159) 10 (254) 0.127 (20.2) 5.00 (127) 7 (178) 0.043 (6.78)
6.50 (165) 10 (254) 0.137 (21.8) 4.50 (11) 7 (178) 0.035 (5.49)
6.75 (171) 10 (254) 0.148 (23.5) 6.25 (159) 8 (203) 0.076 (12.07)
7.00 (178) 10 (254) 0.159 (25.3)
7.25 (184) 10 (254) 0.170 (27.0) 6.00 (152) 8 (203) 0.070 (11.13)
6.00 (152) 12 (305) 0.140 (22.3) 5.50 (140) 8 (203) 0.059 (9.35)
6.25 (159) 12 (305) 0.152 (24.2) 5.00 (127) 8 (203) 0.049 (7.72)
6.50 (165) 12 (305) 0.161 (25.6) 4.50 (114) 8 (203) 0.039 (6.25)
6.75(171) 12 (305) 0.177 (28.1)
4.00 (102) 8 (203) 0.031 (4.96)
7.00 (178) 12 (305) 0.190 (30.2)
7.25 (184) 12 (305) 0.204 (32.4) 7.00 (178) 9 (229) 0.107 (17.03)
6.00 (152) 14 (356) 0.163 (25.9) 6.50 (165) 9 (229) 0.092 (14.69)
6.25 (159) 14 (356) 0.177 (28.1) 6.25 (159) 9 (229) 0.085 (13.55)
6.50 (165) 14 (356) 0.192 (30.5)
6.75 (171) 14 (356) 0.207 (32.9) 6.00 (152) 9 (229) 0.079 (12.49)
7.00 (178) 14 (356) 0.222 (35.3) 5.50 (140) 9 (229) 0.066 (10.48)
7.25 (184) 14 (356) 0.238 (37.8) 5.00 (127) 9 (229) 0.055 (8.66)
6.25 (159) 16 (406) 0.202 (32.1) 4.50 (114) 9 (229) 0.044 (7.04)
6.50 (165) 16 (406) 0.219 (34.8)
7.00 (178) 11 (279) 0.130 (20.82)
6.75 (171) 16 (406) 0.236 (37.5)
7.00 (178) 16 (406) 0.254 (40.4) 6.50 (165) 11 (279) 0.113 (17.94)
7.25 (184) 16 (406) 0.272 (43.2) 6.00 (152) 11 (279) 0.096 (15.29)
6.00 (156) 18 (451) 0.210 (33.4)
5.5 0 (140) 11 (279) 0.081 (12.83)
6.25 (159) 18 (451) 0.228 (36.3)
6.50 (165) 18 (451) 0.246 (39.1)
6.75 (171) 18 (451) 0.266 (42.3)
7.00 (178) 18 (451) 0.286 (45.5)
7.25 (184) 18 (451) 0.306 (48.7)
7.50 (191) 18 (451) 0.328 (52.2)
7.75 (197) 18 (451) 0.350 (55.7)
6.00 (156) 20 (508) 0.233 (37.0)
6.25 (159) 20 (508) 0.253 (40.2)
6.50 (165) 20 (508) 0.274 (43.6)
6.75 (171) 20 (508) 0.295 (46.9)
7.00 (178) 20 (508) 0.317 (50.4)
7.25 (184) 20 (508) 0.340 (54.1)
7.50 (191) 20 (508) 0.364 (57.9)
7.75 (197) 20 (508) 0.389 (61.9)
8.00 (203) 20 (508) 0.414 (65.8)
7.00 (178) 22 (559) 0.349 (55.5)
7.25 (184) 22 (559) 0.374 (59.5)
7.5O (191) 22 (559) 0.401 (63.8)
7.75 (197) 22 (559) 0.428 (68.1)
8.00 (203) 22 (559) 0.456 (72.5)
8.25 (210) 22 (559) 0.485 (77.1)
8.50 (216) 22 (559) 0.515 (81.9)
8.75 (222) 22 (559) 0.545 (86.7)
9.00 (229) 22 (559) 0.577 (91.7)
9.25 (235) 22 (559) 0.610 (97.0)
8.00 (203) 24 (610) 0.497 (79.0)
8.25 (210) 24 (610) 0.529 (84.1)
8.50 (216) 24 (610) 0.562 (89.4)
8.75 (222) 24 (610) 0.595 (94.6)
9.00 (229) 24 (610) 0.630 (100.2)
9.25 (235) 24 (610) 0.665 (105.7)
9.75 (248) 24 (610) 0.739 (117.5)
10.00 (254) 24 (610) 0.777 (123.5)

161
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 162 -

Pounds chemical to remove certain contaminants

Chemical properties

Chemical used to Conversion factor mg/L

Contaminant to
The following table identifies the chemical properties of remove (Contaminant) × factor
be Removed
some elements used in the oilfield. contaminant = lb/bbl chemical to add

Atomic
Element Symbol Atomic weight
number
Aluminum Al 26.98 13 Ca ++ Soda ash 0.000925
Arsenic As 74.92 33 Ca ++ Sodium bicarbonate 0.000734
Barium Ba 137.36 56
Bromine Br 79.916 35 Mg ++ Caustic soda 0.00115
-2
Calcium Ca 40.08 20 CO 3 Lime 0.00043
Carbon C 12.011 6
HCO3-1 Lime 0.00043
Cesium Cs 132.91 55
Chlorine Cl 35.457 17 H2 S Lime 0.00076
Chromium Cr 52.01 24 H2S Zinc carbonate 0.00128
Copper Cu 63.54 29
H2S Zinc oxide 0.000836
Fluorine F 19 9
Hydrogen H 1.008 1
Iodine I 126.91 53
Iron Fe 55.85 26 Note: Due to the extreme danger associated with
Lead Pb 207.21 82 Hydrogen sulfide (H2S), it is recommended that a
Lithium Li 6.94 3 Minimum of 1 ½ times the calculated amount of
Magnesium Mg 24.32 12 Chemical be added.
Manganese Mn 54.94 25
Mercury Hg 200.61 80
Nitrogen N 14.008 7 Density of The following table gives specific gravities and
Oxygen O 16 8 common materials densities for common materials.
Phosphorous P 30.975 15
Material Specific gravity lb/gal lb/bbl
Potassium K 39.1 19
Silicon Si 28.09 14 Barite 4.2 to 4.3 35.0 to 35.8 1470 to 1504
Silver Ag 107.873 47 Calcium carbonate 2.7 22.5 945
Sodium Na 22.991 11 Cement 3.1 to 3.2 25.8 to 26.7 1085 to 1120
Sulfur S 32.066 16 Clays and/or drilled
2.4 to 2.7 20.0 to 22.5 840 to 945
Titanium Ti 47.9 22 solids
Tungsten W 183.86 74 Diesel oil 0.84 7.0 294
Zinc Zn 65.38 30 Dolomite 2.8 to 3.0 23.3 to 25.0 980 to 1050
Feldspar 2.4 to 2.7 20.0 to 22.5 840 to 945
Fresh water 1.0 8.33 350
Chemical conversions Galena 6.5 54.1 2275
Epm to ppm conversion Gypsum 2.3 19.2 805
The following table lists the equivalent weight of various cations Halite (rock salt) 2.2 18.3 770
and anions. Iron 7.8 65.0 2730
Ion Equivalent weight Iron oxide (hematite) 5.1 42.5 1785
Ca +2 20.0
Lead 11.4 95.0 3990
Mg +2 12.2
Limestone 2.7 to 2.9 22.5 to 24.2 945 to 1015
Fe +3 18.6
Na + 23.0 Slate 2.7 to 2.8 22.5 to 23.3 945 to 980
Cl- 35.5 Steel 7.0- to 8.0 58.3 to 66.6 2450 to 2800
SO4-2 48.0
OH- 17.0
CO3-2 30.0
HCO3- 61.0
PO4-3 31.7
Use the following equation to convert concentration in
equivalents per million (epm) to parts per million (ppm).
Equivalent weight × epm = ppm

162
The Baroid CFS COMPLETION FLUIDS MANUAL - 163 -

163